Beyond Linux ® From Scratch

Installation of Shadow

Reinstall Shadow by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../shadow-4.0.9-Linux_PAM_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --libdir=/lib --enable-shared \
    --with-libpam --without-libcrack &&
sed -i 's/groups$(EXEEXT) //' src/Makefile &&
sed -i '/groups/d' man/Makefile &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /usr/bin/passwd /bin &&
mv -v /lib/libshadow.*a /usr/lib &&
rm -v /lib/libshadow.so &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libshadow.so.0 /usr/lib/libshadow.so

Command Explanations

--without-libcrack: This switch tells Shadow not to use libcrack. This is desired as Linux-PAM already contains libcrack.

sed -i ...: These commands are used to suppress the installation of the groups program as the version from the Coreutils package installed during LFS is preferred.

Configuring Linux-PAM to Work with Shadow

Config Files

/etc/pam.d/* or alternatively /etc/pam.conf, /etc/login.defs and /etc/security/*

Configuration Information

Configuring /etc/login.defs

The login program currently performs many functions which Linux-PAM modules should now handle. The following sed command will comment out the appropriate lines in /etc/login.defs, and stop login from performing these functions (a backup file named /etc/login.defs.orig is also created to preserve the original file's contents):

install -v -m644 /etc/login.defs /etc/login.defs.orig &&
for FUNCTION in LASTLOG_ENAB MAIL_CHECK_ENAB \
                PORTTIME_CHECKS_ENAB CONSOLE \
                MOTD_FILE NOLOGINS_FILE PASS_MIN_LEN \
                SU_WHEEL_ONLY MD5_CRYPT_ENAB \
                CONSOLE_GROUPS ENVIRON_FILE \
                ULIMIT ENV_TZ ENV_HZ ENV_SUPATH \
                ENV_PATH QMAIL_DIR MAIL_DIR MAIL_FILE \
                CHFN_AUTH FAILLOG_ENAB QUOTAS_ENAB FTMP_FILE
do
    sed -i -e "s/^$FUNCTION/# &/" /etc/login.defs
done

If you have CrackLib installed, also comment out four more lines using the following command:

for FUNCTION in OBSCURE_CHECKS_ENAB CRACKLIB_DICTPATH \
                PASS_CHANGE_TRIES PASS_ALWAYS_WARN
do
    sed -i -e "s/^$FUNCTION/# &/" /etc/login.defs
done

Configuring the /etc/pam.d/ Files

Add the following Linux-PAM configuration files to /etc/pam.d/ (or add them to /etc/pam.conf with the additional field for the program).

'login' (with CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/login << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/login

auth        requisite      pam_securetty.so
auth        requisite      pam_nologin.so
auth        required       pam_unix.so
account     required       pam_access.so
account     required       pam_unix.so
session     required       pam_env.so
session     required       pam_motd.so
session     required       pam_limits.so
session     optional       pam_mail.so      dir=/var/mail standard
session     optional       pam_lastlog.so
session     required       pam_unix.so
password    required       pam_cracklib.so  retry=3 difok=8 minlen=5 \
                                            dcredit=3 ocredit=3 \
                                            ucredit=2 lcredit=2
password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow use_authtok

# End /etc/pam.d/login
EOF

'login' (without CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/login << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/login

auth        requisite      pam_securetty.so
auth        requisite      pam_nologin.so
auth        required       pam_env.so
auth        required       pam_unix.so
account     required       pam_access.so
account     required       pam_unix.so
session     required       pam_motd.so
session     required       pam_limits.so
session     optional       pam_mail.so      dir=/var/mail standard
session     optional       pam_lastlog.so
session     required       pam_unix.so
password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow

# End /etc/pam.d/login
EOF

'passwd' (with CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/passwd << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/passwd

password    required       pam_cracklib.so  retry=3 difok=8 minlen=5 \
                                            dcredit=3  ocredit=3 \
                                            ucredit=2  lcredit=2
password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow use_authtok

# End /etc/pam.d/passwd
EOF

'passwd' (without CrackLib)

cat > /etc/pam.d/passwd << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/passwd

password    required       pam_unix.so      md5 shadow

# End /etc/pam.d/passwd
EOF

'su'

cat > /etc/pam.d/su << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/su

auth        sufficient      pam_rootok.so
auth        required        pam_unix.so
account     required        pam_unix.so
session     optional        pam_mail.so     dir=/var/mail standard
session     required        pam_env.so
session     required        pam_unix.so

# End /etc/pam.d/su
EOF

'chage'

cat > /etc/pam.d/chage << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/chage

auth        sufficient      pam_rootok.so
auth        required        pam_unix.so
account     required        pam_unix.so
session     required        pam_unix.so
password    required        pam_permit.so

# End /etc/pam.d/chage
EOF

'chpasswd', 'newusers', 'groupadd', 'groupdel', 'groupmod', 'useradd', 'userdel', and 'usermod'

for PROGRAM in chpasswd newusers groupadd groupdel \
               groupmod useradd userdel usermod
do
    install -v -m644 /etc/pam.d/chage /etc/pam.d/$PROGRAM
    sed -i -e "s/chage/$PROGRAM/" /etc/pam.d/$PROGRAM
done

Warning

At this point, you should do a simple test to see if Shadow is working as expected. Open another terminal and log in as a user, then su to root. If you do not see any errors, then all is well and you should proceed with the rest of the configuration. If you did receive errors, stop now and double check the above configuration files manually. If you cannot find and fix the error, you should recompile Shadow replacing --with-libpam with --without-libpam in the above instructions (also move the /etc/login.defs.orig backup file to /etc/login.defs). If you fail to do this and the errors remain, you will be unable to log into your system.

Other

Currently, /etc/pam.d/other is configured to allow anyone with an account on the machine to use PAM-aware programs without a configuration file for that program. After testing Linux-PAM for proper configuration, install a more restrictive other file so that program-specific configuration files are required:

cat > /etc/pam.d/other << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/pam.d/other

auth        required        pam_deny.so
auth        required        pam_warn.so
account     required        pam_deny.so
session     required        pam_deny.so
password    required        pam_deny.so
password    required        pam_warn.so

# End /etc/pam.d/other
EOF

Configuring Login Access

Instead of using the /etc/login.access file for controlling access to the system, Linux-PAM uses the pam_access.so module along with the /etc/security/access.conf file. Rename the /etc/login.access file using the following command:

if [ -f /etc/login.access ]; then
    mv -v /etc/login.access /etc/login.access.NOUSE
fi

Configuring Resource Limits

Instead of using the /etc/limits file for limiting usage of system resources, Linux-PAM uses the pam_limits.so module along with the /etc/security/limits.conf file. Rename the /etc/limits file using the following command:

if [ -f /etc/limits ]; then
    mv -v /etc/limits /etc/limits.NOUSE
fi

Configuring Default Environment

During previous configuration, several items were removed from /etc/login.defs. Some of these items are now controlled by the pam_env.so module and the /etc/security/pam_env.conf configuration file. In particular, the default path has been changed. To recover your default path, execute the following commands:

ENV_PATH=`grep '^ENV_PATH' /etc/login.defs.orig | \
    awk '{ print $2 }' | sed 's/PATH=//'` &&
echo 'PATH        DEFAULT='`echo "${ENV_PATH}"`'        OVERRIDE=${PATH}' \
    >> /etc/security/pam_env.conf &&
unset ENV_PATH

Note

ENV_SUPATH is no longer supported. You must create a valid /root/.bashrc file to provide a modified path for the super user.

A list of the installed files, along with their short descriptions can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/stable/chapter06/shadow.html#contents-shadow.

Iptables-1.3.3

Introduction to Iptables

The next part of this chapter deals with firewalls. The principal firewall tool for Linux, as of the 2.4 kernel series, is iptables. It replaces ipchains from the 2.2 series and ipfwadm from the 2.0 series. You will need to install iptables if you intend on using any form of a firewall.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.iptables.org/files/iptables-1.3.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.netfilter.org/pub/iptables/iptables-1.3.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 86d88455520cfdc56fd7ae27897a80a4
Download size: 176 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Kernel Configuration

A firewall in Linux is accomplished through a portion of the kernel called netfilter. The interface to netfilter is iptables. To use it, the appropriate kernel configuration parameters are found in Device Drivers -> Networking Support -> Networking Options -> Network Packet Filtering -> IP: Netfilter Configuration.

Installation of Iptables

Note

Installation of iptables will fail if raw kernel headers are found in /usr/src/linux either as actual files or a symlink. As of the Linux 2.6 kernel series, this directory should no longer exist because appropriate headers were installed from the Linux-Libc-Headers package during the base LFS installation.

For some non-x86 architectures, the raw kernel headers may be required. In that case, add the environment variable KERNEL_DIR=/usr/src/linux to the make commands below.

Install iptables by running the following commands:

make PREFIX=/usr LIBDIR=/lib BINDIR=/sbin

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr LIBDIR=/lib BINDIR=/sbin install

Command Explanations

PREFIX=/usr LIBDIR=/lib BINDIR=/sbin: Compiles and installs iptables libraries into /lib, binaries into /sbin and the remainder into the /usr hierarchy instead of /usr/local. Firewalls are generally activated during the boot process and /usr may not be mounted at that time.

Configuring Iptables

Introductory instructions for configuring your firewall are presented in the next section: Firewalling

Boot Script

To set up the iptables firewall at boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/iptables init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-iptables

Installed Programs: iptables, iptables-restore, iptables-save and ip6tables

Installed Libraries: libip6t_*.so and libipt_*.so

Installed Directory: /lib/iptables

Short Descriptions

iptables	is used to set up, maintain, and inspect the tables of IP packet filter rules in the Linux kernel.
iptables-restore	is used to restore IP Tables from data specified on STDIN. Use I/O redirection provided by your shell to read from a file.
iptables-save	is used to dump the contents of an IP Table in easily parseable format to STDOUT. Use I/O-redirection provided by your shell to write to a file.
ip6tables	is used to set up, maintain, and inspect the tables of IPv6 packet filter rules in the Linux kernel. Several different tables may be defined. Each table contains a number of built-in chains and may also contain user-defined chains.
`libip*.so`	library modules are various modules (implemented as dynamic libraries) which extend the core functionality of iptables.

Setting Up a Network Firewall

Before you read this part of the chapter, you should have already installed iptables as described in the previous section.

Introduction to Firewall Creation

The general purpose of a firewall is to protect a computer or a network against malicious access.

In a perfect world, every daemon or service on every machine is perfectly configured and immune to flaws such as buffer overflows or other problems regarding its security. Furthermore, you trust every user accessing your services. In this world, you do not need to have a firewall.

In the real world however, daemons may be misconfigured and exploits against essential services are freely available. You may wish to choose which services are accessible by certain machines or you may wish to limit which machines or applications are allowed external access. Alternatively, you may simply not trust some of your applications or users. You are probably connected to the Internet. In this world, a firewall is essential.

Don't assume however, that having a firewall makes careful configuration redundant, or that it makes any negligent misconfiguration harmless. It doesn't prevent anyone from exploiting a service you intentionally offer but haven't recently updated or patched after an exploit went public. Despite having a firewall, you need to keep applications and daemons on your system properly configured and up to date. A firewall is not a cure all, but should be an essential part of your overall security strategy.

Meaning of the Word "Firewall"

The word firewall can have several different meanings.

Personal Firewall

This is a hardware device or software program commercially sold (or offered via freeware) by companies such as Symantec which claims that it secures a home or desktop computer connected to the Internet. This type of firewall is highly relevant for users who do not know how their computers might be accessed via the Internet or how to disable that access, especially if they are always online and connected via broadband links.

Masquerading Router

This is a system placed between the Internet and an intranet. To minimize the risk of compromising the firewall itself, it should generally have only one role—that of protecting the intranet. Although not completely risk free, the tasks of doing the routing and IP masquerading (rewriting IP headers of the packets it routes from clients with private IP addresses onto the Internet so that they seem to come from the firewall itself) are commonly considered relatively secure.

BusyBox

This is often an old computer you may have retired and nearly forgotten, performing masquerading or routing functions, but offering non-firewall services such as a web-cache or mail. This may be used for home networks, but is not to be considered as secure as a firewall only machine because the combination of server and router/firewall on one machine raises the complexity of the setup.

Firewall with a Demilitarized Zone [Not Further Described Here]

This box performs masquerading or routing, but grants public access to some branch of your network which, because of public IPs and a physically separated structure, is essentially a separate network with direct Internet access. The servers on this network are those which must be easily accessible from both the Internet and intranet. The firewall protects both networks. This type of firewall has a minimum of three network interfaces.

Packetfilter

This type of firewall does routing or masquerading, but does not maintain a state table of ongoing communication streams. It is fast, but quite limited in its ability to block undesired packets without blocking desired packets.

Now You Can Start to Build your Firewall

Caution

This introduction on how to setup a firewall is not a complete guide to securing systems. Firewalling is a complex issue that requires careful configuration. The scripts quoted here are simply intended to give examples of how a firewall works. They are not intended to fit into any particular configuration and may not provide complete protection from an attack.

Customization of these scripts for your specific situation will be necessary for an optimal configuration, but you should make a serious study of the iptables documentation and creating firewalls in general before hacking away. Have a look at the list of links for further reading at the end of this section for more details. There you will find a list of URLs that contain quite comprehensive information about building your own firewall.

The firewall configuration script installed in the iptables section differs from the standard configuration script. It only has two of the standard targets: start and status. The other targets are clear and lock. For instance if you issue:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/iptables start

the firewall will be restarted just as it is upon system startup. The status target will present a list of all currently implemented rules. The clear target turns off all firewall rules and the lock target will block all packets in and out of the computer with the exception of the loopback interface.

The main startup firewall is located in the file /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables. The sections below provide three different approaches that can be used for a system.

Note

You should always run your firewall rules from a script. This ensures consistency and a record of what was done. It also allows retention of comments that are essential for understanding the rules long after they were written.

Personal Firewall

A Personal Firewall is designed to let you access all the services offered on the Internet, but keep your box secure and your data private.

Below is a slightly modified version of Rusty Russell's recommendation from the Linux 2.4 Packet Filtering HOWTO. It is still applicable to the Linux 2.6 kernels.

cat > /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh

# Begin $rc_base/rc.iptables

# Insert connection-tracking modules
# (not needed if built into the kernel)
modprobe ip_tables
modprobe iptable_filter
modprobe ip_conntrack
modprobe ip_conntrack_ftp
modprobe ipt_state
modprobe ipt_LOG

# Enable broadcast echo Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts

# Disable Source Routed Packets
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_source_route

# Enable TCP SYN Cookie Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_syncookies

# Disable ICMP Redirect Acceptance
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_redirects

# Don¹t send Redirect Messages
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/send_redirects

# Drop Spoofed Packets coming in on an interface, where responses
# would result in the reply going out a different interface.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter

# Log packets with impossible addresses.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/log_martians

# be verbose on dynamic ip-addresses  (not needed in case of static IP)
echo 2 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr

# disable Explicit Congestion Notification
# too many routers are still ignorant
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_ecn

# Set a known state
iptables -P INPUT   DROP
iptables -P FORWARD DROP
iptables -P OUTPUT  DROP

# These lines are here in case rules are already in place and the
# script is ever rerun on the fly. We want to remove all rules and
# pre-existing user defined chains before we implement new rules.
iptables -F
iptables -X
iptables -Z

iptables -t nat -F

# Allow local-only connections
iptables -A INPUT  -i lo -j ACCEPT

# Free output on any interface to any ip for any service
# (equal to -P ACCEPT)
iptables -A OUTPUT -j ACCEPT

# Permit answers on already established connections
# and permit new connections related to established ones
# (e.g. port mode ftp)
iptables -A INPUT -m state --state ESTABLISHED,RELATED -j ACCEPT

# Log everything else. What's Windows' latest exploitable vulnerability?
iptables -A INPUT -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:INPUT "

# End $rc_base/rc.iptables
EOF
chmod 700 /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables

This script is quite simple, it drops all traffic coming into your computer that wasn't initiated from your computer, but as long as you are simply surfing the Internet you are unlikely to exceed its limits.

If you frequently encounter certain delays at accessing FTP servers, take a look at BusyBox example number 4.

Even if you have daemons or services running on your system, these will be inaccessible everywhere but from your computer itself. If you want to allow access to services on your machine, such as ssh or ping, take a look at BusyBox.

Masquerading Router

A true Firewall has two interfaces, one connected to an intranet, in this example eth0, and one connected to the Internet, here ppp0. To provide the maximum security for the firewall itself, make sure that there are no unnecessary servers running on it such as X11 et al. As a general principle, the firewall itself should not access any untrusted service (think of a remote server giving answers that makes a daemon on your system crash, or even worse, that implements a worm via a buffer-overflow).

cat > /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh

# Begin $rc_base/rc.iptables

echo
echo "You're using the example configuration for a setup of a firewall"
echo "from Beyond Linux From Scratch."
echo "This example is far from being complete, it is only meant"
echo "to be a reference."
echo "Firewall security is a complex issue, that exceeds the scope"
echo "of the configuration rules below."
echo "You can find additional information"
echo "about firewalls in Chapter 4 of the BLFS book."
echo "http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs"
echo

# Insert iptables modules (not needed if built into the kernel).

modprobe ip_tables
modprobe iptable_filter
modprobe ip_conntrack
modprobe ip_conntrack_ftp
modprobe ipt_state
modprobe iptable_nat
modprobe ip_nat_ftp
modprobe ipt_MASQUERADE
modprobe ipt_LOG
modprobe ipt_REJECT

# Enable broadcast echo Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/icmp_echo_ignore_broadcasts

# Disable Source Routed Packets
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_source_route

# Enable TCP SYN Cookie Protection
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_syncookies

# Disable ICMP Redirect Acceptance
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/accept_redirects

# Don¹t send Redirect Messages
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/send_redirects

# Drop Spoofed Packets coming in on an interface where responses
# would result in the reply going out a different interface.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/rp_filter

# Log packets with impossible addresses.
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/conf/all/log_martians

# Be verbose on dynamic ip-addresses  (not needed in case of static IP)
echo 2 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_dynaddr

# Disable Explicit Congestion Notification
# Too many routers are still ignorant
echo 0 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/tcp_ecn

# Set a known state
iptables -P INPUT   DROP
iptables -P FORWARD DROP
iptables -P OUTPUT  DROP

# These lines are here in case rules are already in place and the
# script is ever rerun on the fly. We want to remove all rules and
# pre-existing user defined chains before we implement new rules.
iptables -F
iptables -X
iptables -Z

iptables -t nat -F

# Allow local connections
iptables -A INPUT  -i lo -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -o lo -j ACCEPT

# Allow forwarding if the initiated on the intranet
iptables -A FORWARD -m state --state ESTABLISHED,RELATED -j ACCEPT
iptables -A FORWARD  -i ! ppp+ -m state --state NEW      -j ACCEPT

# Do masquerading
# (not needed if intranet is not using private ip-addresses)
iptables -t nat -A POSTROUTING -o ppp+ -j MASQUERADE

# Log everything for debugging
# (last of all rules, but before policy rules)
iptables -A INPUT   -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:INPUT  "
iptables -A FORWARD -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:FORWARD"
iptables -A OUTPUT  -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:OUTPUT "

# Enable IP Forwarding
echo 1 > /proc/sys/net/ipv4/ip_forward
EOF
chmod 700 /etc/rc.d/rc.iptables

With this script your intranet should be reasonably secure against external attacks. No one should be able to setup a new connection to any internal service and, if it's masqueraded, makes your intranet invisible to the Internet. Furthermore, your firewall should be relatively safe because there are no services running that a cracker could attack.

Note

If the interface you're connecting to the Internet doesn't connect via PPP, you will need to change ppp+ to the name of the interface (e.g., eth1) which you are using.

BusyBox

This scenario isn't too different from the Masquerading Router, but additionally offers some services to your intranet. Examples of this can be when you want to administer your firewall from another host on your intranet or use it as a proxy or a name server.

Note

Outlining a true concept of how to protect a server that offers services on the Internet goes far beyond the scope of this document. See the references at the end of this section for more information.

Be cautious. Every service you have enabled makes your setup more complex and your firewall less secure. You are exposed to the risks of misconfigured services or running a service with an exploitable bug. A firewall should generally not run any extra services. See the introduction to the Masquerading Router for some more details.

If you want to add services such as internal Samba or name servers that do not need to access the Internet themselves, the additional statements are quite simple and should still be acceptable from a security standpoint. Just add the following lines into the script before the logging rules.

iptables -A INPUT  -i ! ppp+  -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -o ! ppp+  -j ACCEPT

If daemons, such as squid, have to access the Internet themselves, you could open OUTPUT generally and restrict INPUT.

iptables -A INPUT -m state --state ESTABLISHED,RELATED -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -j ACCEPT

However, it is generally not advisable to leave OUTPUT unrestricted. You lose any control over trojans who would like to "call home", and a bit of redundancy in case you've (mis-)configured a service so that it broadcasts its existence to the world.

To accomplish this, you should restrict INPUT and OUTPUT on all ports except those that it's absolutely necessary to have open. Which ports you have to open depends on your needs: mostly you will find them by looking for failed accesses in your log files.

Have a Look at the Following Examples:

Squid is caching the web:

iptables -A OUTPUT -p tcp --dport 80 -j ACCEPT
iptables -A INPUT  -p tcp --sport 80 -m state --state ESTABLISHED \
  -j ACCEPT

Your caching name server (e.g., named) does its lookups via UDP:
```
iptables -A OUTPUT -p udp --dport 53 -j ACCEPT
```

You want to be able to ping your computer to ensure it's still alive:

iptables -A INPUT  -p icmp -m icmp --icmp-type echo-request -j ACCEPT
iptables -A OUTPUT -p icmp -m icmp --icmp-type echo-reply   -j ACCEPT

If you are frequently accessing FTP servers or enjoy chatting, you might notice certain delays because some implementations of these daemons have the feature of querying an identd on your system to obtain usernames. Although there's really little harm in this, having an identd running is not recommended because many security experts feel the service gives out too much additional information.

To avoid these delays you could reject the requests with a 'tcp-reset':
```
iptables -A INPUT  -p tcp --dport 113 -j REJECT --reject-with tcp-reset
```
To log and drop invalid packets (packets that came in after netfilter's timeout or some types of network scans):
```
iptables -I INPUT -p tcp -m state --state INVALID \
  -j LOG --log-prefix "FIREWALL:INVALID"
iptables -I INPUT -p tcp -m state --state INVALID -j DROP
```
Anything coming from the outside should not have a private address, this is a common attack called IP-spoofing:
```
iptables -A INPUT -i ppp+ -s 10.0.0.0/8     -j DROP
iptables -A INPUT -i ppp+ -s 172.16.0.0/12  -j DROP
iptables -A INPUT -i ppp+ -s 192.168.0.0/16 -j DROP
```
There are other addresses that you may also want to drop: 0.0.0.0/8, 127.0.0.0/8, 224.0.0.0/3 (multicast and experimental), 169.254.0.0/16 (Link Local Networks), and 192.0.2.0/24 (IANA defined test network).

If your firewall is a DHCP client, you need to allow those packets:

iptables -A INPUT  -i ppp0 -p udp -s 0.0.0.0 --sport 67 \
   -d 255.255.255.255 --dport 68 -j ACCEPT

To simplify debugging and be fair to anyone who'd like to access a service you have disabled, purposely or by mistake, you could REJECT those packets that are dropped.

Obviously this must be done directly after logging as the very last lines before the packets are dropped by policy:
```
iptables -A INPUT -j REJECT
```

These are only examples to show you some of the capabilities of the firewall code in Linux. Have a look at the man page of iptables. There you will find much more information. The port numbers needed for this can be found in /etc/services, in case you didn't find them by trial and error in your log file.

Conclusion

Finally, there is one fact you must not forget: The effort spent attacking a system corresponds to the value the cracker expects to gain from it. If you are responsible for valuable information, you need to spend the time to protect it properly.

Extra Information

Where to Start with Further Reading on Firewalls

www.netfilter.org - Homepage of the netfilter/iptables project
Netfilter related FAQ
Netfilter related HOWTO's
en.tldp.org/LDP/nag2/x-087-2-firewall.html
en.tldp.org/HOWTO/Security-HOWTO.html
en.tldp.org/HOWTO/Firewall-HOWTO.html
www.ibm.com/developerworks/security/library/s-fire.html
www.ibm.com/developerworks/security/library/s-fire2.html
www.interhack.net/pubs/fw-faq/
www.linuxsecurity.com/docs/
www.little-idiot.de/firewall (German & outdated, but very comprehensive)
www.linuxgazette.com/issue65/stumpel.html
linux.oreillynet.com/pub/a/linux/2000/03/10/netadmin/ddos.html
staff.washington.edu/dittrich/misc/ddos
www.e-infomax.com/ipmasq
www.circlemud.org/~jelson/writings/security/index.htm
www.securityfocus.com
www.cert.org - tech_tips
security.ittoolbox.com
www.linux-firewall-tools.com/linux/
logi.cc/linux/athome-firewall.php3
www.insecure.org/reading.html
www.robertgraham.com/pubs/firewall-seen.html

GnuPG-1.4.1

Introduction to GnuPG

The GnuPG package contains a public/private key encryptor. This is becoming useful for signing files or emails as proof of identity and preventing tampering with the contents of the file or email.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://public.ftp.planetmirror.com/pub/gnupg/gnupg-1.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnupg.org/gcrypt/gnupg/gnupg-1.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fdfc5553d0904cd65011e47a42a9532c
Download size: 2.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 32 MB
Estimated build time: 0.42 SBU

GnuPG Dependencies

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.2.24, libusb-0.1.10a, cURL-7.14.0, MTA, DocBook-utils-0.6.14 and docbook-to-man

Installation of GnuPG

Install GnuPG by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 4755 /usr/bin/gpg

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib: This command creates a gnupg directory in /usr/lib instead of /usr/libexec.

chmod -v 4755 /usr/bin/gpg: gpg is installed setuid root to avoid swapping out sensitive data.

Installed Programs: gpg, gpgsplit, and gpgv

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/gnupg and /usr/share/gnupg

Short Descriptions

gpg	is the backend (command-line interface) for this OpenPGP implementation.
gpgsplit	separates key rings.
gpgv	is a verify only version of gpg.

Tripwire-portable-0.9

Introduction to Tripwire

The Tripwire package contains programs used to verify the integrity of the files on a given system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.frenchfries.net/paul/tripwire/tripwire-portable-0.9.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 02610d0593fe04d35d809ff6c5becc02
Download size: 869 KB
Estimated disk space required: 22 MB
Estimated build time: 2.96 SBU

Tripwire Dependencies

Optional

MTA (See Chapter 22, Mail Server Software)

Installation of Tripwire

Compile Tripwire by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's@TWDB="${prefix}@TWDB="/var@' install/install.cfg &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/tripwire &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
cp -v policy/*.txt /usr/share/doc/tripwire

The default configuration is to use a local MTA. If you don't have an MTA installed and have no wish to install one, modify install.cfg to use an SMTP server instead.

Command Explanations

sed -i -e 's@TWDB="${prefix}@TWDB="/var@' install/install.cfg: This command tells the package to install the program database and reports in /var/lib/tripwire.

make install: This command creates the Tripwire security keys as well as installing the binaries. There are two keys: a site key and a local key which are stored in /etc/tripwire/.

cp -v policy/*.txt /usr/share/doc/tripwire: This command installs the documentation.

Configuring Tripwire

Config Files

/etc/tripwire/*

Configuration Information

Tripwire uses a policy file to determine which files are integrity checked. The default policy file (/etc/tripwire/twpol.txt) is for a default Redhat installation and will need to be updated for your system.

Policy files should be tailored to each individual distribution and/or installation. Some custom policy files can be found below:

http://home.iprimus.com.au/glombowski/blfs/twpol-all.txt
Checks integrity of all files
http://home.iprimus.com.au/glombowski/blfs/twpol-lfs.txt
Custom policy file for Base LFS 3.0 system
http://home.iprimus.com.au/glombowski/blfs/twpol-suse7.2.txt
Custom policy file for SuSE 7.2 system

Download the custom policy file you'd like to try, copy it into /etc/tripwire/, and use it instead of twpol.txt. It is, however, recommended that you make your own policy file. Get ideas from the examples above and read /usr/share/doc/tripwire/policyguide.txt for additional information. twpol.txt is a good policy file for beginners as it will note any changes to the file system and can even be used as an annoying way of keeping track of changes for uninstallation of software.

After your policy file has been transferred to /etc/tripwire/ you may begin the configuration steps (perform as the root):

twadmin --create-polfile --site-keyfile /etc/tripwire/site.key \
    /etc/tripwire/twpol.txt &&
tripwire --init

Usage Information

To use Tripwire after creating a policy file to run a report, use the following command:

tripwire --check > /etc/tripwire/report.txt

View the output to check the integrity of your files. An automatic integrity report can be produced by using a cron facility to schedule the runs.

Please note that after you run an integrity check, you must examine the report (or email) and then modify the Tripwire database to reflect the changed files on your system. This is so that Tripwire will not continually notify you that files you intentionally changed are a security violation. To do this you must first ls -l /var/lib/tripwire/report/ and note the name of the newest file which starts with linux- and ends in .twr. This encrypted file was created during the last report creation and is needed to update the Tripwire database of your system. Then, as the root user, type in the following command making the appropriate substitutions for [?]:

tripwire --update -twrfile \
    /var/lib/tripwire/report/linux-[???????]-[??????].twr

You will be placed into vim with a copy of the report in front of you. If all the changes were good, then just type :x and after entering your local key, the database will be updated. If there are files which you still want to be warned about, remove the 'x' before the filename in the report and type :x.

Changing the Policy File

If you are unhappy with your policy file and would like to modify it or use a new one, modify the policy file and then execute the following commands as the root user:

twadmin --create-polfile /etc/tripwire/twpol.txt &&
tripwire --init

Installed Programs: siggen, tripwire, twadmin, and twprint.

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/tripwire, /usr/share/doc/tripwire, and /var/lib/tripwire

Short Descriptions

siggen	is a signature gathering utility that displays the hash function values for the specified files.
tripwire	is the main file integrity checking program.
twadmin	administrative and utility tool used to perform certain administrative functions related to Tripwire files and configuration options.
twprint	prints Tripwire database and report files in clear text format.

Heimdal-0.7

Introduction to Heimdal

Heimdal is a free implementation of Kerberos 5 that aims to be compatible with MIT krb5 and is backward compatible with krb4. Kerberos is a network authentication protocol. Basically it preserves the integrity of passwords in any untrusted network (like the Internet). Kerberized applications work hand-in-hand with sites that support Kerberos to ensure that passwords cannot be stolen or compromised. A Kerberos installation will make changes to the authentication mechanisms on your network and will overwrite several programs and daemons from the Coreutils, Inetutils, Qpopper and Shadow packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.vc-graz.ac.at/mirror/crypto/kerberos/heimdal/heimdal-0.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.pdc.kth.se/pub/heimdal/src/heimdal-0.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0a8097a8772d5d2de8c5539d3182b82a
Download size: 4.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 91 MB
Estimated build time: 2.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/heimdal-0.7-fhs_compliance-1.patch
Required patch for CrackLib support: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/heimdal-0.7-cracklib-1.patch

Heimdal Dependencies

Required

OpenSSL-0.9.7g and Berkeley DB-4.3.28

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, X (X.org-6.8.2 or XFree86-4.5.0), CrackLib-2.8.3 (compiled with the heimdal patch) and krb4

Note

Some sort of time synchronization facility on your system (like NTP-4.2.0) is required since Kerberos won't authenticate if the time differential between a kerberized client and the KDC server is more than 5 minutes.

Installation of Heimdal

Before installing the package, you may want to preserve the ftp program from the Inetutils package. This is because using the Heimdal ftp program to connect to non-kerberized ftp servers may not work properly. It will allow you to connect (letting you know that transmission of the password is clear text) but will have problems doing puts and gets. Issue the following command as the root user.

mv -v /usr/bin/ftp /usr/bin/ftpn

If you wish the Heimdal package to link against the CrackLib library (requires CrackLib-2.8.3 installed with the heimdal patch), you must apply a patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../heimdal-0.7-cracklib-1.patch

Install Heimdal by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../heimdal-0.7-fhs_compliance-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc/heimdal \
            --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
            --datadir=/var/lib/heimdal \
            --localstatedir=/var/lib/heimdal \
            --enable-shared \
            --with-readline=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/heimdal-0.7/standardisation &&
install -v -m644 doc/{init-creds,layman.asc} \
    /usr/share/doc/heimdal-0.7 &&
install -v -m644 doc/standardisation/* \
    /usr/share/doc/heimdal-0.7/standardisation &&
mv -v /bin/login /bin/login.shadow &&
mv -v /bin/su /bin/su.shadow &&
mv -v /usr/bin/{login,su} /bin &&
ln -v -sf ../../bin/login /usr/bin &&
mv -v /usr/lib/lib{otp,kafs,krb5,asn1,roken,crypto}.so.* \
      /usr/lib/libdb-4.3.so /lib &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libdb-4.3.so /usr/lib/libdb.so &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libdb-4.3.so /usr/lib/libdb-4.so &&
for SYMLINK in otp.so.0.1.3  kafs.so.0.4.1   krb5.so.17.4.0 \
               asn1.so.6.1.0 roken.so.16.1.0 crypto.so.0.9.7
do
    ln -v -sf ../../lib/lib$SYMLINK \
        /usr/lib/lib`echo $SYMLINK | cut -d. -f1`.so
done
ldconfig

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: This switch puts the daemon programs into /usr/sbin.

Tip

If you want to preserve all your existing Inetutils package daemons, install the Heimdal daemons into /usr/sbin/heimdal (or wherever you want). Since these programs will be called from (x)inetd or rc scripts, it really doesn't matter where they are installed, as long as they are correctly specified in the /etc/(x)inetd.conf file and rc scripts. If you choose something other than /usr/sbin, you may want to move some of the user programs (such as kadmin) to /usr/sbin manually so they'll be in the privileged user's default PATH.

mv ... .shadow; mv ... /bin; ln -v -sf ../../bin...: The login and su programs installed by Heimdal belong in the /bin directory. The login program is symlinked because Heimdal is expecting to find it in /usr/bin. The old executables are preserved before the move to keep things sane should breaks occur.

mv ... /lib; ln -v -sf ../../lib/lib... /usr/lib...: The login and su programs installed by Heimdal link against Heimdal libraries as well as libraries provided by the OpenSSL and Berkeley DB packages. These libraries are moved to /lib to be FHS compliant and also in case /usr is located on a separate partition which may not always be mounted.

Configuring Heimdal

Config Files

/etc/heimdal/*

Configuration Information

Note

All the configuration steps shown below must be accomplished by the root user unless otherwise noted.

Master KDC Server Configuration

Create the Kerberos configuration file with the following commands:

install -v -m755 -d /etc/heimdal &&
cat > /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf

[libdefaults]
    default_realm = [EXAMPLE.COM]
    encrypt = true

[realms]
    [EXAMPLE.COM] = {
        kdc = [hostname.example.com]
        admin_server = [hostname.example.com]
        kpasswd_server = [hostname.example.com]
    }

[domain_realm]
    .[example.com] = [EXAMPLE.COM]

[logging]
    kdc = FILE:/var/log/kdc.log
    admin_server = FILE:/var/log/kadmin.log
    default = FILE:/var/log/krb.log

# End /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf
EOF
chmod -v 644 /etc/heimdal/krb5.conf

You will need to substitute your domain and proper hostname for the occurrences of the [hostname] and [EXAMPLE.COM] names.

default_realm should be the name of your domain changed to ALL CAPS. This isn't required, but both Heimdal and MIT krb5 recommend it.

encrypt = true provides encryption of all traffic between kerberized clients and servers. It's not necessary and can be left off. If you leave it off, you can encrypt all traffic from the client to the server using a switch on the client program instead.

The [realms] parameters tell the client programs where to look for the KDC authentication services.

The [domain_realm] section maps a domain to a realm.

Store the master password in a key file using the following commands:

install -v -m755 -d /var/lib/heimdal &&
kstash

Create the KDC database:

kadmin -l

The commands below will prompt you for information about the principles. Choose the defaults for now unless you know what you are doing and need to specify different values. You can go in later and change the defaults, should you feel the need. You may use the up and down arrow keys to use the history feature of kadmin in a similar manner as the bash history feature.

At the kadmin> prompt, issue the following statement:

init [EXAMPLE.COM]

The database must now be populated with at least one principle (user). For now, just use your regular login name or root. You may create as few, or as many principles as you wish using the following statement:

add [loginname]

The KDC server and any machine running kerberized server daemons must have a host key installed:

add --random-key host/[hostname.example.com]

After choosing the defaults when prompted, you will have to export the data to a keytab file:

ext host/[hostname.example.com]

This should have created two files in /etc/heimdal: krb5.keytab (Kerberos 5) and srvtab (Kerberos 4). Both files should have 600 (root rw only) permissions. Keeping the keytab files from public access is crucial to the overall security of the Kerberos installation.

Eventually, you'll want to add server daemon principles to the database and extract them to the keytab file. You do this in the same way you created the host principles. Below is an example:

add --random-key ftp/[hostname.example.com]

(choose the defaults)

ext ftp/[hostname.example.com]

Exit the kadmin program (use quit or exit) and return back to the shell prompt. Start the KDC daemon manually, just to test out the installation:

/usr/sbin/kdc &

Attempt to get a TGT (ticket granting ticket) with the following command:

kinit [loginname]

You will be prompted for the password you created. After you get your ticket, you should list it with the following command:

klist

Information about the ticket should be displayed on the screen.

To test the functionality of the keytab file, issue the following command:

ktutil list

This should dump a list of the host principals, along with the encryption methods used to access the principals.

At this point, if everything has been successful so far, you can feel fairly confident in the installation, setup and configuration of your new Heimdal Kerberos 5 installation.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/heimdal init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package:

make install-heimdal

Using Kerberized Client Programs

To use the kerberized client programs (telnet, ftp, rsh, rxterm, rxtelnet, rcp, xnlock), you first must get a TGT. Use the kinit program to get the ticket. After you've acquired the ticket, you can use the kerberized programs to connect to any kerberized server on the network. You will not be prompted for authentication until your ticket expires (default is one day), unless you specify a different user as a command line argument to the program.

The kerberized programs will connect to non-kerberized daemons, warning you that authentication is not encrypted. As mentioned earlier, only the ftp program gives any trouble connecting to non-kerberized daemons.

In order to use the Heimdal X programs, you'll need to add a service port entry to the /etc/services file for the kxd server. There is no 'standardized port number' for the 'kx' service in the IANA database, so you'll have to pick an unused port number. Add an entry to the services file similar to the entry below (substitute your chosen port number for [49150]):

kx              [49150]/tcp   # Heimdal kerberos X
kx              [49150]/udp   # Heimdal kerberos X

For additional information consult the Heimdal hint on which the above instructions are based.

Installed Programs: afslog, dump_log, ftp, ftpd, hprop, hpropd, ipropd-master, ipropd-slave, kadmin, kadmind, kauth, kcm, kdc, kdestroy, kf, kfd, kgetcred, kinit, klist, kpasswd, kpasswdd, krb5-config, kstash, ktutil, kx, kxd, login, mk_cmds, otp, otpprint, pagsh, pfrom, popper, push, rcp, replay_log, rsh, rshd, rxtelnet, rxterm, string2key, su, telnet, telnetd, tenletxr, truncate-log, verify_krb5_conf and xnlock

Installed Libraries: libasn1.[so,a], libeditline.[so,a], libgssapi.[so,a], libhdb.[so,a], libkadm5clnt.[so,a], libkadm5srv.[so,a], libkafs.[so,a], libkrb5.[so,a], libotp.[so,a], libroken.[so,a], libsl.[so,a] and libss.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/heimdal, /usr/include/kadm5, /usr/share/doc/heimdal-0.7 and /var/lib/heimdal

Short Descriptions

afslog	obtains AFS tokens for a number of cells.
ftp	is a kerberized FTP client.
ftpd	is a kerberized FTP daemon.
hprop	takes a principal database in a specified format and converts it into a stream of Heimdal database records.
hpropd	is a server that receives a database sent by hprop and writes it as a local database.
ipropd-master	is a daemon which runs on the master KDC server which incrementally propagates changes to the KDC database to the slave KDC servers.
ipropd-slave	is a daemon which runs on the slave KDC servers which incrementally propagates changes to the KDC database from the master KDC server.
kadmin	is a utility used to make modifications to the Kerberos database.
kadmind	is a server for administrative access to the Kerberos database.
kauth	is a symbolic link to the kinit program.
kcm	is a process based credential cache for Kerberos tickets.
kdc	is a Kerberos 5 server.
kdestroy	removes a principle's current set of tickets.
kf	is a program which forwards tickets to a remote host through an authenticated and encrypted stream.
kfd	is a server used to receive forwarded tickets.
kgetcred	obtains a ticket for a service.
kinit	is used to authenticate to the Kerberos server as a principal and acquire a ticket granting ticket that can later be used to obtain tickets for other services.
klist	reads and displays the current tickets in the credential cache.
kpasswd	is a program for changing Kerberos 5 passwords.
kpasswdd	is a Kerberos 5 password changing server.
krb5-config	gives information on how to link programs against Heimdal libraries.
kstash	stores the KDC master password in a file.
ktutil	is a program for managing Kerberos keytabs.
kx	is a program which securely forwards X connections.
kxd	is the daemon for kx.
login	is a kerberized login program.
otp	manages one-time passwords.
otpprint	prints lists of one-time passwords.
pfrom	is a script that runs push --from.
popper	is a kerberized POP-3 server.
push	is a kerberized POP mail retrieval client.
rcp	is a kerberized rcp client program.
rsh	is a kerberized rsh client program.
rshd	is a kerberized rsh server.
rxtelnet	starts a secure xterm window with a telnet to a given host and forwards X connections.
rxterm	starts a secure remote xterm.
string2key	maps a password into a key.
su	is a kerberized su client program.
telnet	is a kerberized telnet client program.
telnetd	is a kerberized telnet server.
tenletxr	forwards X connections backwards.
verify_krb5_conf	checks `krb5.conf` file for obvious errors.
xnlock	is a program that acts as a secure screen saver for workstations running X.
`libasn1.[so,a]`	provides the ASN.1 and DER functions to encode and decode the Kerberos TGTs.
`libeditline.a`	is a command-line editing library with history.
`libgssapi.[so,a]`	contain the Generic Security Service Application Programming Interface (GSSAPI) functions which provides security services to callers in a generic fashion, supportable with a range of underlying mechanisms and technologies and hence allowing source-level portability of applications to different environments.
`libhdb.[so,a]`	is a Heimdal Kerberos 5 authentication/authorization database access library.
`libkadm5clnt.[so,a]`	contains the administrative authentication and password checking functions required by Kerberos 5 client-side programs.
`libkadm5srv.[so,a]`	contain the administrative authentication and password checking functions required by Kerberos 5 servers.
`libkafs.[so,a]`	contains the functions required to authenticated to AFS.
`libkrb5.[so,a]`	is an all-purpose Kerberos 5 library.
`libotp.[so,a]`	contains the functions required to handle authenticating one time passwords.
`libroken.[so,a]`	is a library containing Kerberos 5 compatibility functions.

MIT Krb5-1.4.1

Introduction to MIT Krb5

MIT krb5 is a free implementation of Kerberos 5. Kerberos is a network authentication protocol. It centralizes the authentication database and uses kerberized applications to work with servers or services that support Kerberos allowing single logins and encrypted communication over internal networks or the Internet.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://web.mit.edu/kerberos/www/dist/krb5/1.4/krb5-1.4.1-signed.tar
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 617e0071fa5b74ab4116f064678af551
Download size: 6.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: TBD MB
Estimated build time: TBD SBU

Installation of MIT Krb5

Note

The instructions for MIT Krb5 have not yet been validated by the BLFS Editors. Until this section is updated, the Editors reccomend using Heimdal-0.7 to implement the functionality of this package.

Command Explanations

Configuring MIT Krb5

Cyrus SASL-2.1.21

Introduction to Cyrus SASL

The Cyrus SASL package contains a Simple Authentication and Security Layer, a method for adding authentication support to connection-based protocols. To use SASL, a protocol includes a command for identifying and authenticating a user to a server and for optionally negotiating protection of subsequent protocol interactions. If its use is negotiated, a security layer is inserted between the protocol and the connection.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.andrew.cmu.edu/pub/cyrus-mail/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.andrew.cmu.edu/pub/cyrus-mail/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: dde02db234dea892bee298390890502e
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 16 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Cyrus SASL Dependencies

Required

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, JDK-1.5.0, MySQL-4.1.12, PostgreSQL-8.0.3, Berkeley DB-4.3.28, GDBM-1.8.3, krb4, SQLite and Dmalloc

Installation of Cyrus SASL

Install Cyrus SASL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --with-dbpath=/var/lib/sasl/sasldb2 \
            --with-saslauthd=/var/run &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite. If you are planning on using the GSSAPI authentication mechanism, it is recommended to test it after installing the package using the sample server and client programs which were built in the preceding step. Instructions for performing the tests can be found at http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/hints/downloads/files/cyrus-sasl.txt.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 saslauthd/saslauthd.8 /usr/share/man/man8 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{*.{html,txt,fig},ONEWS,TODO} \
    saslauthd/LDAP_SASLAUTHD /usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21 &&
install -v -m700 -d /var/lib/sasl

Command Explanations

--with-dbpath=/var/lib/sasl/sasldb2: This parameter forces the saslauthd database to be created in /var/lib/sasl instead of /etc.

--with-saslauthd=/var/run: This parameter forces saslauthd to use the FHS compliant directory /var/run for variable run-time data.

--with-ldap: This parameter enables use with OpenLDAP.

--enable-ldapdb: This parameter enables the LDAPDB authentication backend. There is a circular dependency with this parameter which requires you to build the Cyrus SASL package, then the OpenLDAP package (with SASL support), then finally building the Cyrus SASL package again with this parameter.

install -v -m644 ...: These commands install documentation which is not installed by the make install command.

install -v -m700 -d /var/lib/sasl: This directory must exist when starting saslauthd. If you're not going to be running the daemon, you may omit the creation of this directory.

Configuring Cyrus SASL

Config Files

/etc/saslauthd.conf (for LDAP configuration) and /usr/lib/sasl2/Appname.conf (where "Appname" is the application defined name of the application)

Configuration Information

See file:///usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21/sysadmin.html for information on what to include in the application configuration files. See file:///usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21/LDAP_SASLAUTHD for configuring saslauthd with OpenLDAP.

Init Script

If you need to run the saslauthd daemon at system startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/cyrus-sasl init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-cyrus-sasl

Note

You'll need to modify the init script and replace the [authmech] parameter to the -a switch with your desired authentication mechanism.

Installed Programs: saslauthd, sasldblistusers2, and saslpasswd2

Installed Libraries: libjavasasl.so, libsasl2.so, and numerous SASL plugins and Java classes

Installed Directories: /usr/include/sasl, /usr/lib/java/classes/sasl, /usr/lib/sasl2, /usr/share/doc/cyrus-sasl-2.1.21, and /var/lib/sasl

Short Descriptions

saslauthd	is the SASL authentication server.
sasldblistusers2	is used to list the users in the SASL password database.
saslpasswd2	is used to set and delete a user's SASL password and mechanism specific secrets in the SASL password database.
`libsasl2.so`	is a general purpose authentication library for server and client applications.

Stunnel-4.11

Introduction to Stunnel

The Stunnel package contains a program that allows you to encrypt arbitrary TCP connections inside SSL (Secure Sockets Layer) so you can easily communicate with clients over secure channels. Stunnel can be used to add SSL functionality to commonly used Inetd daemons like POP-2, POP-3, and IMAP servers, to standalone daemons like NNTP, SMTP and HTTP, and in tunneling PPP over network sockets without changes to the server package source code.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.stunnel.org/download/stunnel/src/stunnel-4.11.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://stunnel.mirt.net/stunnel/stunnel-4.11.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 253c50435d4d81cba6f19ca34266e6dc
Download size: 484 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Stunnel Dependencies

Required

Optional

Installation of Stunnel

The stunnel daemon will be run in a chroot jail by an unprivileged user. Create the new user, group and chroot home directory structure using the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 51 stunnel &&
useradd -c "Stunnel Daemon" -d /var/lib/stunnel \
        -g stunnel -s /bin/false -u 51 stunnel &&
install -v -m700 -o stunnel -g stunnel -d /var/lib/stunnel/run

Note

A signed SSL Certificate and a Private Key is necessary to run the stunnel daemon. If you own, or have already created a signed SSL Certificate you wish to use, copy it to /etc/stunnel/stunnel.pem before starting the build (ensure only root has read and write access), otherwise you will be prompted to create one during the installation process. The .pem file must be formatted as shown below:

Install Stunnel by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This parameter forces the configuration directory to /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This parameter causes the installation process to create /var/lib/stunnel instead of /usr/var/stunnel.

make install: This command installs the package and, if you did not copy an stunnel.pem file to the /etc/stunnel directory, prompts you for the necessary information to create one. Ensure you reply to the

Common Name (FQDN of your server) [localhost]:

prompt with the name or IP address you will be using to access the service(s).

Configuring Stunnel

Config Files

/etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf

Configuration Information

Create a basic /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf configuration file using the following commands:

cat >/etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf << "EOF"
# File: /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf

pid = /run/stunnel.pid
chroot = /var/lib/stunnel
client = no
setuid = stunnel
setgid = stunnel

EOF

Next, you need to add the service(s) you wish to encrypt to the configuration file. The format is as follows:

[[service]]
accept  = [hostname:portnumber]
connect = [hostname:portnumber]

If you use Stunnel to encrypt a daemon started from [x]inetd, you may need to disable that daemon in the /etc/[x]inetd.conf file and enable a corresponding [service]_stunnel service. You may have to add an appropriate entry in /etc/services as well.

For a full explanation of the commands and syntax used in the configuration file, run man stunnel. To see a BLFS example of an actual setup of an stunnel encrypted service, read the the section called “Configuring SWAT” in the Samba instructions.

Boot Script

To automatically start the stunnel daemon when the system is rebooted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/stunnel bootscript from the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-stunnel

Installed Programs: stunnel and stunnel3

Installed Library: libstunnel.so

Installed Directories: /etc/stunnel, /var/lib/stunnel, and /usr/share/doc/stunnel

Short Descriptions

stunnel	is a program designed to work as an SSL encryption wrapper between remote clients and local ([x]inetd-startable) or remote servers.
stunnel3	is a Perl wrapper script to use stunnel 3.x syntax with stunnel >=4.05.
`libstunnel.so`	contains the API functions required by Stunnel.

Chapter 5. File Systems

Journaling file systems reduce the time needed to recover a file system that was not unmounted properly. While this can be extremely important in reducing downtime for servers, it has also become popular for desktop environments. This chapter contains a variety of journaling file systems.

Ext3

Ext3 is a journaling file system that is an extension to the ext2 file system. It is backward compatible with ext2 and the conversion from ext2 to ext3 is trivial.

You don't need to install anything to use ext3, all the required packages are available with a bare LFS system.

When building the kernel, ensure that you have compiled in ext3 support. If you want your root partition to be ext3, then compile the ext3 support in the kernel, else you may compile it as a module. Recompile the kernel if needed.

Edit your /etc/fstab. For each partition that you want to convert into ext3, edit the entry so that it looks similar to the following line.

/dev/hd[XX] /mnt_point ext3 defaults 1 1

In the above line, replace /dev/hd[XX] by the partition (e.g., /dev/hda2), /mnt_point by the mount point (e.g., /home). The 1 in the last field ensures that the partition will be checked for consistency during the boot process by the checkfs script as recommended by the maintainer. You may replace the ext3 fs type in the above by auto if you want to ensure that the partition is mounted even if you accidentally disable ext3 support in the kernel.

For each partition that you have converted to ext3 in /etc/fstab, enable the journal for the partition by running the following command.

tune2fs -j /dev/hd[XX]

Remount the concerned partitions, or simply reboot if you have recompiled the kernel to enable ext3 support.

More information is available at http://www.zip.com.au/~akpm/linux/ext3/ext3-usage.html. This information is still relevant to the 2.6 kernels.

ReiserFS-3.6.19

Introduction to ReiserFS

The ReiserFS package contains various utilities for use with the Reiser file system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.namesys.com/pub/reiserfsprogs/reiserfsprogs-3.6.19.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.namesys.com/pub/reiserfsprogs/reiserfsprogs-3.6.19.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: b42cf15f6651c3ceff5cb84996c0d539
Download size: 400 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.16 SBU

Installation of ReiserFS

Install ReiserFS by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sbindir=/sbin &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -sf reiserfsck /sbin/fsck.reiserfs &&
ln -sf mkreiserfs /sbin/mkfs.reiserfs

Command Explanations

--prefix=/usr: This ensures that the manual pages are installed in the correct location while still installing the programs in /sbin as they should be.

--sbindir=/sbin: This ensures that the ReiserFS utilities are installed in /sbin as they should be.

Installed Programs: debugreiserfs, mkreiserfs, reiserfsck, reiserfstune, and resize_reiserfs

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

debugreiserfs	can sometimes help to solve problems with ReiserFS file systems. If it is called without options, it prints the super block of any ReiserFS file system found on the device.
mkreiserfs	creates a ReiserFS file system.
reiserfsck	is used to check or repair a ReiserFS file system.
reiserfstune	is used for tuning the ReiserFS journal. WARNING: Don't use this utility without first reading the man page thoroughly.
resize_reiserfs	is used to resize an unmounted ReiserFS file system.

XFS-2.6.25

Introduction to XFS

The XFS package contains administration and debugging tools for the XFS file system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.sunsite.dk/xfs/download/cmd_tars/xfsprogs-2.6.25.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/xfs/download/cmd_tars/xfsprogs-2.6.25.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 65fbf692f348b57f21edd4813733d9ae
Download size: 833 KB
Estimated disk space required: 25.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.59 SBU

Installation of XFS

Note

If you did not install the E2fsprogs package in LFS, you must install it, or UUID before proceeding with the installation of XFS.

Install XFS by running the following commands:

sed -i 's/autoconf//' Makefile &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i 's/autoconf//' Makefile: This command disables running autoconf because it is unnecessary.

Installed Programs: fsck.xfs, mkfs.xfs, xfs_admin, xfs_bmap, xfs_check, xfs_copy, xfs_db, xfs_freeze, xfs_growfs, xfs_info, xfs_io, xfs_logprint, xfs_mkfile, xfs_ncheck, xfs_repair, and xfs_rtcp

Installed Library: libhandle.so

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/xfsprogs

Short Descriptions

fsck.xfs	simply exits with a zero status, since XFS partitions are checked at mount time.
mkfs.xfs	constructs an XFS file system.
xfs_admin	changes the parameters of an XFS file system.
xfs_bmap	prints block mapping for an XFS file.
xfs_check	checks XFS file system consistency.
xfs_copy	copies the contents of an XFS file system to one or more targets in parallel.
xfs_db	is used to debug an XFS file system.
xfs_freeze	suspends access to an XFS file system.
xfs_growfs	expands an XFS file system.
xfs_info	is equivalent to invoking xfs_growfs, but specifying that no change to the file system is to be made.
xfs_io	is a debugging tool like xfs_db, but is aimed at examining the regular file I/O path rather than the raw XFS volume itself.
xfs_logprint	prints the log of an XFS file system.
xfs_mkfile	creates an XFS file, padded with zeroes by default.
xfs_ncheck	generates pathnames from inode numbers for an XFS file system.
xfs_repair	repairs corrupt or damaged XFS file systems.
xfs_rtcp	copies a file to the real-time partition on an XFS file system.
`libhandle.so`	contains functions to map filesystem handles to a corresponding open file descriptor for that filesystem.

Chapter 6. Editors

This chapter is referenced in the LFS book for those wishing to use other editors on their LFS system. You're also shown how some LFS installed programs benefit from being recompiled after GUI libraries have been installed.

Vim-6.3

Introduction to Vim

The Vim package, which is an abbreviation for VI IMproved, contains a vi clone with extra features as compared to the original vi.

The default LFS instructions install vim as a part of the base system. If you would prefer to link vim against X, you should recompile vim to enable GUI mode. There is no need for special instructions since X support is automatically detected.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.at.vim.org/pub/vim/unix/vim-6.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.vim.org/pub/vim/unix/vim-6.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 821fda8f14d674346b87e3ef9cb96389
Download size: 3.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 48 MB
Estimated build time: 0.59 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/vim-6.3-security_fix-1.patch
Translated Vim messages: http://ftp.at.vim.org/pub/vim/extra/vim-6.3-lang.tar.gz

Vim Dependencies

Optional

GTK+-2.6.7, LessTif-0.94.4, Python-2.4.1, Tcl-8.4.11, Ruby-1.8.2 and GPM-1.20.1

Installation of Vim

Note

If you recompile Vim to link against X, and your X libraries are not on the root partition, you will no longer have an editor for use in emergencies. You may choose to install an additional editor, not link Vim against X, or move the current vim executable to the /bin directory under a different name such as vi.

If desired, unpack the translated messages archive:

tar -zxf ../vim-6.3-lang.tar.gz --strip-components=1

Install Vim by running the following commands:

echo '#define SYS_VIMRC_FILE "/etc/vimrc"' >> src/feature.h &&
echo '#define SYS_GVIMRC_FILE "/etc/gvimrc"' >> src/feature.h &&
patch -Np1 -i ../vim-6.3-security_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-features=huge &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-features=huge: This switch enables all the additional features available in Vim.

--enable-gui=no: If you prefer not to link Vim against X, use this switch.

A list of the reinstalled files, along with their short descriptions can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/stable/chapter06/vim.html#contents-vim.

Installed Programs: gview, gvim, gvimdiff, rgview, and rgvim

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/vim

Short Descriptions

gview	starts gvim in read-only mode.
gvim	is the editor that runs under X and includes a GUI.
gvimdiff	edits two or three versions of a file with gvim and shows the differences.
rgview	is a restricted version of gview.
rgvim	is a restricted version of gvim.

Emacs-21.4a

Introduction to Emacs

The Emacs package contains an extensible, customizable, self-documenting real-time display editor.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/emacs/emacs-21.4a.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/emacs/emacs-21.4a.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 5ec2c01f7604cf207628de0e82181647
Download size: 20 MB
Estimated disk space required: 96.8 MB
Estimated build time: 4.20 SBU

Emacs Dependencies

Optional

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), libjpeg-6b, libpng-1.2.8, libtiff-3.7.3, and libungif-4.1.3 or giflib-4.1.3

Installation of Emacs

Install Emacs by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/sbin &&
make bootstrap

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: b2m, ctags, ebrowse, emacs, emacsclient, etags, grep-changelog, and rcs-checkin

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/sbin/emacs and /usr/share/emacs

Short Descriptions

b2m	is a program to convert mail files from RMAIL format to Unix “mbox” format.
ctags	creates cross-reference tagfile database files for source code.
ebrowse	permits browsing of C++ class hierarchies from within emacs.
emacs	is an editor.
emacsclient	attaches an emacs session to an already running emacsserver instance.
etags	is another program to generate source code cross-reference tagfiles.
grep-changelog	prints entries in Change Logs matching various criteria.
rcs-checkin	is a shell script used to check files into RCS.

Nano-1.2.5

Introduction to Nano

The nano package contains a small, simple text editor which aims to replace Pico, the default editor in the Pine package.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.nano-editor.org/dist/v1.2/nano-1.2.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uni-koeln.de/editor/nano-1.2.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f2b3efbf1cf356d736740d531b6b22c4
Download size: 891 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Nano Dependencies

Optional

slang-1.4.9

Installation of Nano

Install nano by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/nano \
    --enable-color --enable-multibuffer --enable-nanorc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D nanorc.sample /etc/nano/nanorc.sample &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/nano-1.2.5 &&
install -v -m644 *.html /usr/share/doc/nano-1.2.5

Configuring nano

Config Files

/etc/nano/nanorc and ~/.nanorc

Configuration Information

Example configuration (create as a system-wide /etc/nano/nanorc or a personal ~/.nanorc file)

set autoindent
set const
set fill 72
set historylog
set multibuffer
set nohelp
set regexp
set smooth
set suspend

Another example is the nanorc.sample file in the /etc/nano directory. It includes color configurations and has some documentation included in the comments.

Installed Programs: nano

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/nano

Short Descriptions

nano

is a small, simple text editor which aims to replace Pico, the default editor in the Pine package.

JOE-3.3

Introduction to JOE

JOE (Joe's own editor) is a small text editor capable of emulating WordStar, Pico, and Emacs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/joe-editor/joe-3.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 02221716679c039c5da00c275d61dbf4
Download size: 468 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.15 SBU

Installation of JOE

Install JOE by running the following commands:

./configure --sysconfdir=/etc --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring JOE

Config Files

/etc/joe/jmacsrc, /etc/joe/joerc, /etc/joe/jpicorc, /etc/joe/jstarrc, /etc/joe/rjoerc, and ~/.joerc

Installed Programs: jmacs, joe, jpico, jstar, rjoe, and termidx

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /etc/joe

Short Descriptions

jmacs	is a symbolic link to joe used to launch Emacs emulation mode.
joe	is a small text editor capable of emulating WordStar, Pico, and Emacs.
jpico	is a symbolic link to joe used to launch Pico emulation mode.
jstar	is a symbolic link to joe used to launch WordStar emulation mode.
rjoe	is a symbolic link to joe that restricts JOE to editing only files which are specified on the command-line.
termidx	is a program used by joe to generate the termcap index file.

Ed-0.2

Introduction to Ed

Ed is a line-oriented text editor. It is used to create, display, modify and otherwise manipulate text files, both interactively and via shell scripts. Ed isn't something which many people use. It's described here because it can be used by the patch program if you encounter an ed-based patch file. This happens rarely because diff-based patches are preferred these days.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ed/ed-0.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/ed/ed-0.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ddd57463774cae9b50e70cd51221281b
Download size: 182 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.02 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/ed-0.2-mkstemp-1.patch

Installation of Ed

Ed normally uses the mktemp function to create temporary files in /tmp, but this function contains a vulnerability (see the section on Temporary Files at http://en.tldp.org/HOWTO/Secure-Programs-HOWTO/avoid-race.html). Apply the following patch to make Ed use mkstemp instead, a secure way to create temporary files:

patch -Np1 -i ../ed-0.2-mkstemp-1.patch

Install Ed by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --exec-prefix="" &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--exec-prefix="": This forces the programs to be installed into the /bin directory. Having the programs available there is useful in the event of the /usr partition being unavailable.

Installed Programs: ed and red

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ed	is a line-oriented text editor.
red	is a restricted ed—it can only edit files in the current directory and cannot execute shell commands.

Bluefish-1.0.2

Introduction to Bluefish

The Bluefish package contains a powerful X Window System editor designed for web designers, but also suitable as a programmer's editor. Bluefish supports many programming and markup languages, and as such is ideal for editing XML and HTML files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://pkedu.fbt.eitn.wau.nl/~olivier/downloads/bluefish-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ratisbona.com/pub/bluefish/downloads/bluefish-1.0.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 281d72f5c45c913671c36bc6b7b45445
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 23.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Bluefish Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7 and PCRE-6.1

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1 (for remote files), Aspell-0.60.3 (for spellchecking), libgnomeui-2.10.0, GNOME MIME Data-2.4.2, desktop-file-utils-0.10 and shared-mime-info-0.16

Installation of Bluefish

Install Bluefish by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Bluefish

Config Files

~/.bluefish/*

Configuration Information

The directory ~/.bluefish is created by the program when it is first run, and the configuration files are maintained by the program automatically to preserve settings from run to run.

Installed Program: bluefish

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/bluefish

Short Descriptions

bluefish

is an X Window System editor for markup and programming.

Other Editors

pico is a text editor installed as a part of Pine-4.63.

mcedit is a text editor installed as part of MC-4.6.1.

Chapter 7. Shells

We are all familiar with the Bourne Again SHell, but there are two other user interfaces that are considered useful modern shells -- the Berkeley Unix C shell and the Korn shell. This chapter installs packages compatible with these additional shell types.

ASH-0.4.0

Introduction to ASH

ash is a shell that is the most compliant with the Bourne Shell (not to be confused with Bourne Again SHell i.e., Bash installed in LFS) without any additional features. Bourne Shell is available on most commercial UNIX systems. Hence ash is useful for testing scripts to be sh-compliant. It also has small memory and space requirements compared to the other sh-compliant shells.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://distro.ibiblio.org/pub/linux/distributions/slackware/slackware_source/ap/ash/ash-0.4.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1c59f5b62a081cb0cb3b053c01d79529
Download size: 118 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.06 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/ash-0.4.0-cumulative_fixes-1.patch

Installation of ASH

Install ASH by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../ash-0.4.0-cumulative_fixes-1.patch &&
make

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m 755 sh /bin/ash &&
install -v -m 644 sh.1 /usr/share/man/man1/ash.1

If you would like to make ash the default sh shell, make a symlink.

ln -v -sf ash /bin/sh

Configuring ASH

Config Files

ASH sources /etc/profile and $HOME/.profile

Installed Program: ash

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Description

ash

is a sh-compliant shell.

Tcsh-6.14.00

Introduction to Tcsh

The Tcsh package contains “an enhanced but completely compatible version of the Berkeley Unix C shell (csh)”. This is useful as an alternative shell for those who prefer C syntax to that of the bash shell, and also because some programs require the C shell in order to perform installation tasks.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/utils/shells/tcsh/tcsh-6.14.00.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.funet.fi/pub/unix/shells/tcsh/tcsh-6.14.00.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 353d1bb7d2741bf8de602c7b6f0efd79
Download size: 859 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Installation of Tcsh

Install Tcsh by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --bindir=/bin &&
make &&
sh ./tcsh.man2html

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install.man &&
ln -v -sf tcsh /bin/csh &&
ln -v -sf tcsh.1 /usr/man/man1/csh.1 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.14.00/html &&
install -v -m644 tcsh.html/* /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.14.00/html &&
install -v -m644 FAQ /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.14.00

Command Explanations

--bindir=/bin: This installs the tcsh program in /bin instead of /usr/bin.

sh ./tcsh.man2html: This creates HTML documentation from the formatted man page.

ln -v -sf tcsh /bin/csh: The FHS states that if there is a C shell installed, there should be a symlink from /bin/csh to it. This creates that symlink.

Configuring Tcsh

Config Files

There are numerous configuration files for the C shell. Examples of these are /etc/csh.cshrc, /etc/csh.login, /etc/csh.logout, ~/.tcshrc, ~/.cshrc, ~/.history, ~/.cshdirs, ~/.login, and ~/.logout. More information on these files can be found in the tcsh(1) man page.

Configuration Information

Update /etc/shells to include the C shell program names (as the root user):

cat >> /etc/shells << "EOF"
/bin/tcsh
/bin/csh
EOF

Installed Program: tcsh

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/tcsh-6.14.00

Short Descriptions

tcsh

is an enhanced but completely compatible version of the Berkeley Unix C shell, csh. It is usable as both an interactive shell and a script processor.

ZSH-4.2.5

Introduction to ZSH

The ZSH package contains a command interpreter (shell) usable as an interactive login shell and as a shell script command processor. Of the standard shells, ZSH most closely resembles KSH but includes many enhancements.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/zsh/zsh-4.2.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: e2060f743dcdf3b383e80e862a6548fe
Download size: 2.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 24 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

ZSH Dependencies

Optional

PCRE-6.1

Installation of ZSH

Install ZSH by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install.info

Configuring ZSH

Config Files

There are a whole host of configuration files for ZSH including /etc/zshenv, /etc/zprofile, /etc/zshrc, /etc/zlogin, and /etc/zlogout. You can find more information on these in the zsh(1) and related man pages.

Configuration Information

Update /etc/shells to include the ZSH shell program names (as the root user):

cat >> /etc/shells << "EOF"
/usr/bin/zsh
/usr/bin/zsh-4.2.5
EOF

Installed Programs: zsh and zsh-4.2.5

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/zsh and /usr/share/zsh

Short Description

zsh

is a shell which has command-line editing, built-in spelling correction, programmable command completion, shell functions (with autoloading), a history mechanism, and a host of other features.

General Libraries and Utilities

8. General Libraries
9. Graphics and Font Libraries
10. General Utilities
11. System Utilities
12. Programming

Chapter 8. General Libraries

Libraries contain code which is often required by more than one program. This has the advantage that each program doesn't need to duplicate code (and risk introducing bugs), it just has to call functions from the libraries installed on the system. The most obvious example of a set of libraries is Glibc which is installed during the LFS book. This contains all of the C library functions which programs use.

There are two types of libraries: static and shared. Shared libraries (usually libXXX.so) are loaded into memory from the shared copy at runtime (hence the name). Static libraries (libXXX.a ) are actually linked into the program executable file itself, thus making the program file larger. Quite often, you will find both static and shared copies of the same library on your system.

Generally, you only need to install libraries when you are installing software that needs the functionality they supply. In the BLFS book, each package is presented with a list of (known) dependencies. Thus, you can figure out which libraries you need to have before installing that program. If you are installing something without using BLFS instructions, usually the README or INSTALL file will contain details of the program's requirements.

There are certain libraries which nearly everyone will need at some point. In this chapter we list these and some others and explain why you may want to install them.

PCRE-6.1

Introduction to PCRE

The PCRE package contains Perl Compatible Regular Expression libraries. These are useful for implementing regular expression pattern matching using the same syntax and semantics as Perl 5.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.csx.cam.ac.uk/pub/software/programming/pcre/pcre-6.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 069a8c34df7ec4bd0dad8f26c64c9dd3
Download size: 543 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Installation of PCRE

Install PCRE by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-utf8 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make runtest.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/pcre-6.1/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/html/* /usr/share/doc/pcre-6.1/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/{Tech.Notes,*.txt} /usr/share/doc/pcre-6.1

If you reinstall Grep after installing PCRE, Grep will get linked against PCRE and may cause problems if /usr is a separate mount point. To avoid this, either pass the option --disable-perl-regexp when executing ./configure for Grep or move libpcre to /lib as follows.

mv -v /usr/lib/libpcre.so.* /lib/ &&
ln -v -sf ../../lib/libpcre.so.0 /usr/lib/libpcre.so

Command Explanations

--enable-utf8: This switch includes the code for handling UTF-8 character strings in the library.

Installed Programs: pcregrep, pcretest, and pcre-config

Installed Libraries: libpcre.[so,a], libpcrecpp.[so,a] and libpcreposix.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/pcre-6.1

Short Descriptions

pcregrep	is a grep that understands Perl compatible regular expressions.
pcretest	can test a Perl compatible regular expression.
pcre-config	is used during the compile process of programs linking to the PCRE libraries.

Popt-1.7-5

Introduction to Popt

The popt package contains the popt libraries which are used by some programs to parse command-line options.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/p/popt/popt_1.7.orig.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/p/popt/popt_1.7.orig.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 5988e7aeb0ae4dac8d83561265984cc9
Download size: 562 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.17 SBU

Additional Downloads

Patch level upgrade: http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/p/popt/popt_1.7-5.diff.gz

Installation of Popt

Install popt by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../popt_1.7-5.diff &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
cp configure.in configure.ac &&
touch configure.in configure.ac &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

cp configure.in configure.ac: Because configure.in is updated with the patch, this file is needed for make to work properly.

touch configure.in configure.ac: Ensure file timestamps are the same.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libpopt.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libpopt.[so,a]

is used to parse command-line options.

Slang-1.4.9

Introduction to Slang

The slang package contains the slang library, which provides facilities such as display/screen management, keyboard input, and keymaps.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/editors/davis/slang/v1.4/slang-1.4.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://space.mit.edu/pub/davis/slang/v1.4/slang-1.4.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 4fbb1a7f1257e065ca830deefe13d350
Download size: 624 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Installation of Slang

Install slang by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Now, as the unprivileged user:

make elf

And finally, as the root user:

make install-elf &&
chmod 755 /usr/lib/libslang.so.1.4.9

Command Explanations

make elf and make install-elf: These commands create and install the dynamic shared library version of slang.

Configuring Slang

Configuration Information

As with most libraries, there is no configuration to do, save that the library directory i.e., /opt/lib or /usr/local/lib should appear in /etc/ld.so.conf so that ldd can find the shared libraries. After checking that this is the case, /sbin/ldconfig should be run while logged in as root.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libslang.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/slang

FAM-2.7.0

Introduction to FAM

The FAM package contains a File Alteration Monitor which is useful for notifying applications of changes to the file system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/gentoo/distfiles/fam-2.7.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://oss.sgi.com/projects/fam/download/stable/fam-2.7.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1bf3ae6c0c58d3201afc97c6a4834e39
Download size: 301 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.26 SBU

Additional Downloads

Dnotify patch (Recommended): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/fam-2.7.0-dnotify-1.patch

FAM Dependencies

Required

portmap-5beta

Installation of FAM

Install FAM by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../fam-2.7.0-dnotify-1.patch &&
chmod -v 755 configure &&
autoreconf -f -i &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

patch -Np1 -i ../fam-2.7.0-dnotify-1.patch: This patch enables FAM to use the Linux kernel dnotify mechanism to inform the calling process of file modifications, rather than polling the file system for modifications.

chmod -v 755 configure: configure is set to read-only and autoreconf will fail if the permissions aren't changed.

autoreconf -f -i: The autotools need rebuilding because the dnotify patch affects configure.ac and Makefile.am.

Configuring FAM

Config Files

/etc/rpc, /etc/fam.conf, /etc/inetd.conf or /etc/xinetd.conf or /etc/xinetd.d/fam

Configuration Information

Configuring the File Alteration Monitor. Perform the following instructions as the root user.

If you use inetd, add the FAM entry to /etc/inetd.conf with the following command:

echo "sgi_fam/1-2 stream  rpc/tcp wait root /usr/sbin/famd fam" \
    >> /etc/inetd.conf

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the FAM file as /etc/xinetd.d/sgi_fam (be sure the nogroup group exists):

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/sgi_fam << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/sgi_fam

# description: FAM - file alteration monitor
    service sgi_fam
    {
        type            = RPC UNLISTED
        socket_type     = stream
        user            = root
        group           = nogroup
        server          = /usr/sbin/famd
        wait            = yes
        protocol        = tcp
        rpc_version     = 2
        rpc_number      = 391002
    }

# End /etc/xinetd.d/sgi_fam
EOF

If you do not have an inetd daemon installed and have no wish to install one, you can also start famd during system startup by installing the /etc/rc.d/init.d/fam init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-fam

Installed Program: famd

Installed Library: libfam.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

famd	is the file alteration monitor daemon.
`libfam.[so,a]`	contains functions that support the file allocation monitor.

Libxml-1.8.17

Introduction to Libxml

The libxml package contains the libxml libraries. These are useful for parsing XML files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libxml/1.8/libxml-1.8.17.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libxml/1.8/libxml-1.8.17.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c7d1b9b1cbfcfbbc56c92f424c37d32c
Download size: 743 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Installation of Libxml

Install libxml by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: xml-config

Installed Library: libxml.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gnome-xml and /usr/share/gnome-xml

Short Descriptions

libxml.[so,a]

provides the functions for programs to parse files that use the XML format.

Libxml2-2.6.20

Introduction to Libxml2

The libxml2 package contains XML libraries. These are useful for parsing XML files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libxml2/2.6/libxml2-2.6.20.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libxml2/2.6/libxml2-2.6.20.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 342f722d1770071be19253f229fef677
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 79.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.50 SBU (additional 0.65 SBU to run the testsuite)

Libxml2 Dependencies

Optional

Python-2.4.1

Installation of Libxml2

Install libxml2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --with-history &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-history: Enables readline support.

Installed Programs: xml2-config, xmlcatalog, and xmllint

Installed Libraries: libxml2.[so,a] and optionally, the libxml2mod.[so,a] Python module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libxml2, /usr/share/doc/libxml2-2.6.20, and /usr/share/doc/libxml2-python-2.6.20

Short Descriptions

xml2-config	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use `libxml2`.
xmlcatalog	is used to monitor and manipulate XML and SGML catalogs.
xmllint	parses XML files and outputs reports (based upon options) to detect errors in XML coding.
`libxml2.[so,a]`	libraries provide the functions for programs to parse files that use the XML format.

Libxslt-1.1.14

Introduction to Libxslt

The libxslt package contains XSLT libraries. These are useful for extending libxml2 libraries to support XSLT files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libxslt/1.1/libxslt-1.1.14.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://xmlsoft.org/libxslt-1.1.14.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: db71660bb7d01ccd4e6be990af8d813b
Download size: 2.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB
Estimated build time: 0.32 SBU

Libxslt Dependencies

Required

libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

Python-2.4.1 and libgcrypt

Installation of Libxslt

Install libxslt by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: xslt-config and xsltproc

Installed Libraries: libexslt.[so,a], libxslt.[so,a] and optionally, libxsltmod.[so,a] Python modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libxslt, /usr/share/doc/libxslt-1.1.14, and /usr/share/doc/libxslt-python-1.1.14

Short Descriptions

xslt-config	is used to find out the pre-processor, linking and compiling flags necessary to use the libxslt libraries in 3rd-party programs.
xsltproc	is used to apply XSLT stylesheets to XML documents.
`libxslt.[so,a]`	provides extensions to the `libxml2` libraries to parse files that use the XSLT format.
`libexslt.[so,a]`	is used to provide extensions to XSLT functions.

GMP-4.1.4

Introduction to GMP

The GMP package contains math libraries. These have useful functions for arbitrary precision arithmetic.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gmp/gmp-4.1.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gmp/gmp-4.1.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0aa7d3b3f5b5ec5951e7dddd6f65e891
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 60.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.88 SBU (additional 0.81 SBU to run the testsuite)

Installation of GMP

Install GMP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-cxx --enable-mpbsd &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check. Owing to various reports of mis-compilations, the maintainer strongly recommends running the test-suite and report any failures. The libraries should not be used in a production environment if there are problems running make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-cxx: This parameter enables C++ support by building the libgmpxx libraries.

--enable-mpbsd: This parameter enables building the Berkeley MP compatibility (libmp) libraries.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgmp.[so,a], libgmpxx.[so,a] and libmp.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libgmp.[so,a]

contains functions to operate on signed integers, rational numbers, and floating point numbers.

GDBM-1.8.3

Introduction to GDBM

The GDBM package contains the GNU Database Manager. This is a disk file format database which stores key/data-pairs in single files. The actual data of any record being stored is indexed by a unique key, which can be retrieved in less time than if it was stored in a text file.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gdbm/gdbm-1.8.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gdbm/gdbm-1.8.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1d1b1d5c0245b1c00aff92da751e9aa1
Download size: 223 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.75 MB
Estimated build time: 0.08 SBU

Installation of GDBM

Install GDBM by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make BINOWN=root BINGRP=root install

In addition, you may need to install the DBM and NDBM compatibility headers and library since some applications look for these older dbm routines.

make BINOWN=root BINGRP=root install-compat

Command Explanations

make BINOWN=root BINGRP=root install: This command overrides the BINOWN and BINGRP variables in the Makefile changing ownership of the installed files to root instead of the bin user.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgdbm.[so,a] and libgdbm_compat.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libgdbm.[so,a]

contains functions to manipulate a hashed database.

GLib-1.2.10

Introduction to GLib

The glib package contains a low-level core library. This is useful for providing data structure handling for C, portability wrappers and interfaces for such runtime functionality as an event loop, threads, dynamic loading, and an object system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/graphics/gimp/gtk/v1.2/glib-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v1.2/glib-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6fe30dad87c77b91b632def29dd69ef9
Download size: 412 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.19 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/glib-1.2.10-gcc34-1.patch

Installation of GLib

Install glib by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../glib-1.2.10-gcc34-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 755 /usr/lib/libgmodule-1.2.so.0.0.10

Installed Programs: glib-config

Installed Libraries: libglib.[so,a], libgmodule.[so,a] and libgthread.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/glib-1.2 and /usr/lib/glib

Short Descriptions

glib-config	is a tool that is used by configure scripts to determine the compiler and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use GLib.
`libglib.[so,a]`	libraries contain a low-level core library for the GIMP Toolkit.

GLib-2.6.4

Introduction to GLib

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/graphics/gimp/gtk/v2.6/glib-2.6.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v2.6/glib-2.6.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: af7eeb8aae764ff763418471ed6eb93d
Download size: 2.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 40.9 MB
Estimated build time: 2.82 SBU (includes rebuilding documentation)

Glib Dependencies

Required

pkg-config-0.19

Optional

Installation of GLib

Install glib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch will rebuild the API documentation during the make command.

Installed Programs: glib-genmarshal, glib-gettextize, glib-mkenums, and gobject-query

Installed Libraries: libglib-2.0.so, libgobject-2.0.so, libgmodule-2.0.so, and libgthread-2.0.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/glib-2.0, /usr/lib/glib-2.0, /usr/share/glib-2.0, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/glib, and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gobject

Short Descriptions

glib-genmarshal	is a C code marshaller generation utility for GLib closures.
glib-gettextize	is a variant of the gettext internationalization utility.
glib-mkenums	is a C language enum description generation utility.
gobject-query	is a small utility that draws a tree of types.
GLib libraries	contain a low-level core library for the GIMP Toolkit.

LibIDL-0.8.5

Introduction to LibIDL

The libIDL package contains libraries for Interface Definition Language files. This is a specification for defining portable interfaces.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libIDL/0.8/libIDL-0.8.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libIDL/0.8/libIDL-0.8.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c63f6513dc7789d0575bea02d62d58d7
Download size: 332 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.13 SBU

LibIDL Dependencies

Required

Installation of LibIDL

Install libIDL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: libIDL-config-2

Installed Library: libIDL-2.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libIDL-2.0/libIDL

Short Descriptions

libIDL-config-2	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use `libIDL-2`.
`libIDL-2.[so,a]`	libraries provide the functions to create and maintain trees of CORBA Interface Definition Language (IDL) files.

Libcroco-0.6.0

Introduction to Libcroco

The libcroco package contains libcroco libraries. This is useful for providing a CSS API.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libcroco/0.6/libcroco-0.6.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libcroco/0.6/libcroco-0.6.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 78fb2bf78d469df83b1fc94ce196c1c4
Download size: 360 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.22 SBU

Libcroco Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.6.4 and libxml2-2.6.20

Installation of Libcroco

Install libcroco by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: csslint-0.6

Installed Library: libcroco.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libcroco-0.6.0

Libgsf-1.12.0

Introduction to Libgsf

The libgsf package contains libgsf libraries. These are useful for providing an extensible input/output abstraction layer for structured file formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgsf/1.12/libgsf-1.12.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgsf/1.12/libgsf-1.12.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 34c4672edd2e4e814fb82d7b94d71ffd
Download size: 428 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Libgsf Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.6.4 and libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1 (required for GNOME-2 support) and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Libgsf

Install libgsf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgsf-1.[so,a] and optionally, libgsf-gnome-1.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libgsf-1 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gsf

Libglade-2.5.1

Introduction to Libglade

The libglade package contains libglade libraries. These are useful for loading Glade interface files in a program at runtime.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libglade/2.5/libglade-2.5.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libglade/2.5/libglade-2.5.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e4734a59f1f2308d7714dc0ebf8163f1
Download size: 317 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.15 SBU

Libglade Dependencies

Required

libxml2-2.6.20 and GTK+-2.6.7

Optional

Python-2.4.1 and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Libglade

Install libglade by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch can be added to rebuild the HTML documentation.

Installed Program: libglade-convert (requires python and pyexpat.so)

Installed Library: libglade-2.0.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libglade-2.0, /usr/share/xml/libglade, and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libglade

Short Descriptions

libglade-convert	is used to convert old Glade interface files to Glade-2.0 standards.
`libglade-2.0.[so,a]`	contain the functions necessary to load Glade interface files.

Expat-1.95.8

Introduction to Expat

The expat package contains a stream oriented C library for parsing XML.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/expat/expat-1.95.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: aff487543845a82fe262e6e2922b4c8e
Download size: 314 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.08 SBU

Expat Dependencies

Optional

Check (for running the test suite)

Installation of Expat

Install expat by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: xmlwf

Installed Library: libexpat.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

xmlwf	is a non-validating utility to check whether or not XML documents are well formed.
`libexpat.[so,a]`	contains API functions for parsing XML.

Libesmtp-1.0.3r1

Introduction to Libesmtp

The libesmtp package contains the libesmtp libraries which are used by some programs to manage email submission to a mail transport layer.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.stafford.uklinux.net/libesmtp/libesmtp-1.0.3r1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: c07aa79293aa36298626fe5e68d6bfba
Download size: 270 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.16 SBU

Libesmtp Dependencies

Optional

Installation of Libesmtp

Install libesmtp by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: libesmtp-config

Installed Libraries: libesmtp.[so,a] and libesmtp SASL plugins

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/esmtp-plugins

Short Descriptions

libesmtp-config	displays version information and the options used to compile libesmtp.
`libesmtp.[so,a]`	is used to manage submission of electronic mail to a Mail Transport Agent.
`libesmtp SASL plugins`	are used to integrate libesmtp with SASL authentication.

Aspell-0.60.3

Introduction to Aspell

The Aspell package contains an interactive spell checking program and the Aspell libraries. Aspell can either be used as a library or as an independent spell checker.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/aspell/aspell-0.60.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/aspell/aspell-0.60.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ca44ac2fcfdc7213e03d3b5610ce141a
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 26.0 MB (Additional 8 MB for en dict)
Estimated build time: 0.62 SBU

Additional Downloads

You'll need to download at least one dictionary. The link below will take you to a page containing links to dictionaries in many languages.

Aspell dictionaries: ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/aspell/dict

Aspell Dependencies

Required

which-2.16

Installation of Aspell

Install Aspell by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you do not plan to install Ispell, then copy the wrapper script ispell:

install -v -m 755 scripts/ispell /usr/bin/

If you do not plan to install Spell, then copy the wrapper script spell:

install -v -m 755 scripts/spell /usr/bin/

Configuring Aspell

Configuration Information

After Aspell is installed, you must set up at least one dictionary. Install one or more dictionaries by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: aspell, aspell-import, precat, preunzip, prezip, prezip-bin, pspell-config, run-with-aspell, word-list-compress and optionally, ispell and spell

Installed Libraries: libaspell.so and libpspell.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/pspell and /usr/lib/aspell-0.60

Short Descriptions

aspell	is a utility that can function as an ispell -a replacement, as an independent spell checker, as a test utility to test out Aspell features, and as a utility for managing dictionaries.
ispell	is a wrapper around aspell to invoke it in ispell compatible mode.
spell	is a wrapper around aspell to invoke it in spell compatible mode.
aspell-import	imports old personal dictionaries into Aspell.
precat	decompresses a prezipped file to stdout.
preunzip	decompresses a prezipped file.
prezip	is a prefix delta compressor, used to compress sorted word lists or other similar text files.
prezip-bin	is called by the various wrapper scripts to perform the actual compressing and decompressing.
pspell-config	displays information about the `libpspell` installation, mostly for use in build scripts.
run-with-aspell	is a script to help use Aspell as an ispell replacement.
word-list-compress	compresses or decompresses sorted word lists for use with the Aspell spell checker.
`libaspell.so`	contains spell checking API functions.
`libpspell.so`	is an interface to the `libaspell` library. All the spell checking functionality is now in `libaspell` but this library is included for backward compatibility.

Ispell-3.2.06.epa7

Introduction to Ispell

The ispell package contains a spell checker that can handle international languages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://membled.com/work/patches/ispell/ispell-3.2.06.epa7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: d5d867e62776524f60b3b5dcc3d8014f
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 11 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of Ispell

The first step is to create local.h.

sed -e "s:/usr/local:/usr:g" -e "s:/lib:/share/ispell:" \
    local.h.linux > local.h

By default, ispell only installs an American English dictionary. To set up other languages, check out the config.X file for the #define entry to append to local.h.

Build ispell using the following commands:

make

To test the build, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -e "s:/usr/local:/usr:g" -e "s:/lib:/share/ispell:" local.h.linux > local.h: This command corrects the installation directories of the package.

Installed Program: ispell

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/ispell

Short Descriptions

ispell

is used for spell checking.

SLIB-3a1

Introduction to SLIB

The SLIB package is a portable library for the programming language Scheme. It provides a platform independent framework for using “packages” of Scheme procedures and syntax. SLIB contains useful packages for all Scheme implementations, including Guile. Its catalog can be transparently extended to accommodate packages specific to a site, implementation, user or directory.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://swiss.csail.mit.edu/ftpdir/scm/OLD/slib3a1.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: dc1aa0ffb9e2414223ceefc315f6baf9
Download size: 705 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/slib-3a1-automate_install-1.patch

SLIB Dependencies

Required

Guile-1.6.7

Installation of SLIB

Install SLIB by issuing the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../slib-3a1-automate_install-1.patch &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr/ install &&
make prefix=/usr/ catalogs &&
make prefix=/usr/ installinfo

Command Explanations

make prefix=/usr/ catalogs: This command builds the SLIB Scheme implementation catalog.

make prefix=/usr/ installinfo: This commands installs the info documentation.

Installed Program: slib

Installed Libraries: a Scheme library system.

Installed Directory: /usr/share/guile/slib

Short Descriptions

slib

is a shell script used to initialize SLIB in a named Scheme implementation. It can also be used to initialize an SLIB session using a given executable.

G-Wrap-1.3.4

Introduction to G-Wrap

The G-Wrap package contains tools for exporting C libraries into Scheme interpreters.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.gnucash.org/pub/g-wrap/source/g-wrap-1.3.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: bf29b8b563cc27d9f7fd90a6243653aa
Download size: 403 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

G-Wrap Dependencies

Required

Guile-1.6.7

Optional

GLib-1.2.10, GTK+-1.2.10 and guile-gtk

Installation of G-Wrap

Install G-Wrap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: g-wrap-config

Installed Libraries: /usr/lib/libgw-*.[so,a] and /usr/lib/libgwrap-*.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/g-wrap and /usr/share/guile/g-wrap

Short Descriptions

g-wrap-config

is a tool to generate CFLAGS for linking C code to the Scheme runtime libraries.

LZO-2.01

Introduction to LZO

LZO is a data compression library which is suitable for data decompression and compression in real-time. This means it favors speed over compression ratio.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.oberhumer.com/opensource/lzo/download/lzo-2.01.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uni-koeln.de/util/arc/lzo-2.01.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0068c3f5a6325323dcdad3a4c52ed51e
Download size: 591 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.28 SBU

LZO Dependencies

Optional

NASM-0.98.39 and Dmalloc

Installation of LZO

Install LZO by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/lzo-2.01 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/lzo-2.01

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: liblzo2.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/lzo-2.01

Short Descriptions

liblzo2.[so,a]

is a data compression and decompression library.

Libusb-0.1.10a

Introduction to Libusb

The libusb package contains a library used by some applications for USB device access.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/libusb/libusb-0.1.10a.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: c6062b29acd2cef414bcc34e0decbdd1
Download size: 375 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.4 MB (additional 1.3 MB to install documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Libusb Dependencies

Optional (Required to Build the HTML User Manual)

OpenJade-1.3.2 and DocBOOK SGML DTD-4.2

Optional (Required to Build the API Documentation)

Doxygen-1.4.3 and GraphViz

Installation of Libusb

Install libusb by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --disable-build-docs &&
make

If you wish to build the API documentation, issue the following command:

make apidox

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the HTML user manual, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.10a/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/html/* /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.10a/html

If you built the API documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.10a/apidocs &&
install -v -m644 apidocs/html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.10a/apidocs

Command Explanations

--disable-build-docs: This switch avoids building the HTML user manual. If you wish to build the user manual, you may need to remove the OpenSP catalog definitions from the system SGML catalogs. Use the following command before building the package to accomplish this:

sed -i.orig \
    -e "/CATALOG \/etc\/sgml\/OpenSP-1.5.1.cat/d" \
    /etc/sgml/catalog \
    /etc/sgml/sgml-docbook.cat

Configuring Libusb

libusb requires the usbfs kernel filesystem to be mounted on /proc/bus/usb. Applications require the files in this directory to be accessible to the user, sometimes for both reading and writing. To restrict access to USB devices, ensure the usb group exits on your system. If necessary, create the usb group using the following command:

groupadd -g 14 usb

Ensure that you have compiled the “USB device filesystem” directly into the kernel or compiled it as a module (listing the resulting “usbcore” module in the /etc/sysconfig/modules file). You should also have an entry similar to the line below in your /etc/fstab file:

usbfs  /proc/bus/usb  usbfs  devgid=14,devmode=0660  0  0

Installed Program: usb-config

Installed Libraries: libusb.[so,a] and libusbpp.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libusb-0.1.10a

Short Descriptions

usb-config	is a script that provides the right compiler and linker flags for programs using `libusb`.
`libusb.[so,a]`	libraries contain C functions for accessing USB hardware.

Chapter 9. Graphics and Font Libraries

Depending on what your system will be used for, you may or may not require the graphics and font libraries. Most desktop machines will want them for use with graphical applications. Most servers on the other hand, will not require them.

Libjpeg-6b

Introduction to Libjpeg

The libjpeg package contains libraries that allow compression of image files based on the Joint Photographic Experts Group standard. It is a "lossy" compression algorithm.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.photopost.com/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uu.net/graphics/jpeg/jpegsrc.v6b.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: dbd5f3b47ed13132f04c685d608a7547
Download size: 599 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.15 SBU

Installation of Libjpeg

Install libjpeg by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-static --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-static --enable-shared: These switches tell libjpeg to build both shared and static libraries.

Configuring Libjpeg

Configuration Information

Installed Programs: cjpeg, djpeg, jpegtran, rdjpgcom, and wrjpgcom

Installed Library: libjpeg.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

cjpeg	compresses image files to produce a JPEG/JFIF file on the standard output. Currently supported input file formats are: PPM (PBMPLUS color format), PGM (PBMPLUS gray-scale format), BMP, and Targa.
djpeg	decompresses image files from JPEG/JFIF format to either PPM (PBMPLUS color format), PGM (PBMPLUS gray-scale format), BMP, or Targa format.
jpegtran	is used for lossless transformation of JPEG files.
rdjpgcom	displays text comments from within a JPEG file.
wrjpgcom	inserts text comments into a JPEG file.
`libjpeg.[so,a]`	library is used by many programs for reading and writing JPEG format files.

Libpng-1.2.8

Introduction to Libpng

The libpng package contains libraries used by other programs for reading and writing PNG files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/libpng/libpng-1.2.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 00cea4539bea4bd34cbf8b82ff9589cd
Download size: 376 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.75 MB
Estimated build time: 0.13 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch to explicitly link libpng against system libraries: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/libpng-1.2.8-link_to_proper_libs-1.patch

Installation of Libpng

Install libpng by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../libpng-1.2.8-link_to_proper_libs-1.patch &&
make prefix=/usr ZLIBINC= \
    ZLIBLIB= -f scripts/makefile.linux

To test the results, issue: make -f scripts/makefile.linux test.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr install -f scripts/makefile.linux

Command Explanations

ZLIBINC=; ZLIBLIB=: This forces libpng to look for the Zlib includes and libraries in the default locations (/usr/include and /usr/lib respectively).

-f scripts/makefile.linux: This points make at the Linux version of the Makefile as libpng doesn't use an Autoconf routine. Instead, it has various Makefiles for different platforms.

Configuring Libpng

Configuration Information

Installed Programs: libpng-config and libpng12-config

Installed Libraries: libpng.[so,a] and libpng12.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libpng12

Short Descriptions

libpng-config	is a symlink to libpng12-config.
libpng12-config	provides configuration information for libpng.
`libpng.[so,a] and libpng12.[so,a]`	are a collection of routines used to create and manipulate PNG format graphics files. The PNG format was designed as a replacement for GIF and, to a lesser extent, TIFF, with many improvements and extensions and lack of patent problems.

Libtiff-3.7.3

Introduction to Libtiff

The libtiff package contains the TIFF libraries and associated utilities. The libraries are used by many programs for reading and writing TIFF files and the utilities are useful for general work with TIFF files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.remotesensing.org/libtiff/tiff-3.7.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8a4511793f4b20b91ddee0e53bc08dea
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 17.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

Libtiff Dependencies

Optional

libjpeg-6b, X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2) and freeglut-2.4.0

Installation of Libtiff

Install libtiff by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: bmp2tiff, fax2ps, fax2tiff, gif2tiff, pal2rgb, ppm2tiff, ras2tiff, raw2tiff, rgb2ycbcr, thumbnail, tiff2bw, tiff2pdf, tiff2ps, tiff2rgba, tiffcmp, tiffcp, tiffdither, tiffdump, tiffgt, tiffinfo, tiffmedian, tiffset, and tiffsplit

Installed Libraries: libtiff.[so,a] and libtiffxx.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/tiff-3.7.3

Short Descriptions

bmp2tiff	converts a Microsoft Windows Device Independent Bitmap image file to a TIFF image.
fax2ps	converts a TIFF facsimile to compressed PostScript file.
fax2tiff	creates a TIFF Class F fax file from raw fax data.
gif2tiff	creates a TIFF file from a GIF87 format image file.
pal2rgb	converts a palette color TIFF image to a full color image.
ppm2tiff	creates a TIFF file from a PPM image file.
ras2tiff	creates a TIFF file from a Sun rasterfile.
raw2tiff	converts a raw byte sequence into TIFF.
rgb2ycbcr	converts non-YCbCr TIFF images to YCbCr TIFF images.
thumbnail	creates a TIFF file with thumbnail images.
tiff2bw	converts a color TIFF image to grayscale.
tiff2pdf	converts a TIFF image to a PDF document.
tiff2ps	converts a TIFF image to a PostScript file.
tiff2rgba	converts a wide variety of TIFF images into an RGBA TIFF image.
tiffcmp	compares two TIFF files.
tiffcp	copies (and possibly converts) a TIFF file.
tiffdither	converts a grayscale image to bilevel using dithering.
tiffdump	prints verbatim information about TIFF files.
tiffgt	displays an image stored in a TIFF file in an X window.
tiffinfo	prints information about TIFF files.
tiffmedian	applies the median cut algorithm to data in a TIFF file.
tiffset	sets the value of a TIFF header to a specified value.
tiffsplit	splits a multi-image TIFF into single-image TIFF files.
`libtiff.[so,a]`	contains the API functions used by the libtiff programs as well as other programs to read and write TIFF files.
`libtiffxx.[so,a]`	contains the C++ API functions used by programs to read and write TIFF files.

Libungif-4.1.3

Introduction to Libungif

The libungif package contains libraries for reading all GIFs and writing non-compressed ones as well as programs for converting and working with GIF files. The libraries are useful for any graphics program wishing to deal with GIF files while the programs are useful for conversion purposes as well as cleaning up images.

The reason libungif only writes non-compressed GIFs is due to a legal issue with LZW compression (which Unisys claimed a patent on). Reading GIFs is not a problem as the decompression routines do not seem to be limited in this way. Note that this has in the past been disputed. The best way to avoid this whole mess is to simply use libungif for looking at GIF images on the web, while in any pages which you design, use the open source PNG format instead (which uses, not surprisingly, the libpng library) which has no patent issues at all.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/libungif/libungif-4.1.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 8c198831cc0495596c78134b8849e9ad
Download size: 430 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.16 SBU

Libungif Dependencies

Optional

Installation of Libungif

Install libungif by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libungif-4.1.3/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{png,html} \
    /usr/share/doc/libungif-4.1.3/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/libungif-4.1.3

Installed Programs: gif2epsn, gif2ps, gif2rgb, gif2x11, gifasm, gifbg, gifburst, gifclip, gifclrmp, gifcolor, gifcomb, gifcompose, giffiltr, giffix, gifflip, gifhisto, gifinfo, gifinter, gifinto, gifovly, gifpos, gifrotat, gifrsize, gifspnge, giftext, gifwedge, icon2gif, raw2gif, rgb2gif, and text2gif

Installed Library: libungif.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libungif-4.1.3

Short Descriptions

gif2epsn	dumps images saved as GIF files on Epson type printers.
gif2ps	print GIF files on laser printers supporting PostScript.
gif2rgb	convert images saved as GIF to 24-bit RGB image(s).
gif2x11	display images saved as GIF files under X Window System.
gifasm	assemble multiple GIFs into one, or burst a multiple-image GIF.
gifbg	generate a single-color test pattern GIF.
gifburst	burst a GIF image into subrectangles.
gifclip	clip or crop a GIF image.
gifclrmp	modify GIF image colormaps.
gifcolor	generate color test patterns.
gifcomb	combine 2 GIF images of exactly the same size into one.
gifcompose	use (un)giflib tools to compose images.
giffiltr	template code for filtering a GIF sequentially.
giffix	clumsily attempts to fix truncated GIF images.
gifflip	flip GIF image along X or Y axis or rotate by 90 degrees.
gifhisto	generate color-frequency histogram from a GIF.
gifinfo	gives information on a GIF file.
gifinter	convert between interlaced and non-interlaced images.
gifinto	end-of-pipe fitting for GIF-processing pipelines.
gifo-libungifvly	generate one composite GIF from a multiple-image GIF.
gifpos	change a GIF's screen size or recondition it.
gifrotat	rotate a GIF through any desired angle.
gifrsize	resize a GIF by deletion or duplication of bits.
gifspnge	template code for filtering a GIF with in-core operations.
giftext	print (text only) general information about a GIF.
gifwedge	create a test GIF image resembling a color monitor test pattern.
icon2gif	converter/deconverter to/from an editable text format.
raw2gif	convert raw 8-bit image data into GIF files.
rgb2gif	convert 24 bit images to a GIF image using color quantization.
text2gif	generate GIF images out of regular text in 8x8 font.

Giflib-4.1.3

Introduction to Giflib

The giflib package contains libraries for reading and writing GIFs as well as programs for converting and working with GIF files. The libraries are useful for any graphics program wishing to deal with GIF files while the programs are useful for conversion purposes as well as cleaning up images.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/libungif/giflib-4.1.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 22efc9599ccf91d288374dcf0679abf1
Download size: 440 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.16 SBU

Giflib Dependencies

Optional

Installation of Giflib

Install giflib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.3/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{png,html} \
    /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.3/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.3

Installed Library: libgif.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/giflib-4.1.3

Short Descriptions

gif2epsn	dumps images saved as GIF files on Epson type printers.
gif2ps	prints GIF files on laser printers supporting PostScript.
gif2rgb	converts images saved as GIF to 24-bit RGB images.
gif2x11	displays images saved as GIF files under X Window System.
gifasm	assembles multiple GIFs into one, or burst a multiple-image GIF.
gifbg	generates a single-color test pattern GIF.
gifburst	bursts a GIF image into subrectangles.
gifclip	clips or crops a GIF image.
gifclrmp	modifies GIF image colormaps.
gifcolor	generates color test patterns.
gifcomb	combines two GIF images of exactly the same size into one.
gifcompose	uses giflib tools to compose images.
giffiltr	is a template for filtering a GIF sequentially.
giffix	clumsily attempts to fix truncated GIF images.
gifflip	flips a GIF image along the X or Y axis or rotates an image by 90 degrees.
gifhisto	generate a color-frequency histogram from a GIF.
gifinfo	gives information about a GIF file.
gifinter	converts between interlaced and non-interlaced images.
gifinto	is an end-of-pipe fitting for GIF-processing pipelines.
gifovly	generates one composite GIF from a multiple-image GIF.
gifpos	changes a GIF's screen size or reconditions it.
gifrotat	rotates a GIF through any desired angle.
gifrsize	resizes a GIF by deletion or duplication of bits.
gifspnge	is a template for filtering a GIF with in-core operations.
giftext	prints (text only) general information about a GIF file.
gifwedge	creates a test GIF image resembling a color monitor test pattern.
icon2gif	is a converter/deconverter to/from an editable text format.
raw2gif	converts raw 8-bit image data into GIF files.
rgb2gif	converts 24 bit images to a GIF image using color quantization.
text2gif	generates GIF images out of regular text in 8x8 font.
`libgif.[so,a]`	contains API functions required by the giflib programs and any other programs needing library functionality to read, write and manipulate GIF images.

Lcms-1.14

Introduction to Lcms

The lcms library is used by other programs to provide color management facilities.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.littlecms.com/lcms-1.14.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 5a803460aeb10e762d97e11a37462a69
Download size: 654 KB
Estimated disk space required: 18.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.34 SBU (includes building the Python module)

Additional Downloads

Required patch (if building the Python module): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/lcms-1.14-gcc343-1.patch

Lcms Dependencies

Optional

libtiff-3.7.3, libjpeg-6b and Python-2.4.1 (with SWIG)

Installation of Lcms

Install lcms by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../lcms-1.14-gcc343-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/lcms-1.14 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/lcms-1.14

Installed Programs: icc2ps, icclink, icctrans, wtpt and optionally, tifficc and jpegicc

Installed Libraries: liblcms.[so,a] and the optional _lcms.so Python module

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/lcms-1.14

Short Descriptions

icc2ps	generates PostScript CRD or CSA from ICC profiles.
icclink	links two or more profiles into a single device link profile.
icctrans	is a color space conversion calculator.
wtpt	shows media white of profiles, identifying black body locus.
tifficc	is an ICC profile applier for TIFF files.
jpegicc	is an ICC profile applier for JPEG files.
`liblcms.[so,a]`	is used by the lcms programs as well as other programs to provide color management facilities.

Libmng-1.0.9

Introduction to Libmng

The libmng libraries are used by programs wanting to read and write Multiple-image Network Graphics (MNG) files which are the animation equivalents to PNG files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/libmng/libmng-1.0.9.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: ff1205ef70855a75c098ea09690413c6
Download size: 554 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.11 SBU

Libmng Dependencies

Required

libjpeg-6b and lcms-1.14

Installation of Libmng

Install libmng by running the following commands:

cp makefiles/makefile.linux Makefile &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr install &&
install -v -m644 doc/man/*.3 /usr/share/man/man3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/man/*.5 /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libmng-1.0.9 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{png,txt} /usr/share/doc/libmng-1.0.9

Command Explanations

cp makefiles/makefile.linux Makefile: There are no autotools shipped with this package. The Linux Makefile is copied to the root of the source tree, facilitating the installation.

install ...: The documentation files are not installed by the installation procedure, so they are copied manually.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libmng.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libmng-1.0.9

Short Descriptions

libmng.[so,a]

provides functions for programs wishing to read and write MNG files which are animation files without the patent problems associated with certain other formats.

FreeType-2.1.10

Introduction to FreeType2

The FreeType2 package contains a library to allow applications to properly render TrueType fonts.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/freetype/freetype-2.1.10.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: a4012e7d1f6400df44a16743b11b8423
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Installation of FreeType2

Install FreeType2 by running the following commands:

sed -i -r 's:.*(#.*BYTE.*) .*:\1:' \
     include/freetype/config/ftoption.h &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -r 's:.*(#.*BYTE.*) .*:\1:' include/freetype/config/ftoption.h: Uncomments configuration options.

Installed Program: freetype-config

Installed Library: libfreetype.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/freetype2

Short Descriptions

freetype-config	is used to get FreeType compilation and linking information.
`libfreetype.[so,a]`	contains functions to add TrueType font capabilities to the X Window system.

Fontconfig-2.3.2

Introduction to Fontconfig

The Fontconfig package is a library for configuring and customizing font access.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fontconfig.org/release/fontconfig-2.3.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 7354f9f125ea78a8f2851cb9c31d4866
Download size: 942 KB
Estimated disk space required: 13.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Note

The numbering system of Fontconfig is unusual. The beta versions of the package are numbered with a 9x in the last portion of the release number. This means that 2.3.90 is a beta release and the most current release is of the form 2.3.2

Fontconfig Dependencies

Required

FreeType-2.1.10 and expat-1.95.8

Optional

DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Note

If you have DocBook-utils installed and you remove the --disable-docs parameter from the configure command below, you must have SGMLSpm and JadeTeX-3.13 installed also, or the Fontconfig build will fail.

Installation of Fontconfig

Install Fontconfig by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc --disable-docs &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/fontconfig/fontconfig-devel &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.3 /usr/share/man/man3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.5 /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.{html,pdf,txt} /usr/share/doc/fontconfig &&
install -v -m644 doc/fontconfig-devel/* \
    /usr/share/doc/fontconfig/fontconfig-devel

Command Explanations

--disable-docs: This switch avoids building the documentation (the release tarball includes pre-generated documentation).

Configuring Fontconfig

Config Files

/etc/fonts/* and /etc/fonts/conf.d/*

Configuration Information

The configuration file for Fontconfig is /etc/fonts/fonts.conf. Generally you do not want to edit this file. To put a new font directory in the configuration, create (or update) the /etc/fonts/local.conf file with your local information. The default location of fonts in Fontconfig is:

/usr/share/fonts
~/.fonts

Note

X also includes an internal (and older) version of Fontconfig and unless it is explicitly disabled when building Xorg or XFree86, the internal version is created leaving two slightly incompatible libraries on your system. It is recommended that you only install one version.

Installed Programs: fc-cache, fc-list, and fc-match

Installed Library: libfontconfig.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/fonts and /usr/include/fontconfig

Short Descriptions

fc-cache	is used to create font information caches.
fc-list	is used to create font lists.
fc-match	is used to match available fonts, or find fonts that match a given pattern.
`libfontconfig.[so,a]`	contains functions used by the Fontconfig programs and also by other programs to configure or customize font access.

Libart_lgpl-2.3.17

Introduction to Libart_lgpl

The libart_lgpl package contains the libart libraries. These are useful for high-performance 2D graphics.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libart_lgpl/2.3/libart_lgpl-2.3.17.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libart_lgpl/2.3/libart_lgpl-2.3.17.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dfca42529393c8a8f59dc4dc10675a46
Download size: 289 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.14 SBU

Installation of Libart_lgpl

Install libart_lgpl by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: libart2-config

Installed Library: libart_lgpl_2.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libart-2.0

Short Descriptions

libart_lgpl_2.[so,a]

is used as the anti-aliased render engine for libgnomecanvas and as a graphics support library for many other packages.

Librsvg-2.9.5

Introduction to Librsvg

The librsvg package contains librsvg libraries and tools used to manipulate, convert and view Scalable Vector Graphic (SVG) images.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/librsvg/2.9/librsvg-2.9.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/librsvg/2.9/librsvg-2.9.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 44799d75e940eb4150acdae4f63cbe2a
Download size: 392 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Librsvg Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7, libxml2-2.6.20, libart_lgpl-2.3.17 and popt-1.7-5

Optional

libcroco-0.6.0, libgsf-1.12.0, GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1, libgnomeprintui-2.10.2, Mozilla-1.7.8, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Librsvg

Install librsvg by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-gtk-doc: This option prevents the rebuilding of documentation during the make command.

Installed Programs: rsvg and rsvg-view

Installed Libraries: librsvg-2.[so,a], GTK+ modules and Mozilla plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/include/librsvg-2 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/rsvg

Short Descriptions

rsvg	is used to covert SVG images into PNG, JPEG and ICO raster images.
rsvg-view	is used to view an SVG file in an X window.
`librsvg-2.[so,a]`	libraries provide the functions to render Scalable Vector Graphics.

Imlib-1.9.15

Introduction to Imlib

The Imlib package contains image libraries. These are useful for loading, rendering and dithering a wide variety of image data formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/imlib/1.9/imlib-1.9.15.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/imlib/1.9/imlib-1.9.15.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7db987e6c52e4daf70d7d0f471238eae
Download size: 668 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.43 SBU

Imlib Dependencies

Required

GTK+-1.2.10, and libungif-4.1.3 or giflib-4.1.3

Installation of Imlib

Install Imlib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/imlib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/imlib-1.9.15 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{index.html,*.gif} /usr/share/doc/imlib-1.9.15

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/imlib: This installs and combines the configuration files into /etc/imlib instead of /usr/etc.

Configuring Imlib

Config Files

/etc/imlib/imrc

Installed Programs: imlib-config and imlib_config

Installed Libraries: libgdk_imlib.[so,a], libimlib-*.[so,a], and libImlib.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/imlib and /usr/share/doc/imlib-1.9.15

Short Descriptions

libimlib-*.[so,a]

provide the functions for programs to display and edit a wide variety of image data formats.

AAlib-1.4rc5

Introduction to AAlib

AAlib is a library to render any graphic into ASCII Art.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/aa-project/aalib-1.4rc5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ratmir.tver.ru/pub/FreeBsd/ports/distfiles/aalib-1.4rc5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9801095c42bba12edebd1902bcf0a990
Download size: 388 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.15 SBU

AAlib Dependencies

Optional

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), slang-1.4.9 and GPM-1.20.1

Installation of AAlib

Install AAlib by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: aafire, aainfo, aalib-config, aasavefont, and aatest

Installed Library: libaa.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

aafire	is little toy of AAlib, rendering an animated fire in ASCII Art.
aainfo	provides information for your current settings related to AAlib.
aalib-config	provides configuration info for AAlib.
aatest	shows the abilities of AAlib in a little test.
`libaa.[so,a]`	is a collection of routines to render any graphical input in portable format to ASCII Art. It can be used through many programs and has a very well documented API, so you can easily put it into your own programs.

Imlib2-1.2.1

Introduction to Imlib2

Imlib2 is a graphics library for fast file loading, saving, rendering and manipulation.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/enlightenment/imlib2-1.2.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: e32970d03d8aee2885782312d0a7f15f
Download size: 879 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Imlib2 Dependencies

Required

FreeType-2.1.10, libpng-1.2.8 and libjpeg-6b

Optional

libtiff-3.7.3, and libungif-4.1.3 or giflib-4.1.3

Installation of Imlib2

Install Imlib2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/imlib2-1.2.1 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{*.gif,index.html} \
    /usr/share/doc/imlib2-1.2.1

Command Explanations

--without-x: Add this parameter if you do not have an X Window System installed.

Installed Programs: imlib2_bumpmap, imlib2_colorspace, imlib2-config, imlib2_conv, imlib2_poly, imlib2_show, imlib2_test, and imlib2_view

Installed Libraries: libImlib2.[so,a] and various filters and image loader modules.

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/imlib2, /usr/share/doc/imlib2-1.2.0, and /usr/share/imlib2

Short Descriptions

libImlib2.[so,a]

provides the functions for programs to deal with various image data formats.

libexif-0.6.12

Introduction to libexif

The libexif package contains a library for parsing, editing, and saving EXIF data. Most digital cameras produce EXIF files, which are JPEG files with extra tags that contain information about the image. All EXIF tags described in EXIF standard 2.1 are supported.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/libexif/libexif-0.6.12.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 9f952ee8db0be7c53a075c34e8286d91
Download size: 378 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Installation of libexif

Install libexif by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libexif.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/libexif

Short Descriptions

libexif.[so,a]

contains functions used for parsing, editing, and saving EXIF data.

FriBidi-0.10.5

Introduction to FriBidi

The FriBidi package is an implementation of the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm (bidi). This is useful for supporting Arabic and Hebrew alphabets in other packages.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fribidi.org/download/fribidi-0.10.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 4f187c7e6bbb9d03bd1cd7ddc12d3069
Download size: 491 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of FriBidi

Install FriBidi by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: fribidi and fribidi-config

Installed Library: libfribidi.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/include/fribidi

Short Descriptions

fribidi	is a command-line interface to the `libfribidi` library and can be used to convert a logical string to visual output.
fribidi-config	is used to acquire information about the installed `libfribidi` library.
`libfribidi.[so,a]`	contains functions used to implement the Unicode Bidirectional Algorithm.

Chapter 10. General Utilities

This chapter contains various utilities that do not fit conveniently into other chapters. Programs include a command line calculator, several utilities for manipulating text and graphics, and a program to interface with a palm-pilot.

Bc-1.06

Introduction to Bc

The bc package contains an arbitrary precision numeric processing language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/bc/bc-1.06.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/bc/bc-1.06.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: d44b5dddebd8a7a7309aea6c36fda117
Download size: 278 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.31 MB
Estimated build time: 0.04 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/bc-1.06-flex_invocation-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/bc-1.06-readline-1.patch

Bc Dependencies

Optional

libedit (as an alternative to readline)

Installation of Bc

Install bc by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../bc-1.06-flex_invocation-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../bc-1.06-readline-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-readline &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: bc and dc

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

bc	is a calculator.
dc	is a reverse-polish calculator.

Rep-gtk-0.18

Introduction to Rep-gtk

The rep-gtk package contains a Lisp and GTK binding. This is useful for extending GTK-2 and GDK libraries with Lisp. Starting at rep-gtk-0.15, the package contains the bindings to GTK and uses the same instructions. Both can be installed, if needed.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/rep-gtk/rep-gtk-0.18.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 220b0d728656472c068e40823f0a3b22
Download size: 152 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.18 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/rep-gtk-0.18-gtk2.4-1.patch

Rep-gtk Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7, libglade-2.5.1 and librep-0.17

Installation of Rep-gtk

Install rep-gtk by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../rep-gtk-0.18-gtk2.4-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Lisp bindings

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/rep/i686-pc-linux-gnu/gui/

Short Descriptions

Lisp bindings

are libraries stored in /usr/lib/rep/i686-pc-linux-gnu/gui/ that assist communication between Lisp and the GTK libraries.

Compface-1.4

Introduction to Compface

Compface provides utilities and a library to convert from/to X-Face format, a 48x48 bitmap format used to carry thumbnails of email authors in a mail header.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/apps/graphics/convert/compface-1.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: c45b54f67cc5d3580a18e4113219bc26
Download size: 28 KB
Estimated disk space required: 520 KB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/compface-1.4-errno-2.patch

Installation of Compface

Install Compface by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../compface-1.4-errno-2.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: compface and uncompface

Installed Library: libcompface.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

compface	is a filter for generating highly compressed representations of 48x48x1 face image files.
uncompface	is an inverse filter which performs an inverse transformation with no loss of data.
`libcompface.[so,a]`	allows the compression and decompression algorithms to be used in other programs such as MTAs.

ImageMagick-6.2.3-5

Introduction to ImageMagick

ImageMagick is a collection of tools and libraries to read, write, and manipulate an image in various image formats. Image processing operations are available from the command line. Bindings to various programming languages are also available.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.imagemagick.org/download/ImageMagick-6.2.3-5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.imagemagick.net/pub/ImageMagick/ImageMagick-6.2.3-5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 599d9a01d825c138882374922c3cda96
Download size: 4.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: up to 150 MB (depends which dependencies are installed)
Estimated build time: up to 4 SBU (Additional 1.1 SBU for the test suite)

ImageMagick Dependencies

Required

DocBook SGML DTD-4.4 and DocBook DSSSL Stylesheets-1.79

Optional (Install Based on the Required Format Support and Tools)

lcms-1.14, ESP Ghostscript-7.07.1 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.51, libpng-1.2.8, libjpeg-6b, FreeType-2.1.10, libtiff-3.7.3, libxml2-2.6.20, Mozilla-1.7.8, TeX-3.0, GIMP-2.2.8, SANE-1.0.15, Wget-1.9.1, Enscript-1.6.4, libexif-0.6.12, GraphViz, FlashPIX (or FlashPIX library), Jasper, JBIG-KIT, libwmf, AutoTrace, RALCGM, DCRaw, Transfig, Gnuplot, hp2xx, html2ps, Netpbm, MPEG-2 Video Codec, POV-Ray, Utah Raster Toolkit (or source), txt2html, Radiance, corefonts, Electric Fence and Dmalloc

Installation of ImageMagick

Install Imagemagick by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's/\$(LIBLTDL) \$/\$/' Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-modules &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

To test the results, as an unprivileged user, issue: make check.

Additional Configure Options

There are additional switches that can be passed to ImageMagick to customize the installation to your needs. See advanced-unix-installation.html in the www directory.

Command Explanations

sed -i -e 's/\$(LIBLTDL) \$/\$/' Makefile.in: The package will build and install a different version of the Libtool library in /usr/lib. This command forces the package to link to the installed version of libltdl, and not replace it.

--with-modules: Enables support for dynamically loadable modules.

Installed Programs: animate, compare, composite, conjure, convert, display, identify, import, Magick-config, Magick++-config, mogrify, montage, and Wand-config

Installed Libraries: libMagick.[so,a], libMagick++.[so,a], libWand.[so,a], the Magick.so Perl module, and numerous plugin modules

Installed Directories: /usr/include/magick, /usr/include/wand, /usr/lib/ImageMagick-6.2.3, /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.5/i686-linux/auto/Image/Magick, and /usr/share/ImageMagick-6.2.3

Short Descriptions

animate	animates a sequence of images.
compare	compares an image to a reconstructed image.
composite	composites various images into the given base image.
conjure	processes a MSL script to create an image.
convert	converts image(s) from one format to another.
display	displays an image.
identify	describes the format and characteristics of an image file.
import	captures an X window.
Magick-config and Magick++-config	show information about the installed versions of ImageMagick and Magick++.
mogrify	transforms an image.
montage	composites various images into a new image.
Wand-config	shows the options required to use the Wand library.
`Image::Magick`	allows the reading, manipulation and writing of a large number of image file formats using the ImageMagick library. Run make in the `PerlMagick/demo` directory of the package source tree to see a nice demo of the module's capabilities.

Hd2u-1.0.0

Introduction to Hd2u

The hd2u package contains an any to any text format converter.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.megaloman.com/~hany/_data/hd2u/hd2u-1.0.0.tgz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 21249099fbb04b98e30e35d6a89061dd
Download size: 54 KB
Estimated disk space required: 312 KB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Hd2u Dependencies

Required

popt-1.7-5

Installation of Hd2u

Install hd2u by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: dos2unix

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

dos2unix

converts text between various OS formats (such as converting from DOS format to Unix).

GTK-Doc-1.3

Introduction to GTK-Doc

The GTK-Doc package contains a code documentor. This is useful for extracting specially formatted comments from the code to create API documentation. This package is optional; if it is not installed, packages will not build the documentation. This does not mean that you will not have any documentation. If GTK-Doc is not available, the install process will copy any pre-built documentation to your system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtk-doc/1.3/gtk-doc-1.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtk-doc/1.3/gtk-doc-1.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d105d5b28e7e023ab1b7e85fb65e45c3
Download size: 145 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GTK-Doc Dependencies

Required

OpenJade-1.3.2, libxslt-1.1.14, DocBook XML DTD-4.4 and DocBook XSL Stylesheets-1.68.1

Optional

Installation of GTK-Doc

Install GTK-Doc by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: gtkdocize, gtkdoc-fixxref, gtkdoc-mkdb, gtkdoc-mkhtml, gtkdoc-mkman, gtkdoc-mktmpl, gtkdoc-scan, gtkdoc-scangobj, and gtkdoc-scanobj

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/gtk-doc and /usr/share/sgml/gtk-doc

Short Descriptions

gtkdoc*

these are all Perl scripts used by package Makefile scripts to generate documentation for the package being built.

Intltool-0.33

Introduction to Intltool

The intltool package contains an internationalization tool. This is useful for extracting translatable strings from source files, collecting the extracted strings with messages from traditional source files (<source directory>/<package>/po) and merging the translations into .xml, .desktop and .oaf files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/intltool/0.33/intltool-0.33.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/intltool/0.33/intltool-0.33.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7d3b6d421b0fb9beee7faf97daab45e6
Download size: 126 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Intltool Dependencies

Required

XML::Parser

Installation of Intltool

Install intltool by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: intltoolize, intltool-extract, intltool-merge, intltool-prepare, and intltool-update

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/intltool

Short Descriptions

intltoolize	prepares a package to use intltool.
intltool-extract	generates header files that can be read by gettext.
intltool-merge	merges translated strings into various file types.
intltool-prepare	updates pot files and merges them with translation files.
intltool-update	updates the `po` template files and merges them with the translations.

Screen-4.0.2

Introduction to Screen

Screen is a terminal multiplexor that runs several separate processes, typically interactive shells, on a single physical character-based terminal. Each virtual terminal emulates a DEC VT100 plus several ANSI X3.64 and ISO 2022 functions and also supports configurable input and output translation, serial port support, configurable logging, multi-user support, and UTF-8 character encoding support (currently not supported by LFS). Screen sessions can be detached and resumed later on a different terminal.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/screen/screen-4.0.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/screen/screen-4.0.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ed68ea9b43d9fba0972cb017a24940a1
Download size: 825 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Screen Dependencies

Optional

Installation of Screen

Install Screen by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --with-socket-dir=/var/run/screen \
    --with-sys-screenrc=/etc/screenrc &&
sed -i -e "s%/usr/local/etc/screenrc%/etc/screenrc%" {etc,doc}/* &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -m 644 etc/etcscreenrc /etc/screenrc

Command Explanations

--with-socket-dir=/var/run/screen: This option places the per-user sockets in a standard location.

--with-sys-screenrc=/etc/screenrc: This option places the global screenrc file in /etc.

sed -i -e "s%/usr/local/etc/screenrc%/etc/screenrc%" {etc,doc}/*: This command corrects the configuration and documention files to the location that is used here for the global screenrc file.

Configuring Screen

Config Files

/etc/screenrc and ~/.screenrc

Configuration Information

You may want to look at the example configuration file that was installed and customize it for your needs.

Installed Program: screen

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /var/run/screen

Short Descriptions

screen

is a terminal multiplexor with VT100/ANSI terminal emulation.

HTML Tidy-050722

Introduction to HTML Tidy

The HTML Tidy package contains a command line tool and libraries used to read HTML, XHTML and XML files and write cleaned up markup. It detects and corrects many common coding errors and strives to produce visually equivalent markup that is both W3C compliant and compatible with most browsers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://tidy.sourceforge.net/src/tidy_src_050722.tgz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 0ef3bf907a8429b2bc1e66e43bfff3d7
Download size: 254 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Note

HTML Tidy is updated very frequently by its maintainers, and the source package listed above may not be available at the listed URL due to the release of a newer version. The most current source package can be always be downloaded from http://tidy.sourceforge.net/src/. If this version is newer than the version listed above, the following instructions should work, but have not yet been tested by BLFS. If you'd rather download the version listed above, you can find it at http://tidy.sourceforge.net/src/old/.

Additional Downloads

Documentation

Documentation: http://tidy.sourceforge.net/docs/tidy_docs_050705.tgz
Download MD5 sum: 2e6533fc48b077ff6243deaf21a781de
Download size: 150 KB

Patches

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/tidy-050722-prevent_PRE_newlines-1.patch

HTML Tidy Dependencies

Recommended (To Build the Man Page and Quick Reference Docs)

libxslt-1.1.14

Optional

Dmalloc

Installation of HTML Tidy

The HTML Tidy documentation is contained in a separate tarball. Unpack both the source and docs tarballs before starting the build.

Install HTML Tidy by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../tidy-050722-prevent_PRE_newlines-1.patch &&
sh build/gnuauto/setup.sh &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you have libxslt-1.1.14 installed, issue the following commands as an unprivileged user to build the man page and HTML documentation:

cd htmldoc &&
tidy -xml-help > tidy-help.xml &&
tidy -xml-config > tidy-config.xml &&
xsltproc -o tidy.1 tidy1.xsl tidy-help.xml &&
xsltproc -o quickref.html quickref-html.xsl tidy-config.xml &&
cd ..

If you built the man page and the Quick Reference HTML file, install the man page by issuing the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 htmldoc/tidy.1 /usr/share/man/man1

Now finish the installation by installing the pre-built documentation as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/tidy &&
cp -v -R htmldoc/* /usr/share/doc/tidy

Command Explanations

sh build/gnuauto/setup.sh: This command prepares the source tree for building using the GNU “Auto” tools.

Configuring HTML Tidy

Config Files

The absolute path of the file specified in $HTML_TIDY.

Configuration Information

The default configuration options can be set in the file defined in $HTML_TIDY. Additional configuration options can be passed to tidy via command line parameters or the -config <file> parameter.

Installed Programs: tab2space and tidy

Installed Library: libtidy.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/tidy

Short Descriptions

tab2space	is a utility to expand tabs and ensure consistent line endings.
tidy	validates, corrects, and pretty-prints HTML files.
`libtidy.[so,a]`	libraries provide the HTML Tidy API functions to tidy and can also be called by other programs.

desktop-file-utils-0.10

Introduction to desktop-file-utils

The desktop-file-utils package contains command line utilities for working with desktop entries. These utilities are used by GNOME-2 and other applications to manipulate the MIME-types application databases and help adhere to the desktop entries standards specification.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freedesktop.org/software/desktop-file-utils/releases/desktop-file-utils-0.10.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 8b930e9ad08ac6b8205dd00a1d694b0c
Download size: 341 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.7 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

desktop-file-utils Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.6.4 and popt-1.7-5

Optional

Emacs-21.4a

Installation of desktop-file-utils

Install desktop-file-utils by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring desktop-file-utils

Configuration Information

The default location for the MIME-types application database is /usr/share/applications/mimeinfo.cache. If you are going to install, or have already installed, a desktop environment such as GNOME or KDE in a prefix other than /usr, you'll need to update the XDG_DATA_DIRS environment variable so that additional MIME-types application databases are properly maintained. Add the following to the system-wide or personal profile:

For GNOME:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=$XDG_DATA_DIRS:$GNOME_PREFIX/share
export XDG_DATA_DIRS

For KDE:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=$XDG_DATA_DIRS:$KDE_PREFIX/share
export XDG_DATA_DIRS

If you're installing both GNOME and KDE:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=$XDG_DATA_DIRS:$GNOME_PREFIX/share:$KDE_PREFIX/share
export XDG_DATA_DIRS

Installed Programs: desktop-file-install, desktop-file-validate, and update-desktop-database

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

desktop-file-install	is used to install a new, or modify an existing desktop file entry. It is also used to rebuild or modify the MIME-types application database.
desktop-file-validate	is used to verify the integrity of a desktop file.
update-desktop-database	is used to update the MIME-types application database.

XScreenSaver-4.21

Introduction to XScreenSaver

The XScreenSaver is a modular screen saver and locker for the X Window System. It is highly customizable and allows the use of any program that can draw on the root window as a display mode. The purpose of XScreenSaver is to display pretty pictures on your screen when it is not in use, in keeping with the philosophy that unattended monitors should always be doing something interesting, just like they do in the movies. However, XScreenSaver can also be used as a screen locker, to prevent others from using your terminal while you are away.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.jwz.org/xscreensaver/xscreensaver-4.21.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/X11/graphics/xscreensaver/xscreensaver-4.21.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 3ea7d0bc9b7159523855296e175d7ac7
Download size: 4.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 99.2 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

XScreenSaver Dependencies

Required

bc-1.06 and libglade-2.5.1 (alternatively LessTif-0.94.4 but not recommended)

Optional

libjpeg-6b, GLE, Netpbm, XDaliClock, Linux-PAM-0.80, krb4, and Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1

Installation of XScreenSaver

Install XScreenSaver by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-setuid-hacks: This switch allows some demos to be installed setuid root which is needed in order to ping other hosts.

--enable-locking: This switch provides support for locking the display.

Configuring XScreenSaver

Config Files

/etc/X11/app-defaults/XScreenSaver, ~/.xscreensaver and /etc/pam.d/xscreensaver or /etc/pam.conf

Installed Programs: xscreensaver, xscreensaver-command, xscreensaver-demo, xscreensaver-getimage, xscreensaver-getimage-file, xscreensaver-getimage-video, xscreensaver-gl-helper, and xscreensaver-text

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/xscreensaver and /usr/share/xscreensaver

Short Descriptions

xscreensaver	is a screen saver and locker daemon.
xscreensaver-command	controls a running xscreensaver process by sending it client messages.
xscreensaver-demo	is a graphical front-end for setting the parameters used by the background xscreensaver daemon.
xscreensaver-getimage	is a helper program for the xscreensaver modules that manipulate images.
xscreensaver-getimage-file	is a helper program for the xscreensaver modules that manipulate images.
xscreensaver-getimage-video	is a helper program for the xscreensaver modules that manipulate images.
xscreensaver-gl-helper	is a helper program for the xscreensaver OpenGL modules.
xscreensaver-text	prints some text to stdout, for use by screen savers.

Pilot-link-0.11.8

Introduction to Pilot-link

The pilot-link package provides a suite of tools containing a series of conduits, libraries, and language bindings for moving information to and from your Palm device and your desktop or server/workstation system, as well as across a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.pilot-link.org/pilot-link-0.11.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/pilot-link-0.11.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 586f84add601e8b86da3093ab784e997
Download size: 649 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/pilot-link-0.11.8-bindings_fix-1.patch

Pilot-link Dependencies

Optional

libpng-1.2.8, JDK-1.5.0, Tcl-8.4.11, Python-2.4.1 and Electric Fence

Kernel Configuration

You may need to configure the “USB_SERIAL_VISOR” device into the kernel before your system can communicate with your Palm device. Add this device by enabling the following kernel parameter setting and rebuilding the kernel (and modules, if applicable):

Device Drivers:
  USB support:
    USB Serial Converter support:
      USB Handspring Visor / Palm m50x / Sony Client Driver

For additional information about connecting your USB Palm device, see: http://www.pilot-link.org/README.usb.

Installation of Pilot-link

Install pilot-link by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../pilot-link-0.11.8-bindings_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-perl --with-java --with-tcl=/usr/lib --with-python: Use any or all of these options to enable the respective language bindings desired.

Installed Programs: addresses, ccexample, debugsh, dlpsh, hinotes, ietf2datebook, install-datebook, install-expenses, install-hinote, install-memo, install-netsync, install-todo, install-todos, install-user, memos, money2qif, pi-csd, pi-getram, pi-getrom, pi-getromtoken, pi-nredir, pilot-addresses, pilot-archive, pilot-clip, pilot-datebook, pilot-dedupe, pilot-file, pilot-foto, pilot-prc, pilot-schlep, pilot-undelete, pilot-xfer, pitclsh, read-expenses, read-ical, read-notepad, read-palmpix, read-todos, reminders, and sync-plan

Installed Libraries: libpisock.[so,a], libpisock++.[so,a], and libpisync.[so,a]

Installed Bindings: libjpisock.so JDK library, libpitcl.[so,a] Tcl library, Python and Perl modules

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.6/i686-linux/[,auto/]PDA, /usr/share/pilot-link

Short Descriptions

pilot-link programs and utilities

Describing the functionality of each pilot-link program and utility would take several pages. Instead, after you've installed the package, review the pilot-link man page (man pilot-link). If you wish to review before installing the package, unpack the tarball and issue man doc/man/pilot-link.7.in.

Chapter 11. System Utilities

This chapter contains mainly hardware utilities. It also contains some applications used by other applications in the book for installation purposes.

GPM-1.20.1

Introduction to GPM

The GPM (General Purpose Mouse daemon) package contains a mouse server for the console and xterm. It not only provides cut and paste support generally, but its library component is used by various software such as Links to provide mouse support to the application. It is useful on desktops, especially if following (Beyond) Linux From Scratch instructions; it's often much easier (and less error prone) to cut and paste between two console windows than to type everything by hand!

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://arcana.linux.it/pub/gpm/gpm-1.20.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2c63e827d755527950d9d13fe3d87692
Download size: 556 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.09 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gpm-1.20.1-segfault-1.patch
Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gpm-1.20.1-silent-1.patch

Installation of GPM

Install GPM by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gpm-1.20.1-segfault-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../gpm-1.20.1-silent-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
LDFLAGS="-lm" make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
cp -v conf/gpm-root.conf /etc &&
ldconfig

Command Explanations

LDFLAGS="-lm": The math library must be linked with gpm, as ceil() is used in some cursor scrolling logic.

Configuring GPM

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/gpm init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-gpm

Config Files

/etc/gpm-root.conf and ~/.gpm-root: The default and individual user gpm-root configuration files.

/etc/sysconfig/mouse: This file contains the name of your mouse device and the protocol which it uses. To create this file, run the following as the root user:

cat > /etc/sysconfig/mouse << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/sysconfig/mouse

MDEVICE="[yourdevice]"
PROTOCOL="[yourprotocol]"
GPMOPTS="[additional options]"

# End /etc/sysconfig/mouse
EOF

Configuration Information

Examples of values to set MDEVICE, PROTOCOL, and GPMOPTS to are:

MDEVICE="/dev/psaux"
PROTOCOL="imps2"
GPMOPTS=""

A list of which protocol values are known can be found by running gpm -t -help. The MDEVICE setting depends on which type of mouse you have. For example, /dev/ttyS0 for a serial mouse (on Windows this is COM1), /dev/input/mice is often used for USB mice and /dev/psaux for PS2 mice. GPMOPTS is the 'catch all' for any additional options that are needed for your hardware.

Installed Programs: disable-paste, gpm, gpm-root, hltest, mev, and mouse-test

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

disable-paste	is a security mechanism used to disable the paste buffer.
gpm	is a cut and paste utility and mouse server for virtual consoles.
gpm-root	is a default handler for gpm. It is used to draw menus on the root window.
hltest	is a simple sample application using the high-level library, meant to be read by programmers trying to use the high-level library.
mev	is a program to report mouse events.
mouse-test	is a tool for determining the mouse type and device it's attached to.

Fcron-2.9.7

Introduction to Fcron

The Fcron package contains a periodical command scheduler which aims at replacing Vixie Cron.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://fcron.free.fr/archives/fcron-2.9.7.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.seul.org/pub/fcron/fcron-2.9.7.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9ead65bd13ea6a3278e167f88c572ddb
Download size: 409 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.10 SBU

Fcron Dependencies

Optional

MTA, Linux-PAM-0.80, SELinux, DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Fcron

Fcron uses the cron facility of syslog to log all messages. Since LFS does not set up this facility in /etc/syslog.conf, it needs to be done prior to installing Fcron. This command will append the necessary line to the current /etc/syslog.conf (perform as the root user):

cat >> /etc/syslog.conf << "EOF"
# Begin fcron addition to /etc/syslog.conf

cron.* -/var/log/cron.log

# End fcron addition
EOF

The configuration file has been modified, so reloading the sysklogd daemon will activate the changes (again as the root user).

/etc/rc.d/init.d/sysklogd reload

For security reasons, an unprivileged user and group for Fcron should be created (perform as the root user):

groupadd -g 22 fcron &&
useradd -d /dev/null -c "Fcron User" -g fcron -s /bin/false -u 22 fcron

Install Fcron by running the following commands:

./configure --without-sendmail --with-boot-install=no &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--without-sendmail: Fcron will use an installed MTA to email you the results of the fcron script. Omit the switch and use --with-sendmail=[/path/to/MTA] if you wish to utilize this feature.

--with-boot-install=no: This prevents installation of the bootscript included with the package.

Configuring Fcron

Config Files

/etc/fcron.conf, /etc/fcron.allow, and /etc/fcron.deny

Configuration Information

There are no required changes in any of the config files. Configuration information can be found in the man page for fcron.conf.

The default text editor used is /usr/bin/vi, and this is installed by LFS.

fcron scripts are written using fcrontab. Refer to the fcrontab man page for proper parameters to address your situation.

If Linux-PAM is installed, two PAM configuration files are installed in /etc/pam.d. Alternatively if /etc/pam.d is not used, the installation will append two configuration sections to the exiting /etc/pam.conf file. You should ensure the files match your preferences. Modify them as required to suit your needs.

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/fcron init script from the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-fcron

Installed Programs: fcron, fcrondyn, fcronsighup, and fcrontab

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/fcron-2.9.7 and /var/spool/fcron

Short Descriptions

fcron	is the scheduling daemon.
fcrondyn	is a user tool intended to interact with a running fcron daemon.
fcronsighup	instructs fcron to reread the Fcron tables.
fcrontab	is a program used to install, edit, list and remove the tables used by fcron.

Hdparm-6.1

Introduction to Hdparm

The hdparm package contains a utility that is useful for controlling ATA/IDE controllers and hard drives both to increase performance and sometimes to increase stability.

Warning

As well as being useful, incorrect usage of hdparm can destroy your information and in rare cases, drives. Use with caution and make sure you know what you are doing. If in doubt, it is recommended that you leave the default kernel parameters alone.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/hdparm/hdparm-6.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: b883944bc26a480dcccae837c4ddf732
Download size: 40 KB
Estimated disk space required: 360 KB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Installation of Hdparm

Build hdparm by running the following command:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note that by default, hdparm is installed in /sbin as some systems may require it during the boot process before /usr is mounted. If you wish to install hdparm under the /usr hierarchy, then replace the above command with the following:

make binprefix=/usr install

Installed Program: hdparm

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

hdparm

provides a command-line interface to various hard disk ioctls supported by the stock Linux ATA/IDE device driver subsystem.

Which-2.16 and Alternatives

The presence or absence of the which program in the main LFS book is probably one of the most contentious issues on the mailing lists. It has resulted in at least one flame war in the past. To hopefully put an end to this once and for all, presented here are two options for equipping your system with which. The question of which “which” is for you to decide.

The first option is to install the actual GNU which package.

Introduction to Which

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.xs4all.nl/~carlo17/which/which-2.16.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/which/which-2.16.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 830b83af48347a9a3520f561e47cbc9b
Download size: 123 KB
Estimated disk space required: 940 KB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of Which

Install which by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: which

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

which

shows the full path of (shell) commands installed in your PATH.

The 'which' Script

The second option (for those who don't want to install the package) is to create a simple script (execute as the root user):

cat > /usr/bin/which << "EOF"
#!/bin/bash
type -pa "$@" | head -n 1 ; exit ${PIPESTATUS[0]}
EOF
chmod -v 755 /usr/bin/which
chown -v root:root /usr/bin/which

This should work OK and is probably the easiest solution for most cases, but is not the most comprehensive implementation.

UnZip-5.52

Introduction to UnZip

The UnZip package contains ZIP extraction utilities. These are useful for extracting files from ZIP archives. ZIP archives are created with PKZIP or Info-ZIP utilities primarily in a DOS environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.mirrorservice.org/sites/ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/unzip552.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/unzip552.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9d23919999d6eac9217d1f41472034a9
Download size: 1.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 7.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.09 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/unzip-5.52-fix_Makefile-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/unzip-5.52-fix_libz-1.patch
Recommended patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/unzip-5.52-dont_make_noise-1.patch

Installation of UnZip

Install UnZip by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../unzip-5.52-fix_Makefile-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../unzip-5.52-fix_libz-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../unzip-5.52-dont_make_noise-1.patch &&
cp -v unix/Makefile . &&
make prefix=/usr LOCAL_UNZIP=-DUSE_UNSHRINK linux &&
make prefix=/usr LOCAL_UNZIP=-DUSE_UNSHRINK linux_shlibz

To test the results, issue: LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD && make check.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr LOCAL_UNZIP=-DUSE_UNSHRINK install &&
cp -v -d libunzip.so* /usr/lib

Command Explanations

make prefix=/usr LOCAL_UNZIP=-DUSE_UNSHRINK linux: This command overrides the prefix variable that is set to /usr/local in the Makefile, sets the LOCAL_UNZIP environment variable to instruct UnZip to use the shrinking algorithm based on the LZW compression algorithm, and builds the executables for a Linux system. The alternatives to 'linux' can be seen with a make list command.

make ... linux_shlibz: Build shared libunzip and link UnZip against it and zlib.

Installed Programs: funzip, unzip, unzipfsx, zipgrep, and zipinfo

Installed Library: libunzip.so

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

funzip	allows the output of unzip commands to be redirected.
unzip	lists, tests or extracts files from a `ZIP` archive.
unzipfsx	is a self-extracting stub that can be prepended to a `ZIP` archive. Files in this format allow the recipient to decompress the archive without installing UnZip.
zipgrep	searches files in a `ZIP` archive for lines matching a pattern.
zipinfo	produces technical information about the files in a `ZIP` archive, including file access permissions, encryption status, type of compression, etc.
`libunzip.so`	contains the API functions required by the UnZip programs.

Zip-2.31

Introduction to Zip

The Zip package contains Zip utilities. These are useful for compressing files into ZIP archives.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.mirrorservice.org/sites/ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/zip231.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.info-zip.org/pub/infozip/src/zip231.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6bfc076664416251d7624ab3538d1cb9
Download size: 781 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.04 SBU

Installation of Zip

Install Zip by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's@$(INSTALL) man/zip.1@$(INSTALL_PROGRAM) man/zip.1@' \
    unix/Makefile &&
make prefix=/usr -f unix/Makefile generic_gcc

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr -f unix/Makefile install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ... unix/Makefile: The Makefile has a bug which causes the installation to fail. This command fixes the problem.

make prefix=/usr -f unix/Makefile generic_gcc: This command overrides the prefix variable that is set to /usr/local in the unix/Makefile which is used as a Makefile and builds the executables for a Linux system. The alternatives to generic_gcc can be seen with a make -f unix/Makefile list command.

Installed Programs: zip, zipcloak, zipnote, and zipsplit

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

zip	compresses files into a `ZIP` archive.
zipcloak	is disabled in this version of Zip. It will display a message about how to support encryption by recompiling with `zcrypt27.zip`.
zipnote	reads or writes comments stored in a `ZIP` file.
zipsplit	is a utility to split `ZIP` files into smaller files.

PCI Utilities-2.1.11

Introduction to PCI Utilities

The PCI Utilities package is a set of programs for listing PCI devices, inspecting their status and setting their configuration registers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.kernel.org/pub/software/utils/pciutils/pciutils-2.1.11.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/software/utils/pciutils/pciutils-2.1.11.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2b3b2147b7bc91f362be55cb49fa1c4e
Download size: 107 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.04 MB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

PCI Utilities Dependencies

Required

which-2.16

Installation of PCI Utilities

Install PCI Utilities by running the following commands:

make PREFIX=/usr

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr install

Some packages require the PCI static library. To install the library and headers, issue the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/include/pci &&
install -v -m 644 lib/libpci.a /usr/lib &&
install -v -m 644 lib/*.h /usr/include/pci

Configuring PCI Utilities

The current version of PCI Utilities is a bit dated (2003). The application works quite well, but the default data file, pci.ids, is out of date. To get a current version of this file, run update-pciids as the root user. This program uses wget or lynx to fetch the most current file and place it in /usr/share.

Installed Programs: lspci, setpci and update-pciids

Installed Libraries: libpci.a

Installed Directories: /usr/include/pci

Short Descriptions

lspci	is a utility for displaying information about all PCI buses in the system and all devices connected to them.
setpci	is a utility for querying and configuring PCI devices.
update-pciids	fetches the current version of the PCI ID list. Requires Wget-1.9.1 or Lynx-2.8.5.
`libpci.a`	is the static library that allows applications to access the PCI subsystem.

Pkg-config-0.19

Introduction to Pkg-config

The Pkg-config package contains tools for passing the include path and/or library paths to build tools during the make file execution.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://pkgconfig.freedesktop.org/releases/pkg-config-0.19.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 25f106d2cc82a0013f5bdc89875d5790
Download size: 947 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11 MB
Estimated build time: 0.21 SBU

Installation of Pkg-config

Note

Till version 0.18, this package was called Pkgconfig.

Install Pkg-config by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Pkg-config

The default setting for PKG_CONFIG_PATH is /usr/lib/pkgconfig because of the prefix used to install Pkg-config. You may add to PKG_CONFIG_PATH by exporting additional paths on your system where pkgconfig files are installed. Note that PKG_CONFIG_PATH is only needed when compiling packages, not during run-time.

Installed Program: pkg-config

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

pkg-config

is a function that returns meta information for the specified library.

Cpio-2.6

Introduction to Cpio

The cpio package contains tools for archiving.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/cpio/cpio-2.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/cpio/cpio-2.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 76b4145f33df088a5bade3bf4373d17d
Download size: 561 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/cpio-2.6-security_fixes-1.patch

Installation of Cpio

Install cpio by running the following commands:

sed -i -e "s/invalid_arg/argmatch_invalid/" src/mt.c &&
patch -Np1 -i ../cpio-2.6-security_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure CPIO_MT_PROG=mt --prefix=/usr \
    --bindir=/bin --libexecdir=/tmp \
    --with-rmt=/usr/sbin/rmt &&
echo "#define HAVE_SETLOCALE 1" >> config.h &&
echo "#define HAVE_LSTAT 1" >> config.h &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e "s/invalid_arg/argmatch_invalid/" src/mt.c: This command fixes a build problem with the mt program.

CPIO_MT_PROG=mt: This parameter forces the building and installation of the mt program.

--bindir=/bin: This parameter installs cpio to /bin instead of /usr/bin as recommended by the FHS guidelines.

--libexecdir=/tmp: This parameter is used so that /usr/libexec is not created.

--with-rmt=/usr/sbin/rmt: This parameter inhibits building the rmt program as it is already installed by the Tar package in LFS.

echo "#define HAVE_SETLOCALE 1" >> config.h: This command specifies that the system Libc implements the setlocale function since it is not detected by configure.

echo "#define HAVE_LSTAT 1" >> config.h: This define fixes a bug that causes cpio to convert symlinks into regular files during archive creation.

Installed Programs: cpio and mt

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

cpio	copies files to and from archives.
mt	controls magnetic tape drive operations.

MC-4.6.1

Introduction to MC

MC (Midnight Commander) is a text-mode full-screen file manager and visual shell. It provides a clear, user-friendly, and somewhat protected interface to a Unix system while making many frequent file operations more efficient and preserving the full power of the command prompt.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/utils/file/managers/mc/mc-4.6.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.uni-koeln.de/util/shell/mc-4.6.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 18b20db6e40480a53bac2870c56fc3c4
Download size: 3.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 29 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

MC Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 or GLib-2.6.4

Optional

GPM-1.20.1, X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), Samba-3.0.14a, slang-1.4.9, Zip-2.31, UnZip-5.52 and GNOME Libraries-1.4.2

Installation of MC

Install MC by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring MC

Config Files

~/.mc/*

Configuration Information

The ~/.mc directory and its contents are created when you start mc for the first time. Then you can edit the main ~/.mc/ini configuration file manually or through the MC shell. Consult the mc(1) man page for details.

Installed Programs: mc, mcedit, mcmfmt, and mcview

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/mc and /usr/lib/mc

Short Descriptions

mc	is a visual shell.
mcedit	is an internal file editor.
mcview	is an internal file viewer.

Sysstat-6.0.0

Introduction to Sysstat

The Sysstat package contains utilities to monitor system performance and usage activity. Sysstat contains the sar utility, common to many commercial Unixes, and tools you can schedule via cron to collect and historize performance and activity data.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://perso.wanadoo.fr/sebastien.godard/sysstat-6.0.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ibiblio.org/pub/linux/system/status/sysstat-6.0.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 706044b99a29b7de7bf4b06310bbe6a6
Download size: 118 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Sysstat Dependencies

Installation of Sysstat

Install Sysstat by running the following commands:

make config &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

make config: Runs the interactive configuration process. The first question prompts you for an “Installation directory”. Reply with /usr, as this is equivalent to Autoconf's --prefix=/usr parameter to configure. For all other prompts, you may press Enter to accept the (very sane) defaults. When prompted for “Number of daily data files to keep: [7]”, you may wish to keep a larger number of files. However, don't exceed 25 because Sysstat will resuse existing files the next month, leading to erroneous daily reports.

Configuring Sysstat

Cron Information

To begin gathering Sysstat history information, you must add to, or create a privileged user's crontab. The default history data location is /var/log/sa. The user running Sysstat utilities via cron must have write access to this location.

Below is an example of what to install in the crontab. Adjust the parameters to suit your needs. Use man sa1 and man sa2 for information about the commands.

# 8am-7pm activity reports every 10 minutes during weekdays
0 8-18 * * 1-5 /usr/lib/sa/sa1 600 6 &

# 7pm-8am activity reports every hour during weekdays
0 19-7 * * 1-5 /usr/lib/sa/sa1 &

# Activity reports every hour on Saturday and Sunday
0 * * * 0,6 /usr/lib/sa/sa1 &

# Daily summary prepared at 19:05
5 19 * * * /usr/lib/sa/sa2 -A &

Ensure you submit the revised crontab to the cron daemon.

System Startup Information

At system startup, a LINUX RESTART message must be inserted in the daily data file to reinitialize the kernel counters. This can be automated by installing the /etc/rc.d/init.d/sysstat init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package using the following command as the root user:

make install-sysstat

Installed Programs: iostat, mpstat, sar, sa1, sa2, sadc and sadf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/sa, /usr/share/doc/sysstat-6.0.0 and /var/log/sa

Short Descriptions

iostat	reports CPU statistics and input/output statistics for devices and partitions.
mpstat	reports individual or combined processor related statistics.
sar	collects, reports and saves system activity information.
sa1	collects and stores binary data in the system activity daily data file. It is a front end to `sadc` designed to be run from cron.
sa2	writes a summarized daily activity report. It is a front end to sar designed to be run from cron.
sadc	is the system activity data collector, used as a backend for sar.
sadf	is used for displaying the contents of data files created by the sar command. But unlike sar, sadf can write its data in many different formats.

Apache Ant-1.6.2

Introduction to Apache Ant

The Apache Ant package is a Java-based build tool. In theory, it is kind of like make, but without make's wrinkles. Ant is different. Instead of a model where it is extended with shell-based commands, Ant is extended using Java classes. Instead of writing shell commands, the configuration files are XML-based, calling out a target tree where various tasks get executed. Each task is run by an object that implements a particular task interface.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://archive.apache.org/dist/ant/source/apache-ant-1.6.2-src.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.oregonstate.edu/pub/apache/ant/source/apache-ant-1.6.2-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 83c3adefdbf90bcbc4b804d4c55c0778
Download size: 6.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 92 MB
Estimated build time: 0.47 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/apache-ant-1.6.2-blfs_install-1.patch

Apache Ant Dependencies

Required

JDK-1.5.0

Installation of Apache Ant

Note

You may need additional libraries to satisfy the build requirements of various packages installed using Apache Ant. Review the table at http://ant.apache.org/manual/install.html#librarydependencies for any prerequisite libraries you may need. One such library is the JUnit testing framework library. Many Ant-installed packages will use this library to perform the unit tests during the build process. To install the JUnit library along with the Apache Ant package, download it from http://www.junit.org/, unzip the distribution file (requires UnZip-5.52) and copy the junit.jar file into the lib subdirectory of the Apache Ant source tree before beginning the Apache Ant build.

Install Apache Ant by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../apache-ant-1.6.2-blfs_install-1.patch

Now, as the root user:

./build.sh -Ddist.dir=/opt/ant-1.6.2 dist &&
ln -v -sf /etc/ant /opt/ant-1.6.2/etc &&
ln -v -sf ant-1.6.2 /opt/ant

Command Explanations

./build.sh -Ddist.dir=/opt/ant-1.6.2 dist: This command does everything. It builds the package, then installs the package into /opt/ant-1.6.2.

ln -v -sf /etc/ant /opt/ant-1.6.2/etc: The patch changes the configuration directory to /etc/ant to conform with FHS guidelines. This command creates a symlink from the configuration directory back to the installation directory as the package is expecting to find the files there.

ln -v -sf ant-1.6.2 /opt/ant: This command is optional, and creates a convenience symlink.

Configuring Apache Ant

Config Files

/etc/ant/ant.conf, ~/.ant/ant.conf, and ~/.antrc

Configuration Information

Some packages will require ant to be in the search path and the $ANT_HOME environment variable defined. Satisfy these requirements by adding the following lines to /etc/profile or to individual user's ~/.profile or ~/.bashrc files:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/ant/bin
export ANT_HOME=/opt/ant

Installed Programs: ant, antRun, antRun.pl, complete-ant-cmd.pl, runant.pl, and runant.py

Installed Libraries: ant-*.jar, xercesImpl.jar, and xml-apis.jar

Installed Directories: /etc/ant and /opt/ant-1.6.2

Short Descriptions

ant	is a Java based build tool used by many packages instead of the conventional make program.
antRun	is a support script used to start ant build scripts in a given directory.
antRun.pl	is a Perl script that provides similar functionality offered by the antRun script.
complete-ant-cmd.pl	is a Perl script that allows Bash to complete an ant command-line.
runant.pl	is a Perl wrapper script used to invoke ant.
runant.py	is a Python wrapper script used to invoke ant.
`ant-*.jar`	files are the Apache Ant Java class libraries.
`xercesImpl.jar`	is a Java class library used by Apache Ant to perform XML parsing.
`xml-apis.jar`	contains the DOM Java classes required by the Apache Ant XML formatter.

Chapter 12. Programming

A base LFS system can be used as a development platform, however the base system only includes language support for C, C++ and Perl. This chapter provides instructions to build many popular programming environments to greatly expand your system's development capabilities.

DejaGnu-1.4.4

Introduction to DejaGnu

DejaGnu is a framework for running test suites on GNU tools. It is written in expect, which uses Tcl (Tool command language).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freshmeat.net/redir/dejagnu/12564/url_tgz/dejagnu-1.4.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/dejagnu/dejagnu-1.4.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 053f18fd5d00873de365413cab17a666
Download size: 1.08 MB
Estimated disk space required: 8.5 MB
Estimated build time: .04 SBU

DejaGnu Dependencies

Required

Expect-5.43.0

Optional

DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of DejaGnu

Install DejaGnu by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-doc

To test the installation, issue make check as an unprivileged user.

Installed Program: runtest

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Scripts: There are numerous Expect scripts installed in the /usr/share/dejagnu hierarchy.

Installed Directory: /usr/share/dejagnu

Short Descriptions

runtest

is the DejaGnu test driver program. It is used to control what tests to run, and variations on how to run them.

Doxygen-1.4.3

Introduction to Doxygen

The Doxygen package contains a documentation system for C++, C, Java, Objective-C, Corba IDL and to some extent PHP, C# and D. This is useful for generating HTML documentation and/or an off-line reference manual from a set of documented source files. There is also support for generating output in RTF, PostScript, hyperlinked PDF, compressed HTML, and Unix man pages. The documentation is extracted directly from the sources, which makes it much easier to keep the documentation consistent with the source code.

You can also configure Doxygen to extract the code structure from undocumented source files. This is very useful to quickly find your way in large source distributions. Used along with GraphViz, you can also visualize the relations between the various elements by means of include dependency graphs, inheritance diagrams, and collaboration diagrams, which are all generated automatically.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.stack.nl/pub/users/dimitri/doxygen-1.4.3.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.stack.nl/pub/users/dimitri/doxygen-1.4.3.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6cad81b86c1271777b8ee7c953a496ac
Download size: 2.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 41 MB (additional 6.3 MB to install docs)
Estimated build time: 1.4 SBU

Doxygen Dependencies

Optional

Qt-3.3.4, TeX-3.0 and GraphViz

Installation of Doxygen

Install Doxygen by running the following commands:

rm src/unistd.h &&
./configure --prefix /usr --docdir /usr/share/doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you wish to generate and install the package documentation (note that man pages have already been installed), you must have TeX installed, then issue the following command as the root user:

make install_docs

Tip

If you don't have TeX installed but wish to generate and install the HTML documentation (very good docs), issue the following commands:

make docs

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/doxygen &&
cp -v -R examples html /usr/share/doc/doxygen

Command Explanations

rm src/unistd.h: There is a bug in Flex-2.5.31 which causes make to use this file instead of the system installed version. Removing this file allows the GUI front-end to build successfully. This command is not required if you don't pass the --with-doxywizard parameter (but won't affect the build otherwise).

--with-doxywizard: Use this parameter if Qt is installed and you wish to build the GUI front-end.

Configuring Doxygen

There is no real configuration necessary for the Doxygen package although three additional packages are required if you wish to use extended capabilities. If you need to use the language translation features, you must have Python-2.4.1 installed. If you require formulas to create PDF documentation, then you must have TeX-3.0 installed. If you require formulas to convert PostScript files to bitmaps, then you must have AFPL Ghostscript-8.51 or ESP Ghostscript-7.07.1 installed.

Installed Programs: doxygen, doxytag, and optionally, doxywizard

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/doxygen

Short Descriptions

doxygen	is a command-line based utility used to generate template configuration files and then generate documentation from these templates. Use doxygen --help for an explanation of the command-line parameters.
doxytag	is used to generate a tag file and/or a search index for a set of HTML files.
doxywizard	is a GUI front-end for configuring and running doxygen.

Expect-5.43.0

Introduction to Expect

The Expect package contains tools for automating interactive applications such as telnet, ftp, passwd, fsck, rlogin, tip, etc. Expect is also useful for testing these same applications as well as easing all sorts of tasks that are prohibitively difficult with anything else.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://expect.nist.gov/old/expect-5.43.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 230400129630335b3060a42f66fec11d
Download size: 525 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.07 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/expect-5.43.0-spawn-2.patch

Expect Dependencies

Required

Tcl-8.4.11

Optional

Tk-8.4.11

Installation of Expect

Install Expect by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../expect-5.43.0-spawn-2.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --with-tcl=/usr/lib \
    --with-tclinclude=/usr/include/tcl8.4 --enable-shared &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -sf ../libexpect5.43.a /usr/lib/expect5.43

Command Explanations

--enable-shared: This option enables building the shared library.

--with-tk=/usr/lib: Use this option to link in the Tk library.

ln -sf ../libexpect5.43.a /usr/lib/expect5.43: This command creates a required link to the static library.

Configuring Expect

Config Files

$exp_library/expect.rc and ~/.expect.rc

Configuration Information

Reference the expect man page for information about utilizing the expect.rc configuration files. Additionally, many of the tools contained in the Expect package will use their own configuration files. Reference the respective man page, or examine the script directly for configuration file information.

Installed Programs: autoexpect, autopasswd, cryptdir, decryptdir, dislocate, expect, ftp-rfc, kibitz, lpunlock, mkpasswd, passmass, rftp, rlogin-cwd, timed-read, timed-run, unbuffer, weather, and optionally (if Expect was linked against Tk), expectk, multixterm, tknewsbiff, tkpasswd, xkibitz, and xpstat

Installed Library: libexpect5.43.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/expect5.43

Short Descriptions

autoexpect	generates an Expect script from watching a session.
autopasswd	is a wrapper to make passwd(1) be non-interactive.
cryptdir	encrypts all files in a directory.
decryptdir	decrypts all files in a directory.
dislocate	allows processes to be disconnected and reconnected to a terminal.
expect	is a program that “talks” to other interactive programs according to a script.
ftp-rfc	retrieves an RFC (or the index) from UUNET.
kibitz	allows two (or more) people to interact with one shell (or any arbitrary program).
lpunlock	unhangs a printer which claims it is “waiting for lock”.
mkpasswd	generates passwords and can apply them automatically to users.
passmass	changes a password on multiple machines.
rftp	is much like ftp except it uses `~g` and `~p` instead of `mget` and `mput`.
rlogin-cwd	is rlogin except it uses the local current directory as the current working directory on the remote machine.
timed-read	reads a complete line from stdin and aborts after a given number of seconds.
timed-run	runs a program for a given amount of time.
unbuffer	disables the output buffering that occurs when program output is redirected.
weather	retrieves a weather report (courtesy University of Michigan) for a given city or geographical area.
expectk	is a combination of Expect with Tk and should run any wish or Expect script.
multixterm	creates multiple xterms that can be driven together or separately.
tknewsbiff	pops up a window when there is unread news in your favorite newsgroups and removes the window after you've read the news.
tkpasswd	is a script to change passwords using expectk.
xkibitz	allows users in separate xterms to share one shell (or any program that runs in an xterm).
xpstat	is a script that acts as a front-end for xpilot.
`libexpect5.43.[so,a]`	contains functions that allow Expect to be used as a Tcl extension or to be used directly from C or C++ (without Tcl).

GCC-3.4.3

Introduction to GCC

The GCC package contains GNU compilers. This is useful for compiling programs written in C, C++, Fortran, Java, Objective C and Ada.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.rcn.net/pub/sourceware/gcc/releases/gcc-3.4.3/gcc-3.4.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://mirrors.rcn.net/pub/sourceware/gcc/releases/gcc-3.4.3/gcc-3.4.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e744b30c834360fccac41eb7269a3011
Download size: 27.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 1.62 GB
Estimated build time: 45.50 SBU (build and install all compilers)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gcc-3.4.3-no_fixincludes-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gcc-3.4.3-linkonce-1.patch

GCC Dependencies

Note

If you plan to compile Ada, you will need to install GNAT temporarily to satisfy the circular dependency when you recompile GCC to include Ada.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://cs.nyu.edu/pub/gnat/3.15p/gnat-3.15p-i686-pc-redhat71-gnu-bin.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 57c060cd1ccef8b1ae9165b11d98780a
Download size: 13.4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GNAT Dependencies

Required

Tcsh-6.14.00

Installation of GNAT

Install GNAT by running the following commands:

./doconfig

The above script will ask you how and where you would like to install GNAT. To avoid conflicts with the system gcc, the package will be installed in a separate directory, that can later be removed from the system.

In response to the questions asked by the doconfig script, enter 3 in response to the first question and /opt/gnat in response to the second question.

To finish the install, run the following command as the root user:

./doinstall

The GNAT compiler can be invoked by executing the gcc binary installed by the above script.

You may now remove the GNAT source directory:

cd .. &&
rm -rf gnat-3.15p-i686-pc-linux-gnu-bin

Prepare to compile GCC by placing the GNAT gcc at the beginning of the PATH variable by using the following commands:

PATH_HOLD=$PATH &&
export PATH=/opt/gnat/bin:$PATH

Installation of GCC

Install GCC by running the following commands:

Important

The installation process may overwrite your existing GCC compiler and libraries. It is highly recommended that you have the Tcl, Expect and DejaGnu packages installed before beginning the build so you can run the full suite of tests.

Do not continue with the make install command until you're confident the build was successful. You can compare your test results with those found at http://gcc.gnu.org/ml/gcc-testresults/. There's also an i686 platform test result produced by an LFS-6.1 system at http://linuxfromscratch.org/~randy/gcc343_test.txt. You may also want to refer to the information found in the GCC-Pass 2 section of Chapter 5 in the LFS book ( ../../../../lfs/view/stable/chapter05/gcc-pass2.html).

patch -Np1 -i ../gcc-3.4.3-no_fixincludes-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../gcc-3.4.3-linkonce-1.patch &&
sed -i 's/install_to_$(INSTALL_DEST) //' libiberty/Makefile.in &&
mkdir ../gcc-build &&
cd ../gcc-build &&
../gcc-3.4.3/configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib \
    --enable-shared --enable-threads=posix --enable-__cxa_atexit \
    --enable-clocale=gnu --enable-languages=c,c++,objc,f77,ada,java &&
make bootstrap &&
make -C gcc gnatlib-shared &&
make -C gcc gnattools &&
make -k check &&
../gcc-3.4.3/contrib/test_summary

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -sf ../usr/bin/cpp /lib &&
ln -v -sf gcc /usr/bin/cc &&
ln -v -sf g77 /usr/bin/f77 &&
chown -v -R root:root \
    /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/3.4.3/include &&
chown -v -R root:root \
    /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/3.4.3/ada{lib,include}

There is a bug in the installation of the libffi interface headers. The architecture specific ffitarget.h file is not installed. If you included Java as one of the installed languages, install the missing file using the command below. Substitute for the [arch] in the command with the appropriate directory path for your system.

install -v -m644 ../gcc-3.4.3/libffi/src/[arch]/ffitarget.h \
    /usr/include

As the root user, remove the GNAT installation:

rm -rf /opt/gnat

Now, as the unprivileged user, restore your old PATH:

export PATH=$PATH_HOLD &&
unset PATH_HOLD

Note

Some of the Java programs installed by the GCC package conflict (have the same names) with programs from the JDK-1.5.0 package. If you installed the Java language from the GCC package but you wish to use the programs from the JDK as the defaults, ensure $JAVA_HOME/bin is listed before /usr/bin in your PATH variable.

Command Explanations

sed -i 's/install_to_$(INSTALL_DEST) //' libiberty/Makefile.in: This command suppresses the installation of libiberty.a as the version provided by Binutils is used instead.

mkdir ../gcc-build; cd ../gcc-build: The GCC documentation recommends building the package in a dedicated build directory.

--enable-shared --enable-threads=posix --enable-__cxa_atexit: These commands are required to build the C++ libraries to published standards.

--enable-clocale=gnu: This command is a failsafe for incomplete locale data.

--enable-languages=c,c++,objc,f77,ada,java: This command identifies which languages to build. You may modify this command to remove undesired languages.

make -C gcc gnatlib-shared: This command builds the Ada shared and static libraries. Skip this step if you have not enabled Ada as one of the languages.

make -C gcc gnattools: This command builds the Ada development tools and binaries. Skip this step if you have not enabled Ada as one of the languages.

make -k check: This command runs the test suite without stopping should any errors be encountered.

../gcc-3.4.3/contrib/test_summary: This command will produce a summary of the test suite results. You can append | grep -A7 Summ to the command to produce an even more condensed version of the summary. You may also wish to redirect the output to a file for review and comparison later on.

ln -sf ../usr/bin/cpp /lib: This command creates a link to the C PreProcessor as some packages expect it to be installed in the /lib directory.

ln -sf gcc /usr/bin/cc; ln -sf g77 /usr/bin/f77: These links are created as some packages refer to the C and Fortran compilers using an alternate name.

chown -R root:root /usr/lib/gcc/i686-pc-linux-gnu/...: If the package is built by a user other than root, the ownership of the installed include and adalib directories (and their contents) will be incorrect. These commands change the ownership to root:root. Omit the command changing the Ada directories if you did not include Ada as one of the installed languages.

Installed Programs: addr2name.awk, cc, c++, cpp, f77, g++, g77, gcc, gccbug, gcj, gcjh, gcov, gij, gnat, gnatbind, gnatbl, gnatchop, gnatclean, gnatfind, gnatkr, gnatlink, gnatls, gnatmake, gnatname, gnatprep, gnatxref, gpr2make, gprcmd, grepjar, jar, jcf-dump, jv-convert, jv-scan, rmic, rmiregistry and architecture specific names for c++, g++, gcc, gcc-3.4.3, gcj, and gcjh

Installed Libraries: lib-org-w3c-dom.[so,a], lib-org-xml-sax.[so,a], libffi-2.00-beta.so, libffi.[so,a], libfrtbegin.a, libg2c.[so,a], libgcc_s.so, libgcj.[so,a], libobjc.[so,a], libstdc++.[so.6,a], libsupc++.a, and numerous other run-time libraries and executables in /usr/lib/gcc

Installed Directories: /usr/include/c++, /usr/include/gcj, /usr/include/gnu, /usr/include/java, /usr/include/javax, /usr/lib/gcc, /usr/lib/security, /usr/share/gnat, and /usr/share/java

Short Descriptions

Some program and library descriptions are not listed here, but can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/stable/chapter06/gcc.html#contents-gcc.

addr2name.awk	emulates some of the functionality of addr2line.
f77	is a symlink to g77, created for compatibility purposes.
g77	is the Fortran compiler invoked by gcc.
gcj	is an ahead-of-time compiler for the Java language.
gcjh	generates header files from Java class files.
gij	is the GNU interpreter for Java bytecode.
gnat	is the Ada compiler invoked by gcc.
gnatbind	is used to bind compiled objects.
gnatbl	is the Ada linker.
gnatchop	is useful for renaming files to meet the standard Ada default file naming conventions.
gnatclean	is used to remove files associated with a GNAT project.
gnatfind	is the GNAT definition/use finder.
gnatkr	is used to determine the crunched name for a given file, when crunched to a specified maximum length.
gnatlink	is used to link programs and build an executable file.
gnatls	is the compiled unit browser.
gnatmake	is an automatic make facility.
gnatname	will list the files associated with a GNAT project.
gnatprep	is the GNAT external preprocessor.
gnatxref	is the GNAT cross-referencer.
gpr2make	is a tool used to create `Makefile`s that support compilation by multiple languages.
gprcmd	is a utility used by `Makefile.generic` to handle multi-language builds. It provides a set of commands so that the `Makefile`s do not need to depend on Unix utilities not available on all targets.
grepjar	searches `jar` files for a pattern.
jar	is an archive tool for Java archives.
jcf-dump	prints information about Java class files.
jv-convert	converts files from one encoding to another.
jv-scan	prints information about Java source files.
rmic	generates stubs for Remote Method Invocation.
rmiregistry	starts a remote object registry on the current host.

GCC-3.3.4

Introduction to GCC-3.3.4

The reason for installing GCC-3.3.4 is that some BLFS packages (such as compiled Java and OpenOffice) have not been updated to be compilable by GCC-3.4.3. Additionally, some pre-compiled packages may require the GCC-3.3.4 libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-3.3.4/gcc-3.3.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gcc/gcc-3.3.4/gcc-3.3.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a1c267b34f05c8660b24251865614d8b
Download size: 23 MB
Estimated disk space required: 489 MB
Estimated build time: 5.72 SBU (additional 12.54 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gcc-3.3.4-no_fixincludes-1.patch
Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gcc-3.3.4-linkonce-1.patch

GCC-3.3.4 Dependencies

DejaGnu-1.4.4 (required to run the full test suite)

Installation of GCC-3.3.4

Install GCC-3.3.4 by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gcc-3.3.4-no_fixincludes-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../gcc-3.3.4-linkonce-1.patch &&
mkdir ../gcc-build &&
cd ../gcc-build &&
../gcc-3.3.4/configure \
    --prefix=/opt/gcc-3.3.4 \
    --enable-shared --enable-languages=c,c++ \
    --enable-threads=posix &&
make bootstrap

If desired, run the test suite using the following commands. The test_summary commands create log files which can be compared to known good results located at http://linuxfromscratch.org/~randy/gcc-334-lfs-6.0-test_summary.log and http://linuxfromscratch.org/~randy/gcc-334-lfs-6.0-test_summary_short.log.

make -k check &&
../gcc-3.3.4/contrib/test_summary >test_summary.log 2>&1 &&
../gcc-3.3.4/contrib/test_summary | \
    grep -A7 Summ >test_summary_short.log 2>&1

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /opt/gcc-3.3.4/lib/libstdc++.so.5* /usr/lib &&
ln -v -sf /usr/lib/libstdc++.so.5.0.6 /opt/gcc-3.3.4/lib &&
ln -v -sf libstdc++.so.5.0.6 /opt/gcc-3.3.4/lib/libstdc++.so.5 &&
chown -v -R root:root \
    /opt/gcc-3.3.4/lib/gcc-lib/i686-pc-linux-gnu/3.3.4/include

Command Explanations

mkdir ../gcc-build; cd ../gcc-build: The GCC development team recommends building in a separate directory.

--enable-shared --enable-languages=c,c++ --enable-threads=posix: Configures GCC to build the C and C++ compilers and enable the related C++ options.

mv -v /opt/gcc-3.3.4/lib/libstdc++.so.5* /usr/lib: Moves the C++ libraries to the standard lib directory to avoid having to add /opt/gcc-3.3.4/lib to /etc/ld.so.conf.

Configuring GCC-3.3.4

Configuration information

If you only need the GCC-3.3.4 libraries, you may delete /opt/gcc-3.3.4.

Whenever you need to use GCC-3.3.4 instead of your system installed compiler, add /opt/gcc-3.3.4/bin to the front of your PATH or (preferably) set the CC environment variable before compiling the concerned package.

Installed Programs: c++, cpp, g++, gcc, gccbug, gcov, and architecture specific names of these programs.

Installed Libraries: libgcc_s.so, libiberty.a, libstdc++.[a,so], libsupc++.a, and other support libraries and files.

Installed Directory: /opt/gcc-3.3.4

Short Descriptions

The GCC-3.3.4 package contains the gcc-3.3.4 C and C++ compilers and the GCC-3.3.4 libstdc++.so library that is required by some commercial and pre-compiled packages.

Guile-1.6.7

Introduction to Guile

The Guile package contains the Project GNU's extension language library. Guile also contains a stand alone Scheme interpreter.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/guile/guile-1.6.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/pub/gnu/guile/guile-1.6.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: c2ff2a2231f0cbb2e838dd8701a587c5
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 37.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.86 SBU

Installation of Guile

Install Guile by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: guile, guile-config, guile-snarf, and guile-tools

Installed Libraries: libguile.[so,a], libguilereadline-v-12.[so,a], libguile-ltdl.[so,a], libguile-srfi-srfi-13-14-v-1.[so,a], libguile-srfi-srfi-4-v-1.[so,a], and optionally, libqthreads.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/guile, /usr/include/guile-readline, /usr/include/libguile, and /usr/share/guile

Short Descriptions

guile	is a stand-alone Scheme interpreter for Guile.
guile-config	is a Guile script which provides the information necessary to link your programs against the Guile library, in much the same way pkg-config-0.19 does.
guile-snarf	is a script to parse declarations in your C code for Scheme visible C functions, i Scheme objects to be used by C code, etc.
guile-tools	is a wrapper program installed along with guile which knows where a particular module is installed and calls it passing its args to a program.

JDK-1.5.0

Introduction to JDK

The JDK package contains Sun's Java development environment. This is useful for developing Java programs and provides the runtime environment necessary to run Java programs. It also includes a plug-in for browsers so that they can be Java aware.

The JDK comes in two flavors, a precompiled binary and a source package. Previously, the plugin included in the JDK binary package was unusable on LFS owing to incompatibilities with GCC-3 compiled browsers. This is not the case anymore.

In order to use the source code and patches, you must read and agree to the Sun Java Research License. In addition, the source code cannot be downloaded from some countries, so for users in those countries, the binary is the only option.

If you plan on compiling the JDK source, you will still need to download the binary version to bootstrap the JDK build. You will need to download a total of four files to complete the source build: jdk-1_5_0_03-linux-i586.bin, jdk-1_5_0-src-jrl.zip, jdk-1_5_0-bin-jrl.zip, and jdk-1_5_0-mozilla_headers-unix.zip.

Package Information

Binary download: http://java.sun.com/j2se/1.5.0/download.jsp
Version used (binary): 1.5.0_03
Download MD5 sum (binary): bc221641fcfdc9268499001326fc8ebb
Source download: http://java.sun.com/j2se/jrl_download.html
Download MD5 sum (source): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/SVN/I-K/JDK/jdk-1.5.0.md5sums
Download size (binary): 48.7 MB
Download size (source): 65.7 MB (three .zip files)
Estimated disk space required: 1444 MB
Estimated build time: 33.06 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patches

Recommended Patches

http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/jdk-1.5.0-remove_debug_image-1.patch (skips compiling of the JDK debug image)
http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/jdk-1.5.0-static_cxx-1.patch (forces dynamic linking to GCC libs)

Optional Patch

http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/jdk-1.5.0-xorg-6.8.1-1.patch (only required if building against X.org-6.8.2)

JDK Dependencies

Required (to Build JDK from Source)

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), Zip-2.31, UnZip-5.52, cpio-2.6, ALSA-1.0.9, and Tcsh-6.14.00

Installation of JDK

Both versions will be installed in parallel. You may choose to keep either or both.

Install the precompiled JDK with the following commands:

export VERSION=1.5.0_03 &&
export MV=`echo $VERSION | cut -d "_" -f 1,1` &&
export V=`echo ${VERSION} | sed -e "s/\./_/g"` &&
sed -i "s:^PATH=.*::" jdk-${V}-linux-i?86.bin &&
chmod -v +x jdk-${V}-linux-i?86.bin &&
mkdir -v -p bin &&
ln -v -sf /bin/true bin/more &&
yes | PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH ./jdk-${V}-linux-i?86.bin &&
cd jdk${VERSION}

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d /opt/jdk/jdk-precompiled-${MV} &&
mv -v * /opt/jdk/jdk-precompiled-${MV}
chown -v -R root:root /opt/jdk/jdk-precompiled-${MV}

The binary version is now installed.

If you don't want to compile the source or are not in a position to download the source owing to license restrictions, skip ahead to the configuration section.

Add the recently installed JDK to the path.

export JAVA_HOME=/opt/jdk/jdk-precompiled-${MV} &&
export PATH=$PATH:${JAVA_HOME}/bin

Unzip the sources:

mkdir jdk-build &&
cd jdk-build &&
VERSION=1.5.0 &&
V=`echo $VERSION | sed -e "s/\./_/g"` &&
unzip ../jdk-${V}-src-jrl.zip &&
unzip ../jdk-${V}-bin-jrl.zip &&
unzip ../jdk-${V}-mozilla_headers-unix.zip

Apply all the patches downloaded above.

for PATCH in ../jdk-1.5.0*.patch
    do patch -Np1 -i ${PATCH}
done

Set/unset some variables which affect the build:

export ALT_BOOTDIR="$JAVA_HOME" &&
unset JAVA_HOME &&
unset CLASSPATH
unset CFLAGS
unset CXXFLAGS
unset LDFLAGS
export ALT_DEVTOOLS_PATH="/usr/bin" &&
export BUILD_NUMBER="blfs-6.1" &&
export DEV_ONLY=true &&
export ALT_MOZILLA_PATH=$PWD &&
export INSANE=true &&
export MAKE_VERBOSE=true &&
export ALT_CACERTS_FILE=${ALT_BOOTDIR}/jre/lib/security/cacerts

Warning

Setting CFLAGS/CXXFLAGS/LDFLAGS is guaranteed to make the build fail. If you are interested in optimizing the build, set OTHER_CFLAGS/OTHER_CXXFLAGS/OTHER_LDFLAGS instead. -O3, even in OTHER_C{,XX}FLAGS, is known to cause a build failure.

Additionally, if you would like to make in parallel, add the following:

export HOTSPOT_BUILD_JOBS=[3]

Build the JDK with the following commands. There will be a lot of messages about missing files that look like errors. These are caused by not meeting the expected build environment (Red Hat). As long as the build doesn't stop, the messages are harmless.

cd control/make &&
make &&
cd ../build/linux-i?86

Now, as the root user, install the JDK:

cp -v -a j2sdk-image /opt/jdk/jdk-1.5.0 &&
chown -v -R root:root /opt/jdk/jdk-1.5.0 &&
ln -sf motif21/libmawt.so  /opt/jdk/jdk-1.5.0/jre/lib/i386/

Restore the unprivileged user's environment using the following commands:

unset VERSION &&
unset MV &&
unset V &&
unset ALT_BOOTDIR &&
unset ALT_DEVTOOLS_PATH &&
unset BUILD_NUMBER &&
unset DEV_ONLY &&
unset ALT_MOZILLA_PATH &&
unset INSANE &&
unset MAKE_VERBOSE &&
unset ALT_CACERTS_FILE

Command Explanations

export ALT_BOOTDIR="$JAVA_HOME": This variable sets the location of the bootstrap JDK.

export ALT_MOZILLA_PATH=$PWD: This tells the build where to find the base directory of the plugin path (which contains the Mozilla headers).

export ALT_DEVTOOLS_PATH="/usr/bin": This changes the location where the build finds the needed executables.

export BUILD_NUMBER="blfs-6.1": This will help you identify the compiled version of the runtime environment and virtual machine by appending this information to the version string.

export DEV_ONLY=true: This command skips compiling the documentation and eliminates a dependency on rpm.

unset JAVA_HOME: This clears the JAVA_HOME variable as recommended by the build instructions.

unset CLASSPATH: This clears the CLASSPATH variable as recommended by the build instructions.

unset CFLAGS/CXXFLAGS...: These variables cause miscompilation of the build. Never set them.

export INSANE=true: The certified platform for the build is Redhat Enterprise Advanced Server 2.1. This variable ensures that all the errors related to compiling on a non-certified platform will be displayed as warnings instead of errors.

export MAKE_VERBOSE=true: Allows the compiler commands to be displayed on the console.

export ALT_CACERTS_FILE...: Specifies the certificate file to use (from the installed binary JDK).

ln -sf motif21/libmawt.so /opt/jdk/jdk-1.5.0/jre/lib/i386/: This fixes linking issues with other applications that expect to find the motif libraries with the other JDK libraries.

Configuring JDK

Configuration Information

There are now two Java 2 SDKs installed in /opt/jdk. You should decide on which one you would like to use as the default. For example if you decide to use the source compiled JDK, do the following as the root user:

ln -v -nsf jdk-1.5.0 /opt/jdk/jdk

Add the following jdk.sh shell startup file to the /etc/profile.d directory with the following commands as the root user:

cat > /etc/profile.d/jdk.sh << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/profile.d/jdk.sh

# Set JAVA_HOME directory
JAVA_HOME=/opt/jdk/jdk
export JAVA_HOME

# Adjust PATH
pathappend ${JAVA_HOME}/bin PATH

# Auto Java Classpath Updating
# Create symlinks to this directory for auto classpath setting
AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR=/usr/lib/classpath
if [ -z ${CLASSPATH} ]; then
        CLASSPATH=.:${AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR}
else
        CLASSPATH="${CLASSPATH}:.:${AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR}"
fi

# Check for empty AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR
ls ${AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR}/*.jar &> /dev/null &&
for i in ${AUTO_CLASSPATH_DIR}/*.jar
        do CLASSPATH=${CLASSPATH}:"${i}"
done
export CLASSPATH

# End /etc/profile.d/jdk.sh
EOF

The Java plugin is located in $JAVA_HOME/jre/plugin/i?86/ns7/. Make a symbolic link to the file in that directory from your browser(s) plugins directory.

Important

The plugin must be a symlink for it to work. If not, the browsers will crash when you attempt to load a Java application.

Installed Programs: appletviewer, extcheck, idlj, jar, jarsigner, java, javac, javadoc, javah, javap, javaws, jdb, keytool, native2ascii, orbd, policytool, rmic, rmid, rmiregistry, serialver, servertool, and tnameserv

Installed Libraries: $JAVA_HOME/lib/*, $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/*, and libjavaplugin_oji.so

Installed Directory: /opt/jdk

Short Descriptions

appletviewer	runs Java applets outside of the context of a browser.
extcheck	checks a specified `JAR` file for title and version conflicts with any extensions installed in the JDK software.
idlj	generates Java bindings from a given IDL file.
jar	combines multiple files into a single `JAR` archive file.
jarsigner	signs `JAR` (Java ARchive) files and verifies the signatures and integrity of a signed `JAR`.
java	launches a Java application by starting a Java runtime environment, loading a specified class and invoking its main method.
javac	reads class and interface definitions, written in the Java programming language, and compiles them into bytecode class files.
javadoc	parses the declarations and documentation comments in a set of Java source files and produces a corresponding set of HTML pages describing the classes, interfaces, constructors, methods, and fields.
javah	generates C header and source files that are needed to implement native methods.
javap	disassembles a Java class file.
javaws	launches Java application/applets hosted on a network.
jdb	is a simple command-line debugger for Java classes.
keytool	is a key and certificate management utility.
native2ascii	converts files that contain non-supported character encoding into files containing Latin-1 or Unicode-encoded characters.
orbd	is used to enable clients to transparently locate and invoke persistent objects on servers in the CORBA environment.
policytool	creates and manages a policy file graphically.
rmic	generates stub and skeleton class files for remote objects from the names of compiled Java classes that contain remote object implementations.
rmid	starts the activation system daemon.
rmiregistry	creates and starts a remote object registry on the specified port on the current host.
serialver	returns the serialVersionUID for one or more classes in a form suitable for copying into an evolving class.
servertool	provides an ease-of-use interface for application programmers to register, unregister, startup and shutdown a server.
tnameserv	starts the Java IDL name server.

Librep-0.17

Introduction to Librep

The librep package contains a Lisp system. This is useful for scripting or for applications that may use the Lisp interpreter as an extension language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/librep/librep-0.17.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: ad4ad851ff9f82a5d61024cd96bc2998
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 13.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.47 SBU

Librep Dependencies

Required

GDBM-1.8.3

Optional

GMP-4.1.4 and GCC-3.4.3 (build Java so that libffi is built)

Installation of Librep

Install librep by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/lib: This parameter installs files to /usr/lib/rep instead of /usr/libexec/rep.

Installed Programs: rep, rep-config, rep-remote, rep-xgettext, and repdoc

Installed Libraries: librep.so and numerous modules installed in the /usr/lib/rep hierarchy

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/rep, /usr/share/emacs/site-lisp, and /usr/share/rep

Short Descriptions

rep	is the Lisp interpreter.
`librep.so`	contains the functions necessary for the Lisp interpreter.

NASM-0.98.39

Introduction to NASM

NASM (Netwide Assembler) is an 80x86 assembler designed for portability and modularity. It includes a disassembler as well.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/nasm/nasm-0.98.39.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 2032ad44c7359f7a9a166a40a633e772
Download size: 543 KB
Estimated disk space required: 17.3 MB (includes building and installing all docs)
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch to fix a buffer overrun vulnerability: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/nasm-0.98.39-security_fix-1.patch

NASM Dependencies

Optional (for Building Documentation)

TeX-3.0, and ESP Ghostscript-7.07.1 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.51

Installation of NASM

Install NASM by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../nasm-0.98.39-security_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make &&
make -C rdoff/doc &&
make -C rdoff/doc html

To build the base NASM documentation, ensure you have Ghostscript installed and issue:

make doc

To build the RDOFF Postscript documentation, ensure you have TeX-3.0 installed and issue:

sed -i -e "s/dvips \$</& -o rdoff.ps/" rdoff/doc/Makefile &&
make -C rdoff/doc ps

To build the RDOFF PDF documentation, ensure you have Ghostscript installed and issue:

make -C rdoff/doc pdf

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install_rdf &&
install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/rdoff.info /usr/share/info &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/nasm/html &&
install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/v1-v2.txt /usr/share/doc/nasm &&
cp -v -R rdoff/doc/rdoff /usr/share/doc/nasm/html

If you built the Ghostscript generated documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

make install_doc &&
install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/rdoff.pdf /usr/share/doc/nasm

Lastly, if you built the RDOFF Postscript documentation, install it using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 rdoff/doc/rdoff.ps /usr/share/doc/nasm

Installed Programs: nasm, ndisasm, ldrdf, rdf2bin, rdf2com, rdf2ihx, rdfdump, rdflib, and rdx

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/nasm

Short Descriptions

nasm	is a portable 80x86 assembler.
ndisasm	is an 80x86 binary file disassembler.
ldrdf	is an RDOFF linker.
rdfdump	dumps the contents of an RDOFF file.
rdflib	is an RDOFF librarian.
rdx	is used to load and execute an RDOFF module.

PDL-2.4.2

Introduction to PDL

PDL (Perl Data Language) gives standard Perl the ability to compactly store and quickly manipulate the large N-dimensional data arrays common to scientific computing. PDL turns Perl into an array-oriented, numerical language similar to such commercial packages as IDL and MatLab. One can write simple Perl expressions to manipulate entire numerical arrays all at once.

PDL provides extensive numerical and semi-numerical functionality with support for two- and three-dimensional visualisation as well as a variety of I/O formats. The goal is to allow PDL to interact with a variety of external numerical packages, graphics and visualisation systems. Easy interfacing to such systems is one of the core design features of PDL.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/pdl/PDL-2.4.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: edd056a006eae8b46e8ef804b9774a93
Download size: 2.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 74 MB
Estimated build time: 2.56 SBU

PDL Dependencies

PDL is a collection of over 90 Perl modules. Some of these modules require additional libraries and/or Perl modules for full functionality. Listed below are the modules which require additional software or configuration. If you don't need a particular module's functionality, you don't need to install its dependencies. The dependency tree for each module is listed downward, meaning you'll need to start at the bottom of a module's tree and work up. The dependencies are listed in the same order as they are in the DEPENDENCIES file, found in the package source tree.

PDL::NiceSlice

The PDL::NiceSlice module is used to enhance PDL's slice syntax. “Slicing” is a term used in the process of creating a cross-section, or slice, of a PDL object (piddle).

Filter-1.30

Inline::Pdlpp

The Inline::Pdlpp module allows you to define fast PP code inline in your scripts.

Inline-0.44
- Parse-RecDescent-1.94

Perldl

perldl is a simple shell (written in Perl) which allows interactive use of PDL.

Term-ReadLine-Gnu-1.15

PDL::Graphics::TriD

The PDL::Graphics::TriD module implements a generic 3D plotting interface for PDL. Points, lines and surfaces (among other objects) are supported.

OpenGL (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2)

PDL::Graphics::PGPLOT

The PDL::Graphics::PGPLOT module is a convenience interface to the PGPLOT commands, implemented using the object oriented PGPLOT plotting package in the PDL::Graphics::PGPLOT::Window module.

pgperl
- ExtUtils-F77-1.14
  - GCC-3.4.3 (Fortran compiler)
- PGPLOT
  - X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), LessTif-0.94.4, Tk-8.4.11 and GCC-3.4.3 (Fortran compiler)

PDL::Graphics::PLPLOT

The PDL::Graphics::PLPLOT module is a simple interface to the PLplot plotting library.

PLplot
- pkg-config-0.19, X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), GTK+-1.2.10, FreeType-2.1.10, GD, SVGAlib, GNOME Libraries-1.4.2, JDK-1.5.0, Tk-8.4.11, Python-2.4.1 (with the Numerical Extension), GCC-3.4.3 (Fortran compiler), SWIG, iTcl

PDL::Graphics::IIS

The PDL::Graphics::IIS module provides an interface to any image display “device” which supports the “IIS protocol”.

SAOimage
- X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2)
X11 IRAF
- X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2) and Tk-8.4.11

PDL::Graphics::Karma

The PDL::Graphics::Karma module is an interface to Karma visualisation applications.

Karma
- X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2)

Note: You may need to modify the WHERE_KARMA => undef line in the source tree perldl.conf file to point to your installation of Karma

PDL::IO::Pic

The PDL::IO::Pic module implements I/O for a number of popular image formats by exploiting the xxxtopnm and pnmtoxxx converters from the Netpbm package and the cjpeg and djpeg converters. It also contains the routine wmpeg to write MPEG movies from piddles representing image stacks.

Netpbm, libjpeg-6b and mpeg_encode

PDL::Slatec

The PDL::Slatec module serves the dual purpose of providing an interface to parts of the slatec library and showing how to interface PDL to an external library. The module provides routines to manipulate matrices, calculate FFTs, fit data using polynomials, and interpolate/integrate data using piecewise cubic Hermite interpolation.

ExtUtils-F77-1.14
- GCC-3.4.3 (Fortran compiler)

PDL::GSL

The PDL::GSL module is an interface to the functions provided by the Gnu Scientific Library.

PDL::FFTW

The PDL::FFTW module is a means to interface PDL with the FFTW library. It's similar to the standard FFT routine but it's usually faster and has support for real transforms. It works well for the types of piddles for which the library was compiled (otherwise it must do conversions).

FFTW-2.x

PDL::IO::Browser

The PDL::IO::Browser module is a 2D cursor terminal data browser for piddles.

There is no additional software required to use the module. However, the default is to not install the module because some platforms don't provide a curses compatible library. To enable the module, issue the following command:

sed -i -e "s/WITH_IO_BROWSER => 0/WITH_IO_BROWSER => 1/" \
    perldl.conf

PDL::IO::NDF

The PDL::IO::NDF module adds the ability to read and write Starlink N-dimensional data files as N-dimensional piddles.

Astro-FITS-Header-2.8.1
- Astro-FITS-CFITSIO-1.03
  - CFITSIO
- NDFPERL-1.45
  - Starlink-Config-1.00
    
    Starlink IMG
    
    Starlink NDF
    
    GCC-3.4.3 (Fortran compiler)
- GSDPERL-1.13
  - Starlink-Config-1.00
    
    Starlink GSD
    
    GCC-3.4.3 (Fortran compiler)

Installation of PDL

Install PDL (and all the dependency Perl modules) by running the following commands:

perl Makefile.PL &&
make &&
make test

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring PDL

Config Files

~/.perldlrc and local.perldlrc in the current directory

Configuration Information

See http://pdl.sourceforge.net/PDLdocs/perldl.html#the startup file ~/.perldlrc for information about configuring perldl to suit your needs.

Installed Programs: pdl, pdldoc, perldl, and pptemplate

Installed Modules: 90+ individual Perl modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.6/i686-linux/{,auto/}PDL

Short Descriptions

pdl	is a binary program called from PDL scripts which is used to interface perldl.
pdldoc	is a shell interface to PDL documentation.
perldl	is a simple shell (written in Perl) for interactive use of PDL.
pptemplate	is a script to generate `Makefile.PL` and PP file skeletons.

Perl Modules

Introduction to Perl Modules

The Perl module packages add useful objects to the Perl language. Modules utilized by packages throughout BLFS are listed here, along with their dependencies. Most references to Perl modules are in the form of Module, Module::SubName or Module::Sub::Name, however occasionally you'll also see Module, Module-SubName or Module-Sub-Name. Most references on this page are in the latter form, as these are the official package names.

Download MD5 sums (HTTP): http://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/sources/BLFS/SVN/Perl_Modules/Perl_Modules.gz.md5sums
Download MD5 sums (FTP): ftp://anduin.linuxfromscratch.org/BLFS/SVN/Perl_Modules/Perl_Modules.gz.md5sums

The Module::Info Module

One module in particular is shown first, as this module's usefulness warrants installation, even though it won't be required by many other modules. The Module::Info module can tell you if a particular module is included in, or has been installed into your Perl installation. Additionally, Module::Info can tell you what versions are installed and what dependencies are required for them. You can even use Module::Info to gather dependencies of uninstalled modules.

Module-Info-0.28 (build and installation instructions)

The Test::Pod Module

Another useful module, and one which is (typically optionally) used by other modules during the build process is the Test:Pod module. This module is used to check the validity of POD (Plain Old Documentation) files. The Test::Pod module is typically included by module authors to automatically find and check all POD files in a module distribution. This module and all the dependencies can be installed using the build and installation instructions.

Test-Pod-1.20
- Pod-Simple-3.02
  - Pod-Escapes-1.04
- Test-Builder-Tester-1.01

The Module::Build Module

The Module::Build module is a system for building, testing, and installing Perl modules. It is meant to be an alternative to ExtUtils::MakeMaker. Developers may alter the behavior of the module through subclassing in a much more straightforward way than with MakeMaker. It also does not require a make command on your system. Most of the Module::Build code is pure-Perl and written in a very cross-platform way.

The Module::Build module (as well as any other Perl module that uses the Module::Build build system) uses modified build instructions. All the dependencies can be installed using the build and installation instructions.

Note

The Compress::Zlib module requires the following sed after untarring the distribution tarball (before any other build commands) to use the system-installed copy of Zlib.

sed -i -e "s|BUILD_ZLIB = True|BUILD_ZLIB = False|" \
       -e "s|INCLUDE    = ./zlib-src|INCLUDE    = /usr/include|" \
       -e "s|LIB        = ./zlib-src|LIB        = /usr/lib|" \
    config.in

Module-Build-0.2611
- Module-Signature-0.44 (optional)
- ExtUtils-ParseXS-2.11
  - ExtUtils-CBuilder-0.12
- Archive-Tar-1.24
  - IO-Zlib-1.04
    
    Compress-Zlib-1.34
  - Test::Pod
- YAML-0.39

Module::Build Build and Installation Instructions

perl Build.PL &&
./Build test

Now, as the root user:

./Build install

The HTML::Parser Module

The HTML::Parser distribution is a collection of modules that parse and extract information from HTML documents. In order to use the included HTML::HeadParser module, you will also need to install LWP. The two modules listed below can be installed using the Perl Module build and installation instructions.

HTML-Parser-3.45
- HTML-Tagset-3.04

The XML::Parser Module

The XML::Parser module is a Perl extension interface to James Clark's XML parser, expat. The module can be installed using the Perl Module build and installation instructions.

XML-Parser-2.34
- expat-1.95.8

The SGMLSpm Module

The SGMLSpm module is a Perl library used for parsing the output from James Clark's SGMLS and NSGMLS parsers. This module requires modified installation instructions, shown below.

SGMLSpm-1.03ii

If your system's Perl version is different than 5.8.6, you'll need to modify the sed command below to reflect the version you have installed.

sed -i -e "s@/usr/local/bin@/usr/bin@" \
       -e "s@/usr/local/lib/perl5@/usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.6@" \
       -e "s@/usr/local/lib/www/docs@/usr/share/doc/perl5@" \
    Makefile

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/perl5 &&
make install_html &&
rm -v -f /usr/share/doc/perl5/SGMLSpm/sample.pl &&
install -v -m644 DOC/sample.pl /usr/share/doc/perl5/SGMLSpm

The Tk Module

The Tk module is a Perl interface to the Tk package. The goal of this release is Unicode support via Perl's and core-Tk's use of UTF-8. Tk-804.027 builds and loads into a threaded Perl but is NOT yet thread safe. The module can be installed using the Perl Module build and installation instructions.

Tk-804.027
- Tk-8.4.11 and libjpeg-6b

The Net::DNS Module

Net::DNS is a DNS resolver implemented in Perl. It can be used to perform nearly any type of DNS query from a Perl script. The Net::DNS module and all its dependencies can be installed using the Perl Module build and installation instructions.

Net-DNS-0.52
- Digest-HMAC-1.01
  - Digest-SHA1-2.10
- Net-IP-1.23
- IO-Socket-INET6-2.51 (required for IPv6 support)
  - Socket6-0.18
- Digest-BubbleBabble-0.01 (optional, only used during the test suite)

The LWP Module

The libwww-perl (LWP) collection is a set of Perl modules which provides a simple and consistent application programming interface to the World-Wide Web. The main focus of the library is to provide classes and functions that allow you to write WWW clients. The library also contains modules that are of more general use and even classes that help you implement simple HTTP servers. The LWP modules and all its Perl module dependencies can be installed using the Perl Module build and installation instructions.

Note

The Compress::Zlib module requires the following sed after untarring the distribution tarball (before any other build commands) to use the system-installed copy of Zlib.

sed -i -e "s|BUILD_ZLIB = True|BUILD_ZLIB = False|" \
       -e "s|INCLUDE    = ./zlib-src|INCLUDE    = /usr/include|" \
       -e "s|LIB        = ./zlib-src|LIB        = /usr/lib|" \
    config.in

LWP-5.803
- URI-1.35
  - Business-ISBN-1.80 (optional, only used during the test suite)
    
    Business-ISBN-Data-1.10
    
    Test::Pod
    
    Test-Prereq-1.027
    
    Module::Info
    
    Module::Build (optional)
    
    Module-CoreList-2.02
- HTML::Parser
- Compress-Zlib-1.34
- Crypt-SSLeay-0.51 (optional, for HTTPS support)
  - OpenSSL-0.9.7g

The Date::Manip Module

Date::Manip is a set of routines designed to make any common date/time manipulation easy to do. Operations such as comparing two times, calculating a time a given amount of time from another, or parsing international times are all easily done. From the very beginning, the main focus of Date::Manip has been to be able to do ANY desired date/time operation easily.

DateManip-5.44 (build and installation instructions)

The Finance::Quote Module

Finance::Quote is used to get stock quotes from various Internet sources, including Yahoo! Finance, Fidelity Investments, and the Australian Stock Exchange. There are two methods of using this module – a functional interface that is depreciated, and an object-orientated method that provides greater flexibility and stability. With the exception of straight currency exchange rates, all information is returned as a two-dimensional hash (or a reference to such a hash, if called in a scalar context).

After you've installed the package, issue perldoc Finance::Quote for full information. Alternatively, you can issue perldoc lib/Finance/Quote.pm after unpacking the distribution tarball and changing into the top-level directory. The module and dependencies can be installed using the Perl module build and installation instructions.

Note

To run the regression test suite, you'll need to create a symbolic link to the test directory using the following command after unpacking the tarball and changing into the root directory of the sources:

ln -s test t

Some tests will fail depending on certain conditions. See the INSTALL file for full details.

Finance-Quote-1.10
- HTML-TableExtract-2.02
  - HTML::Parser
- LWP

The Finance::QuoteHist Module

The Finance::QuoteHist bundle is several modules designed to fetch historical stock quotes from the web. The module and dependencies can be installed using the Perl module build and installation instructions.

Finance-QuoteHist-1.00

Standard Installation of Perl Modules

Install Perl modules by running the following commands:

perl Makefile.PL &&
make &&
make test

Now, as the root user:

make install

(Alternate) Auto Installation of Perl Modules.

There is an alternate way of installing the modules using Perl's built-in install command. The command automatically downloads the source from the CPAN archive, extracts it, runs the commands mentioned above, and removes the build tree. You may still need to install dependent library packages before running the automated installation method.

The first time you run this command, you'll be prompted to enter some information regarding download locations and methods. This information is retained in files located in ~/.cpan. Start the perl shell with the following command as the root user:

perl -MCPAN -e shell

Each module may now be installed from this shell with the command:

install [Module::Name]

For additional commands and help, type help.

Alternatively, for scripted or non-interactive installations, use the following syntax as the root user:

perl -MCPAN -e 'install [Module::Name]'

PHP-5.0.4

Introduction to PHP

PHP is the PHP Hypertext Preprocessor. Primarily used in dynamic web sites, it allows for programming code to be directly embedded into the HTML markup.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://us2.php.net/distributions/php-5.0.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isu.edu.tw/pub/Unix/Web/PHP/distributions/php-5.0.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: fb1aac107870f897d26563a9cc5053c0
Download size: 4.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 126 MB
Estimated build time: 1.82 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch for Berkeley DB: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/php-5.0.4-db43-1.patch

PHP Dependencies

Required

Apache-2.0.54

Optional

libxml2-2.6.20, libxslt-1.1.14, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, ClibPDF, libjpeg-6b, libtiff-3.7.3, cURL-7.14.0, QDBM, cdb, GDBM-1.8.3, Berkeley DB-4.3.28, FAM-2.7.0, GD, libpng-1.2.8, X (X.org-6.8.2 or XFree86-4.5.0), FreeType-2.1.10, t1lib, GMP-4.1.4 MySQL-4.1.12, PCRE-6.1, PostgreSQL-8.0.3, Aspell-0.60.3, pkg-config-0.19, HTML Tidy-050722, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, Cyrus SASL-2.1.21, MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7, libmcrypt, mhash, OSSP mm, Net-SNMP, SQLite, Dmalloc, mnoGoSearch, Mini SQL, Empress, Birdstep, DBMaker, Adabas, FrontBase, Caudium, WDDX, FDF Toolkit, Hyperwave, Monetra, expat-1.95.8 and MTA

Installation of PHP

Note

You can use PHP for server-side scripting, command line scripting or client-side GUI applications. The book provides instructions for setting up PHP for server-side scripting as it is the most common form.

If you have Berkeley DB installed and wish to utilize it, apply the following patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../php-5.0.4-db43-1.patch

Install PHP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --sysconfdir=/etc \
            --with-apxs2 \
            --with-config-file-path=/etc \
            --with-zlib \
            --enable-bcmath \
            --with-bz2 \
            --enable-calendar \
            --enable-dba \
            --enable-exif \
            --enable-ftp \
            --with-gettext \
            --enable-mbstring \
            --with-ncurses \
            --with-readline \
            --disable-libxml &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
cp -v php.ini-recommended /etc/php.ini

Remove the --disable-libxml switch if you have libxml2-2.6.20 installed otherwise pear will not be built.

Note

PHP has many more configure options that will enable support for certain things. You can use ./configure --help to see a full list of the available options. Also, use of the PHP web site is highly recommended, as their online docs are very good.

Command Explanations

--with-apxs2: This parameter builds the Apache 2.0 module.

--with-config-file-path=/etc: This parameter puts the php.ini configuration file in /etc.

--with-zlib: This parameter adds support for Zlib compression.

--enable-bcmath: Enables bc style precision math functions.

--with-bz2: Add support for bz2 compression functions.

--enable-calendar: This parameter provides support for calendar conversion.

--enable-dba: This parameter enables numerous database support including Berkeley DB functions.

--enable-exif: Enables functions to access metadata from images.

--enable-ftp: This parameter enables FTP functions.

--with-gettext: Enables functions that use Gettext text translation.

--enable-mbstring: This parameter enables multibyte string support.

--with-ncurses: Provides ncurses terminal independent cursor handling.

--with-readline: This parameter enables command line readline support.

--disable-libxml: This parameter disables XML support functions.

Configuring PHP

Config Files

/etc/php.ini, /etc/pear.conf

Configuration Information

To enable PHP support in the Apache web server, a new LoadModule (which should be handled automatically by the make install command) and AddType directives must be added to the httpd.conf file:

LoadModule php5_module lib/apache/libphp5.so
AddType application/x-httpd-php .php

Also, it can be useful to add an entry for index.php to the DirectoryIndex directive of the httpd.conf file.

You'll need to restart the Apache web server after making any modifications to the httpd.conf file.

Installed Programs: pear, php, php-config, phpextdist, and phpize

Installed Library: libphp5.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/php and /usr/lib/php

Short Descriptions

php	is a command line interface that enables you to parse and execute PHP code.
pear	is the PHP Extension and Application Repository (PEAR) package manager.

Python-2.4.1

Introduction to Python

The Python package contains the Python development environment. This is useful for object-oriented programming, writing scripts, prototyping large programs or developing entire applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.python.org/ftp/python/2.4.1/Python-2.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.python.org/pub/python/2.4.1/Python-2.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: de3e9a8836fab6df7c7ce545331afeb3
Download size: 7.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 115 MB
Estimated build time: 0.91 SBU (additional 2.20 SBU to run the testsuite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/Python-2.4.1-gdbm-1.patch

Python Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Tk-8.4.11, GDBM-1.8.3 and Berkeley DB-4.3.28

Installation of Python

Install Python by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../Python-2.4.1-gdbm-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note

There is no documentation installed using the instructions above. However, There are LaTeX sources included with the distribution. See the Doc/README file in the source distribution for instructions to format the LaTeX sources. Alternatively, you can download preformatted documentation from http://www.python.org/doc/current/download.html.

Installed Programs: pydoc, python, python2.4, smtpd.py, and optionally if Tk is installed, idle

Installed Libraries: libpython2.4.so and numerous modules installed in /usr/lib/python2.4/lib-dynload

Installed Directories: /usr/include/python2.4 and /usr/lib/python2.4

Short Descriptions

idle	is a wrapper script that opens a Python aware GUI editor.
pydoc	is the Python documentation tool.
python	is an interpreted, interactive, object-oriented programming language.
python2.4	is a version-specific name for the python program.
smtpd.py	is an SMTP proxy implemented in Python.

Ruby-1.8.2

Introduction to Ruby

The Ruby package contains the Ruby development environment. This is useful for object-oriented scripting.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.ibiblio.org/pub/languages/ruby/ruby/ruby-1.8.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ruby-lang.org/pub/ruby/ruby-1.8.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8ffc79d96f336b80f2690a17601dea9b
Download size: 3.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 55.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch to fix a vulnerability which allows remote attackers to execute arbitrary commands: http://www.ruby-lang.org/patches/ruby-1.8.2-xmlrpc-ipimethods-fix.diff

Ruby Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Tk-8.4.11, Berkeley DB-4.3.28 and GDBM-1.8.3

Installation of Ruby

Install Ruby by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../ruby-1.8.2-xmlrpc-ipimethods-fix.diff &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-shared \
    --enable-pthread --enable-install-doc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-shared: This parameter builds the libruby shared library.

--enable-pthread: This parameter links the threading library into the Ruby build.

Installed Programs: ruby, irb, erb, rdoc, ri, and testrb

Installed Libraries: libruby.so and numerous modules located in the /usr/lib/ruby hierarchy.

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/ruby and /usr/share/ri

Short Descriptions

ruby	is an interpreted scripting language for quick and easy object-oriented programming.
irb	is the interactive interface for Ruby.
erb	is Tiny eRuby. It interprets a Ruby code embedded text file.
ri	displays documentation from a database on Ruby classes, modules and methods.
`libruby.so`	contains the API functions required by Ruby.

Tcl-8.4.11

Introduction to Tcl

The Tcl package contains the Tool Command Language, a robust general-purpose scripting language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/tcl/tcl8.4.11-src.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 629dfea34e4087eb4683f834060abb63
Download size: 3.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 22.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (additional 0.9 SBU to run the test suite)

Installation of Tcl

Note

This package is also installed in LFS during the bootstrap phase. At the time of the LFS-6.1 release, 8.4.11 was not available. The significant difference between the two installations (other than installing to /usr) is that the package is installed in such a way that there is no need to keep the build directory around after installation.

Install Tcl by running the following commands:

export VERSION=8.4.11 &&
export V=`echo $VERSION | cut -d "." -f 1,2` &&
export DIR=$PWD &&
cd unix &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-threads &&
make &&
sed -i "s:${DIR}/unix:/usr/lib:" tclConfig.sh &&
sed -i "s:${DIR}:/usr/include/tcl${V}:" tclConfig.sh &&
sed -i "s,^TCL_LIB_FILE='libtcl${V}..TCL_DBGX..so',\
TCL_LIB_FILE=\"libtcl${V}\$\{TCL_DBGX\}.so\"," tclConfig.sh

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d /usr/include/tcl${V}/unix &&
install -v -m644 *.h /usr/include/tcl${V}/unix/ &&
install -v -d /usr/include/tcl${V}/generic &&
install -v -c -m644 ../generic/*.h /usr/include/tcl${V}/generic/ &&
rm -v -f /usr/include/tcl${V}/generic/{tcl,tclDecls,tclPlatDecls}.h &&
ln -v -nsf ../../include/tcl${V} /usr/lib/tcl${V}/include &&
ln -v -sf libtcl${V}.so /usr/lib/libtcl.so &&
ln -v -sf tclsh${V} /usr/bin/tclsh

Clean up the unprivileged user's environment using the following commands:

unset VERSION &&
unset V &&
unset DIR

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This switch forces the package to build with thread support.

sed -i ...: The Tcl package assumes that the source used to build Tcl is always kept around for compiling packages that depend on Tcl. These seds remove the reference to the build directory and replace them by saner system-wide locations.

install ...: These commands install the internal headers into a system-wide location.

ln -v -sf ...: These commands create compatibility symbolic links.

Installed Programs: tclsh and tclsh8.4

Installed Libraries: libtcl.so and libtclstub8.4.a

Installed Directories: /usr/include/tcl8.4 and /usr/lib/tcl8.4

Short Descriptions

tclsh	is a symlink to the tclsh8.4 program.
tclsh8.4	is a simple shell containing the Tcl interpreter.
`libtcl.so`	contains the API functions required by Tcl.

Tk-8.4.11

Introduction to Tk

The Tk package contains a TCL GUI Toolkit.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/tcl/tk8.4.11-src.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 408e34fe8a1cec497f98f05bbe89b348
Download size: 3.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 21.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Tk Dependencies

Required

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2) and Tcl-8.4.11

Installation of Tk

Install Tk by running the following commands:

export VERSION=8.4.11 &&
export V=`echo $VERSION | cut -d "." -f 1,2` &&
export DIR=$PWD &&
cd unix &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-threads &&
make &&
sed -i "s:${DIR}/unix:/usr/lib:" tkConfig.sh &&
sed -i "s:${DIR}:/usr/include/tk${V}:" tkConfig.sh

The test is not recommended. Some tests may crash your X Server. To test the results, issue: make test. Ensure you run it from an X Window display device with the GLX extensions loaded, else the tests will hang.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d /usr/include/tk${V}/unix &&
install -v -m644 *.h /usr/include/tk${V}/unix/ &&
install -v -d /usr/include/tk${V}/generic &&
install -v -m644 ../generic/*.h /usr/include/tk${V}/generic/ &&
rm -v -f /usr/include/tk${V}/generic/{tk,tkDecls,tkPlatDecls}.h &&
ln -v -nsf ../../include/tk${V} /usr/lib/tk${V}/include &&
ln -v -sf libtk${V}.so /usr/lib/libtk.so &&
ln -v -sf wish${V} /usr/bin/wish

Clean up the unprivileged user's environment using the following commands:

unset VERSION &&
unset V &&
unset DIR

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This switch forces the package to build with thread support.

sed -i ...: The Tk package assumes that the source used to build Tk is always kept around for compiling packages that depend on Tk. These seds remove the reference to the build directory and replace them by saner system-wide locations.

install ...: These commands install the internal headers into a system-wide location.

ln -v -sf ...: These commands create compatibility symbolic links.

Installed Programs: wish and wish8.4

Installed Libraries: libtk.so and libtkstub8.4.a

Installed Directories: /usr/include/tk8.4 and /usr/lib/tk8.4

Short Descriptions

wish	is a symlink to the wish8.4 program.
wish8.4	is a simple shell containing the Tk toolkit that creates a main window and then processes Tcl commands.
`libtk.so`	contains the API functions required by Tk.

Other Programming Tools

Introduction

This section is provided to show you some additional programming tools for which instructions have not yet been created in the book or for those that are not appropriate for the book. Note that these packages may not have been tested by the BLFS team, but their mention here is meant to be a convenient source of additional information.

Boost

Boost provides free peer-reviewed portable C++ source libraries. The emphasis is on libraries which work well with the C++ Standard Library. The libraries are intended to be widely useful, and are in regular use by thousands of programmers across a broad spectrum of applications, platforms and programming environments.

Project Home Page: http://www.boost.org/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/boost/

DDD (GNU Data Display Debugger)

GNU DDD is a graphical front-end for command-line debuggers such as GDB, DBX, WDB, Ladebug, JDB, XDB, the Perl debugger, the Bash debugger, or the Python debugger. Besides “usual” front-end features such as viewing source texts, DDD has an interactive graphical data display, where data structures are displayed as graphs..

Project Home Page: http://www.gnu.org/software/ddd/
Download Location: http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/ddd/

cachecc1

cachecc1 is a GCC cache. It can be compared with the well known ccache package. It has some unique features including the use of an LD_PRELOADed shared object to catch invocations to cc1, cc1plus and as, it transparently supports all build methods, it can cache GCC bootstraps and it can be combined with distcc to transparently distribute compilations.

Project Home Page: http://cachecc1.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/cachecc1

ccache

ccache is a compiler cache. It acts as a caching pre-processor to C/C++ compilers, using the -E compiler switch and a hash to detect when a compilation can be satisfied from cache. This often results in 5 to 10 times faster speeds in common compilations.

Project Home Page: http://ccache.samba.org/
Download Location: http://ccache.samba.org/ftp/ccache/

distcc

distcc is a program to distribute builds of C, C++, Objective C or Objective C++ code across several machines on a network. distcc should always generate the same results as a local build, is simple to install and use, and is usually much faster than a local compile. distcc does not require all machines to share a filesystem, have synchronized clocks, or to have the same libraries or header files installed. They can even have different processors or operating systems, if cross-compilers are installed.

Project Home Page: http://distcc.samba.org/
Download Location: http://distcc.samba.org/download.html

Euphoria

Euphoria is a simple, flexible, and easy-to-learn programming language. It lets you quickly and easily develop programs for Windows, DOS, Linux and FreeBSD. Euphoria was first released in 1993. Since then Rapid Deployment Software has been steadily improving it with the help of a growing number of enthusiastic users. Although Euphoria provides subscript checking, uninitialized variable checking and numerous other run-time checks, it is extremely fast. People have used it to develop high-speed DOS games, Windows GUI programs, and Linux X Windows programs. It is also very useful for CGI (Web-based) programming.

Project Home Page: http://www.rapideuphoria.com/
Download Location: http://www.rapideuphoria.com/v20.htm

FFTW (Fastest Fourier Transform in the West)

FFTW is a C subroutine library for computing the discrete Fourier transform (DFT) in one or more dimensions, of arbitrary input size, and of both real and complex data (as well as of even/odd data, i.e., the discrete cosine/sine transforms or DCT/DST).

Project Home Page: http://www.fftw.org/
Download Location: http://www.fftw.org/download.html

GDB (GNU Debugger)

GDB is the GNU Project debugger. It allows you to see what is going on “inside” another program while it executes. It also allows you to see what another program was doing at the moment it crashed.

Project Home Page: http://www.gnu.org/software/gdb/
Download Location: ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/gdb/

GOB (GObject Builder)

GOB (GOB2 anyway) is a preprocessor for making GObjects with inline C code so that generated files are not edited. Syntax is inspired by Java and Yacc or Lex. The implementation is intentionally kept simple, and no C actual code parsing is done.

Project Home Page: http://www.5z.com/jirka/gob.html
Download Location: http://ftp.5z.com/pub/gob/

gocache (GNU Object Cache)

ccache is clone of ccache, with the goal of supporting other compilers than GCC and adding additional features. Embedded compilers will especially be in focus.

Project Home Page: http://sourceforge.net/projects/gocache/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/gocache/

GTK+/GNOME Language Bindings (wrappers)

GTK+/GNOME language bindings allow GTK+ to be used from other programming languages, in the style of those languages.

Project Home Page: http://www.gtk.org/bindings.html

gtkmm

gtkmm is the official C++ interface for the popular GUI library GTK+. Highlights include typesafe callbacks, widgets extensible via inheritance and a comprehensive set of widgets. You can create user interfaces either in code or with the Glade designer, using libglademm.

Project Home Page: http://www.gtkmm.org/
Download Location: http://www.gtkmm.org/download.shtml

Java-GNOME

Java-GNOME is a set of Java bindings for the GNOME and GTK+ libraries that allow GNOME and GTK+ applications to be written in Java. The Java-GNOME API has been carefully designed to be easy to use, maintaining a good OO paradigm, yet still wrapping the entire functionality of the underlying libraries. Java-GNOME can be used with the Eclipse development environment and Glade user interface designer to create applications with ease.

Project Home Page: http://java-gnome.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/bin/view
Download Location: http://java-gnome.sourceforge.net/cgi-bin/bin/view/Main/GetJavaGnome#Source_Code

gtk2-perl

gtk2-perl is the collective name for a set of perl bindings for GTK+ 2.x and various related libraries. These modules make it easy to write GTK and GNOME applications using a natural, perlish, object-oriented syntax.

Project Home Page: http://gtk2-perl.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/gtk2-perl

PyGTK

PyGTK provides a convenient wrapper for the GTK library for use in Python programs, and takes care of many of the boring details such as managing memory and type casting. When combined with PyORBit and gnome-python, it can be used to write full featured GNOME applications.

Project Home Page: http://www.pygtk.org/
Download Location: http://www.pygtk.org/downloads.html

KDE Language Bindings

KDE and most KDE applications are implemented using the C++ programming language, however there are number of bindings to other languages are available. These include scripting languages like Perl, Python and Ruby, and systems programming languages such as Java and C#.

Project Home Page: http://developer.kde.org/language-bindings/

Numerical Python (Numpy)

Numerical Python adds a fast array facility to the Python language.

Project Home Page: http://numeric.scipy.org/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/numpy/

Perl Scripts and Additional Modules

There are many Perl scripts and additional modules located on the Comprehensive Perl Archive Network (CPAN) web site. Here you will find “All Things Perl”.

Project Home Page: http://cpan.org/

SCons

SCons is an Open Source software construction tool, i.e, a next-generation build tool. Think of SCons as an improved, cross-platform substitute for the classic make utility with integrated functionality similar to Autoconf/Automake and compiler caches such as ccache.

Project Home Page: http://scons.sourceforge.net/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/scons/

strace

strace is a system call tracer, i.e., a debugging tool which prints out a trace of all the system calls made by another process or program.

Project Home Page: http://www.liacs.nl/~wichert/strace/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/strace/

SWIG

SWIG is a software development tool that connects programs written in C and C++ with a variety of high-level programming languages. SWIG is used with different types of languages including common scripting languages such as Perl, Python, Tcl/Tk and Ruby. The list of supported languages also includes non-scripting languages such as C#, Common Lisp (Allegro CL), Java, Modula-3 and OCAML. Also several interpreted and compiled Scheme implementations (Chicken, Guile, MzScheme) are supported. SWIG is most commonly used to create high-level interpreted or compiled programming environments, user interfaces, and as a tool for testing and prototyping C/C++ software. SWIG can also export its parse tree in the form of XML and Lisp s-expressions.

Project Home Page: http://www.swig.org/
Download Location: http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/swig/

Valgrind

Valgrind is a collection of five tools: two memory error detectors, a thread error detector, a cache profiler and a heap profiler used for debugging and profiling Linux programs. Features include automatic detection of many memory management and threading bugs as well as detailed profiling to speed up and reduce memory use of your programs.

Project Home Page: http://valgrind.org/
Download Location: http://valgrind.org/downloads/source_code.html

Connecting to a Network

The LFS book covers setting up networking by connecting to a LAN with a static IP address. There are other methods used to connect to a LAN and other networks (such as the Internet). The most popular methods are covered in this chapter.

13. Dial-up Networking
- PPP-2.4.3
- WvDial-1.54.0
14. DHCP Clients
- DHCP-3.0.2 Client
- Dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4
15. Other Connections
- RP-PPPoE-3.5

Chapter 13. Dial-up Networking

This chapter provides utilities for system interaction with a modem.

PPP-2.4.3

Introduction to PPP

The PPP package contains the pppd daemon and the chat program. This is used for connecting to other machines; often for connecting to the Internet via a dial-up or PPPoE connection to an ISP.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ccache.samba.org/ftp/ppp/ppp-2.4.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/ppp/ppp-2.4.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 848f6c3cafeb6074ffeb293c3af79b7c
Download size: 672 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.13 SBU

PPP Dependencies

Required

libpcap-0.9.3

Installation of PPP

Note

PPP support must be compiled into the kernel or available as a kernel module.

Install PPP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-etcppp

Command Explanations

make install-etcppp: This command puts example configuration files in /etc/ppp.

Configuring PPP

Config Files

/etc/ppp/*

Configuration Information

The PPP daemon requires very little configuration. The main trick is scripting the connection. This can be done either using the chat program which comes with this package or by using WvDial-1.54.0.

Installed Programs: chat, pppd, pppdump, pppoe-discovery and pppstats

Installed Libraries: Several plugin modules installed in /usr/lib/pppd/2.4.3

Installed Directories: /etc/ppp, /usr/include/pppd and /usr/lib/pppd

Short Descriptions

chat	defines a conversational exchange between the computer and the modem. Its primary purpose is to establish the connection between the Point-to-Point Protocol Daemon (PPPD) and the remote pppd process.
pppd	is the Point to Point Protocol daemon.
pppdump	is used to convert PPP record files to a readable format.
pppstats	is used to print PPP statistics.

WvDial-1.54.0

Introduction to WvDial

The WvDial package contains a no-nonsense, quick and easy to use alternative to chat and pppd scripts. If you simply want to dial a modem without the fuss and hassle of chat issues, then you'll want this.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://open.nit.ca/download/wvdial-1.54.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ing-steen.se/pub/unix/unsort/wvdial-1.54.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8648c044305fc66ee33ecc55d36f8c8b
Download size: 66 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.06 SBU

WvDial Dependencies

Required

WvStreams-4.0.1 and PPP-2.4.3

Installation of WvDial

Install WvDial by running the following commands:

make PREFIX=/usr

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr install

Configuring WvDial

Config Files

/etc/wvdial.conf and /etc/ppp/peers/*

Configuration Information

Perform the following two commands as the root user:

touch /etc/wvdial.conf &&
wvdialconf /etc/wvdial.conf

wvdialconf will test that you have a working modem and try to determine its exact setup. You will then need to enter your ISP's phone number, login name and password into the /etc/wvdial.conf file.

You then start wvdial with:

wvdial

For more information, examine the wvdialconf, wvdial.conf and wvdial man pages. Also, have a look at the Non-Root Dial Out HOWTO if you want to give non-root users access to wvdial.

Installed Programs: wvdial and wvdialconf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /etc/ppp/peers

Short Descriptions

wvdial	starts a PPP connection.
wvdialconf	automates the configuration of wvdial.

Chapter 14. DHCP Clients

DHCP stands for Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol. It is a protocol used by many sites to automatically provide information such as IP addresses, subnet masks and routing information to computers. If your network uses DHCP, you will need a DHCP client in order to connect to it. DHCP is also used by some cable modems.

BLFS currently provides installation instructions for two DHCP clients, dhclient (from the dhcp package) and dhcpcd. BLFS presents both sets of installation instructions and discusses how to create an appropriate service script to work with the network bootscript and the DHCP client of your choice.

DHCP-3.0.2 Client

The DHCP package comes with both a client (dhclient) and a server program for using DHCP. If you want to install this package, the instructions can be found at DHCP-3.0.2. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links provided for the server daemon. You only need to run the DHCP server if you're providing this service to a network, and it's likely that you'll know if that's the case; if it isn't, don't run the server! Once you have installed the package, return here for information on how to configure the client (dhclient).

Configuring DHCP Client

To configure dhclient, you need to first install the network service script, /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/services/dhclient included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package (as root):

make install-service-dhclient

Next, create the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhclient configuration file with the following commands as the root user. Adjust as necessary for additional interfaces:

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhclient << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="dhclient"
DHCP_START="-q [add additional start parameters here]"
DHCP_STOP="-q -r [add additional stop parameters here]"

# Set PRINTIP="yes" to have the script print
# the DHCP assigned IP address
PRINTIP="no"

# Set PRINTALL="yes" to print the DHCP assigned values for
# IP, SM, DG, and 1st NS. This requires PRINTIP="yes".
PRINTALL="no"
EOF

For more information on the appropriate DHCP_START and DHCP_STOP values, examine the man page for dhclient.

Finally, you should create the /etc/dhclient.conf file using the following commands as the root user:

Note

You'll need to add a second interface definition to the file if you have more than one interface.

cat > /etc/dhclient.conf << "EOF"
# dhclient.conf

interface "eth0"{
prepend domain-name-servers 127.0.0.1;
request subnet-mask, broadcast-address, time-offset, routers,
        domain-name, domain-name-servers, host-name;
require subnet-mask, domain-name-servers;
}
# end dhclient.conf
EOF

Dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4

Introduction to Dhcpcd

The dhcpcd package contains the dhcpcd client. This is useful for connecting your computer to a network which uses DHCP to assign network addresses.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.phystech.com/ftp/dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.phystech.com/pub/dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: dd627a121e43835bead3ffef5b1a72fd
Download size: 145 KB
Estimated disk space required: 944 KB
Estimated build time: 0.04 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4-fhs-1.patch

Installation of Dhcpcd

Install dhcpcd by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4-fhs-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix="" --sysconfdir=/var/lib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

patch -Np1 -i ../dhcpcd-1.3.22-pl4-fhs-1.patch: dhcpcd unpatched puts all configuration and temporary files in /etc/dhcpc. This becomes very annoying when dhcpcd tells you it's running and it's not. You look in /var/run for the PID file, but it's not there, the PID file that needs deleting is in /etc/dhcpc. This patch brings this program into FHS compliance, but more importantly, puts files where you expect them to be.

--prefix="": There may be a good reason for abandoning the normal BLFS convention of using --prefix=/usr here. If you are installing DHCP, it is likely that it is required during the boot process and /usr may be network mounted, in which case dhcpcd wouldn't be available due to being on the network! Therefore, depending on your situation, you may want it to be installed in /sbin or /usr/sbin. This command installs to /sbin.

--sysconfdir=/var/lib: This command installs configuration files in the /var/lib directory.

Configuring Dhcpcd

Config Files

/var/lib/dhcpc/*

Configuration Information

To configure dhcpcd, you need to first install the network service script, /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/services/dhcpcd included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package (as user root):

make install-service-dhcpcd

Finally, as the root user create the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhcpcd configuration file using the following commands. Adjust appropriately for additional interfaces:

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/dhcpcd << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="dhcpcd"
DHCP_START="[insert appropriate start options here]"
DHCP_STOP="-k [insert additional stop options here]"

# Set PRINTIP="yes" to have the script print
# the DHCP assigned IP address
PRINTIP="no"

# Set PRINTALL="yes" to print the DHCP assigned values for
# IP, SM, DG, and 1st NS. This requires PRINTIP="yes".
PRINTALL="no"
EOF

For more information on the appropriate DHCP_START and DHCP_STOP values, examine the man page for dhcpcd.

Note

The default behavior of dhcpcd is to overwrite (after making backup copies) /etc/resolv.conf, /etc/yp.conf and /etc/ntp.conf with new files containing information from the DHCP server. If this is undesirable, review the dhcpcd man page for switches to add to the DHCP_START value.

Installed Program: dhcpcd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /var/lib/dhcpc

Short Descriptions

dhcpcd

is an implementation of the DHCP client specified in RFC2131 and RFC1541 (depending on which options are specified).

Chapter 15. Other Connections

Other methods to connect to large networks are through ISDN and PPPoE interfaces, among others. PPPoE is discussed here. Pages written for ISDN (or others as the need arises) are always welcome and will be included in future books, if the information becomes available.

RP-PPPoE-3.5

Introduction to RP-PPPoE

The Roaring Penguin PPPoE package contains both a client and a server component that works with the client. The client allows you to connect to large networks that use the PPPoE protocol, common among ADSL providers. The server component runs alongside the client, allowing you to configure other clients that send out a configuration request.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.roaringpenguin.com/penguin/pppoe/rp-pppoe-3.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/rp-pppoe-3.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 97972f8f8f6a3ab9b7070333a6a29c4b
Download size: 185 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.05 SBU

RP-PPPoE Dependencies

Required

PPP-2.4.3 and Net-tools-1.60 (you may omit Net-tools by using the following patch to utilize IPRoute2 instead: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/rp-pppoe-3.5-iproute2-1.patch)

Installation of RP-PPPoE

Note

If you plan on using kernel-mode PPPoE, this package is no longer explicitly needed, however, it is recommended for ease of configuration. Additional information about kernel mode PPPoE can be found in rp-pppoe-3.5/doc/KERNEL-MODE-PPPOE.

Fix the location of the logger executable in several ADSL scripts:

sed -i s%/usr/bin/logger%/bin/logger% \
    scripts/adsl-{connect,setup,stop}.in

Install RP-PPPoE by running the following commands:

cd src &&
./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

These are the standard installation commands that will install the package into the /usr prefix. You can optionally use the go script in the root of the source tree to run the same commands, which are then immediately followed by the adsl-setup script.

Configuring RP-PPPoE

Config Files

/etc/ppp/pppoe.conf, /etc/ppp/firewall-standalone, /etc/ppp/firewall-masq, /etc/ppp/pppoe-server-options, /etc/resolv.conf, /etc/ppp/pap-secrets, /etc/ppp/chap-secrets

Configuration Information

To configure RP-PPPoE after installation, you should run the adsl-setup script.

When configuring your connection, you will need to have your ISP's nameserver information available, as well as your username and password. You will also be asked whether to configure a dial-on-demand or a constant connection. If your service provider does not charge by the minute, it is usually good to have a bootscript handle the connection for you. You can, of course, choose not to install the following script, and start your connection manually with the adsl-start script.

Optionally install the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/services/pppoe service script included with the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package (as user root).

make install-service-pppoe

Now create the config file for use with the pppoe service script (as user root):

Note

If you have previously configured the network interface that will now use PPPoE, you should remove the interface configuration files for that interface (as user root):

rm -v /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/*

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/pppoe << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="pppoe"
EOF

Installed Programs: adsl-connect, adsl-setup, adsl-start, adsl-status, adsl-stop, pppoe, pppoe-relay, pppoe-server and pppoe-sniff

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/ppp/plugins and /usr/share/doc/rp-pppoe-3.5

Short Descriptions

adsl-connect	is a shell script which manages an ADSL connection using the user-space PPPoE client.
adsl-setup	is a script for configuring the client. Configuration is then stored in `/etc/ppp/pppoe.conf`.
adsl-start	starts the client using the options specified in `/etc/ppp/pppoe.conf`.
adsl-status	displays the status of the ADSL connection.
adsl-stop	stops the client.
pppoe	is the client program. Generally it should not be started on its own.
pppoe-relay	starts the server relay agent.
pppoe-server	starts the server component.
pppoe-sniff	is a small network sniffer designed to assist in setting `PPPOE_EXTRA` settings.

Basic Networking

16. Networking Libraries
17. Text Web Browsers
18. Basic Networking Programs
19. Basic Networking Utilities
20. Mail/News Clients

Chapter 16. Networking Libraries

These applications are support libraries for other applications in the book. It is unlikely that you would just install these libraries, you will generally find that you will be referred to this chapter to satisfy a dependency of other applications.

CURL-7.14.0

Introduction to CURL

The cURL package contains curl and its support library. This is useful for transferring files with URL syntax. This ability to both download and redirect files can be incorporated into other programs to support functions like streaming media.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.execve.net/curl/curl-7.14.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 46ce665e47d37fce1a0bad935cce58a9
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 23.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.34 SBU (additional 0.86 SBU to run the test suite)

CURL Dependencies

Optional

pkg-config-0.19, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7, krb4, Libidn, SPNEGO and c-ares

Optional (for Running the Test Suite)

Stunnel-4.11 (for running HTTPS and FTPS tests) and Valgrind (not used if building the shared library)

Installation of CURL

Install cURL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you wish to run the testsuite, use the following commands to fix a bug in the test script and then run the tests:

sed -i -e 's/^require "valgrind.pm"/# &/' tests/runtests.pl &&
make check

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
find docs -name "Makefile*" \
    -o -name "*.1" \
    -o -name "*.3" | xargs rm &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/curl-7.14.0 &&
cp -v -R docs/* /usr/share/doc/curl-7.14.0

Command Explanations

--with-gssapi: This parameter adds Kerberos 5 support to libcurl.

Installed Programs: curl and curl-config

Installed Library: libcurl.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/curl, /usr/share/curl and /usr/share/doc/curl-7.14.0

Short Descriptions

curl	is a client that can get documents from or send documents to any of the following protocols: HTTP, HTTPS (needs OpenSSL-0.9.7g), FTP, GOPHER, DICT, TELNET, LDAP (needs OpenLDAP-2.2.24 at run time) or FILE.
curl-config	prints information about the last compile, like libraries linked to and prefix setting.
`libcurl.[so,a]`	provides the API functions required by curl and other programs.

WvStreams-4.0.1

Introduction to WvStreams

WvStreams is a library suite containing platform-independent C++ networking and utilities libraries for rapid application development.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://open.nit.ca/download/wvstreams-4.0.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 89cdc4f979d1f6d745e173bc7485f325
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 57 MB (additional 43 MB to install documentation)
Estimated build time: 0.77 SBU (additional 0.45 SBU to build documentation)

Additional Downloads

Required Patch for Tcl: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/wvstreams-4.0.1-tcl84-1.patch

WvStreams Dependencies

Required

Optional

pkg-config-0.19, FAM-2.7.0, Berkeley DB-4.3.28, Linux-PAM-0.80, Tcl-8.4.11, Qt-3.3.4, Speex-1.0.5, libvorbis-1.1.1, Doxygen-1.4.3, FFTW-2.X, SWIG, QDBM, OpenSLP, XPLC, Valgrind and Electric Fence

Installation of WvStreams

If you have Tcl and SWIG installed and wish to utilize them, apply the following patch and run the autoreconf program:

patch -Np1 -i ../wvstreams-4.0.1-tcl84-1.patch &&
autoreconf -f

Install WvStreams by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
    --sysconfdir=/etc --localstatedir=/var &&
make

If Doxygen is installed and you wish to build the API documentation, issue the following command:

make doxygen

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the API documentation, install it using the following commands:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/wvstreams-4.0.1/doxy-html &&
install -v -m644 Docs/doxy-html/* \
    /usr/share/doc/wvstreams-4.0.1/doxy-html

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This parameter places configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var: This parameter places uniconfd run-time files in /var/lib instead of /usr/var/lib.

Configuring WvStreams

Config Files

/etc/uniconf.conf

Configuration Information

Installed Programs: uni and uniconfd

Installed Libraries: libuniconf.[so,a], libwvbase.[so,a], libwvfft.[so,a], libwvoggspeex.[so,a], libwvoggvorbis.[so,a], libwvqt.[so,a], libwvstreams.[so,a], libwvtelephony.[so,a], libwvutils.[so,a] and libxplc-cxx.a

Installed Directories: /usr/include/wvstreams, /usr/share/doc/wvstreams-4.0.1 and /var/lib/uniconf

Short Descriptions

uni	is a program to interface with the UniConf configuration system.
uniconfd	is a daemon program for the UniConf configuration system.
`libuniconf.[so,a]`	contains functions that define a hierarchical registry abstraction in the UniConf configuration system.
`libwvbase.[so,a]`	contains the Base64 encoder and decoder implementations functions.
`libwvfft.[so,a]`	enables WvStreams programs to easily handle Fast-Fourier transforms, instead of forcing the programmer to use the much harder to use `libfftw` interface.
`libwvoggspeex.[so,a]`	enables quick and painless creation of audio streams using the Speex Voice over IP CODEC.
`libwvoggvorbis.[so,a]`	enables quick and painless creation of audio streams using the OggVorbis CODEC.
`libwvqt.[so,a]`	enables WvStreams to act as the I/O and configuration back end for Qt and KDE.
`libwvstreams.[so,a]`	provides functions for basic streaming I/O support.
`libtelephony.[so,a]`	contains telephony function routines such as echo cancellation, dc offset removal, automatic gain control, etc.
`libwvutils.[so,a]`	contains functions required by the WvStreams libraries and utility programs.
`libxplc-cxx.a`	contains helper functions for the C++ WvStreams bindings.

GNet-2.0.7

Introduction to GNet

The GNet package contains a simple network library. This is useful for supporting TCP sockets, UDP and IP multicast, asynchronous DNS lookup, and more.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gnetlibrary.org/src/gnet-2.0.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 3a7a40411775688fe4c42141ab007048
Download size: 595 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNet Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 or GLib-2.6.4

Installation of GNet

Install GNet by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgnet-2.0.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/gnet-2.0, /usr/lib/gnet-2.0 and /usr/share/doc/libgnet2.0-dev or /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/gnet

Short Descriptions

libgnet-2.0.[so,a]

is a simple network library written in C. It is object-oriented and built upon GLib. It is intended to be easy to use and port.

Libsoup-2.2.3

Introduction to Libsoup

The libsoup package contains an HTTP library implementation in C. This is useful for accessing HTTP servers in a completely asynchronous mode.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libsoup/2.2/libsoup-2.2.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libsoup/2.2/libsoup-2.2.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2591f32e036a5869f7e2bd0d95e6f14b
Download size: 358 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.30 SBU

Libsoup Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.6.4 and libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.3 and GnuTLS (which needs libgpg-error then libgcrypt)

Installation of Libsoup

Install libsoup by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libsoup-2.2.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libsoup-2.2 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libsoup

Short Descriptions

libsoup-2.2.[so,a]

provides functions for asynchronous HTTP connections.

Libpcap-0.9.3

Introduction to Libpcap

libpcap provides functions for user-level packet capture, used in low-level network monitoring.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.tcpdump.org/release/libpcap-0.9.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 0ad921c881fdd3d278046afcd352a151
Download size: 424 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Libpcap Dependencies

Optional

DAG

Installation of Libpcap

Install libpcap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/libpcap-0.9.3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*{html,txt} /usr/share/doc/libpcap-0.9.3

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libpcap.a

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/libpcap-0.9.3

Short Descriptions

libpcap.a

is a library used for user-level packet capture.

Chapter 17. Text Web Browsers

People who are new to Unix-based systems tend to ask the question "Why on earth would I want a text-mode browser? I'm going to compile X and use Konqueror/Mozilla/Whatever!". Those who have been around systems for a while know that when (not if) you manage to mess up your graphical browser install and you need to look up some information on the web, a console based browser will save you. Also, there are quite a few people who prefer to use one of these browsers as their principle method of browsing; either to avoid the clutter and bandwidth which accompanies images or because they may use a text-to-speech synthesizer which can read the page to them (of use for instance to partially sighted or blind users). In this chapter you will find installation instructions for three console web browsers:

Links-2.1pre17

Introduction to Links

Links is a text and graphics mode WWW browser. It includes support for rendering tables and frames, features background downloads, can display colors and has many other features.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz/~clock/twibright/links/download/links-2.1pre17.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://atrey.karlin.mff.cuni.cz/pub/local/clock/links/links-2.1pre17.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 94315d9ba68bbb543d93b3b3b4f07582
Download size: 3.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 24.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.21 SBU

Links Dependencies

Optional

GPM-1.20.1, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, libpng-1.2.8, libjpeg-6b, libtiff-3.7.3, SDL-1.2.8, SVGAlib, DirectFB and X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2)

Installation of Links

Install Links by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-graphics: Add this switch if you want to use Links in graphics mode. You will either need to install the X Window System or enable frame buffer support in your kernel and install GPM-1.20.1.

Configuring Links

Config Files

~/.links/*

Configuration Information

Links stores its configuration in per-user files in the ~/.links directory. These files are created automatically when links is run for the first time.

Installed Program: links

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

links

is a text and graphics mode WWW browser.

Lynx-2.8.5

Introduction to Lynx

Lynx is a text based web browser.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://lynx.isc.org/release/lynx2.8.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://lynx.isc.org/lynx2.8.5/lynx2.8.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d1e5134e5d175f913c16cb6768bc30eb
Download size: 2.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 0.48 SBU

Lynx Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g or GnuTLS (which needs libgpg-error then libgcrypt), MTA, Zip-2.31, UnZip-5.52, slang-1.4.9, ncompress and sharutils

Installation of Lynx

Install Lynx by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libdir=/etc \
    --with-zlib --with-bzlib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make docdir=/usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.5/lynx_doc \
    helpdir=/usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.5/lynx_help install-doc &&
make docdir=/usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.5/lynx_doc \
    helpdir=/usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.5/lynx_help install-help &&
chgrp -v -R root /usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.5/lynx_doc

Command Explanations

--libdir=/etc: For some reason, the configure and make routine for Lynx uses libdir as the prefix for the configuration file. This is set to /etc so that the system wide configuration file is /etc/lynx.cfg.

--with-zlib: This enables support for linking libz into Lynx.

--with-bzlib: This enables support for linking libbz2 into Lynx.

docdir=... helpdir=...: These variables are set to avoid getting the help and documentation files installed under /etc.

--with-ssl: This enables support for linking SSL into Lynx.

--with-gnutls: This enables support for linking GnuTLS into Lynx.

chgrp -v -R root /usr/share/doc/lynx-2.8.5/lynx_doc: This command corrects the improper group ownership of installed documentation files caused if Lynx is built by any user other than root.

Configuring Lynx

Config Files

/etc/lynx.cfg

Configuration Information

Various settings such as proxies can be set in the system-wide lynx.cfg file found in /etc.

Installed Program: lynx

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/lynx

Short Descriptions

lynx

is a general purpose, text-based, distributed information browser for the World Wide Web.

W3m-0.5.1

Introduction to W3m

w3m is primarily a pager but it can also be used as a text-mode WWW browser.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/w3m/w3m-0.5.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 0678b72e07e69c41709d71ef0fe5da13
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.28 SBU

W3m Dependencies

Required

Optional

pkg-config-0.19, GPM-1.20.1, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Imlib-1.9.15 or Imlib2-1.2.1, GDK Pixel Buffer-0.22.0, Compface-1.4, nkf, a Mail User Agent and an External Browser

Installation of W3m

Install w3m by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/lib --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -D -m 644 doc/keymap.default /etc/w3m/keymap &&
install -v -D -m 644 doc/menu.default /etc/w3m/menu &&
install -v -d -m 755 /usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.1/html &&
install -v -m 644 doc/{HISTORY,READM*,keymap.*,menu.*} \
    /usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.1 &&
install -v -m 644 doc/*.html \
    /usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.1/html

Configuring W3m

Config Files

/etc/w3m/* and ~/.w3m/*

Installed Programs: w3m and w3mman

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/w3m, /usr/share/w3m and usr/share/doc/w3m-0.5.1

Short Descriptions

w3m	is a text based web browser and pager.
w3mman	is an interface to the on-line reference manuals in w3m.

Chapter 18. Basic Networking Programs

These applications are generally client applications used to access the appropriate server across the building or across the world. Tcpwrappers and portmap are support programs for daemons that you may have running on your machine.

CVS-1.11.20

Introduction to CVS

CVS is the Concurrent Versions System. This is a version control system useful for projects using a central repository to hold files and then track all changes made to those files. These instructions install the client used to manipulate the repository, creation of a repository is covered at Running a CVS Server.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): https://ccvs.cvshome.org/files/documents/19/861/cvs-1.11.20.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 9e215c0ee3bb7dfb76515d7cd81a3742
Download size: 2.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 22 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU (additional 19.1 SBU to run the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Recommended patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/cvs-1.11.20-zlib-1.patch

CVS Dependencies

Optional

GDBM-1.8.3, Tcsh-6.14.00, krb4, MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7 (for the GSSAPI libraries), AFPL Ghostscript-8.51 or ESP Ghostscript-7.07.1, and an MTA

Installation of CVS

By default CVS is statically linked against the Zlib library included in its source tree. This makes it exposed to possible security vulnerabilities in that library. If you want to modify CVS to use the newest system shared Zlib library, apply the following patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../cvs-1.11.20-zlib-1.patch

Install CVS by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.20 &&
install -v -m644 doc/cvs{,client}.ps /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.20

Configuring CVS

Config Files

~/.cvsrc, ~/.cvswrappers, and ~/.cvspass.

Configuration Information

~/.cvsrc is the main CVS configuration file. This file is used by users to specify defaults for different cvs commands. For example, to make all cvs diff commands run with -u, a user would add diff -u to their .cvsrc file.

~/.cvswrappers specifies wrappers to be used in addition to those specified in the CVSROOT/cvswrappers file in the repository.

~/.cvspass can hold passwords to complete logins to servers.

Installed Programs: cvs, cvsbug, and rcs2log

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/cvs and /usr/share/doc/cvs-1.11.20

Short Descriptions

cvs	is the main program file for the concurrent versions system.
cvsbug	is used to send problem reports about CVS to a central support site.
rcs2log	is a symlink to the contributed RCS to Change Log generator.

Inetutils-1.4.2

Introduction to Inetutils

The Inetutils package contains network clients and servers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/gnu/gnusrc/inetutils/inetutils-1.4.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/inetutils/inetutils-1.4.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: df0909a586ddac2b7a0d62795eea4206
Download size: 1.04 MB
Estimated disk space required: 10.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.26 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/inetutils-1.4.2-kernel_headers-1.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/inetutils-1.4.2-daemon_fixes-1.patch

Inetutils Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80, tcpwrappers-7.6, krb4, and Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1

Installation of Inetutils

Install Inetutils by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../inetutils-1.4.2-kernel_headers-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../inetutils-1.4.2-daemon_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc --localstatedir=/var \
    --mandir=/usr/share/man --infodir=/usr/share/info \
    --disable-logger --disable-syslogd &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
mv -v /usr/bin/ping /bin

Command Explanations

--disable-logger: This switch prevents Inetutils installing a logger program, which is installed in the LFS book.

--disable-syslogd: This switch prevents Inetutils installing a system log daemon, which is installed in the LFS book.

--with-wrap: This switch makes Inetutils compile against tcp-wrappers. Add this option if you want to utilize tcp-wrappers.

--disable-whois: This switch will prevent Inetutils installing an outdated whois client. Add this option if you plan on installing Whois-4.7.5.

--with-pam: This switch makes Inetutils link against Linux-PAM libraries. Add this option if you want to utilize PAM.

--disable-servers: Some of the servers included with Inetutils are insecure in nature and in some cases better alternatives exist. You can choose this switch to enable only the servers you need, avoiding the installation of unneeded servers.

A list of the installed programs not included here, along with their short descriptions can be found at ../../../../lfs/view/stable/chapter06/inetutils.html#contents-inetutils.

Installed Programs: ftpd, inetd, rexecd, rlogind, rshd, talkd, telnetd, tftpd, uucpd and whois

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ftpd	is a DARPA Internet File Transfer Protocol Server.
inetd	is an Internet super-server. Note that the xinetd-2.3.13 package provides a much better server that does the same thing.
rexecd	is a remote execution server.
rlogind	is a remote login server.
rshd	is a remote shell server.
talkd	is a remote user communication server.
telnetd	is a DARPA TELNET protocol server.
tftpd	is an Internet Trivial File Transfer Protocol server.
uucpd	is a server for supporting UUCP connections over networks.
whois	is a client for the whois directory service. Note that the Whois-4.7.5 package provides a much better client.

NcFTP-3.1.9

Introduction to NcFTP

The NcFTP package contains a powerful and flexible interface to the Internet standard File Transfer Protocol. It is intended to replace or supplement the stock ftp program.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/clients/ftp/ncftp/ncftp-3.1.9-src.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ncftp.com/ncftp/ncftp-3.1.9-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 66cf8dacec848eb11a70632fe9f21807
Download size: 401 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Installation of NcFTP

There are two ways to build NcFTP. The first (and optimal) way builds most of the functionality as a shared library and then builds and installs the program linked against this library. The second method simply links all of the functionality into the binary statically. This doesn't make the dynamic library available for linking by other applications. You need to choose which method best suits you. Note that the second method does not create an entirely statically linked binary; only the libncftp parts are statically linked in, in this case. Be aware that building and using the shared library is covered by the Clarified Artistic License; however, developing applications that utilize the shared library is subject to a different license.

To install NcFTP using the first (and optimal) method, run the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make -C libncftp shared

Now, as the root user:

make -C libncftp soinstall

Again, as an unprivileged user:

make

Again, as the root user:

make install

To install NcFTP using the second method (with the libncftp functionality linked in statically) run the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

make -C ... && make -C ...: These commands make and install the dynamic library libncftp which is then used to link against when compiling the main program.

Configuring NcFTP

Config Files

~/.ncftp/*; especially ~/.ncftp/prefs_v3

Configuration Information

Most NcFTP configuration is done while in the program, and the configuration files are dealt with automatically. One exception to this is ~/.ncftp/prefs_v3. There are various options to alter in there, including:

yes-i-know-about-NcFTPd=yes

This disables the splash screen advertising the NcFTPd server.

There are other options in the prefs_v3 file. Most of these are self-explanatory.

Installed Programs: ncftp, ncftpbatch, ncftpbookmarks, ncftpget, ncftpls, ncftpput, and ncftpspooler

Installed Library: libncftp.so

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

ncftp	is a browser program for File Transfer Protocol.
ncftpbatch	is an individual batch FTP job processor.
ncftpbookmarks	is the NcFTP Bookmark Editor (NCurses-based).
ncftpget	is an internet file transfer program for scripts used to retrieve files.
ncftpls	is an internet file transfer program for scripts used to list files.
ncftpput	is an internet file transfer program for scripts used to transfer files.
ncftpspooler	is a global batch FTP job processor daemon.

NCPFS-2.2.4

Introduction to NCPFS

The NCPFS package contains client and administration tools for use with Novell networks.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://platan.vc.cvut.cz/ftp/pub/linux/ncpfs/ncpfs-2.2.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://platan.vc.cvut.cz/pub/linux/ncpfs/ncpfs-2.2.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 5fd2ec0680ba7e66df142637e17a5ac9
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 30 MB
Estimated build time: 0.52 SBU

NCPFS Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80 and PHP-5.0.4

Installation of NCPFS

Install NCPFS by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix="" --includedir=/usr/include \
    --mandir=/usr/share/man --datadir=/usr/share &&
make &&
make install &&
make install-dev

Command Explanations

--prefix="": Installs binaries on the root partition so that they are available at boot time. This may not be ideal for all systems. If /usr is mounted locally, --prefix=/usr may be a better option.

--includedir=/usr/include: Tells configure to look in /usr/include for header files. It also tells make to install NCPFS's headers here.

--mandir=/usr/share/man: Installs the man pages in the correct location.

--datadir=/usr/share: Correctly installs the locale files to /usr/share.

Note

If you do not need to use the IPX protocol, or you use a different IPX package, you can optionally pass --disable-ipx and/or --disable-ipx-tools to the configure script to disable these options.

Configuring NCPFS

Config Files

~/.nwclient

Configuration Information

A config file ~/.nwclient should be placed in the home directory of each user that intends to use NCPFS. The permissions on this file should be set to 600, for obvious security reasons. The configuration file should contain a single line per server that the user will use. Each line should contain the server name, the user name, and optionally the password. Below is a sample .nwclient file.

# Begin example ~/.nwclient config file

Server1/User1 Password
Server2/User1
Server2/Guest1 -

# End example .nwclient config file

The syntax for the .nwclient file is simple, server_name/user_name password. Be extremely careful when creating or editing this file as the client utilities are very picky about syntax. There should always be a space immediately after the username. If this space is substituted by a tab or multiple spaces, you will not get the expected results when attempting to use the NCPFS tools. If no password is supplied, the client utilities will ask for a password when it is needed. If no password is needed, for instance when using a guest account, a single '-' should be put in place of a password.

It should be noted that ncpmount is not intended to mount individual volumes because each mount point creates a separate client connection to the Novell server. Mounting each individual volume separately would be unwise, as mounting all volumes on a server under one mount point uses only one client connection.

Boot Script

If you need to set up the IPX protocol at boot, you can install the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/services/ipx network service script included with the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-service-ipx

Next install the /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/ipx configuration file with the following commands:

install -v -d /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0 &&
cat > /etc/sysconfig/network-devices/ifconfig.eth0/ipx << "EOF"
ONBOOT="yes"
SERVICE="ipx"
FRAME="[802.2]"
EOF

Client Utilities: ncpmount, ncpumountt, nprintt, nsendt, nwpasswdt, nwsfindt, pqlistt, pqrmt, pqstatt, and slist

Server Admin Utilities: ncopyt, nwbocreatet, nwbolst, nwbopropst, nwbormt, nwbpaddt, nwbpcreatet, nwbprmt, nwbpsett, nwbpvaluest, nwdirt, nwdpvaluest, nwfsctrlt, nwfsinfot, nwfstimet, nwgrantt, nwpurget, nwrevoket, nwrightst, nwtrusteet, nwtrustee2t, nwuserlistt, and nwvolinfo

IPX Interface Utilities: ipx_cmdt, ipx_configuret, ipx_interfacet, ipx_internal_nett, and ipx_route

Other Utilities: ncpmap and nwauth

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Net-tools-1.60

Introduction to Net-tools

The Net-tools package is a collection of programs for controlling the network subsystem of the Linux kernel.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.tazenda.demon.co.uk/phil/net-tools/net-tools-1.60.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ibiblio.org/pub/Linux/distributions/rootlinux/rootlinux-1.3/source/base/net-tools/net-tools-1.60.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum (HTTP): 888774accab40217dde927e21979c165
Download MD5 sum (FTP): e1e83a4d4cdd72d35bcf90d76a16206f
Download size: 194 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.10 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch (if compiled using GCC-3.4.x): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/net-tools-1.60-gcc34-3.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/net-tools-1.60-kernel_headers-2.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/net-tools-1.60-mii_ioctl-1.patch

Installation of Net-tools

Note

The Net-tools package installs a hostname program which will overwrite the existing program installed by Coreutils during a base LFS installation. If, for whatever reason, you need to reinstall the Coreutils package after installing Net-tools, you should use the coreutils-5.2.1-suppress_hostname_uptime_kill_su-1.patch patch if you wish to preserve the Net-tools hostname program.

The instructions below automate the configuration process by piping yes to the make config command. If you wish to run the interactive configuration process (by changing the instruction to just make config), but you are not sure how to answer all the questions, then just accept the defaults. This will be just fine in the majority of cases. What you're asked here is a bunch of questions about which network protocols you've enabled in your kernel. The default answers will enable the tools from this package to work with the most common protocols: TCP, PPP, and several others. You still need to actually enable these protocols in the kernel—what you do here is merely tell the package to include support for those protocols in its programs, but it's up to the kernel to make the protocols available.

Install Net-tools by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../net-tools-1.60-gcc34-3.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../net-tools-1.60-kernel_headers-2.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../net-tools-1.60-mii_ioctl-1.patch &&
yes "" | make config &&
sed -i -e 's|HAVE_IP_TOOLS 0|HAVE_IP_TOOLS 1|g' \
       -e 's|HAVE_MII 0|HAVE_MII 1|g' config.h &&
sed -i -e 's|# HAVE_IP_TOOLS=0|HAVE_IP_TOOLS=1|g' \
       -e 's|# HAVE_MII=0|HAVE_MII=1|g' config.make &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make update

Command Explanations

yes "" | make config: Piping yes to make config skips the interactive configuration and accepts the defaults.

sed -i -e ...: These two seds change the configuration files to force building the ipmaddr, iptunnel and mii-tool programs.

Installed Programs: arp, dnsdomainname, domainname, hostname, ifconfig, ipmaddr, iptunnel, mii-tool, nameif, netstat, nisdomainname, plipconfig, rarp, route, slattach, and ypdomainname

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

arp	is used to manipulate the kernel's ARP cache, usually to add or delete an entry, or to dump the entire cache.
dnsdomainname	reports the system's DNS domain name.
domainname	reports or sets the system's NIS/YP domain name.
hostname	reports or sets the name of the current host system.
ifconfig	is the main utility for configuring network interfaces.
ipmaddr	adds, deletes and shows an interface's multicast addresses.
iptunnel	adds, changes, deletes and shows an interface's tunnels.
mii-tool	checks or sets the status of a network interface's Media Independent Interface (MII) unit.
nameif	names network interfaces based on MAC addresses.
netstat	is used to report network connections, routing tables, and interface statistics.
nisdomainname	does the same as domainname.
plipconfig	is used to fine tune the PLIP device parameters, to improve its performance.
rarp	is used to manipulate the kernel's RARP table.
route	is used to manipulate the IP routing table.
slattach	attaches a network interface to a serial line. This allows you to use normal terminal lines for point-to-point links to other computers.
ypdomainname	does the same as domainname.

NTP-4.2.0

Introduction to NTP

The NTP package contains a client and server to keep the time synchronized between various computers over a network. This package is the official reference implementation of the NTP protocol.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.eecis.udel.edu/~ntp/ntp_spool/ntp4/ntp-4.2.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.udel.edu/pub/ntp/ntp4/ntp-4.2.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0f8fabe87cf54f409b57c6283f0c0c3d
Download size: 2.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 27 MB
Estimated build time: 0.53 SBU

NTP Dependencies

Optional

Installation of NTP

Install NTP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --bindir=/usr/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/ntp-4.2.0 &&
cp -v -R html /usr/share/doc/ntp-4.2.0/

Configuring NTP

Config Files

/etc/ntp.conf

Configuration Information

The following configuration file defines various NTP stratum 2 servers with open access from different continents. It also creates a drift file where ntpd stores the frequency offset. Since the documentation included with the package is sparse, visit the NTP website at http://www.ntp.org/ for more information.

cat > /etc/ntp.conf << "EOF"
# Africa
server tock.nml.csir.co.za

# Asia
server ntp.shim.org

# Australia
server ntp.saard.net

# Europe
server ntp.tuxfamily.net

# North America
server clock.psu.edu

driftfile /var/cache/ntp.drift
EOF

Synchronizing the Time

There are two options. Option one is to run ntpd continuously and allow it to synchronize the time in a gradual manner. The other option is to run ntpd periodically (using cron) and update the time each time ntpd is scheduled.

If you choose Option one, then install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/ntp init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-ntp

If you prefer to run ntpd periodically, add the following command to root's crontab:

ntpd -q

Execute the following command if you would like to set the hardware clock to the current system time at shutdown and reboot:

ln -v -sf ../init.d/setclock /etc/rc.d/rc0.d/K46setclock &&
ln -v -sf ../init.d/setclock /etc/rc.d/rc6.d/K46setclock

The other way around is already set up by LFS.

Installed Programs: ntp-keygen, ntp-wait, ntpd, ntpdate, ntpdc, ntpq, ntptime, ntptrace, and tickadj

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/ntp-4.2.0

Short Descriptions

ntp-keygen	generates cryptographic data files used by the NTPv4 authentication and identification schemes.
ntp-wait	is useful at boot time, to delay the boot sequence until ntpd has set the time.
ntpd	is a NTP daemon that runs in the background and keeps the date and time synchronized based on response from configured NTP servers. It also functions as a NTP server.
ntpdate	is a client program that sets the date and time based on the response from an NTP server. This command is deprecated.
ntpdc	is used to query the NTP daemon about its current state and to request changes in that state.
ntpq	is an utility program used to monitor ntpd operations and determine performance.
ntptime	reads and displays time-related kernel variables.
ntptrace	traces a chain of NTP servers back to the primary source.
tickadj	reads, and optionally modifies, several timekeeping-related variables in older kernels that do not have support for precision timekeeping.

OpenSSH-4.1p1 Client

The ssh client is a secure replacement for telnet. If you want to install it, the instructions can be found in Chapter 21 – OpenSSH-4.1p1. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server if you actually need it (and if you don't know whether you need it or not, it's likely that you don't!).

Portmap-5beta

Introduction to Portmap

The portmap package is a more secure replacement for the original SUN portmap package. Portmap is used to forward RPC requests to RPC daemons such as NFS and NIS.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.porcupine.org/pub/security/portmap_5beta.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 781e16ed4487c4caa082c6fef09ead4f
Download size: 18 KB
Estimated disk space required: 268 KB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/portmap-5beta-compilation_fixes-3.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/portmap-5beta-glibc_errno_fix-1.patch

Portmap Dependencies

Required

Installation of Portmap

Install portmap with the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../portmap-5beta-compilation_fixes-3.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../portmap-5beta-glibc_errno_fix-1.patch &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note

The above installation places executable portmap in /sbin. You may choose to move the file to /usr/sbin. If you do, remember to modify the bootscript also.

Configuring Portmap

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/portmap init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-portmap

Installed Programs: pmap_dump, pmap_set, and portmap

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

pmap_dump	saves the port mapping table to an ASCII file.
pmap_set	restores the port mapping table from an ASCII file.
portmap	is an RPC port mapper.

Rsync-2.6.5 Client

rsync is a utility for fast incremental file transfers. If you want to install it, the instructions can be found in Chapter 24 – rsync-2.6.5. Note that if you only want to use the client, you do not need to run the server and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server if you actually need it (and if you don't know whether you need it or not, it's likely that you don't!).

Samba-3.0.14a Client

The Samba client utilities are used to transfer files to and from, mount SMB shares located on or use printers attached to Windows and other SMB servers. If you want to install these utilities, the instructions can be found in Chapter 21 – Samba-3.0.14a. After performing the basic installation, configure the utilities using the configuration section titled “Scenario 1: Minimal Standalone Client-Only Installation”.

Note that if you only want to use these client utilities, you do not need to run the server daemons and so do not need the startup script and links. In accordance with good practice, only run the server daemons if you actually need them. You'll find an explanation of the services provided by the server daemons in the Samba-3.0.14a instructions.

Subversion-1.1.4

Introduction to Subversion

Subversion is a version control system that is designed to be a compelling replacement for CVS in the open source community. It extends and enhances CVS' feature set, while maintaining a similar interface for those already familiar with CVS. These instructions install the client and server software used to manipulate a Subversion repository. Creation of a repository is covered at Running a Subversion Server.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://subversion.tigris.org/tarballs/subversion-1.1.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 6e557ae65b6b8d7577cc7704ede85a23
Download size: 6.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 182 MB (additional 577 MB to run all test suites)
Estimated build time: 1.24 SBU (add 0.90 SBU for SWIG bindings and 6.45 SBU to run test suites)

Subversion Dependencies

Required

libxml2-2.6.20 (only if using the bundled version of neon)

Optional

Python-2.4.1 (required to run the full test suite), Apache-2.0.54, OpenSSH-4.1p1 (runtime only), neon-0.24.7, JDK-1.5.0 (to build the JAVA bindings), JUnit (for running the JAVA bindings test suite and requires UnZip-5.52), Dante (alternate JAVA compiler), Jikes (another alternate JAVA compiler) and inetd or xinetd-2.3.13 (server only)

Installation of Subversion

Install Subversion by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Note

If you have Apache installed, pass the --with-apr=/usr and --with-apr-util=/usr switches to the configure script. Otherwise, Subversion will overwrite APR and APR-utils from the Apache installation with its own files. You may also need to pass --with-apxs=/usr/sbin/apxs as apxs might not be in an unprivileged user's PATH and won't be properly discovered.

If you passed the --enable-javahl parameter to configure and wish to build the JAVA Subversion bindings, issue the following command:

make javahl

If you passed the --with-swig and --enable-swig-bindings parameters to configure and wish to build the SWIG Perl and Python Subversion bindings, issue the following commands:

make swig-pl &&
make swig-py

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/subversion-1.1.4 &&
cp -v -R doc/* /usr/share/doc/subversion-1.1.4

If you built the JAVA Subversion bindings, issue the following command as the root user to install them:

make install-javahl

If you built the SWIG Perl and Python Subversion bindings, issue the following commands as the root user to install them:

make install-swig-pl &&
make install-swig-py &&
echo /usr/lib/svn-python \
    > /usr/lib/python2.4/site-packages/subversion.pth

Command Explanations

--with-ssl: This switch enables OpenSSL support in neon (only required if you use the bundled version of neon).

Configuring Subversion

Config Files

~/.subversion/config and /etc/subversion/config

Configuration Information

/etc/subversion/config is the Subversion system-wide configuration file. This file is used to specify defaults for different svn commands.

~/.subversion/config is the user's personal configuration file. It is used to override the system-wide defaults set in /etc/subversion/config.

Installed Programs: svn, svnadmin, svndumpfilter, svnlook, svnserve, svnversion, and optionally, neon-config

Installed Libraries: libsvn*.[so,a] and optionally, libneon.[so,a] and the mod_dav_svn.so, and mod_authz_svn.so Apache HTTP DSO modules

Installed Directories: /etc/subversion, /usr/include/neon (optional), /usr/include/subversion-1, /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.6/i686-linux/auto/SVN (optional), /usr/lib/perl5/site_perl/5.8.6/i686-linux/SVN (optional), /usr/lib/svn-javahl (optional), /usr/lib/svn-python (optional), /usr/share/doc/neon-0.24.7 (optional), and /usr/share/doc/subversion-1.1.4

Short Descriptions

svn	is a command-line client program used to access Subversion repositories.
svnadmin	is a tool for creating, tweaking or repairing a Subversion repository.
svndumpfilter	is a program for filtering Subversion repository dumpfile format streams.
svnlook	is a tool for inspecting a Subversion repository.
svnserve	is a custom standalone server program, able to run as a daemon process or invoked by SSH.
svnversion	is used to report the version number and state of a working Subversion repository copy.
neon-config	is a script which provides information about an installed copy of the neon library.
`libsvn_*.[so,a]`	are the support libraries used by the Subversion programs.
`libneon.[so,a]`	is used as a high-level interface to common HTTP and WebDAV methods.
`mod_authz_svn.so`	is a plug-in module for the Apache HTTP server, used to authenticate users to a Subversion repository over the Internet or an intranet.
`mod_dav_svn.so`	is a plug-in module for the Apache HTTP server, used to make a Subversion repository available to others over the Internet or an intranet.

Tcpwrappers-7.6

Introduction to Tcpwrappers

The tcpwrappers package provides daemon wrapper programs that report the name of the client requesting network services and the requested service.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://files.ichilton.co.uk/nfs/tcp_wrappers_7.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.porcupine.org/pub/security/tcp_wrappers_7.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e6fa25f71226d090f34de3f6b122fb5a
Download size: 97 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.09 MB
Estimated build time: 0.03 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch (Fixes some build issues and adds building of a shared library): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/tcp_wrappers-7.6-shared_lib_plus_plus-1.patch

Installation of Tcpwrappers

Install tcpwrappers with the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../tcp_wrappers-7.6-shared_lib_plus_plus-1.patch &&
sed -i -e "s,^extern char \*malloc();,/* & */," scaffold.c &&
make REAL_DAEMON_DIR=/usr/sbin STYLE=-DPROCESS_OPTIONS linux

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ... scaffold.c: This command removes an obsolete C declaration which causes the build to fail if using GCC-3.4.x.

Configuring Tcpwrappers

Config Files

/etc/hosts.allow and /etc/hosts.deny

File protections: the wrapper, all files used by the wrapper, and all directories in the path leading to those files, should be accessible but not writable for unprivileged users (mode 755 or mode 555). Do not install the wrapper set-uid.

As the root user, perform the following edits on the /etc/inetd.conf configuration file:

finger stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/sbin/in.fingerd in.fingerd

becomes:

finger stream tcp nowait nobody /usr/sbin/tcpd in.fingerd

Note

The finger server is used as an example here.

Similar changes must be made if xinetd is used, with the emphasis being on calling /usr/sbin/tcpd instead of calling the service daemon directly, and passing the name of the service daemon to tcpd.

Installed Programs: tcpd, tcpdchk, tcpdmatch, try-from, and safe_finger

Installed Library: libwrap.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

tcpd	is the main access control daemon for all Internet services, which inetd or xinetd will run instead of running the requested service daemon.
tcpdchk	is a tool to examine a tcpd wrapper configuration and report problems with it.
tcpdmatch	is used to predict how the TCP wrapper would handle a specific request for a service.
try-from	can be called via a remote shell command to find out if the host name and address are properly recognized.
safe_finger	is a wrapper for the finger utility, to provide automatic reverse name lookups.
`libwrap.[so,a]`	contains the API functions required by the tcpwrappers programs as well as other programs to become “tcpwrappers-aware”.

Wget-1.9.1

Introduction to Wget

The Wget package contains a utility useful for non-interactive downloading of files from the Web.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/wget/wget-1.9.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnu.org/gnu/wget/wget-1.9.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e6051f1e1487ec0ebfdbda72bedc70ad
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 7.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.11 SBU

Wget Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g and Dante

Installation of Wget

Install Wget by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This relocates the configuration file from /usr/etc to /etc.

Configuring Wget

Config Files

/etc/wgetrc and ~/.wgetrc

There are no required changes in these files.

Installed Program: wget

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

wget

retrieves files from the Web using the HTTP, HTTPS and FTP protocols. It is designed to be non-interactive, for background or unattended operations.

Chapter 19. Basic Networking Utilities

This chapter contains some tools that come in handy when the network needs investigating.

Traceroute-1.4a12

Introduction to Traceroute

The Traceroute package contains a program which is used to display the network route that packets take to reach a specified host. This is a standard network troubleshooting tool. If you find yourself unable to connect to another system, traceroute can help pinpoint the problem.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/platform/sun/packages/solaris/freeware/SOURCES/traceroute-1.4a12.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ee.lbl.gov/traceroute-1.4a12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 964d599ef696efccdeebe7721cd4828d
Download size: 74 KB
Estimated disk space required: 540 KB
Estimated build time: 0.01 SBU

Installation of Traceroute

Install Traceroute by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's/-o bin/-o root/' Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install-man

Command Explanations

sed 's/-o bin/-o root/' Makefile.in: Adjusts the Makefile so that the program is installed with user root owning the files instead of user bin (which doesn't exist on a default LFS system).

make install: Installs traceroute with SUID set to root in the /usr/sbin directory. This makes it possible for all users to execute traceroute. For absolute security, turn off the SUID bit in traceroute's file permissions with the command:

chmod -v 0755 /usr/sbin/traceroute

The risk is that if a security problem such as a buffer overflow was ever found in the Traceroute code, a regular user on your system could gain root access if the program is SUID root. Of course, removing the SUID permission also makes it impossible for users other than root to utilize traceroute, so decide what's right for your individual situation.

The goal of BLFS is to be completely FHS compliant, so if you do leave the traceroute binary SUID root, then you should move traceroute to /usr/bin with the following command:

mv -v /usr/sbin/traceroute /usr/bin

This ensures that the binary is in the path for non-root users.

Installed Program: traceroute

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

traceroute

does basically what it says: it traces the route your packets take from the host you are working on to another host on a network, showing all the intermediate hops (gateways) along the way.

Nmap-3.81

Introduction to Nmap

Nmap is a utility for network exploration and security auditing. It supports ping scanning, port scanning and TCP/IP fingerprinting.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://download.insecure.org/nmap/dist/nmap-3.81.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/nmap-3.81.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0713306dda85aee2c95ef31b4b7d2838
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 14.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

Nmap Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, PCRE-6.1, GTK+-1.2.10 (for building the graphical front-end) and libpcap-0.9.3

Installation of Nmap

Install Nmap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test-suite:

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: nmap and optionally, nmapfe

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/applications and /usr/share/nmap

Short Descriptions

nmap	is a utility for network exploration and security auditing. It supports ping scanning, port scanning and TCP/IP fingerprinting.
nmapfe	is the graphical front end to nmap.

Whois-4.7.5

Introduction to Whois

Whois is a client-side application which queries the whois directory service for information pertaining to a particular domain name.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/w/whois/whois_4.7.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.debian.org/debian/pool/main/w/whois/whois_4.7.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: c6657a888a20bd5d5915de6ba18599c8
Download size: 55 KB
Estimated disk space required: 600 KB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of Whois

Install Whois by running the following commands:

make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make prefix=/usr install

Installed Programs: whois

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

whois

is a client-side application which queries the whois directory service for information pertaining to a particular domain name.

BIND Utilities-9.3.1

Introduction to BIND Utilities

BIND Utilities is not a separate package, it is a collection of the client side programs that are included with BIND-9.3.1. The BIND package includes the client side programs nslookup, dig and host. If you install BIND server, these programs will be installed automatically. This section is for those users who don't need the complete BIND server, but need these client side applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/servers/isc/bind9/9.3.1/bind-9.3.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/bind9/9.3.1/bind-9.3.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9ff3204eea27184ea0722f37e43fc95d
Download size: 4.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 52.2 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

BIND Utilities Dependencies

Optional

Installation of BIND Utilities

Install BIND Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make -C lib/dns &&
make -C lib/isc &&
make -C lib/bind9 &&
make -C lib/isccfg &&
make -C lib/lwres &&
make -C bin/dig

Now, as the root user:

make -C bin/dig install

Command Explanations

make -C lib/...: These commands build the libraries that are needed for the client programs.

make -C bin/dig: This command builds the client programs.

Installed Programs: dig, host, and nslookup

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

See the program descriptions in the BIND-9.3.1 section.

Ethereal-0.10.12

Introduction to Ethereal

The Ethereal package contains a network protocol analyzer, also known as a “sniffer”. This is useful for analyzing data captured “off the wire” from a live network connection, or data read from a capture file. Ethereal provides both GUI and TTY-mode programs for examining captured network packets from over 500 protocols, as well as the capability to read capture files from many other popular network analyzers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.ethereal.com/distribution/ethereal-0.10.12.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ethereal.com/pub/ethereal/all-versions/ethereal-0.10.12.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 372b60e6eca14b7e1cf3e789207027f7
Download size: 7.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 255 MB
Estimated build time: 4.6 SBU

Ethereal dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 or GLib-2.6.4 (to build the TTY-mode front-end only)

Optional

pkg-config-0.19, GTK+-1.2.10 or GTK+-2.6.7 (to build the GUI front-end), OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, Python-2.4.1, PCRE-6.1, Net-SNMP and adns

Optional (to build additional documentation)

Doxygen-1.4.3, libxml-1.8.17, libxslt-1.1.14, FOP-0.20.5

Kernel Configuration

The kernel must have the Packet protocol enabled for Ethereal to capture live packets from the network. Enable the Packet protocol by choosing “Y” in the “Device Drivers” – “Networking support” – “Networking options” – “Packet socket” configuration parameter. Alternatively, build the af_packet module by choosing “M” in this parameter.

Installation of Ethereal

Install Ethereal by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc --enable-threads &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 doc/README.* /usr/share/ethereal &&
install -v -m644 -D ethereal.desktop \
    /usr/share/applications/ethereal.desktop &&
install -v -m644 -D image/elogo3d48x48.png \
    /usr/share/pixmaps/ethereal.png &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/pixmaps/ethereal/toolbar &&
install -v -m644 image/*.{png,ico,xpm} /usr/share/pixmaps/ethereal &&
install -v -m644 image/toolbar/* /usr/share/pixmaps/ethereal/toolbar

Command Explanations

--enable-threads: This parameter enables the use of threads in ethereal.

--with-ssl: This parameter enables the use of the OpenSSL libcrypto library.

Configuring Ethereal

Config Files

/etc/ethereal.conf and ~/.ethereal/preferences

Configuration Information

Though the default configuration parameters are very sane, reference the configuration section of the Ethereal User's Guide for configuration information. Most of Ethereal's configuration can be accomplished using the menu options of the ethereal GUI interface.

Note

If you want to look at packets, make sure you don't filter them out with iptables-1.3.3. If you want to exclude certain classes of packets, it is more efficient to do it with iptables than Ethereal.

Installed Programs: capinfos, dftest, editcap, ethereal, idl2eth, mergecap, randpkt, tethereal and text2pcap

Installed Libraries: libethereal.so, libwiretap.so and numerous dissector plugin modules

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/ethereal, /usr/share/ethereal and /usr/share/pixmaps/ethereal

Short Descriptions

capinfos	reads a saved capture file and returns any or all of several statistics about that file. It is able to detect and read any capture supported by the Ethereal package.
dftest	is a display-filter-compiler test program.
editcap	edits and/or translates the format of capture files. It knows how to read libpcap capture files, including those of tcpdump, Ethereal and other tools that write captures in that format.
ethereal	is a GUI network protocol analyzer. It lets you interactively browse packet data from a live network or from a previously saved capture file.
idl2eth	takes a user specified CORBA IDL file and generates “C” source code that can be used to create an Ethereal plugin.
mergecap	combines multiple saved capture files into a single output file.
randpkt	creates random-packet capture files.
tethereal	is a TTY-mode network protocol analyzer. It lets you capture packet data from a live network or read packets from a previously saved capture file.
text2pcap	reads in an ASCII hex dump and writes the data described into a libpcap-style capture file.
`libethereal.so`	contains functions used by the Ethereal programs to perform filtering and packet capturing.
`libwiretap.so`	is a library being developed as a future replacement for `libpcap`, the current standard Unix library for packet capturing. For more information, see the `README` file in the source `wiretap` directory.

Chapter 20. Mail/News Clients

Mail Clients help you retrieve (Fetchmail), sort (Procmail), read and compose responses (Nail, Mutt, Pine, Kmail, Balsa, Evolution, Mozilla) to email.

News clients also help you retrieve, sort, read and compose responses, but these messages travel through USENET (a worldwide bulletin board system) using the Network News Transfer Protocol (NNTP).

Nail-11.24

Introduction to Nail

The Nail package contains nail, a command-line Mail User Agent derived from Berkeley Mail which is intended to provide the functionality of the POSIX mailx command with additional support for MIME messages, IMAP (including caching), POP3, SMTP, S/MIME, message threading/sorting, scoring, and filtering. Nail is especially useful for writing scripts and batch processing.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/nail/nail-11.24.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: e127cdbba1220a45f6f1f463ac4b4fd1
Download size: 266 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.0 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Nail Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g or Mozilla NSS (from Mozilla-1.7.8 or Firefox-1.0.6 or Thunderbird-1.0.6), Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1 (for IMAP GSSAPI authentication) and MTA

Installation of Nail

Install Nail by running the following commands.

make SENDMAIL=/usr/sbin/sendmail

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make PREFIX=/usr install UCBINSTALL=/usr/bin/install &&
ln -v -sf nail /usr/bin/mail &&
ln -v -sf nail /usr/bin/mailx

Command Explanations

make SENDMAIL=/usr/sbin/sendmail: This changes the default MTA path of /usr/lib/sendmail.

make PREFIX=/usr install UCBINSTALL=/usr/bin/install: This changes the default installation path of /usr/local and the default install command path of /usr/ucb.

Configuring Nail

Config Files

/etc/nail.rc, ~/.mailrc and ~/.nailrc

Installed Programs: mail, mailx and nail

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

nail	is a command-line mail user agent compatible with the mail command found on commercial Unix versions.
mail	is a symbolic link to nail.
mailx	is a symbolic link to nail.

Procmail-3.22

Introduction to Procmail

The Procmail package contains an autonomous mail processor. This is useful for filtering and sorting incoming mail.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.procmail.org/procmail-3.22.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.procmail.net/pub/procmail/procmail-3.22.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 1678ea99b973eb77eda4ecf6acae53f1
Download size: 226 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.08 SBU

Installation of Procmail

Install Procmail by running the following commands as the root user:

make LOCKINGTEST=/tmp install &&
make install-suid

Command Explanations

make LOCKINGTEST=/tmp install: This prevents make from asking you where to test file-locking patterns.

make install-suid: Modifies permissions of the installed files.

Configuring Procmail

Config Files

/etc/procmailrc and ~/.procmailrc

Configuration Information

Recipes have to be written and placed in your ~/.procmailrc for execution. The procmailex man page is the starting place to learn how to write recipes.

Installed Programs: formail, lockfile, mailstat and procmail

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

formail	is a filter that can be used to format mail into mailbox format.
lockfile	is a utility that can lock a file for single use interactively or in a script.
mailstat	prints a summary report of mail that has been filtered by procmail since the last time mailstat was ran.
procmail	is an autonomous mail processor. It performs all the functions of an MDA (Mail Delivery Agent).

Fetchmail-6.2.5.2

Introduction to Fetchmail

The Fetchmail package contains a mail retrieval program. "It retrieves mail from remote mail servers and forwards it to your local (client) machine's delivery system, so it can then be read by normal mail user agents."

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://download.berlios.de/fetchmail/fetchmail-6.2.5.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp2.be.freesbie.org/packages/openbsd/distfiles/fetchmail-6.2.5.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 6eefef076bf3517a870f27a6133ff8c4
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 6.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Fetchmail Dependencies

Required

OpenSSL-0.9.7g and a local MDA (Procmail-3.22)

Optional

Python-2.4.1 and Tk-8.4.11

Installation of Fetchmail

Install Fetchmail by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --with-ssl --enable-fallback=procmail &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-ssl: This enables SSL if found, so that you can handle connections to secure POP3 and IMAP servers.

--enable-fallback=procmail: This tells Fetchmail to hand incoming mail to Procmail for delivery if your port 25 mail server is not present or not responding.

Configuring Fetchmail

Config Files

~/.fetchmailrc

Configuration Information

cat > ~/.fetchmailrc << "EOF"
set logfile /var/log/fetchmail.log
set no bouncemail
set postmaster root

poll SERVERNAME :
    user [username] pass [password];
    mda "/usr/bin/procmail -f %F -d %T";
EOF

chmod -v 0600 ~/.fetchmailrc

This is an example configuration that should suffice for most people. You can add as many users and servers as you need using the same syntax.

man fetchmail: Look for the section near the bottom named CONFIGURATION EXAMPLES. It gives some quick examples. There are countless other config options once you get used to it.

Installed Program: fetchmail and fetchmailconf

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

fetchmail	when executed as a user, this will source that users `~/.fetchmailrc` and download the appropriate mail.
fetchmailconf	this program provides a Tk GUI interface to your `~/.fetchmailrc` file making it much easier to configure. However, you will require Python, and it must have the Tkinker module available.

Mutt-1.4.2.1i

Introduction to Mutt

The Mutt package contains a Mail User Agent. This is useful for reading, writing, replying to, saving, and deleting your email.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/mail/mutt/mutt-1.4.2.1i.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mutt.org/mutt/mutt-1.4.2.1i.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 710bd56d3c4c4bcd1403bc4e053f7476
Download size: 2.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 16.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.35 SBU

Mutt Dependencies

Optional

GnuPG-1.4.1, ispell-3.2.06.epa7, MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7, Cyrus SASL-2.1.21, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, slang-1.4.9 and GDB

Installation of Mutt

Mutt requires a group named mail. You can add this group, if it does not exist, with this command:

groupadd -g 34 mail

If you did not install a MTA, such as Postfix-2.2.5 or Sendmail-8.13.4, you need to modify the ownership of /var/mail with this command:

chgrp -v mail /var/mail

Install Mutt by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --enable-pop --enable-imap &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-pop: This switch enables POP3 support.

--enable-imap: This switch enables IMAP support.

Configuring Mutt

Config Files

/etc/Muttrc, ~/.muttrc, /etc/mime.types, ~/.mime.types

Configuration Information

No changes in these files are necessary to begin using Mutt. When you are ready to make changes, the man page for muttrc is a good starting place.

In order to utilize GnuPG, use the following command:

cat /usr/share/doc/mutt/samples/gpg.rc >> ~/.muttrc

Installed Programs: flea, mutt, mutt_dotlock, muttbug, pgpring, and pgpwrap

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/doc/mutt

Short Descriptions

flea	is a bug submitter for Mutt.
mutt	is a Mail User Agent (MUA) which enables you to read, write and delete your email.
mutt_dotlock	implements the mail spool file lock.
muttbug	is a script that executes flea.

Pine-4.63

Introduction to Pine

The Pine package contains the Pine Mail User Agent and several server daemons for various mail protocols, in addition to some nice file and directory editing/browsing programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirror.sit.wisc.edu/pub/net/mail/pine/pine4.63.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/pine4.63.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e881f439f38039b310d22554ab08feb4
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 57 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

Additional Downloads

Recommended Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/pine-4.63-fhs-1.patch

Pine Dependencies

Required

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.2.24 and MIT krb5-1.4.1

Installation of Pine

Install Pine by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../pine-4.63-fhs-3.patch &&
./build DEBUG=-O MAILSPOOL=/var/mail \
    SSLDIR=/usr SSLCERTS=/etc/ssl/certs slx

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

cp -v doc/*.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
cd bin &&
install -v -m755 pine imapd ipop2d ipop3d mailutil mtest pico \
    pilot rpdump rpload /usr/bin

Command Explanations

patch -Np1 -i ../pine-4.63-fhs-x.patch: This patch will make Pine use /etc for configuration files.

The build procedure for Pine is somewhat unusual, in that options usually passed as ./configure options or housed in $CFLAGS must all be passed on the command line to the ./build script.

./build slx: Pine offers quite a few target platforms, slx specifies Linux using -lcrypt to get the crypt function. See the doc/pine-ports file for more information and other authentication options.

DEBUG=-O: This flag compiles an optimized version of pine and pico that produces no debug files.

MAILSPOOL=/var/mail: Location of mail spool files, /var/mail.

SSLDIR=/usr SSLCERTS=/etc/ssl/certs: Location of OpenSSL files.

cd bin && install ... /usr/bin: This installs the Pine programs.

Configuring Pine

Config Files

~/.pinerc

Configuration Information

The pine executable needs no global configuration to use. Users set Pine options in ~/.pinerc using an internal configuration menu.

Installed Programs: imapd, ipop2d, ipop3d, mtest, pico, pilot, pine, rpdump, and rpload

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

imapd	is the IMAP server daemon.
ipop2d	is an IMAP to POP2 conversion server.
ipop3d	is an IMAP to POP3 conversion server.
metest	is a minimal IMAP mail user agent, used for debugging.
pico	is a stand-alone editor, similar to the Pine internal message composer.
pilot	is a file and directory navigator and browser.
pine	is the Pine mail user agent.
rpdump	is used to copy data from remote Pine configuration files or address books into a local file.
rpload	is the Pine remote data utility, used to convert local Pine configuration files or address books into remote configurations or address books.

Slrn-0.9.8.1

Introduction to Slrn

slrn is a slang-based news reader, capable of reading local news spools as well as groups from an NNTP server. Small local news spools can also be created with the use of the slrnpull program included in the slrn distribution.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/slrn/slrn-0.9.8.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fh-heilbronn.de/pub/mirrors/slrn/slrn-0.9.8.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9b613007df537444a5f8a4a2994fadb7
Download size: 1011 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.19 SBU

Slrn Dependencies

Required

slang-1.4.9 and a MTA (See Chapter 22, Mail Server Software)

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, GnuTLS, UUDeview, INN and libcanlock

Installation of Slrn

Install slrn by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --with-slrnpull --enable-spool &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--with-slrnpull --enable-spool: These switches enable building the slrnpull executable.

--with-ssl: This switch adds OpenSSL support to slrn.

--with-uudeview: This switch adds UUDeview support to slrn.

Configuring Slrn

Config Files

/etc/slrn.rc, ~/.slrnrc

Configuration Information

The first time slrn is run, the ~/.jnewsrc file must be created. For this configuration to work, you must have an environmental variable, NNTPSERVER, set. In normal operation it would be exported into the environment by a startup file, like /etc/profile or ~/.bashrc. Here it is just put it into the environment of the configuration step. For now, the LFS news server is used in this example, but you should use whatever server you prefer.

Create the ~/.jnewsrc file with the following command:

NNTPSERVER=news.linuxfromscratch.org \
    slrn -f ~/.jnewsrc --create

You will also have to edit one of the configuration files. There is a sample startup /usr/share/doc/slrn/slrn.rc file that comes with slrn. It is extensively documented but if you need more information, look at the slrn website.

Installed Programs: slrn and slrnpull

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/slrn and usr/share/doc/slrn

Short Descriptions

slrn	is the slang-based news reader.
slrnpull	is used to pull a small news feed from an NNTP server for offline reading.

Other Mail and News Programs

Pan-0.14.2 is a GTK2 based newsreader program.

knode is a Qt based newsreader program from kdepim-3.4.1.

kmail is a Qt based mail client from kdepim-3.4.1.

Balsa-2.2.6 is a GTK2 based mail client.

Mozilla-1.7.8 includes both a mail client and newsreader in its installation.

Thunderbird-1.0.6 is a mail/news client based on the Mozilla code base.

Evolution-2.2.2 includes a GTK2 based mail client.

Servers

21. Major Servers
22. Mail Server Software
23. Databases
24. Other Server Software

Chapter 21. Major Servers

Major servers are the programs that provide content or services to users or other programs.

Apache-2.0.54

Introduction to Apache

The Apache package contains an open-source HTTP server. It is useful for creating local intranet web sites or running huge web serving operations.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.apache.org/dist/httpd/httpd-2.0.54.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.tux.org/pub/net/apache/dist/httpd/httpd-2.0.54.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 4ae8a38c6b5db9046616ce10a0d551a2
Download size: 5.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 91.6 MB
Estimated build time: 1.7 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/httpd-2.0.54-config-1.patch

Apache Dependencies

Optional

Berkeley DB-4.3.28 or GDBM-1.8.3, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, expat-1.95.8 and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of Apache

For security reasons, running the server as an unprivileged user and group is strongly encouraged. Create the following group and user using the following commands (as root):

groupadd -g 25 apache &&
useradd -c "Apache Server" -d /dev/null -g apache \
        -s /bin/false -u 25 apache

The following patch will define the layout of destination directories and, among them, the build directory at /usr/lib/apache/build. This will allow the modules added to Apache to be configured without errors. Apply the patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../httpd-2.0.54-config-1.patch

Build and install Apache by running the following commands:

./configure --enable-layout=FHS --enable-mods-shared=all &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown root:root /usr/sbin/{apxs,apachectl,dbmmanage,envvars-std,envvars} \
    /usr/include/apache/* /usr/lib/apache/httpd.exp \
    /usr/share/man/man1/{dbmmanage,htdigest,htpasswd}.1 \
    /usr/share/man/man8/{ab,apachectl,apxs,httpd}.8 \
    /usr/share/man/man8/{logresolve,rotatelogs,suexec}.8 &&
chown -R apache:apache /srv/www

Command Explanations

--with-expat=/usr: Uses system installed expat. If you have installed expat and do not use this switch, the Apache installation may overwrite some files from the expat installation.

--enable-mods-shared=all: The modules should be compiled and used as Dynamic Shared Objects (DSOs) so they can be included and excluded from the server using the run-time configuration directives.

--enable-ssl: Use this switch to create the mod_ssl module and enable SSL support.

chown root:root ...: This command changes the ownership of some installed files, the result of building the package as a user other than root.

chown -R apache:apache /srv/www: By default, the installation process installs files (documentation, error messages, default icons, etc.) with the ownership of the user that extracted the files from the tar file. If you want to change the ownership to another user, you should do so at this point. The only requirement is that the document directories need to be accessible by the httpd process with (r-x) permissions and files need to be readable (r--) by the apache user.

Configuring Apache

Config Files

/etc/apache/*

Configuration Information

The main configuration file is named httpd.conf. Modify it to run the server as a dedicated user:

sed -i -e "s%User nobody%User apache%" \
       -e "s%^Group #-1%Group apache%" \
    /etc/apache/httpd.conf

See http://httpd.apache.org/docs-2.0/configuring.html for detailed instructions on customizing your Apache HTTP server.

There's a problem with the ISAPI DSO module caused from compiling with GCC-3.4.3. Comment out the module from the configuration file with the following command:

sed -i -e "s/^LoadModule isapi_module/# &/" \
    /etc/apache/httpd.conf

Boot Script

If you want the Apache server to start automatically when the system is booted, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/apache init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-apache

Installed Programs: ab, apachectl, apr-config, apu-config, apxs, checkgid, dbmmanage, htdbm, htdigest, htpasswd, httpd, instdso.sh, logresolve, and rotatelogs

Installed Libraries: libapr-0.[so,a], libaprutil-0.[so,a], and /usr/lib/apache/*.so

Installed Directories: /etc/apache, /srv/www, /usr/include/apache, /usr/lib/apache, and /var/log/apache

Short Descriptions

ab	is a tool for benchmarking your Apache HTTP server.
apachectl	is a front end to the Apache HTTP server which is designed to help the administrator control the functioning of the Apache httpd daemon.
apxs	is a tool for building and installing extension modules for the Apache HTTP server.
dbmanage	is used to create and update the DBM format files used to store usernames and passwords for basic authentication of HTTP users.
htdigest	is used to create and update the flat-files used to store usernames, realms and passwords for digest authentication of HTTP users.
htpasswd	is used to create and update the flat-files used to store usernames and passwords for basic authentication of HTTP users.
httpd	is the Apache HTTP server program.
instdso.sh	is a script which installs Apache DSO modules.
logresolve	is a post-processing program to resolve IP-addresses in Apache's access log files.
rotatelogs	is a simple program for use in conjunction with Apache's piped log file feature.

BIND-9.3.1

Introduction to BIND

The BIND package provides a DNS server and client utilities. If you are only interested in the utilities, refer to the BIND Utilities-9.3.1.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/servers/isc/bind9/9.3.1/bind-9.3.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/bind9/9.3.1/bind-9.3.1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9ff3204eea27184ea0722f37e43fc95d
Download size: 4.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 71.3 MB
Estimated build time: 1.8 SBU (additional 11 minutes, processor independent, to run the complete test suite)

BIND Dependencies

Optional

Optional (to Run the Test Suite)

Net-tools-1.60 (for ifconfig) and Net-DNS

Optional (to [Re]Build Documentation)

OpenJade-1.3.2, JadeTeX-3.13 and DocBook DSSSL Stylesheets-1.79

Installation of BIND

Install BIND by running the following commands:

sed -i -e "s/dsssl-stylesheets/&-1.79/g" configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --enable-threads --with-libtool &&
make

Issue the following commands to run the complete suite of tests. First, as root, set up some test interfaces:

bin/tests/system/ifconfig.sh up

Now run the test suite as an unprivileged user:

make check 2>&1 | tee check.log

Again as root, clean up the test interfaces:

bin/tests/system/ifconfig.sh down

Issue the following command to check that all 145 tests ran successfully:

grep "R:PASS" check.log | wc -l

Finally, install the package as the root user:

make install &&
chmod 755 /usr/lib/{lib{bind9,isc{,cc,cfg},lwres,dns}.so.*.?.?} &&
cd doc &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/bind-9.3.1/{arm,draft,misc,rfc} &&
install -v -m644 arm/*.html \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.3.1/arm &&
install -v -m644 draft/*.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.3.1/draft &&
install -v -m644 rfc/* \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.3.1/rfc &&
install -v -m644 \
    misc/{dnssec,ipv6,migrat*,options,rfc-compliance,roadmap,sdb} \
    /usr/share/doc/bind-9.3.1/misc

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ... configure: This command forces configure to look for the DSSSL stylesheets in the standard BLFS location.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This parameter forces BIND to look for configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--enable-threads: This parameter enables multi-threading capability.

--with-libtool: This parameter forces the building of dynamic libraries and links the installed binaries to these libraries.

chmod 755 /usr/lib/{lib{bind9,isc{,cc,cfg},lwres,dns}.so.*.?.?}: Libtool does not set the permissions for these libraries correctly so they are fixed here.

cd doc; install ...: These commands install the additional package documentation. Optionally, omit any or all of these commands.

Configuring BIND

Config files

named.conf, root.hints, 127.0.0, rndc.conf and resolv.conf

Configuration Information

BIND will be configured to run in a chroot jail as an unprivileged user (named). This configuration is more secure in that a DNS compromise can only affect a few files in the named user's HOME directory.

Create the unprivileged user and group named:

groupadd -g 20 named &&
useradd -m -c "BIND Owner" -g named -s /bin/false -u 20 named

Set up some files, directories and devices needed by BIND:

cd /home/named &&
mkdir -p dev etc/namedb/slave var/run &&
mknod /home/named/dev/null c 1 3 &&
mknod /home/named/dev/random c 1 8 &&
chmod 666 /home/named/dev/{null,random} &&
mkdir /home/named/etc/namedb/pz &&
cp /etc/localtime /home/named/etc

Then, generate a key for use in the named.conf and rdnc.conf files using the rndc-confgen command:

rndc-confgen -b 512 | grep -m 1 "secret" | cut -d '"' -f 2

Create the named.conf file from which named will read the location of zone files, root name servers and secure DNS keys:

cat > /home/named/etc/named.conf << "EOF"
 options {
     directory "/etc/namedb";
    pid-file "/var/run/named.pid";
    statistics-file "/var/run/named.stats";

 };
 controls {
     inet 127.0.0.1 allow { localhost; } keys { rndc_key; };
 };
 key "rndc_key" {
     algorithm hmac-md5;
     secret "[Insert secret from rndc-confgen's output here]";
 };
 zone "." {
     type hint;
     file "root.hints";
 };
 zone "0.0.127.in-addr.arpa" {
     type master;
     file "pz/127.0.0";
 };

// Bind 9 now logs by default through syslog (except debug).
// These are the default logging rules.

logging {
     category default { default_syslog; default_debug; };
     category unmatched { null; };

  channel default_syslog {
      syslog daemon;                      // send to syslog's daemon
                                          // facility
      severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                          // and higher
  };

  channel default_debug {
      file "named.run";                   // write to named.run in
                                          // the working directory
                                          // Note: stderr is used instead
                                          // of "named.run"
                                          // if the server is started
                                          // with the '-f' option.
      severity dynamic;                   // log at the server's
                                          // current debug level
  };

  channel default_stderr {
      stderr;                             // writes to stderr
      severity info;                      // only send priority info
                                          // and higher
  };

  channel null {
     null;                                // toss anything sent to
                                          // this channel
  };
};

EOF

Create the rndc.conf file with the following commands:

cat > /etc/rndc.conf << "EOF"
key rndc_key {
algorithm "hmac-md5";
    secret
    "[Insert secret from rndc-confgen's output here]";
    };
options {
    default-server localhost;
    default-key    rndc_key;
};
EOF

The rndc.conf file contains information for controlling named operations with the rndc utility.

Create a zone file with the following contents:

cat > /home/named/etc/namedb/pz/127.0.0 << "EOF"
$TTL 3D
@      IN      SOA     ns.local.domain. hostmaster.local.domain. (
                        1       ; Serial
                        8H      ; Refresh
                        2H      ; Retry
                        4W      ; Expire
                        1D)     ; Minimum TTL
                NS      ns.local.domain.
1               PTR     localhost.
EOF

Create the root.hints file with the following commands:

Note

Caution must be used to ensure there are no leading spaces in this file.

cat > /home/named/etc/namedb/root.hints << "EOF"
.                       6D  IN      NS      A.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      B.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      C.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      D.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      E.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      F.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      G.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      H.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      I.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      J.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      K.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      L.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
.                       6D  IN      NS      M.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.
A.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       198.41.0.4
B.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.228.79.201
C.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.33.4.12
D.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       128.8.10.90
E.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.203.230.10
F.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.5.5.241
G.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.112.36.4
H.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       128.63.2.53
I.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.36.148.17
J.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       192.58.128.30
K.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       193.0.14.129
L.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       198.32.64.12
M.ROOT-SERVERS.NET.     6D  IN      A       202.12.27.33
EOF

The root.hints file is a list of root name servers. This file must be updated periodically with the dig utility. A current copy of root.hints can be obtained from ftp://rs.internic.net/domain/named.root. Consult the BIND 9 Administrator Reference Manual for details.

Create or modify resolv.conf to use the new name server with the following commands:

Note

Replace [yourdomain.com] with your own valid domain name.

cp /etc/resolv.conf /etc/resolv.conf.bak &&
cat > /etc/resolv.conf << "EOF"
search [yourdomain.com]
nameserver 127.0.0.1
EOF

Set permissions on the chroot jail with the following command:

chown -R named.named /home/named

Boot Script

To start the DNS server at boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/bind init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-bind

Now start BIND with the new boot script:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/bind start

Testing BIND

Test out the new BIND 9 installation. First query the local host address with dig:

dig -x 127.0.0.1

Now try an external name lookup, taking note of the speed difference in repeated lookups due to the caching. Run the dig command twice on the same address:

dig www.linuxfromscratch.org &&
dig www.linuxfromscratch.org

You can see almost instantaneous results with the named caching lookups. Consult the BIND Administrator Reference Manual located at doc/arm/Bv9ARM.html in the package source tree, for further configuration options.

Installed Programs: dig, dnssec-keygen, dnssec-signzone, host, isc-config.sh, lwresd, named, named-checkconf, named-checkzone, nslookup, nsupdate, rndc, and rndc-confgen

Installed Libraries: libbind9.[so,a], libdns.[so,a], libisc.[so,a], libisccc.[so,a], libisccfg.[so,a], and liblwres.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /home/named, /usr/include/bind9, /usr/include/dns, /usr/include/dst, /usr/include/isc, /usr/include/isccc, /usr/include/isccfg, /usr/include/lwres, and /usr/share/doc/bind-9.3.1

Short Descriptions

dig	interrogates DNS servers.
dnssec-keygen	is a key generator for secure DNS.
dnssec-signzone	generates signed versions of zone files.
host	is a utility for DNS lookups.
lwresd	is a caching-only name server for local process use.
named	is the name server daemon.
named-checkconf	checks the syntax of `named.conf` files.
named-checkzone	checks zone file validity.
nslookup	is a program used to query Internet domain nameservers.
nsupdate	is used to submit DNS update requests.
rndc	controls the operation of BIND.
rndc-confgen	generates `rndc.conf` files.

NFS Utilities-1.0.7

Introduction to NFS Utilities

The NFS Utilities package contains the userspace server and client tools necessary to use the kernel's nfs abilities. NFS is a protocol that allows sharing file systems over the network.

Package information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/nfs/nfs-utils-1.0.7.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kernel.org/pub/linux/utils/nfs/nfs-utils-1.0.7.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 8f863120261cd572ad320a9152581e11
Download size: 396 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

NFS Utilities Dependencies

Required

portmap-5beta

Optional

libevent and libnsfidmap for nfsv4 support, and MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7 for gss (RPC Security) support.

Kernel Configuration

Enable the following options in the kernel configuration and recompile the kernel if necessary:

File systems:
  Network File Systems:
    NFS File System Support: M or Y
    NFS Server Support: M or Y

Select the appropriate sub-options that appear when the above options are selected.

Installation of NFS Utilities

Before you compile the program, you need to be sure the nobody user and nogroup group are available. You can add these by running the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 99 nogroup &&
useradd -c "Unprivileged Nobody" -d /dev/null -g nogroup \
    -s /bin/false -u 99 nobody

Note

The classic uid and gid values are 65534 which is also -2 when interpreted as a signed 16-bit number. These values impact other files on some filesystems that do not have support for sparse files. The nobody and nogroup values are relatively arbitrary. The impact on a server is nil if the exports file is configured correctly. If it is misconfigured, the ls -l or ps listing will show a uid or gid number of 65534 instead of a name. The client uses nobody only as the user running rpc.statd.

Install NFS Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --disable-nfsv4 --disable-gss &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note

If your /usr directory is NFS mounted, you should install the executables in /sbin by passing an additional parameter --sbindir=/sbin to the above ./configure command.

Command Explanations

--disable-nfsv4: Disables support for NFS Version 4.

--disable-gss: Disables support for RPCSEC GSS (RPC Security).

Configuring NFS Utilities

Server Configuration

/etc/exports contains the exported directories on NFS servers. Refer to the exports manual page for the syntax of this file. Also refer to the "NFS HowTo" available at http://nfs.sourceforge.net/nfs-howto/ on how to configure the servers and clients in a secure manner. For example, for sharing the /home directory over the local network, the following line may be added:

/home 192.168.0.0/255.255.255.0(rw,anonuid=99,anongid=99)

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs-server init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package to start the server at boot.

make install-nfs-server

Now create the /etc/sysconfig/nfs-server configuration file:

cat > /etc/sysconfig/nfs-server << "EOF"
PORT="2049"
PROCESSES="8"
QUOTAS="no"
KILLDELAY="10"
EOF

Client Configuration

/etc/fstab contains the directories that are to be mounted on the client. Alternately the partitions can be mounted by using the mount command with the proper options. To mount the /home and /usr partitions, add the following to the /etc/fstab:

<server-name>:/home  /home nfs   rw,_netdev,rsize=8192,wsize=8192 0 0
<server-name>:/usr   /usr  nfs   ro,_netdev,rsize=8192            0 0

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/nfs-client init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package to start the client services at boot.

make install-nfs-client

To automatically mount nfs filesystems, clients will also need to install the netfs bootscript as described in Configuring for Network Filesystems.

Installed Programs: exportfs, nfsstat, nhfsgraph, nhfsnums, nhfsrun, nhfsstone, rpc.lockd, rpc.mountd, rpc.nfsd, rpc.rquotad, rpc.statd, and showmount

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /var/lib/nfs

Short Descriptions

exportfs	maintains a list of NFS exported file systems.
nfsstat	prints NFS statistics.
nhfsgraph	runs nhfsstone over multiple loads.
nhfsnums	converts raw numbers from nhfsstone output into plot format.
nhfsrun	executes nhfsstone with a range of different loads.
nhfsstone	is used on a NFS client to generate an artificial load with a particular mix of NFS operations.
rpc.lockd	starts the NFS lock manager (NLM) on kernels that don't start it automatically. However, since most kernels do start it automatically it is usually not required.
rpc.mountd	implements the NFS mount protocol on an NFS server.
rpc.nfsd	implements the user level part of the NFS service on the server.
rpc.rquotad	is an rpc server which returns quotas for a user of a local file system which is mounted by a remote machine over the NFS.
rpc.statd	is used by the NFS file locking service, rpc.lockd, to implement lock recovery when the NFS server machine crashes and reboots. Runs on the NFS server only.
showmount	displays mount information for an NFS server.

OpenSSH-4.1p1

Introduction to OpenSSH

The OpenSSH package contains ssh clients and the sshd daemon. This is useful for encrypting authentication and subsequent traffic over a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://sunsite.ualberta.ca/pub/OpenBSD/OpenSSH/portable/openssh-4.1p1.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.openbsd.org/pub/OpenBSD/OpenSSH/portable/openssh-4.1p1.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 959c663e709c981f07a3315bfd64f3d0
Download size: 894 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

OpenSSH Dependencies

Required

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80, tcpwrappers-7.6, X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7, JDK-1.5.0, Net-tools-1.60, Sysstat-6.0.0, OpenSC and libedit

Installation of OpenSSH

OpenSSH runs as two processes when connecting to other computers. The first process is a privileged process and controls the issuance of privileges as necessary. The second process communicates with the network. Additional installation steps are necessary to set up the proper environment, which are performed by the following commands:

install -v -d -m700 /var/lib/sshd &&
chown root:sys /var/lib/sshd &&
groupadd -g 50 sshd &&
useradd -c 'sshd PrivSep' -d /var/lib/sshd -g sshd \
    -s /bin/false -u 50 sshd

OpenSSH is very sensitive to changes in the linked OpenSSL libraries. If you recompile OpenSSL, OpenSSH may fail to startup. An alternative is to link against the static OpenSSL library. To link against the static library, execute the following command:

sed -i "s:-lcrypto:/usr/lib/libcrypto.a:g" configure

Install OpenSSH by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/ssh \
    --libexecdir=/usr/sbin --with-md5-passwords \
    --with-privsep-path=/var/lib/sshd

If you use Heimdal as your Kerberos5 implementation and you linked the Heimdal libraries into the build using the --with-kerberos5 parameter, you'll need to modify the Makefile or the build will fail. Use the following command:

sed -i -e "s/lkrb5 -ldes/lkrb5/" Makefile

Continue the build:

make

If you linked tcp_wrappers into the build using the --with-tcp-wrappers parameter, ensure you add 127.0.0.1 to the sshd line in /etc/hosts.allow if you have a restrictive /etc/hosts.deny file, or the testsuite will fail. To run the testsuite, issue: make -k tests.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/ssh: This prevents the configuration files from being installed in /usr/etc.

--with-md5-passwords: This is required if you made the changes recommended by the shadowpasswd_plus LFS hint on your SSH server when you installed the Shadow Password Suite or if you access a SSH server that authenticates by user passwords encrypted with md5.

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: This parameter changes the installation path of some programs to /usr/sbin instead of /usr/libexec.

Configuring OpenSSH

Config Files

~/.ssh/*, /etc/ssh/ssh_config, and /etc/ssh/sshd_config

There are no required changes to any of these files. However, you may wish to view the /etc/ssh/ files and make any changes appropriate for the security of your system. One recommended change is that you disable root login via ssh. Execute the following command as the root user to disable root login via ssh:

echo "PermitRootLogin no" >> /etc/ssh/sshd_config

Additional configuration information can be found in the man pages for sshd, ssh and ssh-agent.

Boot Script

To start the SSH server at system boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/sshd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-sshd

Installed Programs: scp, sftp, sftp-server, slogin, ssh, sshd, ssh-add, ssh-agent, ssh-keygen, ssh-keyscan, and ssh-keysign

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/ssh and /var/lib/sshd

Short Descriptions

scp	is a file copy program that acts like rcp except it uses an encrypted protocol.
sftp	is an FTP-like program that works over SSH1 and SSH2 protocols.
sftp-server	is an SFTP server subsystem.
slogin	is a symlink to ssh.
ssh	is an rlogin/ rsh-like client program except it uses an encrypted protocol.
sshd	is a daemon that listens for ssh login requests.
ssh-add	is a tool which adds keys to the ssh-agent.
ssh-agent	is an authentication agent that can store private keys.
ssh-keygen	is a key generation tool.
ssh-keyscan	is a utility for gathering public host keys from a number of hosts.
ssh-keysign	is used by ssh to access the local host keys and generate the digital signature required during hostbased authentication with SSH protocol version 2.

ProFTPD-1.2.10

Introduction to ProFTPD

The ProFTPD package contains a secure and highly configurable FTP daemon. This is useful for serving large file archives over a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.proftpd.org/distrib/source/proftpd-1.2.10.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.proftpd.org/distrib/source/proftpd-1.2.10.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 5feb4a7348e12faefc25e34fd92efdd6
Download size: 901 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.27 SBU

ProFTPD Dependencies

Optional

Installation of ProFTPD

For security reasons, you should install ProFTPD using an unprivileged user and group. As the root user:

groupadd -g 46 proftpd &&
useradd -c proftpd -d /home/ftp -g proftpd \
        -s /usr/lib/proftpd/proftpdshell -u 46 proftpd &&
install -v -d -m775 -o proftpd -g proftpd /usr/lib/proftpd &&
ln -v -s /bin/false /usr/lib/proftpd/proftpdshell &&
echo /usr/lib/proftpd/proftpdshell >> /etc/shells

Install ProFTPD as an unprivileged user by running the following commands:

install_user=proftpd install_group=proftpd \
    ./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var/run &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

install -v -d -m775 -o proftpd -g proftpd /usr/lib/proftpd: Create the home directory for ProFTPD.

ln -v -s /bin/false /usr/lib/proftpd/proftpdshell: Set the default shell as a link to an invalid shell.

echo /usr/lib/proftpd/proftpdshell >> /etc/shells: Fake a valid shell for compatibility purposes.

Note

The above three commands can be omitted if the following directive is placed in the configuration file:

RequireValidShell off

By default, proftpd will require that users logging in have valid shells. The RequireValidShell directive turns off this requirement. This is only recommended if you are setting up your FTP server exclusively for anonymous downloads.

install_user=proftpd install_group=proftpd: Specify the user and group identity for ProFTPD.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This prevents the configuration files from going to /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/run: This uses /var/run instead of /usr/var for lock files.

Configuring ProFTPD

Config Files

/etc/proftpd.conf

Configuration Information

This is a simple, download-only sample configuration. See the ProFTPD documentation in /usr/share/doc/proftpd and consult the website at http://www.proftpd.org/ for example configurations.

cat > /etc/proftpd.conf << "EOF"
# This is a basic ProFTPD configuration file
# It establishes a single server and a single anonymous login.

ServerName                      "ProFTPD Default Installation"
ServerType                      standalone
DefaultServer                   on

# Port 21 is the standard FTP port.
Port                            21
# Umask 022 is a good standard umask to prevent new dirs and files
# from being group and world writable.
Umask                           022

# To prevent DoS attacks, set the maximum number of child processes
# to 30.  If you need to allow more than 30 concurrent connections
# at once, simply increase this value.  Note that this ONLY works
# in standalone mode, in inetd mode you should use an inetd server
# that allows you to limit maximum number of processes per service
# (such as xinetd)
MaxInstances                    30

# Set the user and group that the server normally runs at.
User                            proftpd
Group                           proftpd

# Normally, files should be overwritable.
<Directory /*>
  AllowOverwrite                on
</Directory>

# A basic anonymous configuration, no upload directories.
<Anonymous ~proftpd>
  User                          proftpd
  Group                         proftpd
  # Clients should be able to login with "anonymous" as well as "proftpd"
  UserAlias                     anonymous proftpd

  # Limit the maximum number of anonymous logins
  MaxClients                    10

  # 'welcome.msg' should be displayed at login, and '.message' displayed
  # in each newly chdired directory.
  DisplayLogin                  welcome.msg
  DisplayFirstChdir             .message

  # Limit WRITE everywhere in the anonymous chroot
  <Limit WRITE>
    DenyAll
  </Limit>
</Anonymous>
EOF

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/proftpd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-proftpd

Installed Programs: ftpcount, ftpdctl, ftptop, ftpwho, ftpshut, proftpd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /var/run/proftpd

Short Descriptions

proftpd	is the FTP daemon.
ftpcount	shows the current number of connections.
ftpshut	shuts down all proftpd servers at a given time.
ftptop	displays running status on connections.
ftpwho	shows current process information for each session.

Samba-3.0.14a

Introduction to Samba

The Samba package provides file and print services to SMB/CIFS clients and Windows networking to Linux clients. Samba can also be configured as a Windows NT 4.0 Domain Controller replacement (with caveats working with NT PDC's and BDC's), a file/print server acting as a member of a Windows NT 4.0 or Active Directory domain and a NetBIOS (rfc1001/1002) nameserver (which amongst other things provides LAN browsing support).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://us1.samba.org/samba/ftp/samba-3.0.14a.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/samba/samba-3.0.14a.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: ebee37e66a8b5f6fd328967dc09088e8
Download size: 15.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 147 MB
Estimated build time: 2.21 SBU

Samba Dependencies

Optional

popt-1.7-5, Linux-PAM-0.80, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, CUPS-1.1.23, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, libxml2-2.6.20, MySQL-4.1.12 or PostgreSQL-8.0.3, Python-2.4.1, xinetd-2.3.13 and Valgrind

Installation of Samba

Install Samba by running the following commands:

cd source &&
./configure \
    --prefix=/usr \
    --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var \
    --with-piddir=/var/run \
    --with-fhs \
    --with-smbmount &&
make

Now, as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /var/cache/samba &&
make install &&
mv -v /usr/lib/samba/libsmbclient.so /usr/lib &&
ln -v -sf ../libsmbclient.so /usr/lib/samba &&
chmod -v 644 /usr/include/libsmbclient.h &&
install -v -m755 nsswitch/libnss_win{s,bind}.so /lib &&
ln -v -sf libnss_winbind.so /lib/libnss_winbind.so.2 &&
ln -v -sf libnss_wins.so /lib/libnss_wins.so.2 &&
if [ -f nsswitch/pam_winbind.so ]; then
    install -v -m755 nsswitch/pam_winbind.so /lib/security
fi &&
install -v -m644 ../examples/smb.conf.default /etc/samba &&
install -v -m644 ../docs/*.pdf /usr/share/samba

Note

You may want to run configure with the --help parameter. There may be other parameters needed to take advantage of the optional dependencies.

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: Sets the configuration file directory to avoid the default of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var: Sets the variable data directory to avoid the default of /usr/var.

--with-fhs: Assigns all other file paths in a manner compliant with the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard (FHS).

--with-smbmount: Orders the creation of an extra binary for use by the mount command so that mounting remote SMB (Windows) shares becomes no more complex than mounting remote NFS shares.

--with-pam: Use this parameter to link Linux-PAM into the build. This also builds the pam_winbind.so PAM module. You can find instructions on how to configure and use the module by running man winbindd.

install -v -d /var/cache/samba: This directory is needed for proper operation of the smbd and nmbd daemons.

mv -v /usr/lib/samba/libsmbclient.so ...; ln -v -sf ../libsmbclient.so ...: The libsmbclient.so library is needed by other packages. This command moves it to a location where other packages can find it.

install -v -m755 nsswitch/libnss_win{s,bind}.so /lib: The nss libraries are not installed by default. If you intend to use winbindd for domain auth, and/or WINS name resolution, you need these libraries.

ln -v -sf libnss_winbind.so /lib/libnss_winbind.so.2 and ln -v -sf libnss_wins.so /lib/libnss_wins.so.2: These symlinks are required by glibc to use the NSS libraries.

install -v -m644 ../examples/smb.conf.default /etc/samba: This copies a default smb.conf file into /etc/samba. This sample configuration will not work until you copy it to /etc/samba/smb.conf and make the appropriate changes for your installation. See the configuration section for minimum values which must be set.

Configuring Samba

Config Files

/etc/samba/smb.conf

Mounting Shares by Unprivileged Users

If it is desired for unprivileged users to directly mount (and unmount) SMB shares, the smbmnt and smbumount commands must be setuid root. Note that users can only mount SMB shares on a mount point owned by that user (requires write access also). If desired, change these programs to setuid root by issuing the following command as the root user:

chmod -v 4755 /usr/bin/smb{mnt,umount}

Printing to SMB Clients

If you use CUPS for print services, and you wish to print to a printer attached to an SMB client, you need to create an SMB backend device. To create the device, issue the following command as the root user:

ln -v -sf /usr/bin/smbspool /usr/lib/cups/backend/smb

Configuration Information

Due to the complexity and the many various uses for Samba, complete configuration for all the package's capabilities is well beyond the scope of the BLFS book. This section provides instructions to configure the /etc/samba/smb.conf file for two common scenarios. The complete contents of /etc/samba/smb.conf will depend on the purpose of Samba installation.

Note

You may find it easier to copy the configuration parameters shown below into an empty /etc/samba/smb.conf file instead of copying and editing the default file as mentioned in the “Command Explanations” section. How you create/edit the /etc/samba/smb.conf file will be left up to you. Do ensure the file is only writeable by the root user (mode 644).

Scenario 1: Minimal Standalone Client-Only Installation

Choose this variant if you only want to transfer files using smbclient, mount Windows shares and print to Windows printers, and don't want to share your files and printers to Windows machines.

A /etc/samba/smb.conf file with the following three parameters is sufficient:

[global]
    workgroup = MYGROUP
    dos charset = cp850
    unix charset = ISO-8859-1

The values in this example specify that the computer belongs to a Windows workgroup named “MYGROUP”, uses the “cp850” character set on the wire when talking to MS-DOS and MS Windows 9x, and that the filenames are stored in the “ISO-8859-1” encoding on the disk. Adjust these values appropriately for your installation. The “unix charset” value must be the same as the output of locale charmap when executed with the LANG variable set to your preferred locale, otherwise the ls command may not display correct filenames of downloaded files.

There is no need to run any Samba servers in this scenario, thus you don't need to install the provided bootscripts.

Scenario 2: Standalone File/Print Server

Choose this variant if you want to share your files and printers to Windows machines in your workgroup in addition to the capabilities described in Scenario 1.

In this case, the /etc/samba/smb.conf.default file may be a good template to start from. Also add “dos charset” and “unix charset” parameters to the “[global]” section as described in Scenario 1 in order to prevent filename corruption.

The following configuration file creates a separate share for each user's home directory and also makes all printers available to Windows machines:

[global]
    workgroup = MYGROUP
    dos charset = cp850
    unix charset = ISO-8859-1

[homes]
    comment = Home Directories
    browseable = no
    writable = yes

[printers]
    comment = All Printers
    path = /var/spool/samba
    browseable = no
    guest ok = no
    printable = yes

Other parameters you may wish to customize in the “[global]” section include:

    server string =
    security =
    hosts allow =
    load printers =
    log file =
    max log size =
    socket options =
    local master =

Reference the comments in the /etc/samba/smb.conf.default file for information regarding these parameters.

Since the smbd and nmbd daemons are needed in this case, install the samba bootscript. Be sure to run smbpasswd (with the -a option to add users) to enable and set passwords for all accounts that need Samba access, or use the SWAT web interface (see below) to do the same. Using the default Samba passdb backend, any user you attempt to add will also be required to exist in the /etc/passwd file.

Advanced Requirements

More complex scenarios involving domain control or membership are possible if the right flags are passed to the ./configure script when the package is built. Such setups are advanced topics and cannot be adequately covered in BLFS. Many complete books have been written on these topics alone. It should be noted, however, that a Samba BDC cannot be used as a fallback for a Windows PDC, and conversely, a Windows BDC cannot be used as a fallback for a Samba PDC. Also in some domain membership scenarios, the winbindd daemon and the corresponding bootscript are needed.

There is quite a bit of documentation available which covers many of these advanced configurations. Point your web browser to the links below to view some of the documentation included with the Samba package:

Using Samba, 2nd Edition; a popular book published by O'Reilly file:///usr/share/samba/swat/using_samba/toc.html
The Official Samba HOWTO and Reference Guide file:///usr/share/samba/swat/help/Samba-HOWTO-Collection/index.html
Samba-3 by Example file:///usr/share/samba/swat/help/Samba-Guide/index.html
The Samba-3 man Pages file:///usr/share/samba/swat/help/samba.7.html

Configuring SWAT

The built in SWAT (Samba Web Administration Tool) utility can be used for basic configuration of the Samba installation, but because it may be inconvenient, undesirable or perhaps even impossible to gain access to the console, BLFS recommends setting up access to SWAT using Stunnel. Without Stunnel, the root password is transmitted in clear text over the wire, and is considered an unacceptable security risk. After considering the security implications of using SWAT without Stunnel, and you still wish to implement SWAT without it, instructions are provided at this end of this section.

Setting up SWAT using Stunnel

First install, or ensure you have already installed, the Stunnel-4.11 package.

Next you must add entries to /etc/services and modify the inetd/xinetd configuration.

Add swat and swat_tunnel entries to /etc/services with the following commands issued as the root user:

echo "swat            901/tcp" >> /etc/services &&
echo "swat_tunnel     902/tcp" >> /etc/services

If inetd is used, the following command will add the swat_tunnel entry to /etc/inetd.conf (as user root):

echo "swat_tunnel stream tcp nowait.400 root /usr/sbin/swat swat" \
    >> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Samba file as /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel (you may need to modify or remove the “only_from” line to include the desired host[s]):

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel

service swat_tunnel
{
    port            = 902
    socket_type     = stream
    wait            = no
    only_from       = 127.0.0.1
    user            = root
    server          = /usr/sbin/swat
    log_on_failure  += USERID
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to read the new /etc/xinetd.d/swat_tunnel file.

Next, you must add an entry for the swat service to the /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf file (as user root):

cat >> /etc/stunnel/stunnel.conf << "EOF"
[swat]
accept  = 901
connect = 902

EOF

Restart the stunnel daemon using the following command as the root user:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/stunnel restart

SWAT can be launched by pointing your web browser to https://[CA_DN_field]:901. Substitute the hostname listed in the DN field of the CA certificate used with Stunnel for [CA_DN_field].

Setting up SWAT without Stunnel

Warning

BLFS does not recommend using these procedures because of the security risk involved. However, in a home network environment and disclosure of the root password is an acceptable risk, the following instructions are provided for your convenience.

Add a swat entry to /etc/services with the following command issued as the root user:

echo "swat            901/tcp" >> /etc/services

If inetd is used, the following command issued as the root user will add a swat entry to the /etc/inetd.conf file:

echo "swat stream tcp nowait.400 root /usr/sbin/swat swat" \
    >> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If xinetd is used, the following command issued as the root user will create an /etc/xinetd.d/swat file:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/swat << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/swat

service swat
{
    port            = 901
    socket_type     = stream
    wait            = no
    only_from       = 127.0.0.1
    user            = root
    server          = /usr/sbin/swat
    log_on_failure  += USERID
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/swat
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to read the new /etc/xinetd.d/swat file.

SWAT can be launched by pointing your web browser to http://localhost:901.

Note

If you linked Linux-PAM into the Samba build, you'll need to create an /etc/pam.d/samba file.

Boot Script

For your convenience, boot scripts have been provided for Samba. There are two included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package. The first, samba, will start the smbd and nmbd daemons needed to provide SMB/CIFS services. The second script, winbind, starts the winbindd daemon, used for providing Windows domain services to Linux clients.

The default Samba installation uses the nobody user for guest access to the server. This can be overridden by setting the guest account = parameter in the /etc/samba/smb.conf file. If you utilize the guest account = parameter, ensure this user exists in the /etc/passwd file. To use the default user, issue the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 99 nogroup &&
useradd -c "Unprivileged Nobody" -d /dev/null -g nogroup \
    -s /bin/false -u 99 nobody

Install the samba script with the following command issued as the root user:

make install-samba

If you also need the winbind script:

make install-winbind

Installed Programs: findsmb, mount.smbfs, net, nmbd, nmblookup, ntlm_auth, pdbedit, profiles, rpcclient, smbcacls, smbclient, smbcontrol, smbcquotas, smbd, smbmnt, smbmount, smbpasswd, smbspool, smbstatus, smbtar, smbtree, smbumount, swat, tdbbackup, tdbdump, tdbtool, testparm, testprns, wbinfo, and winbindd

Installed Libraries: libnss_winbind.so, libnss_wins.so, libsmbclient.so, the pam_winbind.so PAM library and assorted character set, filesystem and support modules.

Installed Directories: /etc/samba, /usr/lib/samba, /usr/share/samba, /var/cache/samba, and /var/lib/samba

Short Descriptions

findsmb	lists information about machines that respond to SMB name queries on a subnet.
mount.smbfs	is a symlink to smbmount which provides /bin/mount with a way to mount remote Windows (or Samba) fileshares.
net	is a tool for administration of Samba and remote CIFS servers, similar to the net utility for DOS/Windows.
nmbd	is the Samba NetBIOS name server.
nmblookup	is used to query NetBIOS names and map them to IP addresses.
ntlm_auth	is a tool to allow external access to Winbind's NTLM authentication function.
pdbedit	is a tool used to manage the SAM database.
profiles	is a utility that reports and changes SIDs in Windows registry files. It currently only supports Windows NT.
rpcclient	is used to execute MS-RPC client side functions.
smbcacls	is used to manipulate Windows NT access control lists.
smbclient	is a SMB/CIFS access utility, similar to FTP.
smbcontrol	is used to control running smbd, nmbd and winbindd daemons.
smbcquotas	is used to manipulate Windows NT quotas on SMB file shares.
smbd	is the main Samba daemon which provides SMB/CIFS services to clients.
smbmnt	is a helper application used by the smbmount program to do the actual mounting of SMB shares. It can be installed setuid `root` if you want unprivileged users to be able to mount their SMB shares.
smbmount	is usually invoked as mount.smbfs by the mount command when using the `-t smbfs` option, mounts a Linux SMB filesystem.
smbpasswd	changes a user's Samba password.
smbspool	sends a print job to an SMB printer.
smbstatus	reports current Samba connections.
smbtar	is a shell script used for backing up SMB/CIFS shares directly to Linux tape drives or a file.
smbtree	is a text-based SMB network browser.
smbumount	is used by unprivileged users to unmount SMB filesystems, provided that it is setuid root.
swat	is the Samba Web Administration Tool.
tdbbackup	is a tool for backing up or validating the integrity of Samba `.tdb` files.
tdbdump	is a tool used to print the contents of a Samba `.tdb` file.
tdbtool	is a tool which allows simple database manipulation from the command line.
testparm	checks an `smb.conf` file for proper syntax.
testprns	tests printer names.
wbinfo	queries a running winbindd daemon.
winbindd	resolves names from Windows NT servers.

vsFTPD-2.0.3

Introduction to vsFTPD

The vsFTPD package contains a very secure and very small FTP daemon. This is useful for serving files over a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://vsftpd.beasts.org/users/cevans/vsftpd-2.0.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 74936cbd8e8251deb1cd99c5fb18b6f8
Download size: 150 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

vsFTPD Dependencies

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, and tcpwrappers-7.6

Installation of vsFTPD

For security reasons, running vsFTPD as an unprivileged user and group is encouraged. Also, a user should be created to map anonymous users. As the root user, create the needed directories, users, and groups with the following commands:

install -v -d -m 0755 /var/ftp/empty &&
install -v -d -m 0755 /home/ftp &&
groupadd -g 47 vsftpd &&
useradd -d /dev/null -c "vsFTPD User" -g vsftpd -s /bin/false \
        -u 47 vsftpd &&
groupadd -g 45 ftp &&
useradd -c anonymous_user -d /home/ftp -g ftp -s /bin/false -u 45 ftp

Build vsFTPD as an unprivileged user using the following command:

make

Once again, become the root user and install vsFTPD with the following commands:

install -v -m 755 vsftpd /usr/sbin/vsftpd &&
install -v -m 644 vsftpd.8 /usr/share/man/man8 &&
install -v -m 644 vsftpd.conf.5 /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m 644 vsftpd.conf /etc

Command Explanations

install -v -d ...: This creates the directory that anonymous users will use (/home/ftp) and the directory the daemon will chroot into (/var/ftp/empty).

Note

/home/ftp should not be owned by the user vsftpd, or the user ftp.

echo "#define VSF_BUILD_TCPWRAPPERS" >>builddefs.h: Use this prior to make to add support for tcpwrappers.

echo "#define VSF_BUILD_SSL" >>builddefs.h: Use this prior to make to add support for SSL.

install -v -m ...: The Makefile uses non-standard installation paths. These commands install the files in /usr and /etc.

Configuring vsFTPD

Config Files

/etc/vsftpd.conf

Configuration Information

vsFTPD comes with a basic anonymous-only configuration file that was copied to /etc above. While still as root, this file should be modified because it is now recommended to run vsftpd in standalone mode as opposed to inetd/xinetd mode. Also, you should specify the privilege separation user created above. Finally, you should specify the chroot directory. man vsftpd.conf will give you all the details.

cat >> /etc/vsftpd.conf << "EOF"
background=YES
listen=YES
nopriv_user=vsftpd
secure_chroot_dir=/var/ftp/empty
EOF

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/vsftpd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-vsftpd

Installed Program: vsftpd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /var/ftp, /var/ftp/empty, /home/ftp

Short Descriptions

vsftpd

is the FTP daemon.

xinetd-2.3.13

Introduction to xinetd

xinetd is the eXtended InterNET services Daemon, a secure replacement for inetd.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.xinetd.org/xinetd-2.3.13.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 4295b5fe12350f09b5892b363348ac8b
Download size: 291 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.11 SBU

xinetd Dependencies

Optional

Installation of xinetd

Install xinetd by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring xinetd

Config Files

/etc/xinetd.conf

Configuration Information

Ensure the path to all daemons is /usr/sbin, rather than the default path of /usr/etc, and install the xinetd configuration files by running the following commands as the root user:

cat > /etc/xinetd.conf << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd
# Configuration file for xinetd
#

defaults
{
      instances       = 60
      log_type        = SYSLOG daemon
      log_on_success  = HOST PID USERID
      log_on_failure  = HOST USERID
      cps             = 25 30
}

# All service files are stored in the /etc/xinetd.d directory
#
includedir /etc/xinetd.d
# End /etc/xinetd
EOF

All of the following files have the statement, "disable = yes". To activate any of the services, this statement will need to be changed to "disable = no".

Note

The following files are listed to demonstrate classic xinetd applications. In many cases, these applications are not needed. In some cases, the applications are considered security risks. For example, telnet, rlogin, rexec, and rsh transmit unencrypted usernames and passwords over the network and can be easily replaced with a more secure alternative: ssh.

install -v -d -m755 /etc/xinetd.d &&
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/login << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/login

service login
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.rlogind
   log_type       = SYSLOG local4 info
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/login
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/shell << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/shell

service shell
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   instances      = UNLIMITED
   flags          = IDONLY
   log_on_success += USERID
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.rshd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/shell
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/exec << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/exec

service exec
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.rexecd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/exec
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/comsat << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/comsat

service comsat
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = nobody
   group          = tty
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.comsat
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/comsat
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/talk << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/talk

service talk
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.talkd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/talk
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/ntalk << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/ntalk

service ntalk
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.ntalkd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/ntalk
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/telnet << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/telnet

service telnet
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.telnetd
   bind           = 127.0.0.1
   log_on_failure += USERID
}

service telnet
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
#  server         = /usr/sbin/in.telnetd
   bind           = 192.231.139.175
   redirect       = 128.138.202.20 23
   log_on_failure += USERID
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/telnet
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/ftp << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/ftp

service ftp
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.ftpd
   server_args    = -l
   instances      = 4
   log_on_success += DURATION USERID
   log_on_failure += USERID
   access_times   = 2:00-8:59 12:00-23:59
   nice           = 10
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/ftp
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/tftp << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/tftp

service tftp
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = dgram
   wait           = yes
   user           = root
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.tftpd
   server_args    = -s /tftpboot
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/tftp
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/finger << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/finger

service finger
{
   disable        = yes
   socket_type    = stream
   wait           = no
   user           = nobody
   server         = /usr/sbin/in.fingerd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/finger
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/systat << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/systat

service systat
{
   disable           = yes
   socket_type       = stream
   wait              = no
   user              = nobody
   server            = /usr/bin/ps
   server_args       = -auwwx
   only_from         = 128.138.209.0
   log_on_success    = HOST
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/systat
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/netstat << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/netstat

service netstat
{
   disable           = yes
   socket_type       = stream
   wait              = no
   user              = nobody
   server            = /usr/ucb/netstat
   server_args       = -f inet
   only_from         = 128.138.209.0
   log_on_success    = HOST
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/netstat
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/echo << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/echo

service echo
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = INTERNAL
   id          = echo-stream
   socket_type = stream
   protocol    = tcp
   user        = root
   wait        = no
}

service echo
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = INTERNAL
   id          = echo-dgram
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   user        = root
   wait        = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/echo
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/chargen << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/chargen

service chargen
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = chargen-stream
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   user           = root
   wait           = no
}

service chargen
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = chargen-dgram
   socket_type    = dgram
   protocol       = udp
   user           = root
   wait           = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/chargen
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/daytime << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/daytime

service daytime
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = daytime-stream
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   user           = root
   wait           = no
}

service daytime
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = daytime-dgram
   socket_type    = dgram
   protocol       = udp
   user           = root
   wait           = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/daytime
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/time << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/time

service time
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = time-stream
   socket_type    = stream
   protocol       = tcp
   user           = root
   wait           = no
}


service time
{
   disable        = yes
   type           = INTERNAL
   id             = time-dgram
   socket_type    = dgram
   protocol       = udp
   user           = root
   wait           = yes
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/time
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/rstatd << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/rstatd

ervice rstatd
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = RPC
   flags       = INTERCEPT
   rpc_version = 2-4
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   server      = /usr/sbin/rpc.rstatd
   wait        = yes
   user        = root
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/rstatd
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/rquotad << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/rquotad

service rquotad
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = RPC
   rpc_version = 1
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   wait        = yes
   user        = root
   server      = /usr/sbin/rpc.rstatd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/rquotad
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/rusersd << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/rusersd

service rusersd
{
   disable     = yes
   type        = RPC
   rpc_version = 1-2
   socket_type = dgram
   protocol    = udp
   wait        = yes
   user        = root
   server      = /usr/sbin/rpc.rusersd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/rusersd
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/sprayd << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/sprayd

service sprayd
{
   disable      = yes
   type         = RPC
   rpc_version  = 1
   socket_type  = dgram
   protocol     = udp
   wait         = yes
   user         = root
   server       = /usr/sbin/rpc.sprayd
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/sprayd
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/walld << "EOF" &&
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/walld

service walld
{
   disable      = yes
   type         = RPC
   rpc_version  = 1
   socket_type  = dgram
   protocol     = udp
   wait         = yes
   user         = nobody
   group        = tty
   server       = /usr/sbin/rpc.rwalld
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/walld
EOF
cat > /etc/xinetd.d/irc << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/irc

service irc
{
   disable      = yes
   socket_type  = stream
   wait         = no
   user         = root
   flags        = SENSOR
   type         = INTERNAL
   bind         = 192.168.1.30
   deny_time    = 60
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/irc
EOF

The format of the /etc/xinetd.conf is documented in the xinetd.conf.5 man page. Further information can be found at http://www.xinetd.org.

Boot Script

As the root user, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-xinetd

As the root user, use the new boot script to start xinetd:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd start

Checking the /var/log/daemon.log file should prove quite entertaining. This file may contain entries similar to the following:

Aug 22 21:40:21 dps10 xinetd[2696]: Server /usr/sbin/in.rlogind is not
executable [line=29]
Aug 22 21:40:21 dps10 xinetd[2696]: Error parsing attribute server -
DISABLING SERVICE [line=29]
Aug 22 21:40:21 dps10 xinetd[2696]: Server /usr/sbin/in.rshd is not
executable [line=42]

These errors are because most of the servers xinetd is trying to control are not installed yet.

Installed Programs: itox, xconv.pl, and xinetd

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/xinetd.d/

Short Descriptions

itox	is a utility used for converting `inetd.conf` files to `xinetd.conf` format.
xconv.pl	is a Perl script used for converting `inetd.conf` files to `xinetd.conf` format, similar to itox.
xinetd	is the Internet services daemon.

Chapter 22. Mail Server Software

MTAs are the programs which transport mail from one machine to the other. The traditional MTA is Sendmail, however there are several other choices.

As well as SMTP servers there is a POP server (qpopper) and an IMAP server (Courier-IMAP).

Exim-4.52

Introduction to Exim

The Exim package contains a Mail Transport Agent written by the University of Cambridge, released under the GNU Public License.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.exim.org/ftp/exim4/exim-4.52.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.exim.org/pub/exim/exim4/exim-4.52.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 89601650f3b854d469451f30b369622b
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 12.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch for Berkeley DB: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/exim-4.52-db43-1.patch

Exim Dependencies

Required

Berkeley DB-4.3.28 or GDBM-1.8.3 or TDB

Optional

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), OpenLDAP-2.2.24, OpenSSL-0.9.7g or GnuTLS, Cyrus SASL-2.1.21, MySQL-4.1.12, PostgreSQL-8.0.3, tcpwrappers-7.6 and Linux-PAM-0.80

Installation of Exim

Before building Exim, as the root user you should create the group and user exim which will run the exim daemon:

groupadd -g 31 exim &&
useradd -d /dev/null -c "Exim Daemon" -g exim -s /bin/false -u 31 exim

If you have Berkeley DB installed, apply the following patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../exim-4.52-db43-1.patch

Install Exim with the following commands:

sed -e 's,^BIN_DIR.*$,BIN_DIRECTORY=/usr/sbin,' \
    -e 's,^CONF.*$,CONFIGURE_FILE=/etc/exim.conf,' \
    -e 's,^EXIM_USER.*$,EXIM_USER=exim,' \
    -e 's,^EXIM_MONITOR,#EXIM_MONITOR,' src/EDITME > Local/Makefile &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 doc/exim.8 /usr/share/man/man8 &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/exim-4.52 &&
install -v -m644 doc/* /usr/share/doc/exim-4.52 &&
ln -sv exim /usr/sbin/sendmail

Command Explanations

sed -e ... > Local/Makefile: Most of Exim's configuration options are compiled in using the directives in Local/Makefile which is created from the src/EDITME file. This command specifies the minimum set of options. Descriptions for the options are listed below.

BIN_DIRECTORY=/usr/sbin: This installs all of Exim's binaries and scripts in /usr/sbin.

CONFIGURE_FILE=/etc/exim.conf: This installs Exim's main configuration file in /etc.

EXIM_USER=exim: This tells Exim that after the daemon no longer needs root privileges, the process hands off the daemon to the exim user.

#EXIM_MONITOR: This defers building the Exim monitor program, as it requires X Window System support, by commenting out the EXIM_MONITOR line in the Makefile. If you wish to build the monitor program, omit this sed command and issue the following command before building the package (modify Local/eximon.conf, if necessary): cp exim_monitor/EDITME Local/eximon.conf.

ln -sv exim /usr/sbin/sendmail: Creates a link to sendmail for applications which need it. Exim will accept most Sendmail command-line options.

Adding Additional Functionality

To utilize some or all of the dependency packages, you'll need to modify Local/Makefile to include the appropriate directives and parameters to link additional libraries before you build Exim. Local/Makefile is heavily commented with instructions on how to do this. Listed below is additional information to help you link these dependency packages.

To use a backend database other than Berkeley DB, see the instructions at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_4.html#SECT4.3.

For SSL functionality, see the instructions at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_4.html#SECT4.6 and http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_37.html#CHAP37.

For tcpwrappers functionality, see the instructions at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_4.html#SECT4.7.

For information about adding authentication mechanisms to the build, see the instructions at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_34.html#SECT34.4 For specific information about using Cyrus-SASL, see section 10 of the doc/NewStuff file located in the source tree.

For information about linking Linux-PAM, see the instructions at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_11.html#IX935.

For information about linking database engine libraries used for Exim name lookups, see the instructions at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_9.html#CHAP9.

If you wish to add Readline support to Exim when invoked in “test expansion” (-bv) mode, see the information in section 8 of the doc/NewStuff file located in the source tree.

You may wish to modify the default configuration and send log files to syslog instead of the default /var/spool/exim/log directory. See the information at http://www.exim.org/exim-html-4.40/doc/html/spec_45.html#CHAP45.

Configuring Exim

Config Files

/etc/exim.conf and /etc/aliases

Configuration Information

A default (nothing but comments) /etc/aliases file is installed during the package installation if this file did not exist on your system. Create the necessary aliases and start the Exim daemon using the following commands:

cat >> /etc/aliases << "EOF"
postmaster: root
MAILER-DAEMON: root
EOF
exim -v -bi &&
/usr/sbin/exim -bd -q15m

Note

To protect an existing /etc/aliases file, the command above appends these aliases to it. This file should be checked and duplicate aliases removed, if present.

The /usr/sbin/exim -bd -q15m command starts the Exim daemon with a 15 minute interval in processing the mail queue. Adjust this parameter to suit your desires.

Boot Script

To automate the running of exim at startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/exim init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-exim

The bootscript also starts the Exim daemon and dispatches a queue runner process every 15 minutes. Modify the -q[time interval] parameter in /etc/rc.d/init.d/exim, if necessary for your installation.

Installed Programs: exicyclog, exigrep, exim, exim-4.43-2, exim_checkaccess, exim_dbmbuild, exim_dumpdb, exim_fixdb, exim_lock, exim_tidydb, eximstats, exinext, exipick, exiqgrep, exiqsumm, exiwhat, and optionally, eximon, and eximon.bin

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/exim-4.52 and /var/spool/exim

Short Descriptions

exicyclog	cycles Exim log files.
exigrep	searches Exim log files.
exim	is a symlink to the exim-4.43-2 MTA daemon.
exim-4.43-2	is the Exim mail transport agent daemon.
exim_checkaccess	states whether a given recipient address from a given host is acceptable or not.
exim_dbmbuild	creates and rebuilds Exim databases.
exim_dumpdb	writes the contents of Exim databases to the standard output.
exim_fixdb	modifies data in Exim databases.
exim_lock	locks a mailbox file.
exim_tidydb	removes old records from Exim databases.
eximstats	generates mail statistics from Exim log files.
exinext	queries remote host retry times.
exipick	selects messages based on various criteria.
exiqgrep	is a utility for selective queue listing.
exiqsumm	produces a summary of the messages in the mail queue.
exiwhat	queries running Exim processes.
eximon	is a start-up shell script for eximon.bin used to set the required environment variables before running the program.
eximon.bin	is a monitor program which displays current information in an X window, and also contains a menu interface to Exim's command line administration options.

Postfix-2.2.5

Introduction to Postfix

The Postfix package contains a Mail Transport Agent (MTA). This is useful for sending email to other users of your host machine. It can also be configured to be a central mail server for your domain, a mail relay agent or simply a mail delivery agent to your local Internet Service Provider (ISP).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.mirrorspace.org/postfix/official/postfix-2.2.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.porcupine.org/mirrors/postfix-release/official/postfix-2.2.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: f164b701c3e97b950d4cc64aff4de3c0
Download size: 2.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 81 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Postfix Dependencies

Required

Berkeley DB-4.3.28

Optional

PCRE-6.1, MySQL-4.1.12, PostgreSQL-8.0.3, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Cyrus SASL-2.1.21 and cdb or TinyCDB

Installation of Postfix

Configuring the Build

The Postfix source tree does not contain a configure script, rather the makefile in the top-level directory contains a makefiles target that regenerates all the other makefiles in the build tree. If you wish to use additional software such as a database back-end for virtual users, or TLS/SSL authentication, you will need to regenerate the makefiles using one or more of the appropriate CCARGS and AUXLIBS settings listed below.

Here is an example that combines the TLS and Cyrus-SASL arguments:

make makefiles \
CCARGS='-DUSE_TLS -DUSE_SASL_AUTH -DDEF_DAEMON_DIR=\"/usr/lib/postfix\" \
    -DDEF_MANPAGE_DIR=\"/usr/share/man\" -I/usr/include/openssl \
    -I/usr/include/sasl' \
    AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lssl -lcrypto -lsasl2'

TLS Authentication

To use TLS authentication with postfix you will need to pass the following values to the make makefiles command:

CCARGS='-DUSE_TLS -I/usr/include/openssl'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lssl -lcrypto'

To use TLS you will also need Cyrus SASL-2.1.21.

Cyrus-SASL

To use Cyrus-SASL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DUSE_SASL_AUTH -I/usr/include/sasl'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lsasl2'

OpenLDAP

To use OpenLDAP with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-I/usr/include -DHAS_LDAP'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lldap -llber'

MySQL

To use MySQL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_MYSQL -I/usr/include/mysql'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lmysqlclient -lz -lm'

PostgreSQL

To use PostgreSQL with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_PGSQL -I/usr/include/postgresql'
AUXLIBS='-L/usr/lib -lpq -lz -lm'

TinyCDB

To use TinyCDB with Postfix, use the following arguments:

CCARGS='-DHAS_CDB' 
AUXLIBS='[/path/to/CDB]/libcdb.a'

Installing Postfix

Before you compile the program, you need to create users and groups that will be expected to be in place during the installation. Add the users and groups with the following commands issued by the root user:

groupadd -g 32 postfix &&
groupadd -g 33 postdrop &&
groupadd -g 99 nogroup &&
useradd -c "Postfix Daemon User" -d /dev/null -g postfix \
    -s /bin/false -u 32 postfix &&
useradd -c "Unprivileged Nobody" -d /dev/null -g nogroup \
    -s /bin/false -u 99 nobody &&
chown -v postfix:postfix /var/mail

Install Postfix by running the following commands:

make makefiles CCARGS='-DDEF_DAEMON_DIR=\"/usr/lib/postfix\" \
    -DDEF_MANPAGE_DIR=\"/usr/share/man\" [additional args]' \
    [AUXLIBS='additonal args'] &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

sh postfix-install -non-interactive

The final installation step is to install the program's documentation with the following commands (again, as the root user):

install -v -d /usr/share/doc/postfix &&
cp -v -rf html/* /usr/share/doc/postfix

Command Explanations

make makefiles: This command rebuilds the makefiles throughout the source tree to use the options contained in the CCARGS and AUXLIBS variables.

sh postfix-install -non-interactive : This keeps the install script from asking any questions, thereby accepting default destination directories in all but the two cases mentioned in the 'make makefiles' command.

Configuring Postfix

Config Files

/etc/aliases, /etc/postfix/main.cf, and /etc/postfix/master.cf

Configuration Information

cat >> /etc/aliases << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/aliases

MAILER-DAEMON:    postmaster
postmaster:       root

root:             LOGIN
# End /etc/aliases
EOF

Note

To protect an existing /etc/aliases file, the above command appends these aliases to it if it exists. This file should be checked and duplicate aliases removed, if present.

The /etc/aliases file that was just created or appended, the main.cf and the master.cf must be personalized for your system. The aliases file needs your non-root login identity so mail addressed to root can be forwarded to you at the user level. The main.cf file needs your fully qualified hostname. All of these edits can be done with sed commands entered into the console with appropriate substitutions of your non-root login name for [user] and your fully qualified hostname for [localhost.localdomain]. You will find the main.cf file is self documenting, so load it into your editor to make the changes you need for your situation.

sed -i "s/LOGIN/[user]/" /etc/aliases &&
sed -i "s/#myhostname = host.domain.tld/myhostname = \
        [localhost.localdomain]/" /etc/postfix/main.cf &&
/usr/bin/newaliases &&
/usr/sbin/postfix start

Boot Script

To automate the running of Postfix at startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/postfix init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-postfix

Installed Programs: bounce, cleanup, error, flush, lmtp, local, mailq, master, newaliases, nqmgr, oqmgr, pickup, pipe, postalias, postcat, postconf, postdrop, postfix, postkick, postlock, postlog, postmap, postqueue, postsuper, proxymap, qmgr, qmqpd, sendmail, showq, smtp, smtpd, spawn, trivial-rewrite, verify, and virtual

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/postfix and /usr/share/doc/postfix

Short Descriptions

bounce	A daemon that maintains per-message log files with non-delivery status information.
cleanup	A daemon that processes inbound mail, inserts it into the incoming mail queue, and informs the queue manager of its arrival.
error	A deamon that processes non-delivery requests from the queue manager.
flush	A daemon that maintains a record of deferred mail by destination.
lmtp	A daemon that processes message delivery requests from the queue manager.
local	A daemon that processes delivery requests from the queue manager to deliver mail to local recipients.
mailq	A symlink to `sendmail`.
master	The resident process that runs Postfix daemons on demand.
newaliases	A symlink to `sendmail`.
nqmgr	A daemon that awaits the arrival of incoming mail and arranges for its delivery.
oqmgr	The old style queue manager. This will be removed soon.
pickup	A daemon that waits for hints that new mail has been dropped into the maildrop directory, and feeds it into the cleanup daemon.
pipe	A daemon that processes requests from the queue manager to deliver messages to external commands.
postalias	Creates or queries one or more Postfix alias databases, or updates an existing one.
postcat	Prints the contents of the named files in human readable format.
postconf	Displays or changes the value of Postfix configuration parameters.
postdrop	Creates a file in the maildrop directory and copies it's standard input to the file.
postfix	Controls the operation of the Postfix mail system.
postkick	Sends requests to the specified service over a local transport channel.
postlock	Locks a mail folder for exclusive use, and executes commands passed to it.
postlog	A Postfix-compatible logging interface for use in, for example, shell scripts.
postmap	Creates or queries one or more Postfix lookup tables, or updates an existing one.
postqueue	The Postfix user interface for queue management.
postsuper	The Postfix user interface for superuser queue management.
proxymap	Provides read-only table lookup services to other Postfix processes.
qmgr	A daemon that awaits the arrival of incoming mail and arranges for its delivery.
qmqpd	A daemon that receives one message per connection, and pipes it through the cleanup daemon, and places it into the incoming queue.
sendmail	The Postfix to Sendmail compatibility interface.
showq	A daemon that reports the Postfix mail queue status.
smtp	Looks up a list of mail exchanger addresses for the destination host, sorts the list by preference, and connects to each listed address until it finds a server that responds.
smtpd	Accepts network connection requests and performs zero or more SMTP transactions per connection.
spawn	Listens on a port as specified in the Postfix `master.cf` file and spawns an external command whenever a connection is established.
trivial-rewrite	A daemon that rewrites addresses to standard form.
verify	Maintains a record of what recipient addresses are known to be deliverable or undeliverable.
virtual	Delivers mail to virtual user's mail directories.

Qpopper-4.0.5

Introduction to Qpopper

The Qpopper package contains a POP3 mail server.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.uni-koeln.de/mail/qpopper4.0.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.qualcomm.com/eudora/servers/unix/popper/qpopper4.0.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e00853280c9e899711f0b0239d3d8f86
Download size: 2.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 9.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.13 SBU

Qpopper Dependencies

Required

MTA

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, GDBM-1.8.3, Linux-PAM-0.80, and MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7

Installation of Qpopper

Install Qpopper with the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Qpopper

Configuration Information

Update the Syslog configuration file and force the syslogd daemon to reread the new file so that Qpopper events are logged:

echo "local0.notice;local0.debug /var/log/POP.log" >> \
    /etc/syslog.conf &&
killall -HUP syslogd

If you use inetd, the following command will add the Qpopper entry to /etc/inetd.conf:

echo "pop3 stream tcp nowait root /usr/sbin/popper popper" >> \
    /etc/inetd.conf &&
killall inetd || inetd

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Qpopper file as /etc/xinetd.d/pop3:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/pop3 << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/pop3

service pop3
{
    port            = 110
    socket_type     = stream
    protocol        = tcp
    wait            = no
    user            = root
    server          = /usr/sbin/popper
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/pop3
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to reread the changed xinetd.conf file.

Installed Program: popper

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

popper

is the POP3 server daemon.

Sendmail-8.13.4

Introduction to Sendmail

The Sendmail package contains a Mail Transport Agent (MTA).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.sendmail.org/ftp/sendmail.8.13.4.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.sendmail.org/pub/sendmail/sendmail.8.13.4.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 61e336750b48b01abaa69b4d7c9473b5
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.43 SBU

Sendmail Dependencies

Required

Berkeley DB-4.3.28 and Procmail-3.22

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, tcpwrappers-7.6, Cyrus SASL-2.1.21, nph, and AFPL Ghostscript-8.51 or ESP Ghostscript-7.07.1 (for creating PDF documentation)

Installation of Sendmail

Before building Sendmail, create the users, groups and directories that Sendmail requires with the following commands issued as the root user:

groupadd -g 26 smmsp &&
groupadd -g 34 mail &&
useradd -c "Sendmail Daemon" -g smmsp -G mail \
        -d /dev/null -s /bin/false -u 26 smmsp &&
chmod -v 1777 /var/mail &&
install -v -m700 -d /var/spool/mqueue

Note: See the source tree sendmail/README file for information on linking optional packages into the build. Use the example below, which adds support for tcpwrappers, SASL, StartTLS (OpenSSL) and OpenLDAP, as a starting point. Of course, modify it to suit your particular needs.

cat >> devtools/Site/site.config.m4 << "EOF"
APPENDDEF(`confENVDEF',`-DSTARTTLS -DTCPWRAPPERS -DSASL -DLDAPMAP')
APPENDDEF(`confLIBS', `-lssl -lcrypto -lwrap -lsasl2 -lldap -llber')
APPENDDEF(`confINCDIRS', `-I/usr/include/sasl')
EOF

Install Sendmail with the following commands:

cat >> devtools/Site/site.config.m4 << "EOF"
define(`confMANGRP',`root')
define(`confMANOWN',`root')
define(`confSBINGRP',`root')
define(`confUBINGRP',`root')
define(`confUBINOWN',`root')
EOF
cd sendmail &&
sh Build &&
cd ../cf/cf &&
cp generic-linux.mc sendmail.mc &&
sh Build sendmail.cf

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /etc/mail &&
sh Build install-cf &&
cd ../../ &&
sh Build install &&
cp -v -R cf/* /etc/mail &&
cp -v cf/cf/{submit,sendmail}.mc /etc/mail &&
for manpage in sendmail editmap mailstats makemap praliases smrsh
do
    install -v -m444 $manpage/$manpage.8 /usr/share/man/man8
done &&
install -v -m444 sendmail/aliases.5    /usr/share/man/man5 &&
install -v -m444 sendmail/mailq.1      /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m444 sendmail/newaliases.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m444 vacation/vacation.1   /usr/share/man/man1

Install the Sendmail Installation and Operations Guide with the following commands:

cd doc/op &&
sed -i -e 's/groff/GROFF_NO_SGR=1 groff/' Makefile &&
make op.txt op.pdf

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.13.4 &&
install -v -m644 op.ps op.txt op.pdf \
    /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.13.4 &&
cd ../../

Note: remove op.pdf from the make and install commands if you don't have Ghostscript installed.

Command Explanations

cat > devtools/Site/site.config.m4 << "EOF": This creates a configuration file changing some of the default settings.

sh Build; sh Build sendmail.cf; sh Build install-cf; sh Build install: Sendmail uses an m4 based build script to create the various Makefile's. These commands build and install the package.

for manpage in...;do...;done; install ...: The man pages are installed already formatted and man displays them somewhat garbled. These commands replace the formatted pages with pages man can display properly.

Configuring Sendmail

Config Files

/etc/mail/*

Configuration Information

Create the /etc/mail/local-host-names and /etc/mail/aliases files using the following commands as the root user:

echo $(hostname) > /etc/mail/local-host-names
cat > /etc/mail/aliases << "EOF"
postmaster: root
MAILER-DAEMON: root

EOF
newaliases -v

Sendmail's primary configuration file, /etc/mail/sendmail.cf, is complex and not meant to be directly edited. The recommended method to make changes is to modify /etc/mail/sendmail.mc, and various m4 files, then run the m4 macro processor from within /etc/mail as follows:

m4 m4/cf.m4 sendmail.mc > sendmail.cf

A full explanation of the files to modify, and the available parameters can be found in /etc/mail/README.

Boot Script

To automate the running of Sendmail at startup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/sendmail init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-sendmail

Note

The -qNm option to sendmail, where N is number of minutes, controls how often Sendmail will process the mail queue. A default of 5 minutes is used in the init script. Individual workstation users may want to set this as low as 1 minute, large installations handling more mail may want to set it higher.

Installed Programs: editmap, hoststat, mailstats, mailq, makemap, newaliases, praliases, purgestat, sendmail, smrsh, and vacation

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/mail, /usr/share/doc/sendmail-8.13.4, /var/spool/mqueue, and /var/spool/clientmqueue

Short Descriptions

editmap	queries and edits Sendmail map files.
hoststat	prints Sendmail's persistent host status.
mailstats	displays Sendmail statistics.
mailq	prints a summary of outbound mail messages waiting for delivery.
makemap	creates Sendmail map files.
newaliases	rebuilds `/etc/mail/aliases.db` from the contents of `/etc/mail/aliases`.
praliases	displays current Sendmail aliases.
purgestat	causes Sendmail to clear (purge) all its host-status information.
sendmail	is the Sendmail mail transport agent.
smrsh	is a restricted shell for Sendmail.
vacation	is an email auto responder.

Chapter 23. Databases

This chapter includes databases that range from single-user read/write to industrial database servers with transaction support. Generally, you will be sent here to satisfy dependencies to other applications although building a SQL server on a base LFS system is entirely possible.

Berkeley DB-4.3.28

Introduction to Berkeley DB

The Berkeley DB package contains programs and utilities used by many other applications for database related functions.

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://sleepycat1.inetu.net/releases/db-4.3.28.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: e27759537db6054b31d8cb3e99ba6fbb
Download size: 5.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 74 MB (additional 140 MB to run parallel standard testsuite)
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU (additional 80 SBU to run parallel standard testsuite)

Berkeley DB Dependencies

Optional

Tcl-8.4.11 and JDK-1.5.0

Testing Berkeley DB

It is recommended you skip ahead to Installation. The test-suite takes more than 80 SBU and has a few bugs causing reports of 'Regression Tests Failed'. You must have Tcl to test Berkeley DB.

Build for the Berkeley DB test by running the following commands:

cd build_unix &&
../dist/configure --prefix=/usr \
    --enable-test --enable-tcl --with-tcl=/usr/lib &&
make LIBSO_LIBS="-lpthread" LIBXSO_LIBS="-lpthread" &&
chmod 644 ../test/sijointest.tcl && 
sed -i 's:puts "[s,S].*::' \
    ../test/sijointest.tcl

To test the results, start tclsh:

tclsh

From the tclsh prompt (%), run:

source ../test/test.tcl
run_parallel 4 run_std
exit

Clean up with the following command:

make realclean &&
cd ..

Installation of Berkeley DB

Install Berkeley DB by running the following commands:

cd build_unix &&
../dist/configure --prefix=/usr \
    --enable-compat185 \
    --enable-cxx &&
make LIBSO_LIBS="-lpthread" LIBXSO_LIBS="-lpthread"

Now, as the root user:

make docdir=/usr/share/doc/db-4.3.28 install &&
chown root:root /usr/bin/db_* \
/usr/lib/libdb* /usr/include/db* &&
chown -R root:root /usr/share/doc/db-4.3.28

Command Explanations

cd build_unix && ../dist/configure --prefix=/usr...: This replaces the normal ./configure command, as Berkeley DB comes with various build directories for different platforms.

--enable-compat185: This switch enables building DB 1.85 compatibility API.

--enable-cxx: This switch enables building C++ API libraries.

--enable-test: Enables building the test suite (requires the two Tcl switches below).

--enable-tcl --with-tcl=/usr/lib: Enables Tcl support in DB and creates the libdb_tcl libraries.

--enable-java: Enables Java support in DB and creates the libdb_java libraries.

--enable-rpc: Enables building the Berkeley DB RPC server.

make LIBSO_LIBS="-lpthread" LIBXSO_LIBS="-lpthread": configure does not correctly handle NPTL. These variables force it to properly link against NPTL.

make docdir=/usr/share/doc/db-4.3.28 install: This installs the documentation in the correct place.

sed -i 's:puts "[s,S].*::' ../test/sijointest.tcl: This prevents logging two notes that are not recognized by run_std.

Installed Programs: db_archive, db_checkpoint, db_deadlock, db_dump, db_load, db_printlog, db_recover, db_stat, db_upgrade, db_verify and berkeley_db_svc if enabled

Installed Libraries: libdb.[so,a], libdb_cxx.[so,a], libdb_java.[so,a] and libdb_tcl.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/db-4.3.28

Short Descriptions

berkeley_db_svc	is the Berkeley DB RPC server.
db_archive	prints the pathnames of log files that are no longer in use.
db_checkpoint	is a daemon process used to monitor and checkpoint database logs.
db_deadlock	is used to abort lock requests when deadlocks are detected.
db_dump	converts database files to a flat file format readable by db_load.
db_load	is used to create database files from flat files created with db_dump.
db_printlog	converts database log files to human readable text.
db_recover	is used to restore a database to a consistent state after a failure.
db_stat	displays database environment statistics.
db_upgrade	is used to upgrade database files to a newer version of Berkeley DB.
db_verify	is used to run consistency checks on database files.

MySQL-4.1.12

Introduction to MySQL

MySQL is a widely used and fast SQL database server. It is a client/server implementation that consists of a server daemon and many different client programs and libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mysql.he.net/Downloads/MySQL-4.1/mysql-4.1.12.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://mirror.mcs.anl.gov/pub/mysql/Downloads/MySQL-4.1/mysql-4.1.12.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 56a6f5cacd97ae290e07bbe19f279af1
Download size: 17 MB
Estimated disk space required: 177 MB (additional 110 MB to run the testsuite)
Estimated build time: 3.6 SBU (additional 12 SBU to run the testsuite)

MySQL Dependencies

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, tcpwrappers-7.6, libedit (as an alternative to readline), ORBit-0.5.17 (detected only if which-2.16 is installed), Doxygen-1.4.3 and TeX-3.0

Installation of MySQL

For security reasons, running the server as an unprivileged user and group is strongly encouraged:

groupadd -g 40 mysql &&
useradd -c "MySQL Server" -d /dev/null -g mysql -s /bin/false \
        -u 40 mysql

Build and install MySQL by running the following commands:

CPPFLAGS="-D_GNU_SOURCE" ./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --libexecdir=/usr/sbin --localstatedir=/srv/mysql \
    --enable-thread-safe-client --enable-assembler \
    --enable-local-infile --with-named-thread-libs=-lpthread \
    --with-unix-socket-path=/var/run/mysql/mysql.sock \
    --without-debug --without-bench --without-readline &&
make testdir=/usr/lib/mysql/mysql-test

To test the results, issue: make test.

Now, as the root user:

make testdir=/usr/lib/mysql/mysql-test install &&
cd /usr/lib &&
ln -v -sf mysql/libmysqlclient{,_r}.so* .

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: This switch installs the mysqld daemon in an appropriate location.

--localstatedir=/srv/mysql: This switch forces MySQL to use /srv/mysql for database files and other variable data.

--enable-thread-safe-client: This switch compiles a thread-safe MySQL client library.

--enable-assembler: This switch allows using assembler versions of some string functions.

--enable-local-infile: This switch enables the “LOAD DATA INFILE” SQL statement.

CPPFLAGS="-D_GNU_SOURCE" --with-named-thread-libs=-lpthread: This environment variable and configure switch enable building on NPTL systems.

--with-unix-socket-path=/var/run/mysql: This switch puts the unix-domain socket into /var/run/mysql directory instead of default /tmp.

--without-bench: This switch skips building the benchmark suite.

--without-readline: This switch forces the build to use the system copy of readline instead of the bundled copy.

make testdir=...: This installs the test suite in /usr/lib/mysql/mysql-test. BLFS is currently seeking a method to omit the installation of the test suite altogether.

ln -sf mysql/libmysqlclient{,_r}.so* .: This command makes the MySQL shared libraries available to other packages at run-time.

--with-libwrap: This switch adds tcpwrappers support to MySQL.

--with-openssl: This switch adds OpenSSL support to MySQL.

Configuring MySQL

Config Files

/etc/my.cnf and ~/.my.cnf

Configuration Information

There are several default configuration files available in /usr/share/mysql which you can use. Create /etc/my.cnf using the following command as the root user:

install -v -m644 /usr/share/mysql/my-medium.cnf /etc/my.cnf

You can now install a database and change the ownership to the unprivileged user and group (perform as the root user):

mysql_install_db --user=mysql &&
chgrp -v mysql /srv/mysql{,/test,/mysql}

Further configuration requires that the MySQL server be running. Start the server using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -o mysql -g mysql -d /var/run/mysql &&
mysqld_safe --user=mysql 2>&1 >/dev/null &

A default installation does not setup a password for the administrator, so use the following command as the root user to set one. Replace [new-password] with your own.

mysqladmin -u root password [new-password]

Configuration of the server is now finished. Shut the server down using the following command as the root user:

mysqladmin -p shutdown

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/mysql init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package as the root user to start the MySQL server during system boot-up.

make install-mysql

Installed Programs: comp_err, isamchk, isamlog, make_win_binary_distribution, make_win_src_distribution, msql2mysql, my_print_defaults, myisam_ftdump, myisamchk, myisamlog, myisampack, mysql, mysql_client_test, mysql_config, mysql_convert_table_format, mysql_create_system_tables, mysql_explain_log, mysql_find_rows, mysql_fix_extensions, mysql_fix_privilege_tables, mysql_install_db, mysql_secure_installation, mysql_setpermission, mysql_tableinfo, mysql_tzinfo_to_sql, mysql_waitpid, mysql_zap, mysqlaccess, mysqladmin, mysqlbinlog, mysqlbug, mysqlcheck, mysqld, mysqld_multi, mysqld_safe, mysqldump, mysqldumpslow, mysqlhotcopy, mysqlimport, mysqlmanager, mysqlmanager-pwgen, mysqlmanagerc, mysqlshow, mysqltest, pack_isam, perror, replace, resolve_stack_dump, and resolveip

Installed Libraries: libdbug.a, libheap.a, libmerge.a, libmyisam.a, libmyisammrg.a, libmysqlclient.[so,a], libmysqlclient_r.[so,a], libmystrings.a, libmysys.a, libnisam.a, and libvio.a

Installed Directories: /srv/mysql, /usr/include/mysql, /usr/lib/mysql, /usr/share/mysql, and /var/run/mysql

Short Descriptions

Descriptions of all the programs and libraries would be several pages long. Instead, consult the MySQL documentation for full details.

Certain MySQL support programs may require the Perl DBI modules to be installed to function properly.

PostgreSQL-8.0.3

Introduction to PostgreSQL

PostgreSQL is an advanced object-relational database management system (ORDBMS), derived from the Berkeley Postgres database management system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/db/postgresql/source/v8.0.3/postgresql-8.0.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fr.postgresql.org/source/v8.0.3/postgresql-8.0.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c0914a133ce6c1e0f1d8b93982d6e881
Download size: 11.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 139 MB (additional 110 MB to run the testsuite)
Estimated build time: 1.12 SBU

PostgreSQL Dependencies

Optional

Python-2.4.1, Tcl-8.4.11, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Linux-PAM-0.80, DocBook SGML DTD-4.4, DocBook DSSSL Stylesheets-1.79, OpenJade-1.3.2, SGMLSpm, krb4, MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7, and Rendezvous

Installation of PostgreSQL

In order for configure to properly discover Docbook SGML DTD, you may need to remove OpenSP catalog definitions from the system SGML catalogs. Use the following command before building the package to accomplish this:

sed -i.orig \
    -e "/CATALOG \/etc\/sgml\/OpenSP-1.5.1.cat/d" \
    /etc/sgml/catalog \
    /etc/sgml/sgml-docbook.cat

Install PostgreSQL with the following commands:

sed -i \
    -e "s|dsssl-stylesheets|& \\\\\n        sgml/docbook/&-1.79|" \
    configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --enable-thread-safety &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v root:root /usr/share/doc/postgresql/html

Note

If you are upgrading an existing system and are going to install the new files over the old ones, then you should back up your data, shut down the old server and follow the instructions in the official PostgreSQL documentation.

Initialize a database cluster with the following commands issued by the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /srv/pgsql/data &&
useradd -c "PostgreSQL Server" -g users -d /srv/pgsql/data \
        -u 41 postgres &&
chown -v postgres /srv/pgsql/data &&
su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/initdb -D /srv/pgsql/data'

As the root user, start the database server with the following command:

su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/postmaster -D /srv/pgsql/data > \
    /srv/pgsql/data/logfile 2>&1 &'

Still as user root, create a database and verify the installation:

su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/createdb test' &&
echo "create table t1 ( name varchar(20), state_province varchar(20) );" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "insert into t1 values ('Billy', 'NewYork');" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "insert into t1 values ('Evanidus', 'Quebec');" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "insert into t1 values ('Jesse', 'Ontario');" \
    | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test ') &&
echo "select * from t1;" | (su - postgres -c '/usr/bin/psql test')

Command Explanations

sed -i -e "s|dsssl-stylesheets|...": This command puts an extra line in the configure script so that the BLFS installed version of the DSSSL stylesheets can be discovered.

--enable-thread-safety: This switch makes the client libraries thread-safe by allowing concurrent threads in libpq and ECPG programs to safely control their private connection handles.

chown -R root:root /usr/share/doc/postgresql/html: This command corrects the improper ownership of some documentation files.

useradd ...: Add an unprivileged user to run the database server.

createdb test; create table t1; insert into t1 values...; select * from t1: Create a database, add a table to it, insert some rows into the table and select them to verify that the installation is working properly.

Configuring PostgreSQL

Config Files

$PGDATA/pg_ident.con, $PGDATA/pg_hba.conf and $PGDATA/postgresql.conf

The PGDATA environment variable is used to distinguish database clusters from one another by setting it to the value of the directory which contains the cluster desired. The three configuration files exist in every PGDATA/ directory. Details on the format of the files and the options that can be set in each can be found in file:///usr/share/doc/postgresql/html/index.html.

Boot Script

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/postgresql init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-postgresql

Installed Programs: clusterdb, createdb, createlang, createuser, dropdb, droplang, dropuser, ecpg, initdb, ipcclean, pg_config, pg_controldata, pg_ctl, pg_dump, pg_dumpall, pg_resetxlog, pg_restore, pltcl_delmod, pltcl_listmod, pltcl_loadmod, postgres, postmaster, psql, and vacuumdb

Installed Libraries: libecpg.[so,a], libecpg_compat.[so,a], libpgport.a, libpgtypes.[so,a], libpq.[so,a], and various charset modules.

Installed Directories: /srv/pgsql, /usr/include/libpq, /usr/include/postgresql, /usr/lib/postgresql, /usr/share/doc/postgresql, and /usr/share/postgresql

Short Descriptions

clusterdb	is a utility for reclustering tables in a PostgreSQL database.
createdb	creates a new PostgreSQL database.
createlang	defines a new PostgreSQL procedural language.
createuser	defines a new PostgreSQL user account.
dropdb	removes a PostgreSQL database.
droplang	removes a PostgreSQL procedural language.
dropuser	removes a PostgreSQL user account.
ecpg	is the embedded SQL preprocessor.
initdb	creates a new database cluster.
ipcclean	removes shared memory and semaphores left over by an aborted database server.
pg_config	retrieves PostgreSQL version information.
pg_controldata	returns information initialized during initdb, such as the catalog version and server locale.
pg_ctl	controls stopping and starting the database server.
pg_dump	dumps database data and metadata into scripts which are used to recreate the database.
pg_dumpall	recursively calls pg_dump for each database in a cluster.
pg_resetxlog	clears the write-ahead log and optionally resets some fields in the `pg_control` file.
pg_restore	creates databases from dump files created by pg_dump.
pltcl_delmod	is a support script used to delete a module from a PL/Tcl table. The command requires the Pgtcl package to be installed also.
pltcl_listmod	is a support script used to list the modules in a PL/Tcl table. The command requires the Pgtcl package to be installed also.
pltcl_loadmod	is a support script used to load a module into a PL/Tcl table. The command requires the Pgtcl package to be installed also.
postgres	is a single user database server, generally used for debugging.
postmaster	is a multi-user database daemon.
psql	is a console based database shell.
vacuumdb	compacts databases and generates statistics for the query analyzer.

Chapter 24. Other Server Software

Here you will find many ways to share your machine with the rest of the world or your local network. Before installing any packages in this chapter, you need to be sure you understand what the package does and how to set it up correctly. It might also be helpful to learn about the consequences of an improper setup so that you can analyze the risks.

DHCP-3.0.2

Introduction to DHCP

The DHCP package contains both the client and server programs for DHCP. dhclient (the client) is useful for connecting your computer to a network which uses DHCP to assign network addresses. dhcpd (the server) is useful for assigning network addresses on your private network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/servers/isc/dhcp/dhcp-3.0-history/dhcp-3.0.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.isc.org/isc/dhcp/dhcp-3.0-history/dhcp-3.0.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 04800a111521e7442749b2ce883f962b
Download size: 834 KB
Estimated disk space required: 29.7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.22 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/dhcp-3.0.2-gcc_3.4.3-2.patch

DHCP Dependencies

Required

Net-tools-1.60 (you may omit net-tools by using the following patch to utilize iproute2: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/dhcp-3.0.2-iproute2-3.patch)

Kernel Configuration

You must have Packet Socket support (Device Drivers -> Networking Support -> Networking Options -> Packet Socket) compiled into the kernel.

Installation of DHCP

If you chose not to install net-tools, apply the iproute2 patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../dhcp-3.0.2-iproute2-3.patch

Install DHCP by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../dhcp-3.0.2-gcc_3.4.3-2.patch &&
./configure &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make LIBDIR=/usr/lib INCDIR=/usr/include install

Command Explanations

LIBDIR=/usr/lib INCDIR=/usr/include: This command installs the library and include files in /usr instead of /usr/local.

Configuring DHCP

Config Files

/etc/dhclient.conf and /etc/dhcpd.conf

Configuration Information

Information on configuring the DHCP client can be found in Chapter 14, DHCP Clients.

Note that you only need the DHCP server if you want to issue LAN addresses over your network. The DHCP client doesn't need this script to be used. Also note that this script is coded for the eth1 interface, which may need to be modified for your hardware configuration.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/dhcp init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-dhcp

The lease file must exist on startup. The following command will satisfy that requirement:

touch /var/state/dhcp/dhcpd.leases

The following commands will create a base configuration file for a DHCP server. There are several options that you may want to add (information that is passed back to the DHCP client) and those are covered in the man pages for dhcp.conf.

cat > /etc/dhcpd.conf << "EOF"
default-lease-time 72000;
max-lease-time 144000;
ddns-update-style ad-hoc;

subnet [192.168.5.0] netmask [255.255.255.0] {
  range [192.168.5.10] [192.168.5.240];
  option broadcast-address [192.168.5.255];
  option routers [192.168.5.1];
}
EOF

All addresses should be changed to meet your circumstance.

Installed Programs: dhcpd, dhcrelay, dhclient, dhclient-script, and omshell

Installed Libraries: bdhcpctl.a, libomapi.a

Installed Directories: /var/state/dhcp, /usr/include/omapip, and /usr/include/isi-dhcp

Short Descriptions

dhclient	is the implementation of the DHCP client.
dhcpd	implements Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP) and Internet Bootstrap Protocol (BOOTP) requests for network addresses.
dhcrelay	provides a means to accept DHCP and BOOTP requests on a subnet without a DHCP server and relay them to a DHCP server on another subnet.
omshell	provides an interactive way to connect to, query, and possibly change, the ISC DHCP Server's state via OMAPI, the Object Management API.

Leafnode-1.10.8

Introduction to Leafnode

Leafnode is an NNTP server designed for small sites to provide a local USENET spool.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/leafnode/leafnode-1.10.8.rel.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/linux/mirrors/sunsite/system/news/transport/leafnode-1.10.8.rel.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 1d8d27673780ba49fcb69883c2cabdec
Download size: 385 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6.3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.10 SBU

Leafnode Dependencies

Required

PCRE-6.1 and tcpwrappers-7.6

Installation of Leafnode

Create the group and user news, if not present:

groupadd -g 36 news &&
useradd -c "Leafnode News Server" -d /var/spool/news -g news \
        -u 36 news

Install Leafnode by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr \
    --localstatedir=/var --sysconfdir=/etc/leafnode \
    --with-lockfile=/var/lock/leafnode/fetchnews.lck &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var: Change the default spool directory of /usr/var.

--sysconfdir=/etc/leafnode: Leafnode reads its configuration data from a file called config which will be created in /etc/leafnode to avoid any potential conflict with other packages.

make update: Run this command if you are upgrading from a very old version of Leafnode.

Configuring Leafnode

Config Files

/etc/leafnode/config, /etc/nntpserver, /etc/sysconfig/createfiles /etc/inetd.conf or /etc/xinetd.conf or /etc/xinetd.d/nntp

Configuration Information

The /etc/leafnode/config file must be edited to reflect the name of the upstream NNTP provider. Copy the example configuration file to /etc/leafnode/config and save the original for reference:

cp /etc/leafnode/config.example /etc/leafnode/config

Change the

server =

entry to reflect your news provider.

The /etc/nntpserver file must contain 127.0.0.1 to prevent news clients from reading news from the upstream feed. Create this file using the following command:

cat > /etc/nntpserver << "EOF"
127.0.0.1

EOF

The /etc/rc.d/init.d/cleanfs script, part of the LFS bootscript package, will remove the /var/lock/leafnode directory during the system boot sequence. Install the following line in the /etc/sysconfig/createfiles file to re-create the directory:

/var/lock/leafnode   dir   2775   news   news

Leafnode may be configured to use inetd by adding an entry to the /etc/inetd.conf file with the following command:

echo "nntp stream tcp nowait news /usr/sbin/tcpd /usr/sbin/leafnode" \
>> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Leafnode file as /etc/xinetd.d/nntp:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/nntp << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/nntp

        service nntp
        {
           flags           = NAMEINARGS NOLIBWRAP
           socket_type     = stream
           protocol        = tcp
           wait            = no
           user            = news
           server          = /usr/sbin/tcpd
           server_args     = /usr/sbin/leafnode
           instances       = 7
           per_source      = 3
        }

# End /etc/xinetd.d/nntp
EOF

Issue a killall -HUP xinetd to reread the changed xinetd.conf file.

Add entries to the root or news user's crontab to run the fetchnews and texpire commands at the desired time intervals.

Installed Programs: applyfilter, checkgroups, fetchnews, leafnode, leafnode-version, newsq, and texpire

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/leafnode, /var/lock/leafnode, and /var/spool/news

Short Descriptions

applyfilter	filters newsgroup articles according to regular expressions.
checkgroups	inserts newsgroup titles into the newsgroup database.
fetchnews	sends posted articles to and retrieves new articles from an upstream news server.
leafnode	is an NNTP server daemon.
leafnode-version	prints the Leafnode version.
newsq	shows articles waiting to be sent upstream.
texpire	expires old articles and unread groups.

OpenLDAP-2.2.24

Introduction to OpenLDAP

The OpenLDAP package provides an open source implementation of the Lightweight Directory Access Protocol.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/infosys/network/OpenLDAP/openldap-release/openldap-2.2.24.tgz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.openldap.org/pub/OpenLDAP/openldap-release/openldap-2.2.24.tgz
Download MD5 sum: 383691dbabe05ee2b72a3e9db2042a82
Download size: 2.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 76.7 MB
Estimated build time: 6.58 SBU

OpenLDAP Dependencies

Required

Berkeley DB-4.3.28

Optional

tcpwrappers-7.6, GDBM-1.8.3, GNU Pth, and Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1

Installation of OpenLDAP

Install OpenLDAP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc --localstatedir=/srv/ldap \
    --enable-ldbm --disable-debug &&
make depend &&
make &&
make test

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod 755 /usr/lib/libl*-2.2.so.7.0.17

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: Installs the server executables in /usr/sbin instead of /usr/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc: Sets the configuration file directory to avoid the default of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/srv/ldap: Sets the directory to use for the LDAP directory database, replication logs and run-time variable data.

--enable-ldbm: Build slapd with the primary database back end using either Berkeley DB or GNU Database Manager.

--disable-debug: Disable debugging code.

make test: Validates the correct build of the package. If you've enabled tcp_wrappers, ensure you add 127.0.0.1 to the slapd line in the /etc/hosts.allow file if you have a restrictive /etc/hosts.deny file. If you logged the output of the make test, an easy test to see if all the tests succeeded is to issue grep ">>>>> Test succeeded" [logfilename] | wc -l. You should have 39 returned.

chmod 755 /usr/lib/libl*-2.2.so.7.0.17: This command adds the executable bit to the shared libraries.

Configuring OpenLDAP

Config Files

/etc/openldap/*

Configuration Information

Configuring the slapd and slurpd servers can be complex. Securing the LDAP directory, especially if you are storing non-public data such as password databases, can also be a challenging task. You'll need to modify the /etc/openldap/slapd.conf and /etc/openldap/ldap.conf files to set up OpenLDAP for your particular needs.

Resources to assist you with topics such as choosing a directory configuration, backend and database definitions, access control settings, running as a user other than root and setting a chroot environment include:

The slapd man page
The slapd.conf man page
The OpenLDAP 2.2 Administrator's Guide
Documents located at http://www.openldap.org/pub/

Utilizing GDBM

To utilize GDBM as the database backend, the “database” entry in /etc/openldap/slapd.conf must be changed from “bdb” to “ldbm”. You can use both by creating an additional database section in /etc/openldap/slapd.conf.

Mozilla Address Directory

By default, LDAPv2 support is disabled in the slapd.conf file. Once the database is properly set up and Mozilla is configured to use the directory, you must add allow bind_v2 to the slapd.conf file.

Boot Script

To automate the startup of the LDAP server at system bootup, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/openldap init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package using the following command:

make install-openldap1

Note: The init script you just installed only starts the slapd daemon. If you wish to also start the slurpd daemon at system startup, install a modified version of the script using this command:

make install-openldap2

Note

The init script starts the daemons without any parameters. You'll need to modify the script to include the parameters needed for your specific configuration. See the slapd and slurpd man pages for parameter information.

Testing the Configuration

Start the LDAP server using the init script:

/etc/rc.d/init.d/openldap start

Verify access to the LDAP server with the following command:

ldapsearch -x -b '' -s base '(objectclass=*)' namingContexts

The expected result is:

# extended LDIF
#
# LDAPv3
# base <> with scope base
# filter: (objectclass=*)
# requesting: namingContexts
#

#
dn:
namingContexts: dc=my-domain,dc=com

# search result
search: 2
result: 0 Success

# numResponses: 2
# numEntries: 1

Installed Programs: ldapadd, ldapcompare, ldapdelete, ldapmodify, ldapmodrdn, ldappasswd, ldapsearch, ldapwhoami, slapadd, slapcat, slapd, slapdn, slapindex, slappasswd, slaptest, and slurpd

Installed Libraries: liblber.[so,a], libldap.[so,a], and libldap_r.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/openldap, /srv/ldap, and /usr/share/openldap

Short Descriptions

ldapadd	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and adds entries.
ldapcompare	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and performs a compare using specified parameters.
ldapdelete	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and deletes one or more entries.
ldapmodify	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and modifies entries.
ldapmodrdn	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and modifies the RDN of entries.
ldappasswd	is a tool to set the password of an LDAP user.
ldapsearch	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and performs a search using specified parameters.
ldapwhoami	opens a connection to an LDAP server, binds and displays whoami information.
slapadd	is used to add entries specified in LDAP Directory Interchange Format (LDIF) to an LDAP database.
slapcat	is used to generate an LDAP LDIF output based upon the contents of a slapd database.
slapd	is the stand-alone LDAP server.
slapdn	checks a list of string-represented DNs based on schema syntax.
slapindex	is used to regenerate slapd indices based upon the current contents of a database.
slappasswd	is an OpenLDAP password utility.
slaptest	checks the sanity of the `slapd.conf` file.
slurpd	is the stand-alone LDAP replication server.
`liblber.[so,a]`	is a set of lightweight Basic Encoding Rules routines. These routines are used by the LDAP library routines to encode and decode LDAP protocol elements using the (slightly simplified) Basic Encoding Rules defined by LDAP. They are not normally used directly by an LDAP application program except in the handling of controls and extended operations.
`libldap.[so,a]`	supports the LDAP programs and provide functionality for other programs interacting with LDAP.
`libldap_r.[so,a]`	contains the functions required by the LDAP programs to produce the results from LDAP requests.

rsync-2.6.5

Introduction to rsync

The rsync package contains the rsync utility. This is useful for synchronizing large file archives over a network.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://rsync.samba.org/ftp/rsync/old-versions/rsync-2.6.5.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.samba.org/pub/rsync/old-versions/rsync-2.6.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 3691cdf1540d0649ba679edce6bae8fc
Download size: 643 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

rsync Dependencies

Optional

popt-1.7-5 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of rsync

For security reasons, running the rsync server as an unprivileged user and group is encouraged. If you intend to run rsync as a daemon, create the rsyncd user and group with the following commands issued by the root user:

groupadd -g 48 rsyncd &&
useradd -c "rsyncd Daemon" -d /home/rsync -g rsyncd \
    -s /bin/false -u 48 rsyncd

Install rsync by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

If you have DocBook-Utils installed and wish to build HTML documentation, issue:

cd doc &&
docbook2html rsync.sgml &&
cd ..

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you built the HTML documentation, install it using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/rsync-2.6.5 &&
install -v -m644 doc/*.html /usr/share/doc/rsync-2.6.5

Configuring rsync

Config Files

/etc/rsyncd.conf

Configuration Information

For client access to remote files, you may need to install the OpenSSH-4.1p1 package to connect to the remote server.

This is a simple download-only configuration to set up running rsync as a server. See the rsyncd.conf(5) man-page for additional options (i.e., user authentication).

cat > /etc/rsyncd.conf << "EOF"
# This is a basic rsync configuration file
# It exports a single module without user authentication.

motd file = /home/rsync/welcome.msg
use chroot = yes

[localhost]
    path = /home/rsync
    comment = Default rsync module
    read only = yes
    list = yes
    uid = rsyncd
    gid = rsyncd

EOF

You can find additional configuration information and general documentation about rsync at http://rsync.samba.org/documentation.html.

Boot Script

Note that you only want to start the rsync server if you want to provide an rsync archive on your local machine. You don't need this script to run the rsync client.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/rsyncd init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-rsyncd

Installed Program: rsync

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: Optionally, /usr/share/doc/rsync-2.6.5

Short Descriptions

rsync

is a replacement for rcp (and scp) that has many more features. It uses the “rsync algorithm” which provides a very fast method of syncing remote files. It does this by sending just the differences in the files across the link, without requiring that both sets of files are present at one end of the link beforehand.

Running a CVS Server

This section will describe how to set up, administer and secure a CVS server.

CVS Server Dependencies

Required

CVS-1.11.20 and OpenSSH-4.1p1

Setting up a CVS Server.

A CVS server will be set up using OpenSSH as the remote access method. Other access methods, including :pserver: and :server: will not be used for write access to the CVS repository. The :pserver: method sends clear text passwords over the network and the :server: method is not supported in all CVS ports. Instructions for anonymous, read only CVS access using :pserver: can be found at the end of this section.

Configuration of the CVS server consists of four steps:

1. Create a Repository.

Create a new CVS repository with the following commands:

mkdir /srv/cvsroot &&
chmod 1777 /srv/cvsroot &&
export CVSROOT=/srv/cvsroot &&
cvs init

2. Import Source Code Into the Repository.

Import a source module into the repository with the following commands, issued from a user account on the same machine as the CVS repository:

cd [sourcedir] &&
cvs import -m "[repository test]" [cvstest] [vendortag] [releasetag]

3. Verify Local Repository Access.

Test access to the CVS repository from the same user account with the following command:

cvs co cvstest

4. Verify Remote Repository Access.

Test access to the CVS repository from a remote machine using a user account that has ssh access to the CVS server with the following commands:

Note

Replace [servername] with the IP address or host name of the CVS repository machine. You will be prompted for the user's shell account password before CVS checkout can continue.

export CVS_RSH=/usr/bin/ssh &&
cvs -d:ext:[servername]:/srv/cvsroot co cvstest

Configuring CVS for Anonymous Read Only Access.

CVS can be set up to allow anonymous read only access using the :pserver: method by logging on as root and executing the following commands:

(grep anonymous /etc/passwd || useradd anonymous -s /bin/false -u 98) &&
echo anonymous: > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/passwd &&
echo anonymous > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/readers

If you use inetd, the following command will add the CVS entry to /etc/inetd.conf:

echo "2401  stream  tcp  nowait  root  /usr/bin/cvs cvs -f \
    --allow-root=/srv/cvsroot pserver" >> /etc/inetd.conf

Issue a killall -HUP inetd to reread the changed inetd.conf file.

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the CVS file as /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver

     service cvspserver
     {
          port        = 2401
          socket_type = stream
          protocol    = tcp
          wait        = no
          user        = root
          passenv     = PATH
          server      = /usr/bin/cvs
          server_args = -f --allow-root=/srv/cvsroot pserver
     }

# End /etc/xinetd.d/cvspserver
EOF

Issue a /etc/rc.d/init.d/xinetd reload to reread the changed xinetd.conf file.

Testing anonymous access to the new repository requires an account on another machine that can reach the CVS server via network. No account on the CVS repository is needed. To test anonymous access to the CVS repository, log in to another machine as an unprivileged user and execute the following command:

cvs -d:pserver:anonymous@[servername]:/srv/cvsroot co cvstest

Note

Replace [servername] with the IP address or hostname of the CVS server.

Command Explanations

mkdir /srv/cvsroot: Create the CVS repository directory.

chmod 1777 /srv/cvsroot: Set sticky bit permissions for CVSROOT.

export CVSROOT=/srv/cvsroot: Specify new CVSROOT for all cvs commands.

cvs init: Initialize the new CVS repository.

cvs import -m "repository test" cvstest vendortag releasetag: All source code modules must be imported into the CVS repository before use, with the cvs import command. The -m flags specifies an initial descriptive entry for the new module. The cvstest parameter is the name used for the module in all subsequent cvs commands. The vendortag and releasetag parameters are used to further identify each CVS module and are mandatory whether used or not.

(grep anonymous /etc/passwd || useradd anonymous -s /bin/false -u 98): Check for an existing anonymous user and create one if not found.

echo anonymous: > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/passwd: Add the anonymous user to the CVS passwd file, which is unused for anything else in this configuration.

echo anonymous > /srv/cvsroot/CVSROOT/readers: Add the anonymous user to the CVS readers file, a list of users who have read only access to the repository.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /srv/cvsroot

Running a Subversion Server

This section will describe how to set up, administer and secure a Subversion server.

Subversion Server Dependencies

Required

Subversion-1.1.4 and OpenSSH-4.1p1

Setting up a Subversion Server.

The following instructions will install a Subversion server, which will be set up to use OpenSSH as the secure remote access method, with svnserve available for anonymous access.

Configuration of the Subversion server consists of the following steps:

1. Setup Users, Groups, and Permissions

You'll need to be user root for the initial portion of configuration. Create the svn user and group with the following commands:

groupadd -g 56 svn &&
useradd -c "SVN Owner" -d /home/svn -m -g svn -s /bin/false -u 56 svn

If you plan to have multiple repositories, you should have a group dedicated to each repository for ease of administration. Create the svntest group for the test repository and add the svn user to that group with the following commands:

groupadd -g 57 svntest &&
usermod -G svntest svn

Additionally you should set umask 002 while working with a repository so that all new files will be writable by owner and group. This is made mandatory by creating a wrapper script for svn and svnserve:

mv /usr/bin/svn /usr/bin/svn.orig &&
mv /usr/bin/svnserve /usr/bin/svnserve.orig &&
cat >> /usr/bin/svn << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh
umask 002
/usr/bin/svn.orig "$@"
EOF
cat >> /usr/bin/svnserve << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh
umask 002
/usr/bin/svnserve.orig "$@"
EOF
chmod 0755 /usr/bin/svn{,serve}

Note

If you use Apache for working with the repository over HTTP, even for anonymous access, you should wrap /usr/sbin/httpd in a similar script.

2. Create a Subversion repository.

With subversion-1.1.0 and greater, a new type of repository data-store is available, FSFS. There is a tradeoff for speed with the new backend, however, the repository can now be placed on a network mount, and any corruption does not require an admin to recover the repository. For more information and comparison between FSFS and BDB, see http://svnbook.red-bean.com/svnbook-1.1/ch05.html#svn-ch-5-sect-1.2.A. Optionally you can pass bdb in place of fsfs in the following command to create a BerkeleyDB data-store.

Create a new Subversion repository with the following commands:

install -d -m0755 /srv &&
install -d -m0755 -o svn -g svn /srv/svn/repositories &&
svnadmin create --fs-type fsfs /srv/svn/repositories/svntest

Now that the repository is created, we need to populate it with something useful. You'll need to have a predefined directory layout setup exactly as you want your repository to look. For example, here is a sample BLFS layout setup with a root of svntest/. You'll need to setup a directory tree similar to the following:

          svntest/            # The name of the repository
             trunk/           # Contains the existing source tree
                BOOK/
                bootscripts/
                edguide/
                patches/
                scripts/
             branches/        # Needed for additional branches
             tags/            # Needed for tagging release points

Once you've created your directory layout as shown above, you are ready to do the initial import:

svn import -m "Initial import." \
    [/path/to/source/tree] \
    file:///srv/svn/repositories/svntest

Now go ahead and change owner and group information on the repository, and add an unprivileged user to the svn and svntest groups:

chown -R svn:svntest /srv/svn/repositories/svntest &&
chmod -R g+w /srv/svn/repositories/svntest &&
chmod g+s /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/db &&
usermod -G svn,svntest,[insert existing groups] [username]

svntest is the group assigned to the svntest repository. As mentioned earlier, this eases administration of multiple repositories when using OpenSSH for authentication. Going forward, you'll need to add your unprivileged user, and any additional users that you wish to have write access to the repository, to the svn and svntest groups.

In addition, you'll notice that the new repository's db directory is set-groupID. If the reasoning is not immediately obvious, when using any external authentication method (such as ssh), the sticky bit is set so that all new files will be owned by the user, but group of svntest. Anyone in the svntest group can create files, but still give the entire group write access to those files. This avoids locking out other users from the repository.

Now, go ahead and return to an unprivileged user account, and take a look at your new repository using svnlook:

svnlook tree /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/

Note

You may need to log out and back in again to refresh your group memberships. 'su [username]' should work around this as well.

3. Configure the Server

As mentioned previously, these instructions will configure the server to use only ssh for write access to the repository and to provide anonymous access using svnserve. There are several other ways to provide access to the repository. These additional configurations are best explained at http://svnbook.red-bean.com/.

Access configuration needs to be done for each repository. Create the svnserve.conf file for the svntest repository using the following commands:

cp /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/conf/svnserve.conf \
    /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/conf/svnserve.conf.default &&
cat > /srv/svn/repositories/svntest/conf/svnserve.conf << "EOF"
[general]
anon-access = read
auth-access = write
EOF

There is not a lot to the configuration file at all. You'll notice that only the general section is required. Take a look at the svnserve.conf.default file for information on using svnserve's built-in authentication method.

4. Starting the Server

There are a couple of ways to start svnserve. The most common way is to start it as an inetd or xinetd process. Alternately, you can use a bootscript to start the service at startup.

Note

If you do not wish to provide anonymous access to your svn repositories or use svnserve's built-in authentication, you do not need to run svnserve.

If you use inetd, add a line to /etc/inetd.conf using the following commands:

cat >> /etc/inetd.conf << "EOF"
svn stream tcp nowait svn /usr/bin/svnserve svnserve -i
EOF

If you use xinetd, the following command will create the Subversion server file as /etc/xinetd.d/svn:

cat >> /etc/xinetd.d/svn << "EOF"
# Begin /etc/xinetd.d/svn

service svn
{
        port                    = 3690
        socket_type             = stream
        protocol                = tcp
        wait                    = no
        user                    = svn
        server                  = /usr/bin/svnserve
        server_args             = -i -r /srv/svn/repositories
}

# End /etc/xinetd.d/svn
EOF

Finally, if you wish to simply start the sever at startup, install the svn bootscript included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-svn

X + Window Managers

25. X Window System Environment
26. X Libraries
27. Window Managers

Chapter 25. X Window System Environment

This chapter contains a graphical user environment.

Xorg-6.8.2

Introduction to Xorg

Note

There are two packages in BLFS that implement the X Window System: Xorg and XFree86. These packages are quite similar. In fact, the base system of Xorg is XFree86-4.4.0RC2. The primary difference as of this writing is the license provisions of the packages. For someone building a package for their own use, these issues are not significant. Most large commercial distributions have decided to use the Xorg package, but several still use XFree86.

A second reason for the forking of X packages is the stated goals of the developers. Some developers were unhappy with the administration and progress of XFree86. X.org's future plans include significant improvements to the internals of the system and more frequent releases.

XFree86 continues to be a solid, conservative application with excellent driver support.

Both Xorg and XFree86 can be installed in the same way, but this section will provide a slightly different and more current variation for installation.

Xorg is a freely redistributable open-source implementation of the X Window System. This application provides a client/server interface between display hardware (the mouse, keyboard, and video displays) and the desktop environment, while also providing both the windowing infrastructure and a standardized application interface (API).

Package Information

Download (HTTP):
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.opengroup.org/pub/x.org/pub/X11R6.8.2/src-single/X11R6.8.2-src.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8131cd7ea1e4566e6e05c438a93fcfe1
Download size: 43 MB
Estimated disk space required: 839 MB
Estimated build time: 10.34 SBU

Xorg Dependencies

Required

libpng-1.2.8 and Fontconfig-2.3.2

Optional

The XKB Configuration Guide

Download Instructions

As an alternative to downloading the entire source tree in a single file, there are several files that need to be fetched from the download location (directory /pub/x.org/pub/X11R6.8.2/src/):

X11R6.8.2-src1.tar.gz
X11R6.8.2-src2.tar.gz
X11R6.8.2-src3.tar.gz
X11R6.8.2-src4.tar.gz
X11R6.8.2-src5.tar.gz
X11R6.8.2-src6.tar.gz
X11R6.8.2-src7.tar.gz

The first package contains the Xorg libraries and support programs, the second contains standard X programs, the third contains the X server, the fourth and fifth are fonts, the sixth is normal documentation, and the seventh is hardcopy documentation.

To check your file for integrity, download the md5sums file. Then:

md5sum -c md5sums

The package (or all seven packages) should give an OK status.

Kernel Configuration

If you have an Intel P6 (Pentium Pro, Pentium II and later), it is recommended that you compile MTRR (Memory Type Range Registers) support into the kernel. The kernel can map Cyrix and AMD CPUs to the MTRR interface, so selecting this option is useful for those processors also. This option is found in the "Processor type and features" menu. It can increase performance of image write operations 2.5 times or more on PCI or AGP video cards.

In the "Character Devices" section of the "Device Drivers" menu, enable AGP Support and select the chipset support on your motherboard. If you do not know the chipset, you may select all the chip types at the expense of extra kernel size. You can usually determine your motherboard's chipset by running the command lspci, a program from the PCI Utilities-2.1.11 package.

In the "Character Devices" section, disable Direct Rendering Manager unless you have a Direct Rendering Infrastructure (DRI) supported video card. A complete list of DRI supported video cards can be found at http://dri.sourceforge.net in the "Status" section. Currently, supported cards include those from 3dfx (Voodoo, Banshee), 3Dlabs, ATI (Rage Pro, Rage 128, Radeon 7X00, Radeon 2), Intel (i810, i815), and Matrox (G200, G400, G450).

Additionally NVidia provides their own closed source binary drivers, which do not make use of DRI. If you intend to use these drivers, do not enable DRI.

If you made any changes to the kernel configuration, recompile and install the new kernel.

Installation of Xorg

Suppressing Xprint-related Modification to '/etc'

Xorg insists on putting its boot and profile scripts into the /etc directory even if specifically told not to compile anything Xprint server or client related (see host.def below). The following command will suppress any such modifications:

sed -i '/^SUBDIRS =/s/ etc$//' programs/Xserver/Xprint/Imakefile

Setting Up a Shadow Directory

When building Xorg, you should create a shadow directory of symbolic links for the compiled code. To do that, first make lndir. Starting from the xc directory:

pushd config/util &&
make -f Makefile.ini lndir

Now, as the root user:

cp -v lndir /usr/bin/

And back as an unprivileged user:

popd

Now create the shadow tree:

mkdir ../xcbuild &&
cd ../xcbuild &&
lndir ../xc

Creating 'host.def'

The next step is to create the config/cf/host.def file. The documentation for Xorg indicates that the application will build without a host.def file, but the included libraries for Fontconfig and FreeType2 do not build properly on a base LFS system. Therefore, you must specify that these libraries, as well as others, should be imported from the system.

Note

config/cf/host.def is a C file, not a shell script. Ensure the comments delimited by /* ... */ are balanced when modifying the file.

cat > config/cf/host.def << "EOF"
/* Begin Xorg host.def file */

/* System Related Information.  If you read and configure only one
 * section then it should be this one.  The Intel architecture defaults
 * are set for a i686 and higher.  Axp is for the Alpha architecture
 * and Ppc is for the Power PC.  AMD64 is for the Opteron processor.
 * Note that there have been reports that the Ppc optimization line
 * causes segmentation faults during build.  If that happens, try
 * building without the DefaultGcc2PpcOpt line.  ***********/

/* #define DefaultGcc2i386Opt  -O2 -fno-strength-reduce \
                               -fno-strict-aliasing -march=i686 */
/* #define DefaultGcc2AMD64Opt -O2 -fno-strength-reduce \
                               -fno-strict-aliasing */
/* #define DefaultGcc2AxpOpt   -O2 -mcpu=ev6 */
/* #define DefaultGcc2PpcOpt   -O2 -mcpu=750 */

#define HasFreetype2            YES
#define HasFontconfig           YES
#define HasExpat                YES
#define HasLibpng               YES
#define HasZlib                 YES

/*
 * Which drivers to build.  When building a static server, each of
 * these will be included in it.  When building the loadable server
 * each of these modules will be built.
 *
#define XF86CardDrivers         mga glint nv tga s3virge sis rendition \
                                neomagic i740 tdfx savage \
                                cirrus vmware tseng trident chips apm \
                                GlideDriver fbdev i128 \
                                ati DevelDrivers ark \
                                cyrix siliconmotion vesa vga \
                                XF86OSCardDrivers XF86ExtraCardDrivers
*/

/*
 * Select the XInput devices you want by uncommenting this.
 *
#define XInputDrivers           mouse keyboard acecad calcomp citron \
                                digitaledge dmc dynapro elographics \
                                microtouch mutouch penmount spaceorb \
                                summa wacom void magictouch aiptek
 */

/* Most installs will only need this */

#define XInputDrivers           mouse keyboard

/* Disable building Xprint server and clients until we get them figured
 * out but build Xprint libraries to allow precompiled binaries such as
 * Acrobat Reader to run.
 */

#define XprtServer              NO
#define BuildXprintClients      NO

/* Uncomment the following define if you would prefer to install X into
 * /usr or change it to any other location that you prefer.
 * The GL related defines disable compatibility symlinks (the links are not needed
 * when X is installed in /usr).
#define ProjectRoot             /usr
#define LinkGLToUsrInclude      NO
#define LinkGLToUsrLib          NO
 */

/* Uncomment the following define if you would prefer to install the
 * fonts into /usr/share/fonts, a directory that is fontconfig's default
 * font search path.
#define FontDir /usr/share/fonts
 */

/* End Xorg host.def file */
EOF

There are several other options that you may want to consider. A well documented example file is config/cf/xorgsite.def.

Build Commands

Install Xorg by running the following commands:

sed -i -e "s@^#include <linux/config.h>@/* & */@" \
    `grep -lr linux/config.h *` &&
( make World 2>&1 | tee xorg-compile.log && exit $PIPESTATUS )

Again as the root user:

make install &&
make install.man &&
ln -v -sf ../X11R6/bin /usr/bin/X11 &&
ln -v -sf ../X11R6/lib/X11 /usr/lib/X11 &&
ln -v -sf ../X11R6/include/X11 /usr/include/X11

Command Explanations

sed -i -e "s@^#include <linux/config.h>@...: The Linux-Libc-Headers package installed in LFS installs a /usr/include/linux/config.h file which is not compatible with userspace applications. The recommended fix for applications including this file is to remove it (see linux-libc-headers FAQ). The sed uses grep -lr to replace all occurrences. If you desire, just remove (comment) the line in the appropriate video driver file if you customized host.def.

( make World 2>&1 | tee xorg-compile.log && exit $PIPESTATUS ): This command runs multiple Makefiles to completely rebuild the system. 2>&1 redirects error messages to the same location as standard output. The tee command allows viewing of the output while logging the results to a file. The parentheses around the command runs the entire command in a subshell and finally the exit $PIPESTATUS ensures the result of the make is returned as the result and not the result of the tee command.

Note

When rebuilding Xorg, a separate command that may be used if only minor changes are made to the sources is make Everything. This does not automatically remove generated files and only rebuilds those files or programs that are out of date.

ln -v -sf ...: These commands are present to enable other (broken) packages to build against Xorg, even though the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard says: “In general, software must not be installed or managed via the above symbolic links. They are intended for utilization by users only.”

Configuring Xorg

Edit /etc/ld.so.conf and add /usr/X11R6/lib. Run:

ldconfig

Ensure /usr/X11R6/bin and /usr/X11R6/lib/pkgconfig are added to your PATH and PKG_CONFIG_PATH environment variables, respectively. Instructions for doing this are described in the section The Bash Shell Startup Files.

Create the xorg.conf file with:

cd ~ &&
Xorg -configure

The screen will go black and you may hear some clicking of the monitor. This command will create a file, xorg.conf.new in your home directory.

Edit xorg.conf.new to suit your system. The details of the file are located in the xorg.conf man page. Some things you may want to do are:

Section "Files". Change the order of the font paths searched. You may want to put 100dpi fonts ahead of 75dpi fonts if your system normally comes up closer to 100 dots per inch. You may want to remove some font directories completely.
Section "Module". If you are going to install NVidia drivers, remove the "dri" line.
Sections "InputDevice". You may want to change the keyboard autorepeat rate by adding Option "Autorepeat" "250 30".
Section "Monitor". Specify the VertRefresh and HorizSync values if the system does not automatically detect the monitor and its values.
Section "Device". You may want to set some of the options available for your selected video driver. A description of the driver parameters is in the man page for your driver.
Section "Screen". Add a DefaultDepth statement such as: DefaultDepth 24. In the SubSection for your default depth, add a modes line such as: Modes "1600x1200" "1280x1024" "1024x768". The first mode listed will normally be the starting resolution.

Test the system with:

X -config ~/xorg.conf.new

You will only get a gray background with an X-shaped mouse cursor, but it confirms the system is working. Exit with Control+Alt+Backspace. If the system does not work, take a look at /var/log/Xorg.0.log to see what went wrong.

Move the configuration file to its final location:

mv ~/xorg.conf.new /etc/X11/xorg.conf

Create .xinitrc:

cat > ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
# Begin .xinitrc file
xterm  -g 80x40+0+0   &
xclock -g 100x100-0+0 &
twm
EOF

This provides an initial screen with an xterm and a clock that is managed by a simple window manager, Tab Window Manager. For details of twm, see the man page.

Note

When needed, Xorg creates the directory /tmp/.ICE-unix if it does not exist. If this directory is not owned by root, Xorg delays startup by a few seconds and also appends a warning to the logfile. This also affects startup of other applications. To improve performance, it is advisable to manually create the directory before Xorg uses it. Add the file creation to /etc/sysconfig/createfiles that is sourced by the /etc/rc.d/init.d/cleanfs startup script.

cat >> /etc/sysconfig/createfiles << "EOF"
/tmp/.ICE-unix dir 1777 root root
EOF

Start X with:

startx

to get a basic functional X Window System.

At this point, you should check out the section called “X Window System Components” for the necessary configuration to make X fully functional. Additionally, you can have a look at the section called “Additional X Window System Configuration” for information on fine tuning your X configuration.

For a list of the package contents and a description of the commands, see the sections in the XFree86 Contents and Descriptions.

XFree86-4.5.0

Introduction to XFree86

XFree86 is a freely redistributable open-source implementation of the X Window System. XFree86 provides a client/server interface between display hardware (the mouse, keyboard, and video displays) and the desktop environment, while also providing both the windowing infrastructure and a standardized application interface (API).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gnu.kookel.org/ftp/XFree86/4.5.0/source/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.xfree86.org/pub/XFree86/4.5.0/source/
Download MD5 sum: ftp://ftp.xfree86.org/pub/XFree86/4.5.0/source/SUMS.md5sum
Download size: 51 MB
Estimated disk space required: 775 MB
Estimated build time: 12 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/XFree86-4.5.0-kernel_headers-1.patch

XFree86 Dependencies

Required

libpng-1.2.8

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80; the following packages are included in the XFree86 package, however they are updated more often than the XFree86 package and are highly recommended: expat-1.95.8, FreeType-2.1.10, Fontconfig-2.3.2.

Note

If you choose not to install expat, FreeType2, and Fontconfig, the host.def file below will have to be modified to instruct XFree86 to build them.

Download Instructions

There are several files that need to be fetched from the download location:

XFree86-4.5.0-src-1.tgz
XFree86-4.5.0-src-2.tgz
XFree86-4.5.0-src-3.tgz
XFree86-4.5.0-src-4.tgz
XFree86-4.5.0-src-5.tgz
XFree86-4.5.0-src-6.tgz
XFree86-4.5.0-src-7.tgz

The first three packages are the XFree86 programs, the fourth and fifth are fonts, the sixth is normal documentation, and the seventh is hardcopy documentation. There are also two packages doctools-1.3.x.tgz, which contain programs to regenerate hardcopy documentation, and utils-1.1.x.tgz, which contain GNU TAR and zlib which are already installed on an LFS system.

To check your downloads for integrity, download the SUMS.md5sum file. Then:

md5sum -c SUMS.md5sum

The only errors you should see are for README, doctools-1.3.x.tgz, utils-1.1.x.tgz and XFree86-xtest-4.0.x.tar.bz2 files if you did not download them.

Kernel Configuration

In the "Character Devices" section, enable AGP Support and select the chipset support on your motherboard. If you do not know the chipset, you may select all the chip types at the expense of extra kernel size. You can usually determine your motherboard's chipset by running the command lspci, a program from the PCI Utilities-2.1.11 package.

In the "Character Devices" section, disable Direct Rendering Manager unless you have a Direct Rendering Infrastructure (DRI) supported video card. A complete list of DRI supported video cards can be found at http://dri.sourceforge.net in the Status section. Currently, supported cards include those from 3dfx (Voodoo, Banshee), 3Dlabs, ATI (Rage Pro, Rage 128, Radeon 7X00, Radeon 2), Intel (i810, i815), and Matrox (G200, G400, G450).

Additionally NVidia provides their own closed source binary drivers, which do not make use of DRI. If you intend to use these drivers, do not enable DRI.

If you made any changes to the kernel configuration, recompile and install the new kernel.

Installation of XFree86

Setting Up a Shadow Directory

When building XFree86, you should create a shadow directory of symbolic links for the compiled code. To do that, first make lndir. Starting from the xc directory:

pushd config/util &&
make -f Makefile.ini lndir

Now, as the root user:

cp -v lndir /usr/bin/

And back as an unprivileged user:

popd

Now create the shadow tree:

mkdir ../xcbuild &&
cd ../xcbuild &&
lndir ../xc

Creating 'host.def'

Although XFree86 will compile without a host.def file, the following file is recommended for customizing the installation. Start from the xcbuild directory.

Note

The host.def file is a C file, not the usual configuration file. If you make any changes, be sure the comment characters (/* and */) are balanced. Most of the entries in the file below are commented out with the default settings shown.

cat > config/cf/host.def << "EOF"
/* Begin XFree86 host.def file */

/* System Related Information.  If you read and configure only one
 * section then it should be this one.  The Intel architecture defaults
 * are set for a i686 and higher.  Axp is for the Alpha architecture
 * and Ppc is for the Power PC.  Note that there have been reports that
 * the Ppc optimization line causes segmentation faults during build.
 * If that happens, try building without the DefaultGcc2PpcOpt line. */

/* #define DefaultGcc2i386Opt  -O2 -fomit-frame-pointer -march=i686 */
/* #define DefaultGcc2AxpOpt   -O2 -mcpu=ev6 */
/* #define DefaultGcc2PpcOpt   -O2 -mcpu=750 */

/* The following definitions are normally set properly by XFree86's
 * scripts. You can uncomment them if you want to make sure. *********/

/* #define HasMTRRSupport      YES  */ /* Enabled in kernel; */
                                       /* see kernel docs */
/* #define HasMMXSupport        NO  */ /* Any i586 or above */
/* #define HasKatmaiSupport     NO  */ /* PIII SSE instructions */
/* #define Has3DNowSupport      NO  */ /* AMD instructions */


/* This setting reduces compile time a little by omitting rarely used
 * input devices.  You can find the complete list in
 * config/cf/xfree86.cf *********************************************/

#define XInputDrivers                 mouse void

/* VIDEO DRIVERS ****************************************************/

/* If you are sure you only want the drivers for one or a few video
 * cards, you can delete the drivers you do not want. ***************/


#define XF86CardDrivers  mga glint nv tga s3 s3virge sis rendition \
                         neomagic i740 tdfx savage \
                         cirrus vmware tseng trident chips apm \
                         GlideDriver fbdev i128 nsc \
                         ati i810 DevelDrivers ark \
                         cyrix siliconmotion \
                         vesa vga \
                         dummy XF86OSCardDrivers XF86ExtraCardDrivers


/* USER AND SYSTEM DEFAULT PATHS *************************************/

/* These settings set the PATH variables used by xdm. See README for */
/* detailed description and modify the following as per your need. ***/

/* #define DefaultSystemPath \
       /usr/bin:/bin:/usr/sbin:/sbin:/usr/X11R6/bin */
/* #define DefaultUserPath /usr/bin:/bin:/usr/X11R6/bin */

/* FONT SERVER AND LIBRARY SETTINGS **********************************/

/* These settings are the defaults  **********************************/

/* #define BuildFontServer       YES  */ /*For Ghostscript Print Server*/
/* #define SharedLibFont         YES  */
/* #define CompressAllFonts      YES  */
/* #define GzipFontCompression   YES  */

/* These settings ensure we use our libraries ************************/
#define HasFreetype2             YES
#define HasFontconfig            YES
#define HasExpat                 YES
#define HasLibpng                YES
#define HasZlib                  YES

/* The font path can be redefined in the XF86Config file *************/

/*
#define DefaultFontPath          $(FONTDIR)/misc/,$(FONTDIR)/75dpi/,\
$(FONTDIR)/100dpi/,$(FONTDIR)/Type1,$(FONTDIR)/local,\
$(FONTDIR)/TrueType,$(FONTDIR)/CID,$(FONTDIR)/Speedo
*/


/* INTERNATIONAL FONTS.  Change to YES if you need any of them.  These
 * are the defaults. **************************************************/

/* #define BuildCyrillicFonts            NO  */
/* #define BuildArabicFonts              NO  */
/* #define BuildISO8859_6Fonts           NO  */
/* #define BuildGreekFonts               NO  */
/* #define BuildISO8859_7Fonts           NO  */
/* #define BuildHebrewFonts              NO  */
/* #define BuildISO8859_8Fonts           NO  */
/* #define BuildKOI8_RFonts              NO  */
/* #define BuildJapaneseFonts            NO  */
/* #define BuildJISX0201Fonts            NO  */
/* #define BuildKoreanFonts              NO  */
/* #define BuildChineseFonts             NO  */

/* DOCUMENTATION SETTINGS ********************************************/

/* These setting are the defaults. ***********************************/

/* #define BuildLinuxDocHtml        NO  */  /* X Docs in Html format */
/* #define BuildLinuxDocPS          NO  */  /* PostScript format */
/* #define BuildAllSpecsDocs        NO  */  /* Various docs */
/* #define BuildHtmlManPages        NO  */

/* GENERAL SETTINGS: You generally want to leave these alone when
 * building X on an LFS system ***************************************/

#define GccWarningOptions         -pipe /* Speed up compiles */
#define TermcapLibrary            -lncurses
#define XprtServer                YES /* Needed by realplayer */
#define XnestServer               YES
#define XAppLoadDir               EtcX11Directory/app-defaults
#define VarLibDir                 /var/lib
#define XFree86Devel               NO
#define FSUseSyslog               YES
#define ThreadedX                 YES
#define HasPam                     NO
#define SystemManDirectory        /usr/share/man /*Instead of /usr/man*/
#define HasLibCrypt               YES
#define InstallXinitConfig        YES
#define InstallXdmConfig          YES
#define ForceNormalLib            YES
#define BuildSpecsDocs             NO

/* End XFree86 host.def file */
EOF

Edit the file for your hardware and desires.

Build Commands

Install XFree86 by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../XFree86-4.5.0-kernel_headers-1.patch &&
sed -i -e "s@^#include <linux/config.h>@/* & */@" \
    `grep -lr linux/config.h *` &&
( make WORLDOPTS="" World 2>&1 | \
    tee xfree-compile.log && exit $PIPESTATUS )

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
make install.man &&
ln -v -sf ../X11R6/bin /usr/bin/X11 &&
ln -v -sf ../X11R6/lib/X11 /usr/lib/X11 &&
ln -v -sf ../X11R6/include/X11 /usr/include/X11

Command Explanations

( make WORLDOPTS="" World 2>&1 | tee xfree-compile.log && exit $PIPESTATUS ): This command runs multiple Makefiles to completely rebuild the system. WORLDOPTS="" disables the default setting to continue after encountering an error. 2>&1 redirects error messages to the same location as standard output. The tee command allows viewing of the output while logging the results to a file. The parentheses around the command runs the entire command in a subshell and finally the exit $PIPESTATUS ensures the result of the make is returned as the result and not the result of the tee command.

Note

When rebuilding XFree86, a separate command that may be used if only minor changes are made to the sources is make Everything. This does not automatically remove generated files and only rebuilds those files or programs that are out of date.

ln -v -sf ...: These commands are present to enable other (broken) packages to build against XFree86, even though the Filesystem Hierarchy Standard says: “In general, software must not be installed or managed via the above symbolic links. They are intended for utilization by users only.”

Configuring XFree86

As the root user: Edit /etc/ld.so.conf and add /usr/X11R6/lib, then run:

ldconfig

Create the XF86Config file with:

cd ~ &&
XFree86 -configure

The screen will go black and you may hear some clicking of the monitor. This command will create a file, XF86Config.new in your home directory.

Edit XF86Config.new to suit your system. The details of the file are located in the man page man XF86Config. Some things you may want to do are:

Section "Files". Change the order of the font paths searched. You may want to put 100dpi fonts ahead of 75dpi fonts if your system normally comes up closer to 100 dots per inch. You may want to remove some font directories completely.
Section "Module". If you are going to install NVidia drivers, remove the "dri" line.
Sections "InputDevice". You may want to change the keyboard autorepeat rate by adding Option "Autorepeat" "250 30".
Section "Monitor". Specify the VertRefresh and HorizSync values if the system does not automatically detect the monitor and its values.
Section "Device". You may want to set some of the options available for your selected video driver. A description of the driver parameters is in the man page for your driver.
Section "Screen". Add a DefaultDepth statement such as: DefaultDepth 24. In the SubSection for your default depth, add a modes line such as: Modes "1600x1200" "1280x1024" "1024x768". The first mode listed will normally be the starting resolution.

Test the system with:

XFree86 -xf86config ~/XF86Config.new

You will only get a gray background with an X-shaped mouse cursor, but it confirms the system is working. Exit with Control+Alt+Backspace. If the system does not work, examine /var/log/XFree86.0.log to see what went wrong.

As the root user: move the configuration file to its final location:

mv ~/XF86Config.new /etc/X11/XF86Config

Create .xinitrc:

cat > ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
# Begin .xinitrc file
xterm  -g 80x40+0+0   &
xclock -g 100x100-0+0 &
twm
EOF

This provides an initial screen with an xterm and a clock that is managed by a simple window manager, Tab Window Manager. For details of twm, see the man page.

Note

When needed, XFree86 creates the directory /tmp/.ICE-unix if it does not exist. If this directory is not owned by root, XFree86 delays startup by a few seconds and also appends a warning to the logfile. This also affects startup of other applications. To improve performance, it is advisable to manually create the directory before XFree86 uses it. Add the file creation to /etc/sysconfig/createfiles that is sourced by the /etc/rc.d/init.d/cleanfs startup script.

cat >> /etc/sysconfig/createfiles << "EOF"
/tmp/.ICE-unix dir 1777 root root
EOF

Start X with:

startx

to get a basic functional X Window System.

The XFree86 package contains the X Window System for Linux (and other operating systems). It includes the X server, fonts, xterm, a simple window manager (twm), various utilities, video output drivers, and various input drivers including the mouse and keyboard.

XFree86 also contains libraries and header files for development of the X Window System programs.

Note

The following lists are not comprehensive. The full list of programs is in /usr/X11R6/bin. For additional information about these programs, see the respective man page.

Installed Programs: XFree86, xf86config, xf86cfg, startx, xinit, twm, xterm, xwininfo, x11perf, xlsfonts, xvidtune, xload, xcalc, xclock, oclock, and xmodmap

Installed Libraries: libGL.so, libGLU.so, libSM.so, libXi.so, libXrender.so, libXt.so, and libXfont.so

Installed Directories: /usr/X11R6/ and /etc/X11/

Short Descriptions

XFree86	is the X11R6 implementation of the X Window System server.
xf86config	is an interactive program for generating an `XF86Config` file for use with XFree86 X servers.
xf86cfg	is a tool to configure XFree86 that can be used to either write the initial configuration file or make customizations to the current configuration.
startx	is a script to initialize the X session. It runs xinit.
xinit	is used to start the X Window System server.
twm	(Tab Window Manager) is a window manager included with the X Window System.
xterm	is a terminal emulator for X.
xwininfo	is a window information utility for X.
x11perf	is an X11 server performance test program.
xlsfonts	is a program to list fonts available to the X server.
xvidtune	is a video mode tuner for XFree86.
xload	is a system load average display for X.
xcalc	is a scientific calculator for X.
xclock	is a clock programs for X.
oclock	is a clock programs for X.
xmodmap	is a utility for modifying keymaps and pointer button mappings in X.

Additional X Window System Configuration

Below you will find information on fine tuning the components of both variants of X Window System. The documentation links are specifically for XFree86, however, the information contained in those documents usually pertains to Xorg as well.

Setting up X Input Devices

This is a new section for BLFS. For now, here are some convenient links for additional configuration of X input devices. Descriptive content will be added soon.

Keyboards

How to furthur enhance XKB configuration

Mice

Multi-button mice can be used to their full potential by mapping the additional buttons to X button events. Wheel mice are a common example. The ordinary ones contain two buttons, and a scroll wheel that doubles as a third button. As far as X is concerned, there are 5 buttons as it counts the 'scroll up' and 'scroll down' functions (internally they are buttons). Here is an example 'InputDevice' section for a typical PS/2 wheel mouse:

Section "InputDevice"
  Identifier  "Mouse 0"
  Driver      "mouse"
  Option      "Device"        "/dev/input/mice"
  Option      "Protocol"      "IMPS/2"
  Option      "ZAxisMapping"  "4 5"
  Option      "Buttons"       "5"
EndSection

Button assignments differ for every mouse type. On more exotic mice, you may find that the rocker wheel buttons are 6 and 7. Simply add those values to the ZAxisMapping option, and set the Buttons option appropriately to enable side to side scrolling. Additional information on button assignment can be found in the following XFree86 document:

Mouse Support in XFree86

Other

To be added...

Fine Tuning Display Settings

The 'Monitor' Section

To be added...

The 'Device' Section

To be added...

Devices

X Window System Components

Checking Direct Rendering Infrastructure (DRI) Installation

DRI is a framework for allowing software to access graphics hardware in a safe and efficient manner. It is installed in X by default if you have a supported video card. To check if DRI is installed properly, check the log file /var/log/XFree86.0.log or /var/log/Xorg.0.log for statements like:

(II) R128(0): Direct rendering enabled

From an xterm, run glxinfo and look for the phrase:

direct rendering: Yes

You can also run the test program glxgears. This program brings up a window with three gears turning. The xterm will display how many frames were drawn every five seconds, so this is a reasonable benchmark. The window is scalable, and the frames drawn per second is highly dependent on the size of the window.

For troubleshooting problems, check the DRI Users Guide at http://dri.sourceforge.net/doc/DRIuserguide.html.

Adding TrueType Fonts to X

TrueType font support is built into X. The following items need to be completed to make the fonts available. Each item is described in detail after the list.

Establish a directory for the fonts and move any TrueType fonts you want into that directory. Ensure that any fonts you install are world readable. Incorrect permissions on fonts have been known to cause problems with some X applications.
Download the fonts.
Create the fonts.scale and fonts.dir files in the TrueType font directory.
Ensure the TrueType module is loaded in the XF86Config or xorg.conf.
Ensure the FontPath in XF86Config or xorg.conf contains the TrueType font directory.
Update the font cache files

Establish a TrueType Font Directory

The build of X as given above automatically creates a TrueType font directory: /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/TTF. This directory already has some TrueType fonts and is set up correctly. If this directory is satisfactory, copy any other TrueType fonts you want into that directory. If not, create a new directory, preferably in the /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/ directory and put your TrueType fonts there.

Download the Fonts

There are two known high quality free font resources: ftp://ftp.gnu.org/savannah/files/freefont/ and http://corefonts.sourceforge.net/. Copy the fonts (files with the .ttf suffix) to the directory you've just created.

Create 'fonts.scale' and 'fonts.dir'

Now change to the directory where you have your TrueType fonts and run:

mkfontscale &&
mkfontdir

Ensure TrueType is Loaded in 'XF86Config' or 'xorg.conf'

The "Module" section should look like:

Section "Module"
    ...
    Load  "freetype"
    ...
EndSection

Ensure the FontPath in 'XF86Config' or 'xorg.conf' Points to the TrueType Font Directory

The "Files" section should look like:

Section "Files"
    ...
    FontPath "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/[TrueTypeDir]/"
    ...
EndSection

Update the Font Cache Files

Ensure you have the following directory entries in /etc/fonts/local.conf, inside the fontconfig tags. Create /etc/fonts/local.conf using the following commands:

cat > /etc/fonts/local.conf << "EOF"
<?xml version="1.0"?>
<!DOCTYPE fontconfig SYSTEM "fonts.dtd">
<!-- /etc/fonts/local.conf file for local customizations -->

<fontconfig>
<dir>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/TTF</dir>
<dir>/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Type1</dir>
</fontconfig>

EOF

The fc-cache program will automatically search the above directories and all subdirectories for needed fonts.

Finally, to update all the font cache files, run

fc-cache

X will now be able to use TrueType fonts when it is restarted. You can check to see if the new fonts are available with the xlsfonts or xfontsel program.

Note

You should rerun mkfontscale and mkfontdir any time you add or delete TrueType fonts. You should also rerun fc-cache each time you add or remove any fonts.

Setting up Keyboards

In this version of X, non-Latin keyboard layouts do not include Latin configurations as was previous practice. To set up a keyboard for Latin and non-Latin input, change the XkbLayout keyboard driver option in the InputDevice section of the XF86Config or xorg.conf file. For example:

Section "InputDevice"
    Identifier          "Keyboard0"
    Driver              "Keyboard"
    Option "XkbModel"   "pc105"
    Option "XkbLayout"  "en_US,ru"
    Option "XkbOptions" "grp:switch,grp:alt_shift_toggle,grp_led:scroll"
EndSection

In this example, you can use the Alt+Shift combination to switch between keyboard layouts and use the Scroll Lock LED to indicate when the second layout is active.

Setting up Fonts

Users using character sets other than ISO-8859-1 have to make a few adjustments to their font settings in order to make sure that fonts with the correct encoding are used for "fixed", "variable", "10x20" and similar aliases:

For Cyrillic alphabet, it is sufficient to put the following line into the top of the "Files" section in XF86Config or xorg.conf because this directory already contains the needed bitmap fonts and their aliases:

FontPath   "/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/cyrillic/"

For ISO-8859-[X] based locales, use the following command instead:

sed -i 's,iso8859-1\( \|$\),iso8859-[X]\1,g' \
    /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/{75dpi,100dpi,misc}/fonts.alias

Setting up XDM

xdm provides a graphical logon capability and is normally set up in /etc/inittab. Most of the information you need to customize xdm is found in its man page. To execute xdm during bootup, change the initdefault level to 5 and add the following lines to /etc/inittab:

# Run xdm as a separate service
x:5:respawn:/usr/X11R6/bin/xdm -nodaemon

If Linux-PAM is installed on your system, you should create a PAM entry for xdm by duplicating the login entry using the following command:

cp /etc/pam.d/login /etc/pam.d/xdm

Using X Resources

There are many options that can be set in X and X clients via resources. Typically resources are set in the ~/.Xresources file.

The layout of the ~/.Xresources file consists of a list of specifications in the form of

object.subobject[.subobject...].attribute: value

Components of a resource specification are linked together by either tight, represented by a dot (.), or loose, represented by an asterisk (*), bindings. A tight binding indicates that the components on either side of the dot must be directly next to each other as defined in a specific implementation. An asterisk is a wildcard character that means that any number of levels in a defined hierarchy can be between the components. For example, X offers two special cursors: redglass and whiteglass. To use one of these resources, you need to add the following line:

Xcursor.theme: whiteglass

However, you can specify the background for all clients with:

*background: blue

More specific resource variables will override less specific names.

Resource definitions can be found in the man pages for each respective client.

In order to load your resources, the xrdb program must be called with the appropriate parameters. Typically, the first time resources are loaded, you use:

xrdb -load <filename>

To add resources to X's database in memory, use:

xrdb -merge <filename>

The xrdb instruction is usually placed in ~/.xinitrc or ~/.xsession. To get more information, see the xrdb man page.

Chapter 26. X Libraries

This chapter does not contain libraries that are required to run X. It does contain libraries that enhance X. In some cases the enhancement is as simple as font support. In others it is as complex as libraries that sit between X and applications that run on X whose purpose is to standardize the look and feel and inter-process communications for different applications. They also assist programmers by supplying common elements.

Qt-3.3.4

Introduction to Qt

The Qt package contains a C++ GUI library. This is useful for creating graphical applications or executing graphical applications that are dynamically linked to the Qt library. One of the major users of Qt is KDE.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://sunsite.rediris.es/mirror/Qt/qt/source/qt-x11-free-3.3.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.trolltech.com/qt/source/qt-x11-free-3.3.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 027f4e82fbe592b39d2f160bfb3a73af
Download size: 13.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 250 MB
Estimated build time: 15.5 SBU (full), 10.9 SBU (sub-tools)

Qt Dependencies

Required

Optional

NAS-1.7, CUPS-1.1.23, MySQL-4.1.12, PostgreSQL-8.0.3, SQLite, Firebird and unixODBC

Installation of Qt

There are several ways to install a complicated package such as Qt. The files are not completely position independent. Installation procedures execute the program pkg-config to determine the location of package executables, libraries, headers, and other files. For Qt, pkg-config will look for the file lib/pkgconfig/qt-mt.pc which must be modified if relocating the package. This file is set up correctly by the build process.

The default installation places the files in /usr/local/qt/. Many commercial distributions place the files in the system's /usr hierarchy. The package can also be installed in an arbitrary directory.

This section will demonstrate two different methods.

Note

The build time for Qt is quite long. If you want to save some time and don't want the tutorials and examples, change the first make line to:

make sub-tools

Method 1 - Installing in the '/usr' Hierarchy

The advantage of this method is that no updates to the /etc/ld.so.conf or /etc/man.conf files are required. The package files are distributed within several subdirectories of the /usr hierarchy. This is the method that most commercial distributions use.

Note

If Qt is being reinstalled, run the following commands from a console or non-Qt based window manager. It overwrites Qt libraries that should not be in use during the install process.

sed -i -e 's:$(QTDIR)/include:&/qt:' \
       -e 's:$(QTDIR)/lib:&/qt:' \
    mkspecs/linux*/qmake.conf &&
bash
export PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH &&
./configure -prefix /usr -docdir /usr/share/doc/qt \
    -headerdir /usr/include/qt -plugindir /usr/lib/qt/plugins \
    -datadir /usr/share/qt -translationdir /usr/share/qt/translations \
    -sysconfdir /etc/qt -qt-gif -system-zlib -system-libmng \
    -no-exceptions -thread -plugin-imgfmt-png \
    -system-libjpeg -system-libpng &&
find -type f -name Makefile | xargs sed -i "s@-Wl,-rpath,/usr/lib@@g" &&
make &&
exit

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -sf libqt-mt.so /usr/lib/libqt.so &&
cp -v -r doc/man /usr/share &&
cp -v -r examples /usr/share/doc/qt

Method 2 - Installing in '/opt'

This is the method recommended by the Qt developers. It has the advantage of keeping all the package files consolidated in a dedicated directory hierarchy. By using this method, an update can be made without overwriting a previous installation and users can easily revert to a previous version by changing one symbolic link.

The Qt developers use a default location of /usr/local/qt/, however this procedure puts the files in /opt/qt-3.3.4/ and then creates a symbolic link to /opt/qt/.

bash
export QTDIR=$PWD &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH &&
export PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH &&
./configure -prefix /opt/qt-3.3.4 -qt-gif -system-libpng \
    -system-libmng -system-zlib -system-libjpeg -no-exceptions \
    -thread -plugin-imgfmt-png &&
make &&
exit

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -sfn qt-3.3.4 /opt/qt &&
ln -v -s libqt-mt.so /opt/qt/lib/libqt.so &&
cp -v -r doc/man /opt/qt/doc &&
cp -v -r examples /opt/qt/doc

Note

If you pass the -plugin-sql-[driver] switch to the configure command, you must also pass -I[/path/to/sql/headers] so make can find the appropriate header files.

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ... mkspecs/linux*/qmake.conf: Directories in qmake.conf need to be adjusted to match the BLFS Method 1 installation directories.

bash: This command enters a sub-shell to isolate environment changes.

export QTDIR=$PWD: This command defines where the root of the Qt directory is located.

export LD_LIBRARY_PATH=$PWD/lib:$LD_LIBRARY_PATH: This command allows the not yet installed Qt libraries to be used by the not yet installed Qt programs.

export PATH=$PWD/bin:$PATH: This command allows the build process to find supporting executables.

-qt-gif: This switch adds support for gif files to the libraries.

-system-zlib -system-libpng: This switch forces the build instructions to use the shared libraries that are on your system instead of creating a custom set of support libraries for these functions.

-plugin-imgfmt-png: This switch enables libpng to be linked to at runtime.

-no-exceptions: This switch disables the exceptions coding generated by the C++ compiler.

-thread: This switch adds support for multi-threading.

find -type f -name Makefile | xargs sed -i "s@-Wl,-rpath,/usr/lib@@g": This command removes hardcoded run-time paths. Otherwise, uic always tries to run with Qt libraries in /usr/lib.

ln -v -s libqt-mt.so /usr/lib/libqt.so: This command allows configure scripts to find a working Qt installation.

cp -v -r doc/man /usr/share (or /opt/qt/doc): This command installs the man pages which are missed by make install.

cp -v -r examples /usr/share/doc/qt (or /opt/qt/doc): This command installs the examples which are missed by make install.

exit: This command returns to the parent shell and eliminates environment variables set earlier.

Configuring Qt

Configuration Information

The QTDIR environment variable needs to be set when building packages that depend on Qt. Add the following to the .bash_profile initialization script for each user that builds packages using the Qt libraries. Alternatively, the variable can be set in the system wide /etc/profile file.

For Method 1 (This is optional, only set this if an application is unable to find the installed libraries):

export QTDIR=/usr

or for Method 2:

export QTDIR=/opt/qt

If you installed Qt using Method 2, you also need to update the following configuration files so that Qt is correctly found by other packages and system processes.

Update the /etc/ld.so.conf and /etc/man.conf files:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF" &&
# Begin qt addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/qt/lib

# End qt addition
EOF
ldconfig &&
cat >> /etc/man.conf << "EOF"
# Begin qt addition to man.conf

MANPATH /opt/qt/doc/man

# End qt addition to man.conf
EOF

Update the PKG_CONFIG_PATH environment variable in your ~/.bash_profile or /etc/profile with the following:

PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/qt/lib/pkgconfig

If you want the Qt executables in your shell search path, update the PATH environment variable in your ~/.bash_profile or /etc/profile to include /opt/qt/bin.

As with most libraries, there is no explicit configuration to do. After updating /etc/ld.so.conf as explained above, run /sbin/ldconfig so that ldd can find the shared libraries.

Installed Programs: assistant, designer, linguist, lrelease, lupdate, moc, qm2ts, qmake, qtconfig, and uic

Installed Libraries: libqt-mt.so, libqt.so libqui.so, libdesignercore.a, libeditor.a, and libqassistantclient.a

Installed Directories: /opt/qt-3.3.4 or /usr/lib/qt, /usr/share/qt, /usr/share/doc/qt, /usr/include/qt, and /etc/qt

Short Descriptions

assistant	is a tool for presenting on-line documentation.
designer	is a full-fledged GUI builder. It includes powerful features such as preview mode, automatic widget layout, support for custom widgets, and an advanced property editor.
linguist	provides support for translating applications into local languages.
lrelease	is a simple command line tool. It reads a Qt project file and produces message files used by the application.
lupdate	reads a Qt project file, finds the translatable strings in the specified source, header and Qt Designer interface files, and produces or updates the translation files listed in the project file.
moc	generates Qt meta object support code.
qm2ts	is a tool for converting Qt message file formats.
qmake	qmake uses information stored in project files to determine what should go in the makefiles it generates.
qtconfig	is used to customize the appearance of Qt applications.
uic	is a Qt user interface compiler.

GTK+-1.2.10

Introduction to GTK+

The GTK+ package contains GTK+ Libraries. This is useful for creating graphical user interfaces for applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/graphics/gimp/gtk/v1.2/gtk+-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v1.2/gtk+-1.2.10.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 4d5cb2fc7fb7830e4af9747a36bfce20
Download size: 2.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 51.1 MB
Estimated build time: 1.01 SBU

GTK+ Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10, libtiff-3.7.3, libjpeg-6b, and X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2)

Installation of GTK+

Install GTK+ by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This installs the configuration files into /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--with-xinput=xfree: This configuration flag is necessary to utilize alternative input devices.

Installed Program: gtk-config

Installed Libraries: libgdk.[so,a] and libgtk.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/gtk, /usr/include/gtk-1.2, and /usr/share/themes

Short Descriptions

gtk-config	is a tool used by configure scripts to determine the compiler and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use GTK+.
`libgtk.[so,a]`	(GIMP Tool Kit) is a library for creating graphical user interfaces similar to the Motif “look and feel”.
`libgdk.[so,a]`	is designed as a wrapper library that lies on top of Xlib. It performs many common and desired operations for a programmer instead of the programmer having to explicitly ask for such functionality from Xlib directly.

Pango-1.8.1

Introduction to Pango

The Pango package contains the libpango libraries. These are useful for the layout and rendering of text.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/pango/1.8/pango-1.8.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/pango/1.8/pango-1.8.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 88aa6bf1876766db6864f3b93577887c
Download size: 996 KB
Estimated disk space required: 22 MB
Estimated build time: 0.56 SBU (includes rebuilding the documentation)

Pango Dependencies

Required

Optional

Xft (included in XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), Fontconfig-2.3.2 and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Pango

In order for Pango to find Xft, the PKG_CONFIG_PATH must include /usr/X11R6/lib/pkgconfig. This is a good time to add it if you haven't already. You can utilize the example for X.sh to create a script for modifying this variable located in the section The Bash Shell Startup Files.

Install Pango by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch installs the configuration files into /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch will rebuild the API documentation during the make command.

Configuring Pango

Config Files

/etc/pango/pangorc, ~/.pangorc, and the file specified in the environment variable PANGO_RC_FILE

Configuration Information

The Pango module path is specified by the key Pango/ModulesPath in the Pango config database, which is read from the config files listed above.

Installed Program: pango-querymodules

Installed Libraries: libpango*.so and Pango loadable modules.

Installed Directories: /etc/pango, /usr/include/pango-1.0, /usr/lib/pango, and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/pango

Short Descriptions

pango-querymodules	is a module registration utility that collects information about Pango loadable modules.
Pango libraries	contain low level layout rendering routines, a high level driver for laying out entire blocks of text, and routines to assist in editing internationalized text.

ATK-1.9.1

Introduction to ATK

The ATK package contains the ATK libraries. They are useful for allowing accessibility solutions to be available for all GTK2 applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/atk/1.9/atk-1.9.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/atk/1.9/atk-1.9.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 689eb6a77215858eb804f6dcc90058be
Download size: 473 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.11 SBU

ATK Dependencies

Required

Optional

Installation of ATK

Install ATK by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch will rebuild the API documentation during the make command.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libatk-1.0.so

Installed Directories: /usr/include/atk-1.0 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/atk

Short Descriptions

atklib-1.0.so

contains functions that are used by assistive technologies in order to interact with the desktop and applications.

GTK+-2.6.7

Introduction to GTK+

The GTK+ package contains GTK+ Libraries. These are useful for creating graphical user interfaces for applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/graphics/gimp/gtk/v2.6/gtk+-2.6.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gtk.org/pub/gtk/v2.6/gtk+-2.6.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b89bf892a0dee943f98b4caa12f773c8
Download size: 11.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 180 MB
Estimated build time: 2.93 SBU (additional 13.36 SBU to rebuild the documentation)

GTK+ Dependencies

Required

X (X.org-6.8.2 or XFree86-4.5.0), Pango-1.8.1, and ATK-1.9.1

Optional

libtiff-3.7.3, libjpeg-6b, GTK-Doc-1.3, and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of GTK+

Install GTK+ by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --without-libtiff --without-libjpeg &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch installs the configuration files into /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--without-libtiff: Omit this switch if you have libtiff installed.

--without-libjpeg: Omit this switch if you have libjpeg installed.

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch will rebuild the API documentation during the make command.

Installed Programs: gdk-pixbuf-csource, gdk-pixbuf-query-loaders, gtk-demo, gtk-query-immodules-2.0, and gtk-update-icon-cache

Installed Libraries: libgdk_pixbuf-2.0.so, libgdk-x11-2.0.so, libgtk-x11-2.0.so, libgdk_pixbuf_xlib-2.0.so, and numerous engine, module, and loader plugins

Installed Directories: /etc/gtk-2.0, /usr/include/gtk-2.0, /usr/lib/gtk-2.0, /usr/share/gtk-2.0, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/[gdk,gdk-pixbuf,gtk], /usr/share/themes/Default/gtk*, and /usr/share/themes/Emacs/gtk-2.0-key

Short Descriptions

gdk-pixbuf-csource	generates C code containing images, useful for compiling images directly into programs.
gdk-pixbuf-query-loaders	collects information about loadable modules for gdk-pixbuf and writes it to standard output.
gtk-query-immodules-2.0	collects information about loadable input method modules for GTK+ and writes it to standard output.
gtk-update-icon-cache	creates mmap()able cache files for icon themes.
GTK+ Libraries	provide an API to implement graphical user interfaces.

LessTif-0.94.4

Introduction to LessTif

The LessTif package contains an Open Source version of OSF/Motif®.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/lesstif/lesstif-0.94.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 3096ca456c0bc299d895974d307c82d8
Download size: 2.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 160 MB (includes building and running the test suite)
Estimated build time: 2.89 SBU (includes building the test suite)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/lesstif-0.94.4-testsuite_fix-1.patch

LessTif Dependencies

Required

Optional

Lynx-2.8.5 or Links-2.1pre17 (used to generate the INSTALL documentation file) and Dmalloc

Installation of LessTif

Install LessTif by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../lesstif-0.94.4-testsuite_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --disable-debug \
    --enable-production --with-xdnd &&
make rootdir=/usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.94.4

Now, as the root user:

make rootdir=/usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.94.4 install &&
mv -v /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/mwm /etc/X11 &&
ln -v -s ../../../../etc/X11/mwm /usr/X11R6/lib/X11 &&
ldconfig

Command Explanations

--disable-debug: Do not generate debugging information.

--enable-production: Build the release version of the LessTif libraries.

--with-xdnd: Enable XDND GNOME compatibility support.

rootdir=/usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.94.4: This installs the documentation into an appropriate directory instead of the non-FHS compliant /usr/LessTif directory.

mv -v /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/mwm /etc/X11: The mwm configuration directory is moved to its proper FHS location in /etc/X11.

ln -v -s ../../../../etc/X11/mwm /usr/X11R6/lib/X11: A symlink required by some legacy applications is created pointing to the mwm configuration directory moved in the previous command.

Testing LessTif

It is advisable to test the installation of LessTif using the included test suite. It is not required to install any of the resulting binaries to validate the installation. Issue the following commands to build the test suite:

cd test &&
./configure &&
make

To run the tests, issue the following commands:

cd Xm &&
./testall *

You'll need to manually close three of the test windows. The first one is from test28 in the list directory. The second one is from test10 in the menushell directory. You should click on the button in the window and choose “exit” (do it twice) to finish the test. The third test is from test24 in the scrolledwindow directory.

As many as 100 tests are known to fail. The patch applied at the beginning of the installation created a file used to compare known failures to the failures from the test run. This file was created from an installation using the current LFS book and should be a fairly accurate representation of the failures you'll encounter. You could see some minor variances, however.

Configuring LessTif

Config Files

/etc/X11/mwm/system.mwmrc and ~/.mwmrc

Configuration Information

The config files are used to customize the behavior of the mwm window manager. Information about customizing these files can be found in the mwmrc(5) man page.

Installed Programs: motif-config, mwm, mxmkmf, uil, and xmbind

Installed Libraries: libDtPrints.so, libMrm.so, libUil.so, and libXm.so

Installed Directories: /etc/X11/mwm, /usr/include/Xm, /usr/include/Mrm, /usr/include/uil, /usr/include/Dt, /usr/lib/LessTif, and /usr/share/doc/lesstif-0.94.4

Short Descriptions

motif-config	is used to find out configuration information for packages needing to link to the LessTif libraries.
mwm	is a window manager that adheres largely to the Motif mwm specification.
mxmkmf	is the LessTif version of xmkmf which creates a `Makefile` from an `Imakefile`.
uil	is a user interface language compiler which translates a plain text description of the user interface of a Motif application into a machine-readable form.
xmbind	configures the virtual key bindings of LessTif applications.
`libXm.so`	is an OSF/Motif® source code compatible library for the X Window System. You can download an excellent reference guide (mainly for programmers) for the Motif-2.1 specification from http://unc.dl.sourceforge.net/lesstif/6B_book.pdf.

startup-notification-0.8

Introduction to startup-notification

The startup-notification package contains startup-notification libraries. These are useful for building a consistent manner to notify the user through the cursor that the application is loading.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.freedesktop.org/software/startup-notification/releases/startup-notification-0.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.linux.org.uk/pub/linux/GNOME/sources/startup-notification/0.8/startup-notification-0.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9bba52ffe8c096cfeeaf7a1dcd9b943d
Download size: 335 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.3 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

startup-notification Dependencies

Required

Installation of startup-notification

Install startup-notification by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/startup-notification.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/startup-notification-0.8/startup-notification.txt

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libstartup-notification-1.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/startup-notification-1.0 and /usr/share/doc/startup-notification-0.8

Short Descriptions

libstartup-notification-1.[so,a]

provides the functions to assist applications in communicating with the cursor system to provide feedback to the user that the application is loading.

Libwnck-2.10.0

Introduction to Libwnck

The libwnck package contains a Window Navigator Construction Kit.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libwnck/2.10/libwnck-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libwnck/2.10/libwnck-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c04c79f1e8576bc930c79d2e7bb8190a
Download size: 419 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Libwnck Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7

Optional

Installation of Libwnck

Install libwnck by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libwnck-1

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libwnck-1.0 and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libwnck

Short Descriptions

libwnck-1.[so,a]

contains functions for writing pagers and task lists.

shared-mime-info-0.16

Introduction to shared-mime-info

The shared-mime-info package contains a MIME database. This allows central updates of MIME information for all supporting applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://freedesktop.org/~jrb/shared-mime-info-0.16.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/shared-mime-info-0.16.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 255a20bae753ebd41e2286b01e7b86d0
Download size: 753 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

shared-mime-info Dependencies

Required

GLib-2.6.4, libxml2-2.6.20 and XML::Parser

Installation of shared-mime-info

Install shared-mime-info by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring shared-mime-info

Configuration Information

Some applications (including GNOME-2) require a properly set environment variable to locate the MIME database. Satisfy this requirement by setting the following variable in your local shell profile, or the system-wide profile:

XDG_DATA_DIRS=/usr/share
export XDG_DATA_DIRS

Installed Program: update-mime-database

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/mime

Short Descriptions

update-mime-database

assists in adding MIME data to the database.

hicolor-icon-theme-0.8

Introduction to hicolor-icon-theme

The hicolor-icon-theme package contains a default fallback theme for implementations of the icon theme specification.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://icon-theme.freedesktop.org/releases/hicolor-icon-theme-0.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/hicolor-icon-theme-0.8.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: b854ed36d523d5d72902b04c18f4b499
Download size: 31 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.2 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of hicolor-icon-theme

Install hicolor-icon-theme by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/icons/hicolor/

Short Descriptions

/usr/share/icons/hicolor/*

contains icon definitions used as defaults.

libxklavier-2.0

Introduction to libxklavier

The libxklavier package contains a utility library for X keyboard.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/gswitchit/libxklavier-2.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 9257653ee3d194d9c8d669e969fe4332
Download size: 435 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.0 MB
Estimated build time: 0.12 SBU

libxklavier Dependencies

Required

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), pkg-config-0.19 and libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of libxklavier

Install libxklavier by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libxklavier.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/libxklavier, /usr/share/doc/libxklavier-2.0, and /usr/share/libxklavier

Short Descriptions

libxklavier.[so,a]

contains XKB utility functions.

freeglut-2.4.0

Introduction to freeglut

freeglut is intended to be a 100% compatible, completely opensourced clone of the GLUT library. GLUT is a window system independent toolkit for writing OpenGL programs, implementing a simple windowing API, which makes learning about and exploring OpenGL programming very easy.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/freeglut/freeglut-2.4.0.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 6d16873bd876fbf4980a927cfbc496a1
Download size: 459 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

freeglut Dependencies

Required

Installation of freeglut

Install freeglut by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/doc/freeglut-2.4.0 &&
install -v -m644 doc/freeglut_user_interface.html \
    /usr/share/doc/freeglut-2.4.0

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libglut.{so,a}

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/freeglut-2.4.0

Short Descriptions

libglut.[so,a]

contains functions that implement the OpenGL Utility Toolkit.

Chapter 27. Window Managers

Introduction

Window Mangers and Desktop Environments are the primary user interfaces into the X Window System. A window manager is a program that controls the appearance of windows and provides the means by which the user can interact with them. A Desktop Environment provides a more complete interface to the operating system, and provides a range of integrated utilities and applications.

There are many Window Mangers available. Some of the more well known ones include fvwm2, Window Maker, AfterStep, Enlightenment, Sawfish, and Blackbox.

The Desktop Environments available for Linux are GNOME, KDE, and XFce.

Choosing a Window Manager or Desktop Environment is highly subjective. The choice depends on the look and feel of the packages, the resources (RAM, disk space) required, and the utilities included. One web site that provides a very good summary of what is available, screenshots, and their respective features is Window Managers for X.

In this chapter, the installation instructions of several Window Managers and one lightweight Desktop Environment are presented. Later in the book, both KDE and GNOME have their own sections.

sawfish-1.3

Introduction to sawfish

The sawfish package contains a window manager. This is useful for organizing and displaying windows where all window decorations are configurable and all user-interface policy is controlled through the extension language.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/sawmill/sawfish-1.3.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 9e5ce5e76c60acecdb1889c1f173295a
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 17.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.26 SBU

sawfish Dependencies

Required

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), librep-0.17, rep-gtk-0.18, EsounD-0.2.35 and GTK+-2.6.7

Installation of sawfish

Install sawfish by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexec=/usr/sbin \
    --infodir=/usr/share/info --disable-themer &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-themer: This option prevents building the sawfish themer. This program was not migrated to GTK-2.

--with-audiofile: This command directs sawfish to use libaudiofile for sound manipulation.

--with-esd: This command directs sawfish to use the Enlightened Sound Daemon.

Configuring sawfish

Configuration Information

Be sure to backup your current .xinitrc before proceeding.

cat >> ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
exec sawfish
EOF

Installed Programs: sawfish, sawfish-client, and sawfish-ui

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/sawfish, /usr/sbin/sawfish, and /usr/lib/rep/*/

Short Descriptions

`sawfish`	is the extensible window manager using a Lisp-based scripting language.
`sawfish-client`	allows you to connect to a window manager process and evaluate arbitrary Lisp forms.
`sawfish-ui`	is the sawfish configurator.

Fluxbox-0.9.13

Introduction to Fluxbox

The Fluxbox package contains a window manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/fluxbox/fluxbox-0.9.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: f9b7b3c3b8e1e9ce3449601b238d4fba
Download size: 649 KB
Estimated disk space required: 47.7 MB
Estimated build time: 1.2 SBU

Fluxbox Dependencies

Required

Optional

Imlib2-1.2.1 Image display library

Installation of Fluxbox

Install Fluxbox by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-imlib2: Use this option if you wish image formats additional to xpm.

Configuring Fluxbox

Config Files

~/.fluxbox/init, ~/.fluxbox/keys, and ~/.fluxbox/menu

Configuration Information

Be sure to backup your current .xinitrc before proceeding.

cat >> ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
startfluxbox
EOF

Now create the Fluxbox configuration files:

mkdir -v ~/.fluxbox &&
cp -v /usr/share/fluxbox/init ~/.fluxbox/init &&
cp -v /usr/share/fluxbox/keys ~/.fluxbox/keys

Now if you have Which installed.

cd ~/.fluxbox &&
fluxbox-generate_menu

Else, if you do not have Which installed.

cp -v /usr/share/fluxbox/menu ~/.fluxbox/menu

Menu Items are added by editing ~/.fluxbox/menu. The syntax is explained on the fluxbox man page.

Installed Programs: fluxbox, fbsetbg, bsetroot, fluxbox-generate_menu, startfluxbox, and fbrun

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/fluxbox and ~/.fluxbox

Short Descriptions

fluxbox	is a window manager for X11 based on Blackbox 0.61.0.
fbsetbg	is a utility that sets the background image. It needs display, Esetroot, wmsetbg, xv, qiv or xsri to be used.
bsetroot	is a Blackbox utility to change root window appearance.
fluxbox-generate_menu	is a utility that generates a menu by scanning your `PATH`. It requires which to function properly.
startfluxbox	is a session startup script that allows for command executions prior to fluxbox starting.
fbrun	displays a run dialog window.

Metacity-2.10.1

Introduction to Metacity

The Metacity package contains a window manager. This is useful for organizing and displaying windows.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/metacity/2.10/metacity-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/metacity/2.10/metacity-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c326eb1aed8742057e9ad94b9ccae877
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 47.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

Metacity Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33, GConf-2.10.0, and GTK+-2.6.7

Optional

startup-notification-0.8, Xrender*, and libXcomposite**

* libXrender is installed during an XFree86 installation, but the pkgconfig .pc file Metacity looks for is not installed. Satisfy the requirement by installing an xrender.pc file into /usr/X11R6/lib/pkgconfig (not applicable if you have Xorg installed):

cat > /usr/X11R6/lib/pkgconfig/xrender.pc << "EOF"
prefix=/usr/X11R6
exec_prefix=${prefix}
libdir=${exec_prefix}/lib
includedir=${prefix}/include

Name: Xrender
Description: X Render Library
Version: 0.8.3
Cflags: -I${includedir} -I/usr/X11R6/include
Libs: -L${libdir} -lXrender  -L/usr/X11R6/lib -lX11
EOF

** libXcomposite can optionally be used, but here's what the Metacity package maintainer has to say about it in the configure script if the package is found: “Not building compositing manager by default now, must enable explicitly to get it. And it doesn't work, so don't bother unless you want to hack on it...”

Installation of Metacity

Install Metacity by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/sbin --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/metacity-2.10.1 &&
install -v -m644 README rationales.txt doc/*.txt \
    /usr/share/doc/metacity-2.10.1

Command Explanations

--with-gconf-schema-file-dir=/etc/gnome/gconf/schemas: Use this option if you are installing Metacity for a GNOME-2 installation.

Configuring Metacity

Configuration Information

To automatically start the Metacity window manager when you issue the startx command, append to (or create) .xinitrc using the command below (not required if you are installing Metacity for a GNOME-2 installation). Ensure you backup your current ~/.xinitrc before proceeding:

cat >> ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
xterm &
exec metacity
EOF

Installed Programs: metacity, metacity-dialog, metacity-message, metacity-theme-viewer, and metacity-window-demo

Installed Library: libmetacity-private.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/metacity, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/metacity, /usr/include/metacity-1, /usr/share/doc/metacity-2.10.1, /usr/share/themes/[Crux,Simple]/metacity-1, /usr/share/themes/[Atlanta,Bright,Esco,AgingGorilla,Metabox], /usr/share/metacity, and /usr/share/gnome/wm-properties

Short Descriptions

metacity	is a window manager used mainly by GNOME.
metacity-theme-viewer	allows you to preview any installed Metacity theme. When designing a new Metacity theme, you can use metacity-theme-viewer to measure the performance of a window frame option, and to preview the option.
metacity-window-demo	demonstrates various kinds of windows that window managers and window manager themes should handle.

XFce-4.2.2

Introduction to XFce

The XFce package contains a lightweight desktop environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.us.xfce.org/archive/xfce-4.2.2/fat_tarballs/xfce-4.2.2-src.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 9c65e81b6a7b361af30ae64f3881f2c3
Download size: 23 MB
Estimated disk space required: 95 MB (each build directory deleted after completion)
Estimated build time: 3.6 SBU

XFce Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7 and libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

libgtkhtml-2.6.3, startup-notification-0.8, a2ps-4.13b and PSUtils-p17

Installation of XFce

XFce now distributes as a TAR ball of base packages and module packages. For each package, run the following:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

The following packages will install the bare minimum:

libxfce4util-4.2.2
dbh-1.0.24
libxfcegui4-4.2.2
libxfce4mcs-4.2.2
xfce-mcs-manager-4.2.2
xfwm4-4.2.2
xfce4-panel-4.2.2
xfdesktop-4.2.2
xfce-utils-4.2.2

In addition, you may choose to install:

gtk-xfce-engine-2.2.7
xfcalendar-4.2.2
xfce-mcs-plugins-4.2.2
xfce4-appfinder-4.2.2
xfce4-icon-theme-4.2.2
xfce4-iconbox-4.2.2
xfce4-mixer-4.2.2
xfce4-session-4.2.2
xfce4-systray-4.2.2
xfce4-toys-4.2.2
xfce4-trigger-launcher-4.2.2
xffm-4.2.2
xfprint-4.2.2
xfwm4-themes-4.2.2

Configuring XFce

Configuration Information

Be sure to backup your current .xinitrc before proceeding.

cat > ~/.xinitrc << "EOF"
xfce-mcs-manager
xfwm4 --daemon
xftaskbar4 &
xfdesktop &
exec xfce4-panel
EOF

Installed Programs: fgr, scramble, startxfce4, xfbook, xfbook4, xfcalendar, xfce-mcs-manager, xfce-setting-show, xfce4-about, xfce4-appfinder, xfce4-iconbox, xfce4-kiosk-query, xfce4-menueditor, xfce4-mixer, xfce4-panel, xfce4-session, xfce4-session-logout, xfce4-tips, xfdesktop, xfdiff4, xffm, xffrequent, xffrequent4, xffstab, xffstab4, xfglob4, xfhelp4, xflock4, xfmime-edit, xfmountdev4, xfrecent, xfrecent4, xfprint-manager, xfprint4, xfrun4, xfsamba4, xftaskbar4, xfterm4, xftrash4, xftree4, and xfwm4

Installed Libraries: libdbh, libxfce4mcs, libxfce4util, libxfcegui4, libxffm, libxfsm, and libxfprint

Installed Directories: /usr/share/xfce4, /usr/share/xffm and /usr/share/xfwm4

Short Descriptions

fgr	is a file content search engine for xffm.
xfce-mcs-manager	is the settings manager for XFce.
xfce4-about	displays the about box.
xfce4-session	starts up the XFce Desktop Environment.
xfce4-session-logout	logs out from XFce.
xfce-setting-show	displays the settings for XFce.
xfce4-panel	is the panel manager for XFce. It contains the launcher, clock, mail check, desktop switcher and separator programs.
xfdesktop	is the desktop manager for XFce.
xfhelp4	is script that launches a HTML browser to display online documentation.
xflock4	is a script used to lock the current screen during drag and drop actions.
xfmountdev4	mounts a device on the specified mount point and launches xftree4, then unmounts the device when xftree4 finishes.
xfrun4	is the program launcher for XFce.
xfsamba4	is the Samba front end for XFce.
xftaskbar4	is the taskbar manager for XFce.
xfterm4	is a small terminal wrapper to be used as a drag and drop action for the XFce front panel.
xftrash4	is a small script to be used as a drag and drop action for the XFce front panel.
xftree4	is the file manager for XFce.
xfwm4	is an X11 window manager for XFce.

Other Window Managers

twm is the Tab Window Manager. This is the default window manager installed by the X.org-6.8.2 and XFree86-4.5.0 X Window Systems.

mwm is the Motif® Window Manager. It is an OSF/Motif® clone packaged and installed with LessTif-0.94.4.

KDE

Introduction to KDE

KDE is a comprehensive desktop environment that builds on an X Window System and Qt to provide a window manager and many user tools, including a browser, word processor, spreadsheet, presentation package, games, and numerous other utilities. It provides extensive capabilities for customization.

The KDE instructions are divided into two parts. The first part, the core packages, are needed for the rest of KDE to work. The second part presents additional packages which provide functionality in various areas (multimedia, graphics, etc.).

There are two alternatives for installing KDE. Option one, that is used by most of the commercial distributions, is to install KDE in the standard system prefix: /usr. This option allows the use of KDE without the need for any additional configuration such as modification of various environment variables or configuration files. Option two is to install it in a unique prefix such as /opt/kde or /opt/kde-3.4.1. This option allows for easy removal of the package.

Tip

All the KDE packages are comprised of various components. The default is to install most of the components. If specific components are to be eliminated, the official way is to set the variable DO_NOT_COMPILE. This comes in handy when there are problems compiling a particular component.

DO_NOT_COMPILE="component1 component2" \
    ./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX ...

The core KDE packages also honor this variable, but omitting components from the core packages is not advisable since it may result in an incomplete KDE installation.

Note

In each of the packages, one other option to configure can be added: --enable-final. This option can speed up the build process, but requires a lot of memory. If you have less than 256MB of RAM, this option may cause swapping and significantly slow compilation.

28. KDE Core Packages
29. KDE Additional Packages

Chapter 28. KDE Core Packages

KDE Pre-installation Configuration

Based on your preference, set KDE_PREFIX.

If KDE is your desktop of choice:

export KDE_PREFIX=/usr

If you want to try-out KDE:

export KDE_PREFIX=/opt/kde-3.4.1

Remember to execute ldconfig after installation of libraries to update the library cache.

If you are not installing KDE in /usr, you will need to make some configuration changes:

You should consider installing the desktop-file-utils-0.10 package. Though not required, this package will allow you to easily use existing .desktop files in /usr/share/applications (and any other locations identified by XDG_DATA_DIRS), and automatically add these applications to the KDE menu system.

Add to your system or personal profile:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/kde-3.4.1/bin
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/kde-3.4.1/lib/pkgconfig

Add to your /etc/ld.so.conf:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF"
# Begin kde addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/kde-3.4.1/lib

# End kde addition
EOF

Add to your /etc/man.conf:

cat >> /etc/man.conf << "EOF"
# Begin kde addition to man.conf

MANPATH /opt/kde-3.4.1/man

# End kde addition to man.conf
EOF

Tip

If you prefer installing KDE in /opt, one trick to avoid the above configuration changes every time you install a new version is to replace /opt/kde-3.4.1 with /opt/kde and to create a symlink from /opt/kde-3.4.1 to /opt/kde.

ln -v -sf kde-3.4.1 /opt/kde

aRts-1.4.1

Introduction to aRts

The Analog Real-time Synthesizer (aRts) provides sound support for KDE and necessary libraries for kdelibs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/arts-1.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/arts-1.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f632984ddc976a1e4243718af54559ee
Download size: 960 KB
Estimated disk space required: 30.4 MB
Estimated build time: 2.0 SBU

aRts Dependencies

Required

Qt-3.3.4 and GLib-2.6.4

Optional

libogg-1.1.2, libvorbis-1.1.1, ALSA-1.0.9, Audio File-0.2.6, libmad-0.15.1b, EsounD-0.2.35, MAS, and JACK

Installation of aRts

Install aRts by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$KDE_PREFIX: This option tells the process to install the package in $KDE_PREFIX. aRts is installed here as it's required before installing KDE.

--disable-debug: This option causes the package to be compiled without debugging code.

--disable-dependency-tracking: This option speeds up one time builds.

Installed Programs: artsd, artswrapper, artsshell, artsplay, artsdsp, artscat, arts-control, artsc-config, and mcopidl

Installed Libraries: aRts libraries

Installed Directories: kde/bin, kde/include, and kde/lib

Short Descriptions

artsd	is a daemon that provides access to the sound hardware resources.
artswrapper	is a small wrapper program which simply sets real-time priority (running as `root`) and then executes artsd as a non-root user.
artsshell	is intended as a utility to perform miscellaneous functions related to the sound server.
artsplay	is a simple utility to play a sound file.
artsdsp	provides an interim solution that allows most of legacy sound applications to run unchanged.
artscat	is a simple utility to send raw audio data to the sound server.
artscontrol	is a graphical utility for performing a number of tasks related to the sound server.
artsc-config	is a utility to assist developers using the aRts C API.
mcopidl	is the Interface Definition Language (IDL) file compiler for MCOP, the Multimedia Communication Protocol used by aRts.
`aRts Libraries`	contains functions that support aRts programs.

To find out information about aRts and the various programs included in the package, see The aRts Handbook. For information in languages other then English, see the KDE Documentation and navigate to the aRts documentation in your language.

Kdelibs-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdelibs

This package includes programs and libraries that are central to the development and execution of a KDE program, as well as internationalization files for these libraries, misc HTML documentation, theme modules and regression tests.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdelibs-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdelibs-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 67224e6b55856c23b0a162cab17dd1b4
Download size: 16.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 265 MB (additional 232 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 19.3 SBU (additional 14.4 SBU for API docs)

Kdelibs Dependencies

Required

aRts-1.4.1

Optional

libtiff-3.7.3, Aspell-0.60.3, CUPS-1.1.23, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, ALSA-1.0.9, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, OpenEXR, JasPer, GraphViz, and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of Kdelibs

Install kdelibs with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking --enable-fast-malloc=full &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and GraphViz installed, make apidox must be done before make install. This applies to all packages which can utilize Doxygen.

The make apidox command generates a lot of errors and warnings. In some cases it complains that Helvetica fonts are missing and substitutes a font that does not fit boxes properly. You can add the font by downloading the URW Fonts and unpacking them into ~/.fonts. fc-cache should also be run to update the font properties on your system.

The documents generated are html and are found in $KDE_PREFIX/share/doc/HTML/en/kdelibs-apidocs.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$KDE_PREFIX: This option tells the process to install the package in $KDE_PREFIX.

--disable-debug: This option causes the package to be compiled without debugging code.

--disable-dependency-tracking: This option speeds up one time builds.

--enable-fast-malloc=full: This option tells KDE programs to use an internal memory allocation scheme optimized for KDE.

Installed Programs: Numerous KDE support programs

Installed Libraries: Numerous KDE libraries

Installed Directories: kde/share and kde/etc

Short Descriptions

KDE Support Programs	contain essential support programs needed by other KDE applications.
KDE Libraries	contain essential functions that are needed by KDE applications.

The number of programs and libraries installed by kdelibs prohibits an explanation of each one in this section. Instead, see the KDE Documentation.

Kdebase-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdebase

kdebase is the last mandatory package required for the K Desktop Environment. It provides various applications, infrastructure files and libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdebase-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdebase-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8fbe0b943721b79f2549064b580acdde
Download size: 21.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 262 MB (additional 15 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 19.2 SBU (additional 0.5 SBU for API docs)

Kdebase Dependencies

Required

kdelibs-3.4.1

Optional

libtiff-3.7.3, LessTif-0.94.4, Linux-PAM-0.80, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, Cyrus SASL-2.1.21, Samba-3.0.14a, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, krb4, Mtools, libraw1394, lm_sensors, JasPer, GraphViz, and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of Kdebase

Note: You should ensure a nogroup group exists on your system before performing the make install command, as kdebase installs a program ($KDE_PREFIX/bin/kdesud) with group ownership of nogroup.

Install kdebase with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and GraphViz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kate, kcontrol, kdebugdialog, kdeprint, kdesu, kdm, kfind, khelpcenter, kicker, kinfocenter, kioslave, klipper, kmenuedit, konqueror, konsole, kpager, ksplashml, ksysguard, kwrite, and kxkb

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kate	is a programmer's text editor for KDE.
kcontrol	is the KDE Control Center.
kdebugdialog	is a dialog box for managing diagnostic messages at runtime.
kdeprint	is the printing module in KDE. It manages the actual printing from KDE applications, It handles print job administration and handles printer and print system management.
kdesu	is a graphical front end for the Unix su command.
kdm	is the KDE display manager (a replacement for xdm).
kfind	is a utility to find files.
khelpcenter	is the KDE help tool.
kicker	is the KDE control panel.
kinfocenter	provides a centralized and convenient overview of your KDE and system settings.
kioslaves	are support programs designed to be intimately familiar with a certain protocol, so that a standard interface can be used to get at data from any number of places. Examples are the http and ftp kioslaves, which will retrieve data from an http or ftp server respectively.
klipper	is a clipboard utility.
kmenuedit	is a utility to rearrange or add items to the K-menu.
kongueror	is a filesystem and web browser.
konsole	is a highly configurable X terminal emulator.
kpager	provides a thumbnail view of all virtual desktops.
ksplashml	is a splash screen that shows the progress of an application that is loading.
ksysguard	is a network enabled task manager and system monitor application, with the additional functionality of top.
kwrite	is a text editor for KDE.
kxkb	is a keyboard layout switching utility based on the X11 xkb extension.

Configuring the Core KDE Packages

Back up your existing ~/.xinitrc file and create a new .xinitrc file to start KDE:

echo "exec startkde" > ~/.xinitrc

If you installed the desktop-file-utils-0.10 package, update the MIME-type application database (as root):

update-desktop-database

Ensure all libraries can be found with (as root):

ldconfig

At this point you can bring up KDE with:

startx

Chapter 29. KDE Additional Packages

Each of the packages in this chapter depend on the base KDE installation procedures, but each is an independent group of programs that can be optionally installed. Few users will want to install every package, but instead review and install only the ones desired.

Kdeadmin-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdeadmin

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeadmin-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeadmin-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ee02e3caf664d825838698b44557b0ef
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 20.3 MB
Estimated build time:2.1 SBU

Kdeadmin Dependencies

Required

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80 and LILO

Installation of Kdeadmin

Install kdeadmin with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kcron, kdat, kpackage, ksysv, and kuser

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kcron	is a task scheduler.
kdat	is a tar-based tape archiver.
kpackage	is a package manager.
ksysv	is a Sys V-Init editor.
kuser	is a graphical user manager.

Kdenetwork-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdenetwork

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdenetwork-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdenetwork-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: cfdec84537bd20f032b9b27c74bc28ba
Download size: 7.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 156 MB
Estimated build time: 13.0 SBU

Kdenetwork Dependencies

Required

Optional

PPP-2.4.3, XMMS-1.2.10, Doxygen-1.4.3, OpenSLP, Wireless Tools, libgadu, GraphViz, and Valgrind

Installation of Kdenetwork

Install kdenetwork with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Kdenetwork

Config Files

/etc/lisarc and ~/.lisarc

Configuration Information

To utilize the LAN Browser of konqueror you will need to create the /etc/lisarc file and start the lisa daemon. Create /etc/lisarc by filling out the information in the “Guided LISa Setup” section of the “LISa Daemon” tab on the “Control Center” — “Internet & Network” — “Local Network Browsing” dialog box.

Install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/lisa init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-lisa

There is no explicit configuration for the rest of the kdenetwork package, however some individual programs need to be set up with user information.

Installed Programs: kdict, kget, knewsticker, kopete, kpf, kppp, krdc, krfb, ksirc, ktalkd, kwifimanager, and lisa

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kdict	is a graphical client for the Dictionary Server Protocol (DICT).
kget	allows you to group downloads.
knewsticker	is a news applet for the KDE Application Launcher Panel.
kopete	is KDE's multi-protocol instant messenger client.
kpf	allows you to share files over a network.
kppp	is a dial-up utility.
krdc	is a client application that allows you to view or even control the desktop session on another machine that is running a compatible (VNC) server.
krfb	is a server application that allows you to share your current session with a user on another machine, who can use a VNC client to view or even control the desktop.
ksirc	is a chat client.
ktalkd	is an enhanced talk daemon—a program to handle incoming talk requests, announce them and allow you to respond to them using a talk client.
kwifimanager	is used to configure and monitor wireless LAN cards.
lisa	is intended to provide a kind of network neighborhood, but only relying on the TCP/IP protocol stack.

Kdepim-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdepim

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdepim-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdepim-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e5515aa230558bac8651e9cd9f8f9673
Download size: 10.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 239 MB (additional 22 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 26 SBU (additional 0.5 SBU for API docs)

Additional Downloads

Required patch: http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdepim-kpilot-fix.diff

Kdepim Dependencies

Required

Optional

pilot-link-0.11.8, GPGME-0.9.x (requires Libgpg-error then Libgcrypt then Libassuan then Libksba, pinentry, Pth, OpenSC and then GnuPG-1.9.x), libmal, gnokii, Bluetooth hardware and driver libraries, GraphViz, and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of Kdepim

Install kdepim with:

pushd kpilot &&
patch -Np0 -i ../../kdepim-kpilot-fix.diff &&
popd &&
./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and GraphViz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kaddressbook, kalarm, kandy, karm, kgpgcertmanager, kmail, knode, knotes, konsolekalendar, kontact, korganizer, korn, and kpilot

Installed Libraries: Numerous kdepim specific libraries

Installed Directories: Numerous subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

kaddressbook	is the KDE address book.
kalarm	is a system to provide reminder messages.
kandy	is a program to synchronize mobile phone numbers.
karm	is a personal time tracker.
kgpgcertmanager	is a tool for managing X509 certificates.
kmail	is KDE's email client.
knode	is the KDE newsreader.
knotes	is a popup notes utility.
konsolehelper	is a command line interface to KDE calendars.
kontact	is the integrated solution to personal information management (PIM) needs.
korganizer	is a personal calendar/todo system.
korn	is a KDE mail checker that has the capabilities to dock itself to kicker.
kpilot	is a program to synchronize a Palm-Pilot.

Kdemultimedia-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdemultimedia

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdemultimedia-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdemultimedia-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: db69c9ab845c8295f095dc6394fba047
Download size: 5.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 117 MB
Estimated build time: 12.4 SBU

Kdemultimedia Dependencies

Required

Optional

CDParanoia-III-9.8, LAME-3.96.1, Audio File-0.2.6, libogg-1.1.2, libvorbis-1.1.1, xine Libraries-1.0.1, FLAC-1.1.2, Speex-1.0.5, SDL-1.2.8, GStreamer-0.8.10 (with KGst), TagLib, libmusicbrainz, TRM Generator, and TunePimp

Installation of Kdemultimedia

Install kdemultimedia with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: artsbuilder, juk, kaboodle, kmid, kmix, krec, kscd, and noatun

Installed Libraries: Numerous kdemultimedia specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

artsbuilder	is a tool to create new structures of small connected aRts modules.
juk	is a jukebox, tagger, and music collection manager.
kaboodle	is a multimedia player.
kmid	is a midi/karaoke player.
kmix	is a sound mixer.
krec	is a recording frontend for aRts.
kscd	is a CD player.
noatun	is another multimedia player.

Kdegraphics-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdegraphics

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdegraphics-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdegraphics-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d91ef530a416bd8407abb28103bc049c
Download size: 6.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 103 MB
Estimated build time: 8.7 SBU

Kdegraphics Dependencies

Required

Optional

libtiff-3.7.3, Imlib-1.9.15, lcms-1.14, SANE-1.0.15, Xpdf-3.00pl3, TeX-3.0, FriBidi-0.10.5, gPhoto2, t1lib, OpenEXR, and libpaper

Installation of Kdegraphics

Install kdegraphics with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kcoloredit, kdvi, kfax, kgamma, kghostview, kiconedit, kooka, kpaint, kpdf, kpovmodeler, kruler, ksnapshot, kuickshow, and kview

Installed Libraries: kio_kamera and several other kdegraphics specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kcoloredit	is a color pallette editor.
kdvi	is a DVI viewer.
kfax	is a FAX viewer.
kgamma	is a simple tool for monitor gamma correction.
kghostview	is a PS/PDF viewer.
kiconedit	is an icon editor.
kooka	is a raster image scan program.
kpaint	is a paint program.
kpovmodeler	is a graphical 3D modeler, which can generate scenes for POV-Ray.
kruler	is a screen ruler.
ksnapshot	is a screen capture program.
kuickshow	is an image viewer.
kview	is another image viewer.
kio_kamera	is an io slave that allows you to view and download images from a digital camera using the `kamera:/` URL in konqueror.

Kdeutils-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdeutils

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeutils-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeutils-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0c3ef37a96ce9f5b0b3ee5d0b31ef4e4
Download size: 2.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 55 MB
Estimated build time: 5.3 SBU

Kdeutils Dependencies

Required

Optional

Net-SNMP and tpctl

Installation of Kdeutils

Install kdeutils with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: ark, irkick, kcalc, kcharselect, kcmlirc, kdepasswd, kdf, kedit, kfloppy, kgpg, khexedit, kjots, ksim, kregexpeditor, ktimer, and kwallet

Installed Libraries: Several kdeutils specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

ark	is an archiving tool.
irkick	is the infrastructure for KDE's Infrared Remote Control functionality; irkick is the server component of that infrastructure.
kcalc	is a scientific calculator.
kcharselect	is a character selector applet.
kdepasswd	is a password managing utility.
kdf	is a disk usage viewer.
kedit	is a text editor.
kfloppy	is a floppy formatter.
kgpg	a simple graphical interface for GnuPG-1.4.1.
khexedit	is a binary editor.
kjots	is a note taker.
kregexpeditor	is an editor for editing regular expressions in a graphical style (in contrast to the ASCII syntax).
ktimer	is a task scheduler.

Kdeedu-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdeedu

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeedu-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeedu-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9fa1db1cf500c0fc594b0f5d291bbf69
Download size: 22.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 171 MB
Estimated build time: 10.4 SBU

Kdeedu Dependencies

Required

Optional

Boost.Python

Installation of Kdeedu

Install kdeedu with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: flashkard, kalzium, kbruch, keduca, khangman, kig, kiten, klettres, kmathtool, kmessedwords, kmplot, kpercentage, kstars, ktouch, kverbos, and kvoctrain

Installed Libraries: Several kdeedu specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kalzium	is a program which shows you the Periodic System of Elements.
kbruch	is a small program to generate tasks with fractions.
keduca	is flash card application, which allows you to make interactive form based tests..
khangman	is the classical hangman game for children, adapted for KDE.
kig	is a KDE application for Interactive Geometry.
kiten	is a Japanese reference/study tool for KDE.
klettres	is an alphabet tutor (French).
kmessedwords	is a simple mind-training word game.
kmplot	is a mathematical function plotter for KDE.
kpercentage	is a small math application that will help pupils to improve their skills in calculating percentages.
kstars	is a desktop planetarium.
ktouch	is a touch typing tutor.
kverbos	is an application specially designed to study Spanish verb forms.
kvoctrain	is a vocabulary trainer.

Kdesdk-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdesdk

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdesdk-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdesdk-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b7073f0f4ac7efe4d6ff33c1ba527668
Download size: 4.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 101 MB
Estimated build time: 9.1 SBU

Kdesdk Dependencies

Required

Installation of Kdesdk

Install kdesdk with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: cervisia, kbabel, kcachegrind, kompare, and umbrello

Installed Libraries: Several kdesdk specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

cervisia	provides a graphical view of CVS.
kbabel	is a suite of an advanced PO file editor comprising kbabel, a multi functional catalogmanager and a dictionary for translators kbabeldict.
kcachegrind	is a KDE frontend for cachegrind, part of Valgrind.
kompare	is a program to view the differences between files.
umbrello	is a UML modelling diagram tool.

Kdevelop-3.2.1

Introduction to Kdevelop

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdevelop-3.2.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdevelop-3.2.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7a5e9f2fb8a9539a41541dba566a234a
Download size: 8.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 191 MB (additional 14.6 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 16.6 SBU (additional 1.4 SBU for API docs)

Kdevelop Dependencies

Required

Optional

Python-2.4.1, DocBase, GraphViz, and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of Kdevelop

Install kdevelop with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and GraphViz installed, make apidox must be done before make install. You'll also need to run make install-apidox to install the API documentation.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v -R root:root $KDE_PREFIX/kdevbdb

Command Explanations

chown -v -R root:root $KDE_PREFIX/kdevbdb: If kdevelop is built by any user other than root the installed Berkeley-DB files will have incorrect ownership. This command changes the ownership to root:root.

Installed Programs: kdevelop and supporting programs

Installed Libraries: Supporting kdevelop libraries

Installed Directories: $KDE_PREFIX/kdevbdb and supporting subdirectoies in $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Short Descriptions

kdevelop

is an Integrated Development Environment to be used for a wide variety of programming tasks in many programming languages.

Kdewebdev-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdewebdev

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdewebdev-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdewebdev-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d5c9e5c72731aead950ab29a4d620af8
Download size: 5.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 100 MB
Estimated build time: 8.8 SBU

Kdewebdev Dependencies

Required

Installation of Kdewebdev

Install kdewebdev with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kxsldbg and quanta

Installed Libraries: kdewebdev specific libraries

Installed Directories: Several subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kxsldbg	is a GUI front-end to xsldbg, the XSLT debugger.
quanta	is a web development tool that strives to be neutral and transparent to all markup languages, while supporting popular web-based scripting languages, CSS, and other emerging W3C recommendations.

Kdebindings-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdebindings

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdebindings-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdebindings-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 18a4e2c42d34bb86279e691498482951
Download size: 6.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 517 MB
Estimated build time: 29 SBU

Kdebindings Dependencies

Required

Optional

GLib-1.2.10, GTK+-1.2.10, Python-2.4.1, Ruby-1.8.2, JDK-1.5.0, Mozilla-1.7.8, Mono, DotGNU Portable.NET, and Rotor

Installation of Kdebindings

Note: If KDE is installed in /opt/kde-3.4.1, you'll need to make a modification before the build using the following command:

sed -i -e 's@/usr@/opt/kde-3.4.1@' \
    python/pykde/configure.py

Install kdebindings with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: Several support programs for software development

Installed Libraries: KDE bindings for various programming languages

Installed Directories: Subdirectories of /usr/lib and $KDE_PREFIX/share

Kdeaccessibility-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdeaccessibility

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeaccessibility-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeaccessibility-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a8f51420c214bbf36efa54c99e24fdd9
Download size: 7.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 52 MB
Estimated build time: 2.6 SBU

Kdeaccessibility Dependencies

Required

Optional

A text-to-speech synthesis program such as FreeTTS-1.2.1 or Festival is required by kmouth to render speech.

Installation of Kdeaccessibility

Install kdeaccessibility with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: kmag, kmousetool, and kmouth

Installed Libraries: kdeaccessability support libraries

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

kmag	is a screen magnifier for KDE.
kmousetool	is a utility which clicks the mouse whenever the mouse cursor pauses briefly.
kmouth	is an application that enables persons that cannot speak to let their computers speak.

Kdetoys-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdetoys

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdetoys-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdetoys-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8c9ad215fe076942bc9195eca5a9175f
Download size: 3.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 21.6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Kdetoys Dependencies

Required

Installation of Kdetoys

Install kdetoys with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: amor, kmoon, kodo, kteatime, ktux, kweather, and kworldclock

Installed Libraries: kdetoys support libraries

Installed Directories: Support subdirectories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

amor	Amusing Misuse of Resources.
kmoon	is a Moon phase indicator.
kodo	measures your desktop mileage.
kteatime	times your tea brewing.
ktux	small Tux crossing stars.
kworldclock	shows which parts of the world are currently experiencing daylight, and which parts are currently in night. It also shows the current time in a range of cities around the world.

Kdegames-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdegames

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdegames-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdegames-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 6af3f45a1c959324c44d4b08bd552f16
Download size: 9.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 95 MB (additional 5.7 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 5.9 SBU (additional 0.4 SBU for API docs)

Kdegames Dependencies

Required

Optional

GraphViz and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of Kdegames

Install kdegames with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and GraphViz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: a compilation of various games

Installed Libraries: Support libraries for kdegames

Installed Directories: Subdirectories of $KDE_PREFIX/{include,share}

Kdeartwork-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdeartwork

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeartwork-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeartwork-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0f58245c2fa3c58dbe139da43037a203
Download size: 17.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 99 MB
Estimated build time: 1.5 SBU

Kdeartwork Dependencies

Required

Optional

XScreenSaver-4.21

Installation of Kdeartwork

Install kdeartwork with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Objects: additional themes, screensavers, sounds, backgrounds, and widget styles for KDE

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Kdeaddons-3.4.1

Introduction to Kdeaddons

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeaddons-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kdeaddons-3.4.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 596c3a7f4ef43e2f0bd760196a6b119b
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 40 MB
Estimated build time: 3.1 SBU

Kdeaddons Dependencies

Required

Optional

kdenetwork-3.4.1, kdemultimedia-3.4.1, kdepim-3.4.1, kdegames-3.4.1, Berkeley DB-4.3.28, XMMS-1.2.10, and SDL-1.2.8

Installation of Kdeaddons

Install kdeaddons with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: Miscellaneous KDE support programs

Installed Libraries: Additional plugins, libraries, and scripts for KDE applications

Installed Directories: None

Kde-i18n-3.4.1

Introduction to Kde-i18n

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kde-i18n/
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/kde-i18n/
Download MD5 sum: http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/3.4.1/src/MD5SUMS
Download size: 789 KB to 29 MB (average is about 3 MB)
Estimated disk space required: varies
Estimated build time: varies

Download Details

KDE has 52 separate internationalization packages in the form of:

kde-i18n-[xx]-3.4.1.tar.bz2

where the [xx] is a two to five letter code for the country covered. Download the package(s) you need from the directories above.

Kde-i18n Dependencies

Required

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1 and EsounD-0.2.35

Installation of Kde-i18n

Install kde-i18n with:

./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Kde-i18n

Configuration Information

To use translated programs, select Control Center —> Personalization —> Country & Language —> Language in your K Desktop Environment.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: Internationalization support for KDE

Installed Directories: None

GNOME

Introduction to GNOME

This chapter presents the instructions to install a complete GNOME-2.10.1 desktop environment and a limited GNOME 1.4 library environment that is sufficient to run GNOME 1.4 applications included in this book. The order of the pages follow the build order defined by the GNOME development team as published in previous versions of the release notes. Note that the development team did not publish a build order for the 2.10.1 release.

The installation of GNOME-2.10.1 is a large undertaking and one we would like to see you complete with the least amount of stress. One of the first goals in this installation is to protect your previously installed software, especially if you are testing GNOME on your machine. GNOME-2.10 packages utilize the --prefix=option passed to configure, so you will use that and an environment variable (GNOME_PREFIX) to add flexibility to the installation.

To install GNOME as your desktop of choice, it is recommended that you install using --prefix=/usr. If you are not sure that you are going to keep the GNOME installation, or you think you will update to the newest releases as they become available, you should install with --prefix=/opt/gnome-2.10. Setting the environment variable and the additional edits required by the second option are covered on the pre-installation page.

If you choose the second option, removal of GNOME-2.10.1 is as easy as removing the edits from the pre-installation page and issuing the following command:

rm -rf /opt/gnome-2.10

If your system was completely built per LFS and BLFS instructions, you have a very good chance of using GNOME-2.10.1 after your first installation. If you are a typical LFS user, you have made modifications to the instructions along the way knowing that you have to take those modifications into account on future installations. You should have no problems integrating GNOME-2.10.1 into your unique setup, but you will have to install almost 50 packages before you can run GNOME through any testing (assuming your window manager is preinstalled and tested). You should anticipate that you will be rebuilding GNOME at least once to make adjustments for your setup.

If you are building a GNOME 1.4 desktop environment, you would install only those libraries in the GNOME 1.4 chapter and any dependencies listed on those pages, whether labeled or not. GNOME packages without pages are simply installed with:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

These instructions are simplistic to facilitate removal of GNOME 1.4 from BLFS systems when it is no longer necessary. These instructions may be refined later to comply with BLFS standards for file locations, specifically /opt/gnome/etc to /etc and /opt/gnome/var to /var. You should consider using the GNOME 1.4 hint located at http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/hints/ if you have no interest in GNOME-2.10.1.

30. GNOME Core Packages
31. GNOME Additional Packages
32. GNOME 1.4 Libraries

Chapter 30. GNOME Core Packages

This section contains required elements of the GNOME environment to display a functional desktop.

Caution

The BLFS team recommends that you carefully evaluate the optional dependencies listed for each of the core GNOME packages. You may lose desired functionality if you don't install an optional dependency before the package that lists the dependency, even if you later install it.

Pre-installation Configuration

Set an environment variable to resolve the prefix destination.

If GNOME is your desktop of choice:

export GNOME_PREFIX=/usr

If you want to try-out GNOME, or install it in an easy to remove location:

export GNOME_PREFIX=/opt/gnome-2.10

Remember to execute ldconfig as the root user after installation of libraries to update the library cache.

The try-out group will also need to make all the following configuration changes:

Add to your system or personal profile:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/gnome-2.10/bin
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/gnome-2.10/lib/pkgconfig
export GNOME_LIBCONFIG_PATH=/usr/lib:/opt/gnome-2.10/lib

Add to your /etc/ld.so.conf:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF"
# Begin gnome addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/gnome-2.10/lib

# End gnome addition
EOF

Add to your /etc/man.conf:

cat >> /etc/man.conf << "EOF"
# Begin gnome addition to man.conf

MANPATH /opt/gnome-2.10/man

# End gnome addition to man.conf
EOF

ORBit2-2.12.2

Introduction to ORBit2

The ORBit2 package contains a high-performance CORBA Object Request Broker. This allows programs to send requests and receive replies from other programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/ORBit2/2.12/ORBit2-2.12.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/ORBit2/2.12/ORBit2-2.12.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7f963dcd0d84e6854460449383cc8c70
Download size: 678 KB
Estimated disk space required: 32 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU (additional 0.2 SBU to run the test suite)

ORBit2 Dependencies

Required

libIDL-0.8.5 and popt-1.7-5

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.3 and OpenSSL-0.9.7g

Installation of ORBit2

Install ORBit2 by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=$GNOME_PREFIX --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=$GNOME_PREFIX: This is the Base installation for GNOME-2 from which all future installations will receive their prefix parameter. Be sure that GNOME_PREFIX is set for this install or globally to your install directory as described in the introduction of this Chapter.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: ior-decode-2, linc-cleanup-sockets, orbit-idl-2, orbit2-config and typelib-dump

Installed Libraries: libname-server-2.a, libORBit-2.[so,a], libORBit-imodule-2.[so,a], libORBitCosNaming-2.[so,a], and Everything_module.[so,a]

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/orbit-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/orbit-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/ORBit2, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/orbit-2.0

Short Descriptions

libORBit-2.[so,a]

is the CORBA API.

Libbonobo-2.8.1

Introduction to Libbonobo

The libbonobo package contains libbonobo libraries. This is a component and compound document system for GNOME-2.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libbonobo/2.8/libbonobo-2.8.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libbonobo/2.8/libbonobo-2.8.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 54f863c20016cf8a2cf25056f6c7cda7
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 35 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU (additional 0.2 SBU to run the test suite)

Libbonobo Dependencies

Required

ORBit2-2.12.2, libxml2-2.6.20 and XML::Parser

Optional

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2) and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Libbonobo

Install libbonobo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`: Setting the prefix with this command instead of with GNOME_PREFIX will ensure that the prefix is consistent with the installation environment.

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--enable-gtk-doc: This switch rebuilds the documentation during the make command.

Installed Programs: activation-client, bonobo-slay, echo-client-2, bonobo-activation-run-query, bonobo-activation-server, and bonobo-activation-sysconf

Installed Libraries: libbonobo-2.[so,a], libbonobo-activation.[so,a], ORBit-2 bonobo module, bonobo servers, and libmoniker_std_2.[so,a] bonobo library

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/bonobo-activation-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libbonobo-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/bonobo[,2.0], $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/[bonobo-activation,libbonobo], and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/bonobo-[,activation-]2.0

Short Descriptions

libbonobo-2.[so,a]

are a set of language and system independent CORBA interfaces for creating reusable components and compound documents.

GConf-2.10.0

Introduction to GConf

The GConf package contains a configuration database system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/GConf/2.10/GConf-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/GConf/2.10/GConf-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a7cd37be4e317195a6668a086fc72033
Download size: 1.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 26 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

GConf Dependencies

Required

ORBit2-2.12.2 and libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

GTK+-2.6.7, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of GConf

Install GConf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts GNOMEGConf-2 configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc. This installation controls all future installations of schemas. If you change the location (which includes eliminating this parameter), it must be consistent for every subsequent GNOMEGConf-2 package installation.

Installed Programs: gconf-merge-tree, gconf-sanity-check-2, gconfd-2, and gconftool-2

Installed Library: libgconf-2.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gconf, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/GConf, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gconf, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/sgml/gconf

Short Descriptions

libgconf-2.[so,a]

provide the functions necessary to maintain the configuration database.

Desktop-file-utils-0.10

The desktop-file-utils-0.10 package is located in Chapter 10 – General Utilities, however it is now required by GNOME-2 starting with version 2.8. desktop-file-utils is not a direct dependency of any GNOME-2 package, therefore the package is mentioned within the GNOME-2 Core Packages chapter to ensure it is installed.

GNOME MIME Data-2.4.2

Introduction to GNOME MIME Data

The GNOME MIME Data package contains the base set of file types and applications for GNOME-2.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-mime-data/2.4/gnome-mime-data-2.4.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-mime-data/2.4/gnome-mime-data-2.4.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 37242776b08625fa10c73c18b790e552
Download size: 849 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GNOME MIME Data Dependencies

Required

XML::Parser

Installation of GNOME MIME Data

Note

The instructions below are based on installing the package into a GNOME-2 environment. If, for whatever reason, you're installing this package without having ORBit2 and the core GNOME-2 libraries installed, you'll need to modify the --prefix= parameter on the configure script to point to your desired installation path (e.g., --prefix=/usr).

Install GNOME MIME Data by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D man/gnome-vfs-mime.5 \
    $GNOME_PREFIX/man/man5/gnome-vfs-mime.5

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/application-registry and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/mime-info

Short Descriptions

`application-registry`	contains the application mime database.
`mime-info`	contains the mime description database.

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Virtual File System

The GNOME Virtual File System package contains virtual file system libraries. This is used as one of the foundations of the Nautilus file manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-vfs/2.10/gnome-vfs-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-vfs/2.10/gnome-vfs-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 88b520e5de748a310a2aef62fc095c8b
Download size: 1.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 49 MB
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required patch if HAL-0.5.0 is installed: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gnome-vfs-2.10.1-hal_0.5.0-1.patch

GNOME Virtual File System Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33, GConf-2.10.0, libbonobo-2.8.1, GNOME MIME Data-2.4.2 and shared-mime-info-0.16

Optional

Samba-3.0.14a, CDParanoia-III-9.8, FAM-2.7.0, GTK-Doc-1.3, OpenSSH-4.1p1, OpenSSL-0.9.7g or GnuTLS, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, OpenAFS, Howl and HAL

Installation of GNOME Virtual File System

Install GNOME Virtual File System by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gnome-vfs-2.10.1-hal_0.5.0-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

rmdir `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/doc: Use this command if $GNOME_PREFIX is anything other than /usr as the directory is unneeded and unpopulated.

Installed Programs: gnomevfs-cat, gnomevfs-copy, gnomevfs-info, gnomevfs-ls, gnomevfs-mkdir, gnomevfs-mv, gnomevfs-rm, and gnome-vfs-daemon

Installed Libraries: libgnomevfs-2.[so,a] and modules

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/schemas, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/[desktop,schemas,system], /etc/gnome/gnome-vfs-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-vfs-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-vfs-module-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-vfs-2.0, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gnome-vfs-2.0

Libgnome-2.10.0

Introduction to Libgnome

The libgnome package contains the libgnome library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnome/2.10/libgnome-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnome/2.10/libgnome-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f8e1225d96126f5139232821a6723d15
Download size: 871 KB
Estimated disk space required: 18 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Libgnome Dependencies

Required

Optional

Installation of Libgnome

Install libgnome by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch sets LIBGNOME_LOCALSTATEDIR to /var/lib instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var to synchronize with the GNOME Games installation and properly record high scores in /var/lib/games.

Installed Program: gnome-open

Installed Libraries: libgnome-2.[so,a] and the libmoniker_extra_2.[so,a] bonobo library

Installed Directories: several configuration directories under the /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/ hierarchy, /etc/gnome/sound, GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnome-2.0, and GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libgnome

Short Descriptions

libgnome-2.[so,a]

are the non-GUI portion of the GNOME libraries.

Libgnomecanvas-2.10.0

Introduction to Libgnomecanvas

The libgnomecanvas package contains the GNOME canvas library. It is an engine for structured graphics and one of the essential GNOME libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomecanvas/2.10/libgnomecanvas-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomecanvas/2.10/libgnomecanvas-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 88aac06c8dfd24671db3fe3bf881b5fc
Download size: 575 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

Libgnomecanvas Dependencies

Required

libglade-2.5.1 and libart_lgpl-2.3.17

Optional

Installation of Libgnomecanvas

Note

Install libgnomecanvas by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgnomecanvas-2.[so,a] and the libcanvas.[so,a] glade library

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnomecanvas-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/libglade, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libgnomecanvas

Libbonoboui-2.8.1

Introduction to Libbonoboui

The libbonoboui package contains libbonoboui libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libbonoboui/2.8/libbonoboui-2.8.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libbonoboui/2.8/libbonoboui-2.8.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b23daafa8344a88696d497f20285ef55
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 28 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Libbonoboui Dependencies

Required

libgnome-2.10.0 and libgnomecanvas-2.10.0

Optional

Installation of Libbonoboui

Install libbonoboui by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: bonobo-browser and test-moniker

Installed Libraries: libbonoboui-2.[so,a] and libbonobo.[so,a] glade library

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libbonoboui-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/applications, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libbonoboui, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-2.0

Short Descriptions

libbonoboui-2.[so,a]

are the GUI portion of the Bonobo libraries.

GNOME Icon Theme-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Icon Theme

The GNOME Icon Theme package contains an assortment of scalable and non-scalable icons of different sizes and themes.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-icon-theme/2.10/gnome-icon-theme-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-icon-theme/2.10/gnome-icon-theme-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 680a57ed3cecb9a16824570f7002879e
Download size: 2.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 28 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Icon Theme Dependencies

Required

hicolor-icon-theme-0.8 and XML::Parser

Installation of GNOME Icon Theme

Install GNOME Icon Theme by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/icons/gnome

Installed Icons: Several icons under the /usr/share/icons/gnome and /usr/share/icons/hicolor hierarchies.

Gnome-keyring-0.4.2

Introduction to Gnome-keyring

The gnome-keyring package contains a daemon that keeps passwords and other secrets for users.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-keyring/0.4/gnome-keyring-0.4.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-keyring/0.4/gnome-keyring-0.4.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 220930f6685780089cc5c769dd4ad561
Download size: 369 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Gnome-keyring Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7

Installation of Gnome-keyring

Note

Install gnome-keyring by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Programs: gnome-keyring-ask and gnome-keyring-daemon

Installed Library: libgnome-keyring.so

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-keyring-1

Short Descriptions

gnome-keyring-daemon	is a session daemon that keeps passwords for users.
`libgnome-keyring.so`	let other applications utilize gnome-keyring-daemon.

Libgnomeui-2.10.0

Introduction to Libgnomeui

The libgnomeui package contains libgnomeui libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomeui/2.10/libgnomeui-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomeui/2.10/libgnomeui-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e17c0d97e5f240513ac2d36268d696ed
Download size: 1.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 37 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Libgnomeui Dependencies

Required

libbonoboui-2.8.1 and gnome-keyring-0.4.2

Optional

libjpeg-6b and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Libgnomeui

Install libgnomeui by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Configuring Libgnomeui

Configuration Information

Some applications cannot properly discover the libglade interface library installed by libgnomeui. Get around this problem by initializing an environment variable which identifies the location of the library. Add the following line to the system-wide /etc/profile file, or to individual user's ~/.profile or ~/.bashrc files:

export LIBGLADE_MODULE_PATH=$GNOME_PREFIX/lib/libglade/2.0

Installed Program: gnome_segv2

Installed Libraries: libgnomeui-2[so,a], libgnome[so,a] glade library, and libgnome-vfs[so,a] GTK+ library.

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnomeui-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gtk-2.0/2.4.0/filesystems, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libgnomeui

Short Descriptions

libgnomeui-2.[so,a]

are the GUI portion of the GNOME libraries.

GTK Engines-2.6.3

Introduction to GTK Engines

The GTK Engines package contains eight themes/engines and two additional engines for GTK2.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtk-engines/2.6/gtk-engines-2.6.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtk-engines/2.6/gtk-engines-2.6.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ba5975f8ab390fa43fc0bf94f4a3b023
Download size: 469 KB
Estimated disk space required: 13 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

GTK Engines Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7

Installation of GTK Engines

Install GTK Engines by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: GTK-2 engines libraries

Installed Directories: /usr/lib/gtk-2.0/engines and /usr/share/themes/[theme name]

Installed Themes: Crux, Clearlooks, Industrial, LighthouseBlue, Metal, Mist, Redmond, and ThinIce

Short Descriptions

engines libraries

are manager systems for specific themes.

GNOME Themes-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Themes

The GNOME Themes package contains several more theme sets.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-themes/2.10/gnome-themes-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-themes/2.10/gnome-themes-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f365c73ccfbe35640e17fe8d877273fe
Download size: 2.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Themes Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33 and GTK Engines-2.6.3

Installation of GNOME Themes

Install GNOME Themes by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: Several directories under /usr/share/[themes,icons]

Installed Themes: Several themes under the /usr/share/themes hierarchy and icons under the /usr/share/icons hierarchy

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Introduction to ScrollKeeper

The ScrollKeeper package contains a cataloging system for documentation. This is useful for managing documentation metadata and providing an API to help browsers find, sort and search the document catalog.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/scrollkeeper/0.3/scrollkeeper-0.3.14.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/scrollkeeper/0.3/scrollkeeper-0.3.14.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b175e582a6cec3e50a9de73a5bb7455a
Download size: 546 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ScrollKeeper Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33, libxslt-1.1.14 and DocBook XML DTD-4.4

Installation of ScrollKeeper

Install ScrollKeeper by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc \
    --localstatedir=/var --disable-static \
    --with-omfdirs=/usr/share/omf:/opt/gnome/share/omf:\
/opt/kde-3.4.1/share/omf:/opt/gnome-2.10/share/omf &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch puts the configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

--localstatedir=/var: This switch puts ScrollKeeper's database directory in /var/lib/scrollkeeper.

--disable-static: This switch prevents the static library from being built.

--with-omfdirs=...: This switch defines the locations of OMF files for ScrollKeeper. This information is stored in /etc/scrollkeeper.conf and can be updated manually, if necessary.

Configuring ScrollKeeper

Config Files

/etc/scrollkeeper.conf

Configuration Information

The configuration file sets the OMF_DIR variable to the location of all of the omf directories in the system. This was set in the configure command so no further action is needed until another OMF directory is created.

Installed Programs: scrollkeeper-config, scrollkeeper-extract, scrollkeeper-gen-seriesid, scrollkeeper-get-cl, scrollkeeper-get-content-list, scrollkeeper-get-extended-content-list, scrollkeeper-get-index-from-docpath, scrollkeeper-get-toc-from-docpath, scrollkeeper-get-toc-from-id, scrollkeeper-install, scrollkeeper-preinstall, scrollkeeper-rebuilddb, scrollkeeper-uninstall, and scrollkeeper-update

Installed Library: libscrollkeeper.so

Installed Directories: /usr/share/doc/scrollkeeper-0.3.14, /usr/share/omf/scrollkeeper, /usr/share/scrollkeeper, /usr/share/xml/scrollkeeper, and /var/lib/scrollkeeper

Short Descriptions

ScrollKeeper utility programs	The ScrollKeeper utility programs and scripts listed above are for performing installation, building, getting and updating table of contents files.
`libscrollkeeper.so`	provides the API necessary for help browsers to interact with documentation written to utilize ScrollKeeper.

GNOME Desktop-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Desktop

The GNOME Desktop package contains the gnome-about program, the libgnome-desktop-2 library and GNOME's core graphics files and icons.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-desktop/2.10/gnome-desktop-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-desktop/2.10/gnome-desktop-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 5d6d21e4b5d66975c9c2c04add7da6e2
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Desktop Dependencies

Required

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1

Installation of GNOME Desktop

Install GNOME Desktop by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Program: gnome-about

Installed Library: libgnome-desktop-2.[so,a]

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-desktop-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-about, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf

Short Descriptions

gnome-about	produces the about screen.
`libgnome-desktop-2.[so,a]`	contains APIs being tested for inclusion in libgnome or libgnomeui.

Gnome-backgrounds-2.10.1

Introduction to Gnome-backgrounds

The gnome-backgrounds package contains a set of backgrounds used in the GNOME desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-backgrounds/2.10/gnome-backgrounds-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-backgrounds/2.10/gnome-backgrounds-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2a4ec2862c6a1a2bf3ad330c830edae4
Download size: 2.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: less then 0.1 SBU

Gnome-backgrounds Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33

Installation of Gnome-backgrounds

Note

Install gnome-backgrounds by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/backgrounds and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-background-properties

Short Descriptions

GNOME backgrounds

are backgrounds for the GNOME desktop.

Gnome-menus-2.10.1

Introduction to Gnome-menus

The gnome-menus package contains an implementation of the draft “Desktop Menu Specification” from freedesktop.org (http://www.freedesktop.org/Standards/menu-spec). Also contained are the GNOME menu layout configuration files, .directory files and a menu related utility program.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-menus/2.10/gnome-menus-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-menus/2.10/gnome-menus-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 83d9695a35ed2215620e8773ee918b8a
Download size: 339 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Gnome-menus Dependencies

Required

Installation of Gnome-menus

Install gnome-menus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Gnome-menus

Configuration Information

So that GNOME can find the desktop configuration files, ensure you set the XDG_CONFIG_DIRS environment variable in the system profile, or in individual user's profiles as shown below:

XDG_CONFIG_DIRS=/etc/gnome/xdg

Installed Program: gnome-menu-spec-test

Installed Library: libgnome-menu.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/xdg, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-menus and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/desktop-directories

Short Descriptions

gnome-menu-spec-test	is used to test GNOME's implementation of the Desktop Menu Specification.
`libgnome-menu.[so,a]`	contains functions required to support GNOME's implementation of the Desktop Menu Specification.

GNOME Panel-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Panel

The GNOME Panel package contains hooks to the menu sub-system and the applet sub-system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-panel/2.10/gnome-panel-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-panel/2.10/gnome-panel-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a2719f5c79a9e48bca086f08a77a6889
Download size: 2.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 55 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

GNOME Panel Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.10.1, libwnck-2.10.0 and gnome-menus-2.10.1

Optional

Installation of GNOME Panel

Install GNOME Panel by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 644 `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/gnome/help/\
{fish-applet-2,window-list,workspace-switcher}/C/*.xml

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: clock-applet, fish-applet-2, gnome-desktop-item-edit, gnome-panel, gnome-desktop-item-edit, notification-area-applet, and wnck-applet

Installed Libraries: libpanel-applet-2.[so,a] and bonobo servers

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/[,schemas]/apps, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/panel-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/gnome-panel-2.0, some help directories under the $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help hierarchy, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/icons, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/panel, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/panel-applet, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-panel

Short Descriptions

libpanel-applet-2.[so,a]

allow development of small applications (applets) which may be embedded in the panel.

GNOME Session-2.10.0

Introduction to GNOME Session

The GNOME Session package contains the GNOME session manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-session/2.10/gnome-session-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-session/2.10/gnome-session-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: cbeb2db49dac11bf8088e6b025265fff
Download size: 796 KB
Estimated disk space required: 11 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Session Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0

Optional

Installation of GNOME Session

Install GNOME Session by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome  &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: gnome-session, gnome-session-properties, gnome-session-remove, gnome-session-save, gnome-smproxy, and gnome-wm

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-session, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-session, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/splash

Short Descriptions

gnome-session	starts up the GNOME desktop.
gnome-session-*	session utilities includes a configuration program and other session management related utilities.
gnome-smproxy	handles basic session management for applications that do not support XSM.
gnome-wm	uses the `$WINDOW_MANAGER` environment variable to allow a user to define a window manager of choice. If no `$WINDOW_MANAGER` is defined, gnome-wm defaults to metacity as the default window manager.

VTE-0.11.13

Introduction to VTE

The VTE package contains a termcap file implementation for terminal emulators.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/vte/0.11/vte-0.11.13.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/vte/0.11/vte-0.11.13.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 5eb73c7de433fb6e53ac4378df9d23b5
Download size: 952 KB
Estimated disk space required: 24 MB
Estimated build time: 0.7 SBU

VTE Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7 and Python-2.4.1

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.3 and PyGTK

Installation of VTE

Install VTE by running the following commands:

sed -i -e 's%\\177:%&kh=\\EOH:@7=\\EOF:%g' termcaps/xterm &&
./configure --prefix=/usr --libexecdir=/usr/sbin --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ...: The Home and End keys are broken in the xterm termcap file. This sed command fixes them.

--libexecdir=/usr/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in /usr/sbin instead of /usr/libexec.

--disable-gtk-doc: This switch prevents the building of documentation. Remove it if you have GTK-Doc installed and wish to rebuild the documentation.

Installed Programs: gnome-pty-helper and vte

Installed Libraries: libvte.[so,a] and vtemodule.[so,a] Python module

Installed Directories: /usr/include/vte, /usr/lib/vte, /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/vte, and /usr/share/vte

Short Descriptions

gnome-pty-helper	is a setuid helper for opening ptys.
vte	is a test application for the VTE libraries.
`libvte.[so,a]`	provide the functions necessary to implement a “termcap file” for terminal emulators.

GNOME Terminal-2.10.0

Introduction to GNOME Terminal

The GNOME Terminal package contains the console. This is useful for executing programs from a command prompt.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-terminal/2.10/gnome-terminal-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-terminal/2.10/gnome-terminal-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 062744daca0c7f708b8c52f47b5db0d1
Download size: 2.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 33 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Terminal Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, VTE-0.11.13 and startup-notification-0.8

Installation of GNOME Terminal

Install GNOME Terminal by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Program: gnome-terminal

Installed Library: gnome-terminal.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-terminal, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-terminal, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-terminal, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-terminal, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-terminal

Short Descriptions

gnome-terminal

provides the command prompt in the GNOME environment.

LibGTop-2.10.1

Introduction to LibGTop

The LibGTop package contains the GNOME top libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgtop/2.10/libgtop-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgtop/2.10/libgtop-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b006baa3bd486005411a03534b45708e
Download size: 750 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

LibGTop Dependencies

Required

Optional

popt-1.7-5, GDBM-1.8.3 and X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2)

Installation of LibGTop

Note

Install LibGTop by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --infodir=$GNOME_PREFIX/share/info &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you passed --with-libgtop-examples to the configure script to build the example programs, install them using the following commands as the root user:

install -v -m755 -d $GNOME_PREFIX/share/libgtop-2.10.1/examples &&
install -v -m755 examples/.libs/* \
    $GNOME_PREFIX/share/libgtop-2.10.1/examples

Command Explanations

--infodir=$GNOME_PREFIX/share/info: This switch installs the info documentation in $GNOME_PREFIX/share/info instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/info.

--with-libgtop-examples: Adding this parameter to the configure script will build numerous example programs.

--with-libgtop-inodedb: Add this parameter to the configure script if you have GDBM installed and wish to build the inodedb programs.

Configuring LibGTop

Configuration Information

If $GNOME_PREFIX is anything other than /usr, update the INFOPATH environment variable by adding the following to your system-wide or personal profile:

export INFOPATH=/usr/share/info:$GNOME_PREFIX/share/info

Installed Programs: file_by_inode2, mkinodedb2

Installed Library: libgtop-2.0

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgtop-2.0 and and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/libgtop-2.10.1

Short Descriptions

libgtop-2.0.[so,a]

contains the functions that allow access to system performance data.

GAIL-1.8.3

Introduction to GAIL

The GAIL package contains the GNOME Accessibility Implementation Libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gail/1.8/gail-1.8.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gail/1.8/gail-1.8.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9e5db197dea8f92eec1f07984f12542a
Download size: 562 KB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

GAIL Dependencies

Required

libgnomecanvas-2.10.0

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1

Installation of GAIL

Note

Install GAIL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

GTK+ will look for the GAIL modules in /usr/lib even if $GNOME_PREFIX is NOT /usr. If $GNOME_PREFIX is anything other than /usr, create a symlink to $GNOME_PREFIX to satisfy this requirement:

ln -v -sf `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/lib/gtk-2.0/modules \
    /usr/lib/gtk-2.0

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgailutil.so and GAIL GTK+ modules

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gail-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gtk-2.0/modules, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gail-libgail-util

Short Descriptions

libgailutil.so

provides the functions that solve accessibility problems in a consistent manner across GNOME.

GNOME Applets-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Applets

The GNOME Applets package contains small applications which generally run in the background and display their output to the GNOME panel.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-applets/2.10/gnome-applets-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-applets/2.10/gnome-applets-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: da9cd75f77972c96eec9551d41878a7f
Download size: 6.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 108 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

GNOME Applets Dependencies

Required

GAIL-1.8.3, GNOME Panel-2.10.1 and libxklavier-2.0

Optional

LibGTop-2.10.1, gst-plugins-0.8.10, gucharmap-1.4.3, system-tools-backends-1.2.0, DocBook-utils-0.6.14 and libapm

Installation of GNOME Applets

Install GNOME Applets by running the following commands:

export PRE=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
./configure --prefix=$PRE --libexecdir=$PRE/sbin \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make tooldir=$PRE/lib/gnome-applets

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

Note

If you switch to the root user in a manner which causes the PRE environment variable to be unset, ensure you set it again before installing the package.

make tooldir=$PRE/lib/gnome-applets install &&
make -C man install-man &&
chmod -v 644 $PRE/share/gnome/help/\
{gtik2_applet2/C/*.xml,cpufreq-applet/{C,uk}/legal.xml}

Remove the variable from the unprivileged user's environment using the following command:

unset PRE

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=$PRE/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

tooldir=$PRE/lib/gnome-applets: This puts the mini-commander applet files in $PRE/lib/gnome-applets instead of $PRE/sbin/gnome-applets.

make -C man install-man: This installs the man-pages in $PRE/man.

Installed Programs: accessx-status-applet, battstat-applet-2, charpick_applet2, cpufreq-applet, cpufreq-selector, drivemount_applet2, geyes_applet2, gnome-keyboard-applet, gswitchit-plugins-capplet, gtik2_applet2, gweather-applet-2, mini_commander_applet, mixer_applet2, modem_applet, multiload-applet-2, null_applet, stickynotes_applet, and trashapplet

Installed Libraries: bonobo servers

Installed Directories: several config directories under the /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/ hierarchy, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgswitchit, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-applets, several help directories under the $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/ hierarchy, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-applets, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-applets, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/[accessx-status-applet,cpufreq-applet,stickynotes], and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/xmodmap

EEL-2.10.1

Introduction to EEL

The EEL package contains the Eazel Extensions Library. This is a collection of widgets and extensions to the GNOME platform.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/eel/2.10/eel-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/eel/2.10/eel-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2978fae17565dfb6e2d7ca129e738b9d
Download size: 672 KB
Estimated disk space required: 13 MB
Estimated build time: 0.4 SBU

EEL Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0 and GAIL-1.8.3

Installation of EEL

Install EEL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libeel-2.[so,a]

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/eel-2

Short Descriptions

libeel-2.[so,a]

is a collection of widgets developed by the Nautilus project.

Nautilus-2.10.1

Introduction to Nautilus

The Nautilus package contains the GNOME shell and file manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/nautilus/2.10/nautilus-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/nautilus/2.10/nautilus-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 976d725db15e901bc881dfb8c50145c1
Download size: 5.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 81 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Nautilus Dependencies

Required

EEL-2.10.1, libexif-0.6.12, librsvg-2.9.5 and GNOME Desktop-2.10.1

Optional

startup-notification-0.8, libgsf-1.12.0, libcroco-0.6.0, CDParanoia-III-9.8, libjpeg-6b, DocBook-utils-0.6.14 and medusa

Installation of Nautilus

Install Nautilus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d \
    `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/doc/nautilus-2.10.1 &&
install -v -m644 docs/*.{txt,dia,pdf,sxw,faq,html} \
    `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/doc/nautilus-2.10.1

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: nautilus, nautilus-connect-server, and nautilus-file-management-properties

Installed Libraries: libnautilus-extension.so, libnautilus-private.so, and Nautilus_shell.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/[apps,schemas/apps]/nautilus, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/nautilus, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/doc/nautilus-2.10.1, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/nautilus, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/nautilus

Short Descriptions

nautilus	is the GNOME file manager.
`libnautilus-*.so`	supply the functions needed by the file manager.

GNOME Doc Utils-0.2.0

Introduction to GNOME Doc Utils

The GNOME Doc Utils package is a collection of documentation utilities for the GNOME project. Notably, it contains utilities for building documentation and all auxiliary files in your source tree, and it contains the DocBook XSLT stylesheets that were once distributed with Yelp. Starting with GNOME 2.8, Yelp will require GNOME Doc Utils for the XSLT.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-doc-utils/0.2/gnome-doc-utils-0.2.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-doc-utils/0.2/gnome-doc-utils-0.2.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c72f2a974e4f05210d2736e92399c58e
Download size: 285 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Doc Utils Dependencies

Required

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Optional

pkg-config-0.19 and Python-2.4.1

Installation of GNOME Doc Utils

Note

Install GNOME Doc Utils by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gnome-doc-prepare and xml2po

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-doc-utils, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-doc-make, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-doc-xslt, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-doc-make, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-doc-xslt, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/xml/gnome and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/xml2po

Installed Stylesheets: Custom DocBook XSLT stylesheets used by Yelp

Short Descriptions

gnome-doc-prepare	prepares a package to use gnome-doc-utils.
xml2po	is a Python script used to translate XML documents.

Libgtkhtml-2.6.3

Introduction to Libgtkhtml

The libgtkhtml package contains the libgtkhtml-2 library. This library provides an API for rendering HTML.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgtkhtml/2.6/libgtkhtml-2.6.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgtkhtml/2.6/libgtkhtml-2.6.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c77789241d725e189ffc0391eda94361
Download size: 392 KB
Estimated disk space required: 31 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

Libgtkhtml Dependencies

Required

Optional

GAIL-1.8.3

Installation of Libgtkhtml

Install libgtkhtml by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
            --disable-accessibility &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-accessibility: This forces the package to build without linking to the libgailutil accessibility library. Remove this switch if you have GAIL installed.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgtkhtml-2.[so,a]

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gtkhtml-2.0

Short Descriptions

libgtkhtml-2.[so,a]

provides the functions necessary to render and/or edit HTML.

Yelp-2.6.5

Introduction to Yelp

The Yelp package contains the help browser. This is useful for viewing help files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/yelp/2.6/yelp-2.6.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/yelp/2.6/yelp-2.6.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9bd94af344ee6a0bf69aa6f9cbd6b7e9
Download size: 654 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Yelp Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, libgtkhtml-2.6.3 and ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Installation of Yelp

Install Yelp by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gnome-help and yelp

Installed Library: GNOME_Yelp.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/sgml/docbook/yelp and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/yelp

Short Descriptions

gnome-help	is a symbolic link to yelp.
yelp	is the GNOME help browser.

Control Center-2.10.1

Introduction to Control Center

The Control Center package contains the GNOME settings managers.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/control-center/2.10/control-center-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/control-center/2.10/control-center-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d95a5746aa349536dc0f59c61cdaf19f
Download size: 2.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 54 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

Control Center Dependencies

Required

libxklavier-2.0, gnome-menus-2.10.1, Metacity-2.10.1, Nautilus-2.10.1 and GNOME Icon Theme-2.10.1

Optional

ALSA-1.0.9, gst-plugins-0.8.10 and XScreenSaver-4.21

Installation of Control Center

Install Control Center by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts scrollkeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: gnome-accessibility-keyboard-properties, gnome-at-properties, gnome-background-properties, gnome-control-center, gnome-default-applications-properties, gnome-display-properties, gnome-font-properties, gnome-font-viewer, gnome-keybinding-properties, gnome-keyboard-properties, gnome-mouse-properties, gnome-network-preferences, gnome-settings-daemon, gnome-sound-properties, gnome-theme-applier, gnome-theme-manager, gnome-theme-thumbnailer, gnome-thumbnail-font, gnome-typing-monitor, gnome-ui-properties, and gnome-window-properties

Installed Libraries: libgnome-window-settings.[so,a], GNOME VFS and window manager settings library modules and Nautilus library module extensions

Installed Directories: several config directories under the /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/ hierarchy, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-window-settings-2.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/[nautilus,window-manager-settings], $GNOME_PREFIX/share/control-center-2.0, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/[cursor-fonts,vfolders]

GNOME2 User Docs-2.8.1

Introduction to GNOME2 User Docs

The GNOME2 User Docs package contains end user documents for GNOME.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome2-user-docs/2.8/gnome2-user-docs-2.8.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome2-user-docs/2.8/gnome2-user-docs-2.8.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 90bdd21ea3e3e794f641dd805216f275
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

GNOME2 User Docs Dependencies

Required

ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Optional

DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of GNOME2 User Docs

Note

Install GNOME2 User Docs by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 644 `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/gnome/help/\
{gnome-access-guide,system-admin-guide,user-guide}/C/*.xml

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/[gnome-access-guide,system-admin-guide,user-guide] and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/[gnome2-user-docs,user-guide]

Short Descriptions

OMF files

contain user documentation. These include introductions and help on the core packages.

Configuring the Core GNOME Packages

Create (or append to) an .xinitrc file to start GNOME:

echo "exec gnome-session" >> ~/.xinitrc

Ensure all libraries can be found with (as root):

ldconfig

Update the MIME-type application database (as root):

update-desktop-database

At this point you can bring up GNOME with startx.

Chapter 31. GNOME Additional Packages

These packages are modular and add desktop applications and assorted utilities to the GNOME environment. Feel free to install them on an as needed or as desired basis.

libgnomecups-0.2.0

Introduction to libgnomecups

The libgnomecups package contains a library used to wrap the CUPS API in a GLib fashion, so CUPS code can be cleanly integrated with GLib code.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomecups/0.2/libgnomecups-0.2.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomecups/0.2/libgnomecups-0.2.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 227cb2b119412b164bece23b287a130d
Download size: 310 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

libgnomecups Dependencies

Required

CUPS-1.1.23, GLib-2.6.4 and intltool-0.33

Installation of libgnomecups

Note

Install libgnomecups by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgnomecups-1.0.[so,a]

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnomecups-1

Short Descriptions

libgnomecups-1.0.[so,a]

libraries are used to wrap the CUPS API in a GLib type interface.

libgnomeprint-2.10.3

Introduction to libgnomeprint

The libgnomeprint package contains libgnomeprint libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomeprint/2.10/libgnomeprint-2.10.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomeprint/2.10/libgnomeprint-2.10.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9052dc919ad038b1a9e4d5301148588e
Download size: 727 KB
Estimated disk space required: 20 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

libgnomeprint Dependencies

Required

Pango-1.8.1, libart_lgpl-2.3.17, Fontconfig-2.3.2, popt-1.7-5, libxml2-2.6.20 and XML::Parser

Optional

CUPS-1.1.23 (and libgnomecups-0.2.0), GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of libgnomeprint

Note

Install libgnomeprint by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

The test suite requires Acroread-4 to be installed and passing --with-metadata-printer to the configure script. If the previous requirements are met and you wish to run the regression tests, change directories to the tests directory and issue: ./run-test.pl.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--disable-gtk-doc: This switch prevents rebuilding the documentation during the make command. Remove this parameter if you have GTK-Doc installed and wish to rebuild the documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgnomeprint-2-2.[so,a] and modules

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnomeprint-2.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/libgnomeprint, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libgnomeprint, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/libgnomeprint

Short Descriptions

libgnomeprint-2-2.[so,a]

implements the GNOME Printing Architecture.

libgnomeprintui-2.10.2

Introduction to libgnomeprintui

The libgnomeprintui package contains the libgnomeprintui library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomeprintui/2.10/libgnomeprintui-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libgnomeprintui/2.10/libgnomeprintui-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 01fce7918f4e106e00ee8b5447783e4c
Download size: 626 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

libgnomeprintui Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7, libgnomeprint-2.10.3, GNOME Icon Theme-2.10.1 and libgnomecanvas-2.10.0

Optional

Installation of libgnomeprintui

Note

Install libgnomeprintui by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgnomeprintui-2-2.[so,a]

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgnomeprintui-2.2 and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libgnomeprintui

Short Descriptions

libgnomeprintui-2-2.[so,a]

is the GUI portion of the GNOME Printing Architecture implementation.

GAL-2.4.2

Introduction to GAL

The GAL package contains library functions that came from Evolution and Gnumeric. GAL is short for GNOME Application Libs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gal/2.4/gal-2.4.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gal/2.4/gal-2.4.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 70e07fde659f0553ba56caeae4f51908
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 63 MB
Estimated build time: 1.5 SBU

GAL Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0 and libgnomeprintui-2.10.2

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1 and libgnomeprintui-2.10.2

Installation of GAL

In order to build the documentation using GTK-Doc, issue the following commands to fix a build problem:

mv docs/gal-decl.txt docs/gal-2.4-decl.txt &&
mv docs/gal-sections.txt docs/gal-2.4-sections.txt &&
sed -i -e "s/gal-decl/gal-2.4-decl/" \
       -e "s/gal-sections/gal-2.4-sections/" docs/Makefile.in

Install GAL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgal-a11y-2.4.[so,a] and libgal-2.4.[so,a]

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gal-2.4, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gal-2.4, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gal-2.4

GtkHTML-3.6.2

Introduction to GtkHTML

The GtkHTML package contains a lightweight HTML rendering/printing/editing engine. This is an Evolution specific application at this time.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtkhtml/3.6/gtkhtml-3.6.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/gtkhtml/3.6/gtkhtml-3.6.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 37465fde0f1e1d7ba2284c5a4fd06fe7
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 54 MB
Estimated build time: 1.2 SBU

GtkHTML Dependencies

Required

GAL-2.4.2

Optional

libsoup-2.2.3 and GAIL-1.8.3

Installation of GtkHTML

Install GtkHTML by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgtkhtml-3.6.[so,a], libgnome-gtkhtml-editor-3.6[so,a], and GNOME_GtkHTML_Editor-3.6.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libgtkhtml-3.6, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gtkhtml, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtkhtml-3.6

Short Descriptions

libgtkhtml-3.6.[so,a]

provide the functions to render HTML within applications.

Evolution Data Server-1.2.2

Introduction to Evolution Data Server

The Evolution Data Server package provides a unified backend for programs that work with contacts, tasks, and calendar information. It was originally developed for Evolution (hence the name), but is now used by other packages as well.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evolution-data-server/1.2/evolution-data-server-1.2.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/evolution-data-server/1.2/evolution-data-server-1.2.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2b15cba799e4594926472dca3e1747bb
Download size: 7.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 146 MB
Estimated build time: 2.9 SBU

Evolution Data Server Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0 and libsoup-2.2.3

Optional

OpenLDAP-2.2.24, Mozilla-1.7.8 (nsp4 libs for SSL and S/MIME support), Sendmail-8.13.4, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, krb4, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Evolution Data Server

Install Evolution Data Server by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Note

To enable many of the optional dependencies, review the information from ./configure --help for the necessary parameters you must pass to the configure script.

Installed Programs: camel-index-control-1.2, camel-lock-helper-1.2, and evolution-data-server-1.2

Installed Libraries: libcamel-1.2.so, libcamel-provider-1.2.so, libebook-1.2.so, libecal-1.2.so, libedata-book-1.2.so, libedata-cal-1.2.so, libedataserver-1.2.so, libedataserverui-1.2.so, libegroupwise-1.2.so, and numerous provider and extension modules.

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/evolution-data-server-1.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/evolution-data-server-1.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/evolution-data-server-1.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/evolution-data-server-1.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/evolution-data-server-1.2, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/libe*

Short Descriptions

evolution-data-server-1.2	is the Evolution database backend server.
`libe*.so`	libraries are client, backend and utility libraries for the Evolution address books, calendar and data servers.

bug-buddy-2.10.0

Introduction to bug-buddy

The bug-buddy package contains a graphical bug reporting tool. This can extract debugging information from a core file or crashed application.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/bug-buddy/2.10/bug-buddy-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/bug-buddy/2.10/bug-buddy-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c821a933f3d7be64071c7bfcb07ee1ac
Download size: 718 KB
Estimated disk space required: 10 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

bug-buddy Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.10.1 and gnome-menus-2.10.1

Installation of bug-buddy

Install bug-buddy by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts GConf schema files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Program: bug-buddy

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/bug-buddy, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/bug-buddy, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/bug-buddy, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/bug-buddy and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/bug-buddy

Short Descriptions

bug-buddy

is a graphical bug reporting system.

gtksourceview-1.2.0

Introduction to gtksourceview

The gtksourceview package contains libgtksourceview libraries. This is useful for extending the GTK text functions to include syntax highlighting.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtksourceview/1.2/gtksourceview-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtksourceview/1.2/gtksourceview-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0a9f68a3faf982599b64276487c37c6d
Download size: 882 KB
Estimated disk space required: 12 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gtksourceview Dependencies

Required

Optional

Installation of gtksourceview

Install gtksourceview by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite, however, after the package is installed you can change to the tests directory in the source tree and issue ./test-widget to test the functionality of the libgtksourceview-1.0 library.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgtksourceview-1.0.[so,a]

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gtksourceview-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gtksourceview, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtksourceview-1.0

Short Descriptions

libgtksourceview-1.0.[so,a]

contains function extensions for the GtkTextView widget.

gedit-2.10.2

Introduction to gedit

The gedit package contains a lightweight UTF-8 text editor for the GNOME desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gedit/2.10/gedit-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gedit/2.10/gedit-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e3cf99b9233377583a69c4ad235e8494
Download size: 3.1 MB
Estimated disk space required: 56 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

gedit Dependencies

Required

EEL-2.10.1 and gtksourceview-1.2.0

Optional

Aspell-0.60.3

Installation of gedit

Install gedit by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: gedit and gnome-text-editor

Installed Libraries: GNOME_Gedit.server bonobo server and several gedit plugin modules

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gedit-2, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gedit-2, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gedit-2.10, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gedit-2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gedit-2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gedit, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gedit

Short Descriptions

gedit	is a lightweight text editor.
gnome-text-editor	is a symlink to gedit.

EOG-2.10.0

Introduction to EOG

The EOG package contains Eye of GNOME. This is useful for viewing and cataloging image files.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/eog/2.10/eog-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/eog/2.10/eog-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 45c345a0aed600c7ab17c5af750b7c8c
Download size: 903 KB
Estimated disk space required: 14 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

EOG Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0

Optional

libjpeg-6b and libexif-0.6.12

Installation of EOG

Install EOG by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Program: eog

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/eog, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/eog, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/eog, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/eog, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/eog and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/eog

Short Descriptions

eog

is a fast and functional image viewer as well as an image cataloging program.

GGV-2.8.4

Introduction to GGV

The GGV package contains a PostScript file viewer.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/ggv/2.8/ggv-2.8.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/ggv/2.8/ggv-2.8.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7a465dcc795ebab69daa0ed658d2e978
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 17 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GGV Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0 and ESP Ghostscript-7.07.1 or AFPL Ghostscript-8.51

Optional

CUPS-1.1.23 or LPRng-3.8.28

Installation of GGV

Install GGV by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Programs: ggv and ggv-postscript-viewer

Installed Libraries: GNOME_GGV.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/ggv, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/ggv, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/ggv, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/ggv, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/ggv

Short Descriptions

ggv

is a GNOME 2 based PostScript viewer.

File Roller-2.10.3

Introduction to File Roller

File Roller is an archive manager for GNOME with support for tar, bzip2, gzip, zip, jar, compress, lzop and many other archive formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/file-roller/2.10/file-roller-2.10.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/file-roller/2.10/file-roller-2.10.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dd152e2cb1bfe5c46930ae74c73e4f8e
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 20 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

File Roller Dependencies

Required

Optional

Nautilus-2.10.1

Installation of File Roller

Install File Roller by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Program: file-roller

Installed Libraries: bonobo component and nautilus extension

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/file-roller, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/file-roller, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/file-roller, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/file-roller, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/file-roller

Short Descriptions

file-roller

is an archiver for GNOME.

GConf Editor-2.10.0

Introduction to GConf Editor

The GConf Editor package contains a GUI editor for the GConf configuration database.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gconf-editor/2.10/gconf-editor-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gconf-editor/2.10/gconf-editor-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 651a18f7eb5af91761521aa4f04ccc07
Download size: 543 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

GConf Editor Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0

Installation of GConf Editor

Install GConf Editor by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts GConf schema files in /etc/gnome/gconf/schemas instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc/gconf/schemas.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Program: gconf-editor

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gconf-editor, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gconf-editor, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gconf-editor, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gconf-editor, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/gconf-editor

Short Descriptions

gconf-editor

allows direct modification of the GConf configuration database.

GNOME Utilities-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Utilities

The GNOME Utilities package contains a collection of small applications designed to make your life a little easier.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-utils/2.10/gnome-utils-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-utils/2.10/gnome-utils-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 78c0afdc112757b13d203fe1ad9c04ad
Download size: 2.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 27 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GNOME Utilities Dependencies

Required

GNOME Panel-2.10.1 and libgnomeprintui-2.10.2

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80 (requires consolehelper) and HAL

Installation of GNOME Utilities

Install GNOME Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--with-pam-prefix=/etc/pam.d: This switch puts PAM files in /etc/pam.d instead of /etc/gnome.

--disable-hal: Use this switch if you have HAL version >0.4.7 installed, as the build will fail with higher versions due to the D-BUS/HAL ABI changes.

Installed Programs: gdict-applet, gfloppy, gnome-dictionary, gnome-panel-screenshot, gnome-screenshot, gnome-search-tool, and gnome-system-log

Installed Libraries: GNOME_GDictApplet.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gfloppy, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-dictionary, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-screenshot, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-search-tool, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-system-log, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gfloppy, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-dictionary, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-screenshot, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-search-tool, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-system-log, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-screenshot, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-utils, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gfloppy, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-dictionary, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-search-tool, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-system-log, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-utils

Short Descriptions

gfloppy	formats floppy disks under Linux.
gnome-dictionary	allows you to look up definitions and spelling of words.
gnome-screenshot	is used to capture the contents of the current desktop as a graphics formatted file.
gnome-search-tool	allows you to search for files on your system using simple and advanced search options.
gnome-system-log	allows you to monitor and view system log files.

system-tools-backends-1.2.0

Introduction to system-tools-backends

The system-tools-backends are a set of cross-platform scripts for Linux and other Unix systems. The backends provide a standard XML interface for modifying the configuration regardless of the distribution being used.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/system-tools-backends/1.2/system-tools-backends-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/system-tools-backends/1.2/system-tools-backends-1.2.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 96b00eb0f800c1b5346be2f71d4dc3b2
Download size: 532 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

system-tools-backends Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33

Installation of system-tools-backends

Note

Install system-tools-backends by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/setup-tool-backends

Short Descriptions

System tools backend scripts

are configuration files, Perl and shell scripts used to perform setup of various desktop frontend processes and services.

GNOME System Monitor-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME System Monitor

The GNOME System Monitor package contains gnome-system-monitor, GNOME's replacement for gtop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-system-monitor/2.10/gnome-system-monitor-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-system-monitor/2.10/gnome-system-monitor-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 22acb1699193f8bd2ced656d44f57377
Download size: 766 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

GNOME System Monitor Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, libwnck-2.10.0 and LibGTop-2.10.1

Installation of GNOME System Monitor

Install GNOME System Monitor by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

Installed Program: gnome-system-monitor

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/procman, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/procman, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-system-monitor, and, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-system-monitor

Short Descriptions

gnome-system-monitor

displays the process tree and hardware meters.

Nautilus CD Burner-2.10.1

Introduction to Nautilus CD Burner

The Nautilus CD Burner lets you write files to a CD burner easily with GNOME; by drag-and-dropping files using the GNOME file manager, Nautilus.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/nautilus-cd-burner/2.10/nautilus-cd-burner-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/nautilus-cd-burner/2.10/nautilus-cd-burner-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ce2b3bd588ca77190976e2487badc17d
Download size: 515 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Nautilus CD Burner Dependencies

Required

Nautilus-2.10.1 and Cdrtools-2.01

Optional

HAL

Installation of Nautilus CD Burner

Install Nautilus CD Burner by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--disable-hal: Use this switch if you have HAL version >0.4.7 installed, as the build will fail with higher versions due to the D-BUS/HAL ABI changes.

Installed Programs: mapping-daemon and nautilus-cd-burner

Installed Libraries: libnautilus-burn.so and gnome-vfs and nautilus modules

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/nautilus-cd-burner, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/nautilus-cd-burner, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/libnautilus-burn, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/nautilus-cd-burner

Short Descriptions

mapping-daemon	is the central daemon which keeps track of file mappings.
nautilus-cd-burner	is an extension to Nautilus that lets you burn CDs easily.

GNOME Media-2.10.2

Introduction to GNOME Media

The GNOME Media package contains GNOME's media applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-media/2.10/gnome-media-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-media/2.10/gnome-media-2.10.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3d73cd40cfa52c5eef882302f92c60d6
Download size: 3.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB
Estimated build time: 0.50 SBU

GNOME Media Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, Nautilus CD Burner-2.10.1, gst-plugins-0.8.10 and ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Optional

GAIL-1.8.3, MTA, DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of GNOME Media

Install GNOME Media by running the following commands:

sed -i -e \
"s/-lORBit-2 -lbonobo-2 -lgobject-2.0 -lglib-2.0/\$(CDDBSLAVE_LIBS)/" \
    cddb-slave2/Makefile.in &&
./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
gst-register

Command Explanations

sed -i -e ... cddb-slave2/Makefile.in: This command fixes a bug encountered if $GNOME_PREFIX is not set to /usr.

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: CDDBSlave2, cddb-slave2-properties, cddb-track-editor, gnome-audio-profiles-properties, gnome-cd, gnome-sound-recorder, gnome-volume-control, gstreamer-properties, and vumeter

Installed Libraries: libcddb-slave2.[so,a], libgnome-media-profiles.[so,a], libgnome-media-profiles.[so,a] libglade library, and GNOME_Media_CDDBSlave2.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/CDDB-Slave2, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-cd, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnome-sound-recorder, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/CDDB-Slave2, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-cd, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnome-sound-recorder, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/system/gstreamer/audio, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/system/gstreamer/audio, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/[cddb-slave2,gnome-media], $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-media, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-sound-recorder, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-cd, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-sound-recorder, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-volume-control, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/grecord, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gstreamer-properties, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gstreamer-properties, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-media, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/gnome-cd, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/gnome-media

Short Descriptions

gnome-cd	is GNOME's CD Player.
gnome-sound-recorder	is GNOME's recorder.
gnome-volume-control	is GNOME's mixer with volume applet.
gstreamer-properties	is a GUI front-end to GStreamer's audio/video input/output parameters.
vumeter	is a visual volume meter.

gnome-audio-2.0.0

Introduction to gnome-audio

The gnome-audio package contains a set of default sounds for the GNOME GUI desktop. Sound files for startup, shutdown and many GTK+ events are included. These sounds compliment the GNOME Media package.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-audio/2.0/gnome-audio-2.0.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-audio/2.0/gnome-audio-2.0.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: cd14b84af59fb2ec673527d32f4e379f
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 4 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of gnome-audio

Note

Install gnome-audio by running the following command as the root user:

make prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/sounds

GNOME Netstatus-2.10.0

Introduction to GNOME Netstatus

The GNOME Netstatus package contains a panel applet that monitors network interfaces. It provides indicators for incoming and outgoing data, packets received and transmitted, and information about the network interface such as IP information and Ethernet address.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-netstatus/2.10/gnome-netstatus-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-netstatus/2.10/gnome-netstatus-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b1a044cfbe3299e00d514d966d4766e8
Download size: 510 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

GNOME Netstatus Dependencies

Required

GNOME Panel-2.10.1

Installation of GNOME Netstatus

Install GNOME Netstatus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod 644 `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`\
/share/gnome/help/gnome-netstatus/C/*.xml

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Program: gnome-netstatus-applet

Installed Library: GNOME_NetstatusApplet_Factory.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/netstatus_applet, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/netstatus_applet, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-netstatus, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnome-netstatus, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-netstatus

Short Descriptions

gnome-netstatus-applet

displays information about a network interface on your panel.

gcalctool-5.5.42

Introduction to gcalctool

gcalctool is a powerful graphical calculator with financial, logical and scientific modes. It uses a multiple precision package to do its arithmetic to give a high degree of accuracy.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gcalctool/5.5/gcalctool-5.5.42.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gcalctool/5.5/gcalctool-5.5.42.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0f42e6e437f64c844b7b30e3255b02aa
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 16 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gcalctool Dependencies

Required

Installation of gcalctool

Install gcalctool by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gcalctool and gnome-calculator

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gcalctool, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gcalctool, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gcalctool, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gcalctool

Short Descriptions

gcalctool	is a desktop calculator for GNOME.
gnome-calculator	is a symlink to the gcalctool program.

GPdf-2.10.0

Introduction to GPdf

GPdf is a PDF viewer for GNOME. It is based on Xpdf and the GNOME Print Preview widget.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gpdf/2.10/gpdf-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gpdf/2.10/gpdf-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9278cd3b9d06e3b1d364452f0e512fa9
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

GPdf Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0 and libgnomeprintui-2.10.2

Optional

TeX-3.0 and libpaper

Installation of GPdf

Install GPdf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gpdf and gnome-pdf-viewer

Installed Library: GNOME_PDF.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gpdf, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gpdf, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gpdf, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gpdf, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gpdf, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/pixmaps/gpdf

Short Descriptions

gpdf

is a PDF viewer for GNOME.

gucharmap-1.4.3

Introduction to gucharmap

gucharmap is a Unicode character map and font viewer. It allows you to browse through all the available Unicode characters and categories for the installed fonts, and to examine their detailed properties. It is an easy way to find the character you might only know by its Unicode name or code point.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gucharmap/1.4/gucharmap-1.4.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gucharmap/1.4/gucharmap-1.4.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9003427becd6fae9b2df5ddf1a6c390b
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 25 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

gucharmap Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33 and GTK+-2.6.7

Optional

Installation of gucharmap

Note

Install gucharmap by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: charmap, gnome-character-map, and gucharmap

Installed Library: libgucharmap.so

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gucharmap, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gucharmap, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gucharmap

Short Descriptions

gucharmap

is a Unicode character map and font viewer.

Zenity-2.10.0

Introduction to Zenity

Zenity is a rewrite of gdialog, the GNOME port of dialog which allows you to display GTK+ dialog boxes from the command line and shell scripts.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/zenity/2.10/zenity-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/zenity/2.10/zenity-2.10.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 2e501bba72b6e7d4f951080b9e5f675b
Download size: 742 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Zenity Dependencies

Required

intltool-0.33, popt-1.7-5, libgnomecanvas-2.10.0 and ScrollKeeper-0.3.14

Installation of Zenity

Install Zenity by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gdialog and zenity

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/zenity, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/zenity, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/zenity

Short Descriptions

gdialog	is a Perl wrapper script which can be used with legacy scripts.
zenity	is a program that will display GTK+ dialogs, and return the user's input.

AT SPI-1.6.4

Introduction to AT SPI

The AT SPI package contains the Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface. This is useful for redirecting UI events to accessible applications and adaptive/assistive technologies.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/at-spi/1.6/at-spi-1.6.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/at-spi/1.6/at-spi-1.6.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: be8b3077e2fab51a427303f228dffc2e
Download size: 499 KB
Estimated disk space required: 15 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

AT SPI Dependencies

Required

GAIL-1.8.3 and libbonobo-2.8.1

Optional

Installation of AT SPI

Install AT SPI by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin &&
make

The test suite cannot be run until after the package is installed. To run the test suite after installation, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

Installed Program: at-spi-registryd

Installed Libraries: libspi.[so,a], libcspi.[so,a], libloginhelper.[so,a], the libatk-bridge.so GTK+ module, and ORBit-2.0 Accessibility modules

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/at-spi-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/at-spi-cspi and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/at-spi-1.0

Short Descriptions

at-spi-registryd

is the registry daemon that allows communication between the UI and assistance devices.

libgail-gnome-1.1.1

Introduction to libgail-gnome

The libgail-gnome package contains the GNOME Accessibility Implementation library additions which implement ATK interfaces for libbonoboui and libgnomeui widgets.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgail-gnome/1.1/libgail-gnome-1.1.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/gnome/sources/libgail-gnome/1.1/libgail-gnome-1.1.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 03f0bc21808484b5f64baffbad47ab0a
Download size: 209 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

libgail-gnome Dependencies

Required

GNOME Panel-2.10.1 and AT SPI-1.6.4

Installation of libgail-gnome

Install libgail-gnome by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libgail-gnome.so GTK+ module

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

libgail-gnome.so

library module is a GAIL addition which implements ATK interfaces for libbonoboui and libgnomeui widgets.

Java Access Bridge-1.4.5

Introduction to Java Access Bridge

The Java Access Bridge package contains Java components which connect the built-in accessibility support in Java Swing applications to the GNOME Accessibility framework, specifically the Assistive Technology Service Provider Interface (AT-SPI).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/java-access-bridge/1.4/java-access-bridge-1.4.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/java-access-bridge/1.4/java-access-bridge-1.4.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 55530a282c7b9d2634e72361d789378b
Download size: 120 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

Java Access Bridge Dependencies

Required

AT SPI-1.6.4 and JDK-1.5.0

Installation of Java Access Bridge

Install Java Access Bridge by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
cat `pkg-config --variable=prefix \
    ORBit-2.0`/share/jar/accessibility.properties \
    >> $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/accessibility.properties &&
ln -v -sf `pkg-config --variable=prefix \
    ORBit-2.0`/share/jar/gnome-java-bridge.jar \
    $JAVA_HOME/jre/lib/ext

Command Explanations

cat `pkg-config ...: This command appends to (or creates) the Java runtime accessibility.properties file required for Java Access Bridge.

ln -v -sf `pkg-config ...: This command creates a link from the access bridge jar file to the Java runtime library extensions directory.

Configuring Java Access Bridge

Config Files

~/.orbitrc

Configuration Information

Before running a Java program with the Java Access Bridge, you should ensure that your GNOME 2 installation enables CORBA traffic over IP from the ORBit2 ORB. Do this by adding the following line to ~/.orbitrc using the following command:

cat >> ~/.orbitrc << "EOF"
ORBIIOPIPv4=1

EOF

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: gnome-java-bridge.jar and JNav.jar

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/share/jar

Short Descriptions

gnome-java-bridge.jar

is a Java runtime environment extension that connects the built-in accessibility support in Java Swing applications to the GNOME Accessibility framework.

GNOME Speech-0.3.7

Introduction to GNOME Speech

The GNOME Speech package provides a simple general API for producing text-to-speech output. Multiple backends are supported by the GNOME Speech library, but currently only the Festival backend is built by default; the other backends require either Java or proprietary software.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-speech/0.3/gnome-speech-0.3.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-speech/0.3/gnome-speech-0.3.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0afa367c75288357fa3b8e274e72584d
Download size: 275 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

GNOME Speech Dependencies

Required

libbonobo-2.8.1

Optional

Java Access Bridge-1.4.5, FreeTTS-1.2.1, Festival, ViaVoice, Eloquence, DECTalk and Theta

Installation of GNOME Speech

Note

You must install at least one of the backend drivers for GNOME Speech to render speech through the audio hardware. Testing the installation of the backend driver to ensure it produces desired results before installing GNOME Speech is recommended.

Install GNOME Speech by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/gnome-speech.html \
    `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`\
/share/doc/gnome-speech-0.3.7/gnome-speech.html

Command Explanations

--with-jab-dir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/jar: Use this option if you have installed the Java Access Bridge package and wish to have GNOME Speech build in Java support.

Note: see the README and INSTALL files in the package source tree for the correct parameters to pass to configure to enable the desired backends.

Testing the Installation

You can test all the available backend drivers, voices and audio hardware using the test-speech command. Invoking test-speech produces a menu allowing you to select a backend driver and the desired voice, then prompts you (with on-screen prompts and text-to-speech audio) for additional information.

Installed Programs: festival-synthesis-driver, freetts-synthesis-driver and test-speech

Installed Library: libgnomespeech.[so,a]. Other drivers and libraries are also installed if you have enabled additional backends.

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-speech-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/doc/gnome-speech-0.3.7, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-speech and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/gnome-speech-1.0

Short Descriptions

test-speech	is used to test the various backend drivers and voices installed on the system.
`libgnomespeech.[so,a]`	provides the API for programs to convert text into speech.

GNOME Magnifier-0.12.1

Introduction to GNOME Magnifier

The GNOME Magnifier includes a screen magnifier, which allows you to zoom in on portions of the desktop. It is expressly designed for users with low vision who wish to use the GNOME desktop.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-mag/0.12/gnome-mag-0.12.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-mag/0.12/gnome-mag-0.12.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 8987cdd1034baeae4554ea50f82715aa
Download size: 332 KB
Estimated disk space required: 6 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

GNOME Magnifier Dependencies

Required

AT SPI-1.6.4

Optional (For XFree86 Only)

Xdamage (requires XExtensions* then FixesExt then Xfixes then DamageExt)

* The XExtensions package is included with the BLFS XFree86 installation, but the pkgconfig .pc file FixesExt looks for is not installed. Satisfy the requirement by installing an xextensions.pc file:

As the root user:

cat > /usr/X11R6/lib/pkgconfig/xextensions.pc << "EOF"
prefix=/usr/X11R6
exec_prefix=${prefix}
libdir=${exec_prefix}/lib
includedir=${prefix}/include

Name: XExtensions
Description: Sundry X extension headers
Version: 1.0.1
Cflags: -I${includedir}

EOF

Installation of GNOME Magnifier

Install GNOME Magnifier by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: magnifier

Installed Library: libgnome-mag.so

Installed Directories: $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnome-mag-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-mag and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/gnome-mag-1.0

Short Descriptions

magnifier

is a screen zooming utility.

Gnopernicus-0.10.9

Introduction to Gnopernicus

Gnopernicus enables users with limited vision, or no vision, to use the GNOME desktop and applications effectively. It provides a number of features, including magnification, focus tracking, braille output, automatic screen reading and more.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnopernicus/0.10/gnopernicus-0.10.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnopernicus/0.10/gnopernicus-0.10.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: dd36c9b729344153812918c03dd84b12
Download size: 2.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 38 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

Gnopernicus Dependencies

Required

libgail-gnome-1.1.1, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, GNOME Speech-0.3.7 and GNOME Magnifier-0.12.1

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.3 and BRLTTY

Installation of Gnopernicus

Install Gnopernicus by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib \
    --with-default-fonts-path=/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Type1 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin: This switch puts libexec files in $GNOME_PREFIX/sbin instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/libexec.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--with-default-fonts-path=/usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Type1: This switch installs Braille fonts into /usr/X11R6/lib/X11/fonts/Type1 instead of /usr/share/fonts/default/Type1.

Installed Programs: brlmonitor, gnopernicus, gnopernicus-mag-config and srcore

Installed Libraries: Gnopernicus support libraries

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnopernicus, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnopernicus, /etc/gnome/gnopernicus-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/gnopernicus-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/gnopernicus-1.0, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/{brlmonitor,gnopernicus}, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnopernicus and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnopernicus

Short Descriptions

brlmonitor	is a braille display simulator.
gnopernicus	is a GUI menu interface used to access and configure the various functionality parameters provided for users with limited vision.

GOK-1.0.4

Introduction to GOK

GOK is a dynamic onscreen keyboard. It features Direct Selection, Dwell Selection, Automatic Scanning and Inverse Scanning access methods and includes word completion.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gok/1.0/gok-1.0.4.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gok/1.0/gok-1.0.4.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 5fb60bcaf9868fef1edbb92ef62affcf
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 40 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

GOK Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, libwnck-2.10.0, AT SPI-1.6.4 and GNOME Speech-0.3.7

Optional

libgnomeui-2.10.0, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, Evolution Data Server-1.2.2, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, PWLib-1.8.4 (compiled with OpenLDAP support) and OpenH323-1.15.3

Installation of GOK

Install GOK by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 644 `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`\
/share/gnome/help/gok/C/legal.xml

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Configuring GOK

Configuration Information

It is recommended that you configure your input device as an “Extended” input device. Exact configuration methods depend on the type of hardware attached to your system. See the README file in the package source tree and GOK Help for information on how to configure your input device.

Installed Programs: gok and create-branching-keyboard

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gok, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gok, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gok, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gok, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/gok and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gok

Short Descriptions

gok

is a dynamic onscreen keyboard utility.

Epiphany-1.6.2

Introduction to Epiphany

Epiphany is a simple yet powerful GNOME web browser targeted at non-technical users. Its principles are simplicity and standards compliance.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/epiphany/1.6/epiphany-1.6.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/epiphany/1.6/epiphany-1.6.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3161495ac4af4a7435918a98896b05e9
Download size: 3.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 59 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Epiphany Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.10.1, and Mozilla-1.7.8 or Firefox-1.0.6 or Thunderbird-1.0.6

Optional

startup-notification-0.8, D-BUS and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Epiphany

Install Epiphany by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--with-mozilla=firefox or --with-mozilla=thunderbird: Use this option to use a system installed version of Firefox or Thunderbird instead of the default Mozilla.

Installed Program: epiphany

Installed Libraries: GNOME_Epiphany_Automation.server bonobo server

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/epiphany, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/epiphany, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/epiphany-1.6, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/epiphany, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/epiphany, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gtk-doc/html/epiphany, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/epiphany

Short Descriptions

epiphany

is a GNOME web browser based on the Mozilla rendering engine.

GnomeMeeting-1.2.1

Introduction to GnomeMeeting

GnomeMeeting is an H.323 compatible videoconferencing and VOIP/IP-Telephony application that allows you to make audio and video calls to remote users with H.323 hardware or software (such as Microsoft Netmeeting). It supports all modern videoconferencing features, such as registering to an ILS directory, gatekeeper support, making multi-user conference calls using an external MCU, using modern Quicknet telephony cards, and making PC-To-Phone calls.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnomemeeting/1.2/gnomemeeting-1.2.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnomemeeting/1.2/gnomemeeting-1.2.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e765914ed1eb547d4a15d211e2ae9f57
Download size: 3.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 48 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

GnomeMeeting Dependencies

Required

Optional

SDL-1.2.8 (required for full-screen video), D-BUS and Howl

Installation of GnomeMeeting

Install GnomeMeeting by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

Installed Programs: gnomemeeting and gnomemeeting-config-tool

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnomemeeting, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnomemeeting, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gnomemeeting, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnomemeeting, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnomemeeting and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/sounds/gnomemeeting

Short Descriptions

gnomemeeting

is a H.323 Voip, Telephony and Video Conferencing application which uses the H.323 protocol.

GNOME Games-2.10.1

Introduction to GNOME Games

The GNOME Games package contains games. Starting with GNOME-2.8, the background graphics, artwork and themes for the games are supplied in a separate package. You can download the GNOME Games Extra Data package from http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-games-extra-data/2.10/.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-games/2.10/gnome-games-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-games/2.10/gnome-games-2.10.1.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b7d21e5e12de80c50266e8735e04577c
Download size: 5.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 70 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

GNOME Games Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14 and librsvg-2.9.5

Optional

Guile-1.6.7 (required to build the AisleRiot solitaire games), Howl and GOB2

Installation of GNOME Games

Some of the GNOME Games game binaries need to be setgid to track high scores. Create a separate user and group for games. See the README file in the source directory for more information:

install -v -m755 -d /var/lib/games &&
groupadd -g 60 games &&
useradd -c 'Games High Score Owner' -d /var/lib/games \
        -g games -s /bin/false -u 60 games &&
chown -v games:games /var/lib/games

Install GNOME Games by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper and also causes the programs to use /var/lib/games as the directory holding the high score files.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--disable-setgid: This will prevent the setgid bit on the executables from being set. It provides system administrators with the option to disable setgid binaries, though it also means that the functionality to save high game scores will be disabled.

Installed Programs: blackjack, games-server.py, gataxx, glines, gnect, gnibbles, gnobots2, gnome-stones, gnometris, gnomine, gnotravex, gnotski, gtali, iagno, mahjongg, same-gnome, and sol

Installed Libraries: gnome-stones objects

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/[game name], /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/[game name], $GOME_PREFIX/lib/gnome-stones, $GOME_PREFIX/share/gnome-games, $GOME_PREFIX/share/[,help,pixmaps,sound]/[game name], $GOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gnome-games, and /var/lib/games

Short Descriptions

See the README file in the source tree for a description of each game.

GDM-2.6.0.9

Introduction to GDM

The GDM package contains GNOME's Display Manager daemon. This is useful for allowing configurable graphical logins.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gdm/2.6/gdm-2.6.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gdm/2.6/gdm-2.6.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d845fe205412bb101d4c66d1e88a317d
Download size: 3.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 46 MB
Estimated build time: 0.5 SBU

GDM Dependencies

Required

libgnomeui-2.10.0, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14 and librsvg-2.9.5

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80, tcpwrappers-7.6 and SELinux

Installation of GDM

It is recommended to have a dedicated user and group to take control of the gdm-binary daemon after it is started. Issue the following commands as the root user:

groupadd -g 21 gdm &&
useradd -c "GDM Daemon Owner" -d /dev/null -g gdm -s /bin/bash -u 21 gdm

Install GDM by running the following commands as an unprivileged user:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/sbin \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib \
    --with-pam-prefix=/etc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chmod -v 644 --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`\
/share/gdm/BuiltInSessions/default.desktop &&
chmod -v 644 --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`\
/share/xsessions/gnome.desktop

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This command puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This command puts files in /var/lib instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var. This also has the downside affect of using /var/lib/log/gdm as the log directory. See the “Configuration Information” section below for information how to relocate the log file directory.

--with-pam-prefix=/etc: This command puts PAM configuration files in /etc/pam.d instead of /etc/gnome.

Configuring GDM

Config Files

/etc/gnome/gdm/gdm.conf

Configuration Information

If desired, change the directory containing the GDM log files to the /var/log hierarchy by modifying the /etc/gnome/gdm/gdm.conf configuration file as the root user:

sed -i -e "s|var/lib/log|var/log|" /etc/gnome/gdm/gdm.conf

The GDM PAM config files contain modules not present in a BLFS installation. The following commands will replace those files (issue as the root user):

cat > /etc/pam.d/gdm << "EOF"
auth        required    pam_unix.so
auth        required    pam_nologin.so
account     required    pam_unix.so
password    required    pam_unix.so
session     required    pam_unix.so
EOF
cat > /etc/pam.d/gdm-autologin << "EOF"
auth        required    pam_env.so
auth        required    pam_nologin.so
auth        required    pam_permit.so
account     required    pam_unix.so
password    required    pam_unix.so
session     required    pam_unix.so
EOF

gdm can be tested by executing it from a root console.

Boot Script

To start a graphical login at boot, install the /etc/rc.d/init.d/gdm init script included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package. If your GNOME_PREFIX environment variable is anything other than /usr or /opt/gnome-2.10, you will need to modify the PATH statement in the script to include the path where you have GNOME installed.

make install-gdm

To autostart with a graphical login, edit /etc/inittab so that the line containing:

id:3:initdefault:

is changed to:

id:5:initdefault:

Installed Programs: gdm, gdm-binary, gdmXnest, gdmXnestchooser, gdmchooser, gdmflexiserver, gdmgreeter, gdmlogin, gdmphotosetup, gdmsetup, gdmthemetester, gdm-restart, gdm-safe-restart, gdm-stop, gdmconfig, gdmopen, and gdmtranslate

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/dm, /etc/gnome/gdm, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gdm, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/capplets, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/gdm, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/gdm, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/xsessions, /var/lib/gdm and /var/log/gdm

Short Descriptions

gdm	is a wrapper script to execute the GDM binary, the configurable GNOME based login prompt.
gdmchooser	is an application for selecting XDMCP enabled hosts on the local network.
gdmsetup	is a graphical interface to edit the `gdm.conf` file.
gdm-restart	sends the HUP signal to the GDM daemon so that it restarts. It's used after the config file is edited
gdm-safe-restart	sends the USR1 signal to the GDM daemon so that it restarts. It's used after the config file is edited.
gdmconfig	is an application for managing the configuration of the entire GDM applications suite. It handles look and feel, security, XDMCP, GDMchooser and more.

Chapter 32. GNOME 1.4 Libraries

This section contains GNOME 1.4 libraries, needed by some applications that have not yet been ported to GNOME 2.x. None of these libraries are needed for a GNOME desktop installation.

Pre-installation Configuration

Add to your system or personal profile:

export PATH=$PATH:/opt/gnome-1.4/bin
export PKG_CONFIG_PATH=$PKG_CONFIG_PATH:/opt/gnome-1.4/lib/pkgconfig
export GNOME_LIBCONFIG_PATH=/usr/lib

if [ -z $INFOPATH ]
then
  export INFOPATH=/usr/share/info:/opt/gnome-1.4/info
else
  export INFOPATH=$INFOPATH:/opt/gnome-1.4/info
fi

Add to your /etc/ld.so.conf:

cat >> /etc/ld.so.conf << "EOF"
# Begin GNOME-1 addition to /etc/ld.so.conf

/opt/gnome-1.4/lib

# End GNOME-1 addition
EOF

Remember to execute ldconfig after installation of libraries to update the library cache.

Add to your /etc/man.conf:

cat >> /etc/man.conf << "EOF"
# Begin GNOME-1 addition to man.conf

MANPATH /opt/gnome-1.4/man

# END GNOME-1 addition to man.conf
EOF

ORBit-0.5.17

Introduction to ORBit

The ORBit package contains a high-performance CORBA Object Request Broker. This allows programs to send requests and receive replies from other programs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/ORBit/0.5/ORBit-0.5.17.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/ORBit/0.5/ORBit-0.5.17.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 35acc6f8d49d930b566104fcceb893d3
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 29 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

ORBit Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10

Optional

Installation of ORBit

Install ORBit by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/ORBit-0.5.17 &&
cp -v -R docs/* /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/ORBit-0.5.17

Installed Programs: ior-decode, libIDL-config, name-client, old-name-server, orbit-config, orbit-idl, orbit-ird, orbit-event-server, and orbit-name-server

Installed Libraries: libIDL.[so,a], libIIOP.[so,a], libname-server.a, liborbit-c-backend.a, libORBit.[so,a], libORBitCosNaming.[so,a], and libORBitutil.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/libIDL-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/orbit-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/ORBit-0.5.17 and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/idl

Short Descriptions

`libIDL.[so,a]`	library is the Interface Definition Language mappings for CORBA.
`libIIOP.[so,a]`	is for low level CORBA communications.
`libORBit.[so,a]`	is the CORBA API.
`libORBitutil.[so,a]`	contains the convenience routines for ORBit.

OAF-0.6.10

Introduction to OAF

The OAF package contains the Object Activation Framework for GNOME.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/oaf/0.6/oaf-0.6.10.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/oaf/0.6/oaf-0.6.10.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: ed9aa2ceb70bba34034b3134b22d2729
Download size: 435 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2

OAF Dependencies

Required

ORBit-0.5.17, libxml-1.8.17 and popt-1.7-5

Optional

GtkHTML-3.6.2, Evolution Data Server-1.2.2

Installation of OAF

Install OAF by running the following commands:

ldconfig &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtk-doc/html/oaf-0.6.10 \
                    /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/oaf-0.6.10 &&
install -v -m644 api-docs/html/* \
    /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtk-doc/html/oaf-0.6.10 &&
install -v -m644 docs/{INTERNALS,*.txt} \
    /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/oaf-0.6.10

To test the results, issue: make check as an unprivileged user (the package must be installed before running the tests, else many tests fail).

Installed Programs: oaf-client, oaf-config, oaf-empty-server, oaf-run-query, oaf-slay, oaf-sysconf and oafd

Installed Libraries: liboaf.so

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/oaf, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/liboaf, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/oaf-0.6.10 and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtk-doc/html/oaf-0.6.10

GNOME Libraries-1.4.2

Introduction to GNOME Libraries

The GNOME Libraries package contains the GNOME libraries. This is useful as a foundation for the GNOME Desktop and applications.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-libs/1.4/gnome-libs-1.4.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-libs/1.4/gnome-libs-1.4.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 6111e91b143a90afb30f7a8c1e6cbbd6
Download size: 2.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 70 MB
Estimated build time: 1.4 SBU

GNOME Libraries Dependencies

Required

ORBit-0.5.17, GTK+-1.2.10, Imlib-1.9.15 and Berkeley DB-4.3.28

Optional

Audio File-0.2.6, EsounD-0.2.35 and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of GNOME Libraries

The installation process expects a games group to exist on the system. If you have not previously created this group, issue the following command as the root user:

groupadd -g 60 games

Install GNOME Libraries by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring GNOME Libraries

Config Files

/opt/gnome-1.4/etc/mime-magic, /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/paper.config, /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/sound/events/gnome.soundlist and /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/sound/events/gtk-events.soundlist

Installed Programs: dns-helper, gconfigger, gnome-bug, gnome-config, gnome-dump-metadata, gnome-gen-mimedb, gnome-moz-remote, gnome-name-service, gnome-pty-helper, gnome_segv, goad-browser, libart-config, loadshlib and new-object

Installed Libraries: libart_lgpl.[so,a], libgnome.[so,a], libgnomeui.[so,a], libgnomesupport.[so,a], libgnorba.[so,a], libgnorbagtk.[so,a], libgtkxmhtml.[so,a], and libzvt.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/doc, /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/sound, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gnome-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/gnome-libs, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtk-doc/html/libart, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/mime-info, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/pixmaps, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/type-convert and /opt/gnome-1.4/var

Short Descriptions

`libart_lgpl.[so,a]`	is the LGPL component of libart.
`libgnome.[so,a]`	is the non-GUI part of the GNOME library.
`libgnomeui.[so,a]`	is the GUI part of the GNOME library.
`libgnorbagtk.[so,a]`	is the GNOME CORBA GTK framework.
`libzvt.[so,a]`	provides the functions necessary to emulate xterm.

GDK Pixel Buffer-0.22.0

Introduction to GDK Pixel Buffer

The GDK Pixel Buffer package is the GTK+ pixel buffer library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gdk-pixbuf/0.22/gdk-pixbuf-0.22.0.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gdk-pixbuf/0.22/gdk-pixbuf-0.22.0.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 05fcb68ceaa338614ab650c775efc2f2
Download size: 398 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3 SBU

GDK Pixel Buffer Dependencies

Required

GTK+-1.2.10

Optional

GNOME Libraries-1.4.2, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of GDK Pixel Buffer

The make command attempts to open an X display during the compile, so an X server must be running during this process.

Install GDK Pixel Buffer by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: gdk-pixbuf-config

Installed Libraries: libgdk_pixbuf.[so,a], libgdk_pixbuf_xlib.[so,a], libgnomecanvaspixbuf.[so,a], and many gdk-pixbuf loader modules

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gdk-pixbuf-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/gdk-pixbuf and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/html/gdk-pixbuf

Short Descriptions

libgdk_pixbuf.[so,a]

contains the GTK+ pixel buffer libraries for the GIMP Toolkit.

GNOME Print-0.37

Introduction to GNOME Print

The GNOME Print package contains the GNOME Printing Architecture, for GNOME 1.4.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.linux.org.uk/mirrors/ftp.gnome.org/sources/gnome-print/0.37/gnome-print-0.37.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-print/0.37/gnome-print-0.37.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f9e13f4f17b04baceec1cdeed0f88eae
Download size: 768 KB
Estimated disk space required: 19 MB
Estimated build time: 0.6

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gnome-print-0.37-ft217_fixes-1.patch

GNOME Print Dependencies

Required

GDK Pixel Buffer-0.22.0, GNOME Libraries-1.4.2 and libxml-1.8.17

Installation of GNOME Print

Install GNOME Print by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gnome-print-0.37-ft217_fixes-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: gnome-font-install

Installed Libraries: libgnomeprint.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/gnome, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gnome-1.0/libgnomeprint, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/fonts, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome-print and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/fonts

Bonobo-1.0.22

Introduction to Bonobo

The Bonobo package contains a set of language and system independent CORBA interfaces for creating reusable components, controls and compound documents.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/bonobo/1.0/bonobo-1.0.22.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/bonobo/1.0/bonobo-1.0.22.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7718c374ed82911b24d95fa3ab55dda5
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 48 MB
Estimated build time: 1.5 SBU

Bonobo Dependencies

Required

OAF-0.6.10 and GNOME Print-0.37

Optional

GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Bonobo

Install Bonobo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/bonobo-1.0.22 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{FAQ,Monikers,*.txt} \
    /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/bonobo-1.0.22

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Installs Bonobo in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

Installed Programs: bonobo-application-x-mines, bonobo-audio-ulaw, bonobo-echo, bonobo-moniker-gunzip, bonobo-moniker-http, bonobo-sample-canvas-item, bonobo-sample-controls, bonobo-sample-hello, bonobo-sample-paint, bonobo-selector, bonobo-text-plain, echo-client, efstool, gshell, libefs-config, moniker-test, sample-container and sample-control-container

Installed Libraries: libbonobo.[so,a], libbonobobox.[so,a], libbonobo-print.[so,a], libefs.[so,a] and Bonobo plugin and moniker modules

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gnome-1.0/bonobo, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/bonobo, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/bonobo, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/bonobo-1.0.22, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/bonobo, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/ui and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/libefs

GConf-1.0.9

Introduction to GConf

The GConf package contains a configuration database system.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/GConf/1.0/GConf-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/GConf/1.0/GConf-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 613aea1d9b7a9c504f52217451c7bf99
Download size: 784 KB
Estimated disk space required: 17 MB
Estimated build time: 0.3

Additional Downloads

Required patch for Berkeley DB: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/GConf-1.0.9-db43-2.patch

GConf Dependencies

Required

OAF-0.6.10 and popt-1.7-5

Optional

GTK+-1.2.10, Berkeley DB-4.3.28, Guile-1.6.7 and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of GConf

If you have Berkeley DB installed, apply the following patch:

patch -Np1 -i ../GConf-1.0.9-db43-2.patch

Install GConf by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

If you have GTK-Doc installed and wish to build the HTML documentation, issue the following commands:

cd doc/gconf &&
make templates &&
make sgml &&
make html &&
cd ../..

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: gconf-config, gconf-config-1, gconf-sanity-check-1, gconfd-1, gconftool, gconftool-1

Installed Libraries: libgconf-1.[so,a], libgconf-gtk-1.[so,a] and GConf backend modules

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/gconf, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gconf, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/GConf and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gconf

Short Descriptions

libgconf-1.[so,a]

provide the functions necessary to maintain the configuration database.

GNOME Virtual File System-1.0.5

Introduction to GNOME Virtual File System

The GNOME Virtual File System package contains file system libraries.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-vfs/1.0/gnome-vfs-1.0.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnome-vfs/1.0/gnome-vfs-1.0.5.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: e2a17a6b178f54c43968241258f3e729
Download size: 781 KB
Estimated disk space required: 17 MB
Estimated build time: 0.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gnome-vfs-1.0.5-gcc34-1.patch

GNOME Virtual File System Dependencies

Required

GNOME MIME Data-2.4.2 and GNOME Libraries-1.4.2

Optional

pkg-config-0.19, OAF-0.6.10, libxml-1.8.17, GConf-1.0.9, Bonobo-1.0.22, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, CDParanoia-III-9.8, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of GNOME Virtual File System

Install GNOME Virtual File System by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gnome-vfs-1.0.5-gcc34-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: gnome-vfs-config

Installed Libraries: libgnomevfs.[so,a], libgnomevfs-pthread.[so,a] and GNOME VFS filesystem modules

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/vfs, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gnome-vfs-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/gnome-vfs-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/vfs and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtk-doc/html/gnome-vfs

Libglade-0.17

Introduction to Libglade

The libglade package contains libraries which allow applications to load Glade interface files at runtime.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libglade/0.17/libglade-0.17.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libglade/0.17/libglade-0.17.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 38b2e2cfd813783fe157617813bfe3b3
Download size: 418 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Libglade Dependencies

Required

libxml-1.8.17 and GTK+-1.2.10

Optional

GNOME Libraries-1.4.2, Bonobo-1.0.22, Python-2.4.1 (to run the libglade-xgettext script) and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of Libglade

The make command attempts to open an X display during the compile, so an X server must be running during this process.

Install libglade by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-bonobo: Enables Bonobo support.

Installed Programs: libglade-config and libglade-xgettext

Installed Libraries: libglade.[so,a] and optionally, libglade-bonobo.[so,a] and libglade-gnome.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/libglade-1.0 and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/html/libglade

GAL-0.24

Introduction to GAL

The GAL package contains library functions that came from Gnumeric and Evolution. GAL is short for GNOME Application Libs.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gal/0.24/gal-0.24.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gal/0.24/gal-0.24.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9f9790d4e8763c4ce74e5d59f47aa509
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 52 MB
Estimated build time: 1.0 SBU

GAL Dependencies

Required

GNOME Print-0.37 and libglade-0.17

Optional

GNOME Virtual File System-1.0.5 and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of GAL

Install GAL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

If you have GTK-Doc installed and wish to build the HTML documentation, issue the following commands:

cd docs &&
make templates &&
make sgml &&
make html &&
cd ..

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Installs GAL in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libgal.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gal-1.0, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/etable and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gal

Guppi-0.40.3

Introduction to Guppi

The Guppi package contains a Guile scriptable plot library with integrated statistics capabilities.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/Guppi/0.40/Guppi-0.40.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/Guppi/0.40/Guppi-0.40.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 26ec6eb5b6fe7fb4e32ecff64d4f1b16
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 32 MB
Estimated build time: 1.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/Guppi-0.40.3-gcc34-1.patch
Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/Guppi-0.40.3-legend_fix-1.patch

Guppi Dependencies

Required

GNOME Print-0.37 and libglade-0.17

Optional

Bonobo-1.0.22, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Guppi

Install Guppi by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../Guppi-0.40.3-gcc34-1.patch &&
patch -Np1 -i ../Guppi-0.40.3-legend_fix-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Installs Guppi in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libguppi.so, libguppitank.so and numerous plotting plugin modules

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gnome-1.0/libguppi, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/guppi, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/help/guppi, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/guppi and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/pixmaps/guppi

Libcapplet-1.5.11

Introduction to libcapplet

The libcapplet package contains a control panel applet library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libcapplet/1.5/libcapplet-1.5.11.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libcapplet/1.5/libcapplet-1.5.11.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: c6ba2bd6a08d82cba6b2b5360baab23c
Download size: 312 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.7 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Libcapplet Dependencies

Required

GNOME Libraries-1.4.2

Optional

pkg-config-0.19

Installation of Libcapplet

Install libcapplet by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Installs libcapplet in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libcapplet.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/libcapplet-1.4

Soup-0.7.11

Introduction to Soup

The Soup package contains a SOAP (Simple Object Access Protocol) implementation in C.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/soup/0.7/soup-0.7.11.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/soup/0.7/soup-0.7.11.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 61bb2fef816ce164af62f8a3a5bd782e
Download size: 323 KB
Estimated disk space required: 7.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/soup-0.7.11-gcc_3.4-1.patch

Soup Dependencies

Required

GLib-1.2.10 or GLib-2.6.4, libxml-1.8.17 or libxml2-2.6.20 and popt-1.7-5

Optional

Apache-2.0.54, OpenSSL-0.9.7g or Mozilla-1.7.8 (for the NSS libraries), GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Soup

Install Soup by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../soup-0.7.11-gcc_3.4-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Installs Soup in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

--enable-apache=no: This command can be added to prevent building against Apache.

Installed Programs: soup-config, soup-httpd, soup-ssl-proxy and soup-wsdl

Installed Libraries: libsoup.[so,a], libsoup-apache.[so,a] and libwsdl.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/soup and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtk-doc/html/soup

Libghttp-1.0.9

Introduction to Libghttp

The libghttp package contains a GNOME 1.4 HTTP client library.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libghttp/1.0/libghttp-1.0.9.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/libghttp/1.0/libghttp-1.0.9.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 0690e7456f9a15c635f240f3d6d5dab2
Download size: 147 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.5 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Installation of Libghttp

Install libghttp by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m644 -D doc/ghttp.html \
    /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/libghttp-1.0.9/ghttp.html

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Installs libghttp in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libghttp.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /opt/gnome-1.4/share/doc/libghttp-1.0.9

GtkHTML-1.1.7

Introduction to GtkHTML

The GtkHTML package contains a lightweight HTML rendering/printing/editing engine.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtkhtml/1.1/gtkhtml-1.1.7.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gtkhtml/1.1/gtkhtml-1.1.7.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 83cd60ab9a108d2a0d65b3bf760affa4
Download size: 1.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB
Estimated build time: 1.4 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required Patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/gtkhtml-1.1.7-gcc34-1.patch

GtkHTML Dependencies

Required

GAL-0.24 and libcapplet-1.5.11

Optional

GConf-1.0.9, Soup-0.7.11, Bonobo-1.0.22, libghttp-1.0.9 and GTK-Doc-1.3

Installation of GtkHTML

Install GtkHTML by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i ../gtkhtml-1.1.7-gcc34-1.patch &&
./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: Install GtkHTML in the GNOME 1.4 directory structure.

Installed Programs: ebrowser, gnome-gtkhtml-editor-1.1 and gtkhtml-properties-capplet

Installed Libraries: libgtkhtml-1.1.[so,a], Bonobo plugin modules and Glade rendering components

Installed Directories: /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gtkhtml-1.1, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/control-center, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/apps, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/html/gtkhtml and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gtkhtml-1.1

X Software

33. Individual Office Programs
34. Office Suites
- KOffice-1.4.0b
- OpenOffice-1.1.4
35. Graphical Web Browsers
36. Other X-based Internet Programs

Chapter 33. Individual Office Programs

This chapter is a collection of independent projects that can be installed based on specific needs. Together, they create a respectable office suite. While they may be lacking in user interface consistency, they excel in doing one thing and doing it well.

AbiWord-2.2.8

Introduction to AbiWord

The AbiWord package contains a word processing application. This is useful for writing reports, letters and other formatted documents.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.abisource.com/downloads/abiword/2.2.8/source/abiword-2.2.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: f6f58e6ea4720ca635ede7b7f13cf156
Download size: 23.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 208 MB
Estimated build time: 2.7 SBU

AbiWord Dependencies

Required

popt-1.7-5, libglade-2.5.1 and FriBidi-0.10.5

Optional

gucharmap-1.4.3, libgnomeprintui-2.10.2, Nautilus-2.10.1, ImageMagick-6.2.3-5, Enchant (uses Aspell-0.60.3) and wv

Optional for Plugins

librsvg-2.9.5, GNOME Utilities-2.10.1, Python-2.4.1for gypsthon mailmerge, aiksaurus, libgda, libwmf, libwpd and libots

Installation of AbiWord

Install AbiWord by running the following commands:

cd abi &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make &&
cd ../abiword-plugins &&
sed -i 's:python2.3:python2.4:g' configure &&
./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

cd ../abi &&
make install &&
cp -v -rf docs /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.2/AbiWord &&
cd ../abiword-plugins &&
make install

To build the help files, issue the following commands as an unprivileged user:

cd ../abiword-docs &&
./make-html.sh

And, as the root user:

install -v -m644 man/abiword.1 /usr/share/man/man1 &&
install -v -m644 Manual/en/Abiword_Manual.abw \
    /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.2/AbiWord/docs  &&
cp -v -rf help /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.2/AbiWord &&
find /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.2/AbiWord/help \
    -type d -exec chmod -v 755 {} \;

To integrate AbiWord into your GNOME-2 environment, run the following commands:

cd .. &&
install -v -m644 abidistfiles/GNOME_AbiWord_Control_2_2.server \
    $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/bonobo/servers &&
install -v -m644 abi/abiword.desktop $GNOME_PREFIX/share/applications

Command Explanations

./make-html.sh: This command creates the HTML files used by AbiWord when help is requested from the main menu.

Installed Programs: abiword, AbiWord-2.2, ttfdmin.sh, and ttftool

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/share/AbiSuite-2.2

Short Descriptions

abiword	is a symbolic link to the main AbiWord-2.2 executable.
AbiWord-2.2	is the word-processing program executable.
ttfadmin.sh	generates support files required by AbiWord for each TrueType font in a given directory.
ttftool	is a utility for processing TrueType fonts.

Gnumeric-1.4.3

Introduction to Gnumeric

The Gnumeric package contains a spreadsheet program. This is useful for financial analysis.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnumeric/1.4/gnumeric-1.4.3.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/gnumeric/1.4/gnumeric-1.4.3.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: b684eec48b1696d7a8d7152d1e17741c
Download size: 13.7 MB
Estimated disk space required: 216 MB
Estimated build time: 2.4 SBU

Gnumeric Dependencies

Required

libgnomeprintui-2.10.2 and libgsf-1.12.0

Optional

libgnomeui-2.10.0, Python-2.4.1, PyGTK, libgnomedb (requires libgda), pxlib and Psiconv

Note

Though only a run-time dependency, if you don't install the Yelp-2.6.5 package, the built-in help functionality in Gnumeric will not be available.

Installation of Gnumeric

Install Gnumeric by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --without-gnome \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If desired, install the developer documentation using the following commands:

install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.4.3 &&
install -v -m644 doc/developer/* /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.4.3 &&
rm -v /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.4.3/Makefile*

Command Explanations

--without-gnome: This switch prevents the build from looking for the GNOME session related components. Remove this switch if you have a GNOME desktop or even just libgnomeui-2.10.0 installed.

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper. This switch may not be applicable if you don't have Yelp-2.6.5 installed, but won't affect the build otherwise.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc. This switch may not be applicable if you don't have GConf-2.10.0 installed, but won't affect the build otherwise.

Installed Programs: gnumeric, gnumeric-1.4.3, and ssconvert

Installed Libraries: numerous filters, plugins and GNOME components

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/gnumeric, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/gnumeric, /usr/lib/gnumeric, /usr/share/doc/gnumeric-1.4.3, /usr/share/gnumeric, /usr/share/mc, /usr/share/omf/gnumeric and /usr/share/pixmaps/gnumeric

Short Descriptions

gnumeric	is a symlink to gnumeric-1.4.1
gnumeric-1.4.1	is GNOME's spreadsheet application.
ssconvert	is a command line utility to convert spreadsheet files between various spreadsheet file formats.

GnuCash-1.8.11

Introduction to GnuCash

GnuCash is a personal finance manager.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.gnucash.org/pub/gnucash/sources/stable/gnucash-1.8.11.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.at.gnucash.org/pub/gnucash/gnucash/sources/stable/gnucash-1.8.11.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 62f94331936e37ed1b1d28b5a1863bb3
Download size: 7.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 110 MB (additional 22 MB for Help documentation)
Estimated build time: 2.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

Help documentation: http://www.gnucash.org/pub/gnucash/sources/stable/gnucash-docs-1.8.5.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 9758d8e523530c2509912761e327a9d5

GnuCash Dependencies

Required

OAF-0.6.10, GAL-0.24, GtkHTML-1.1.7, libghttp-1.0.9, gwrap-1.3.4 and SLIB-3a1

Optional

PostgreSQL-8.0.3, Guppi-0.40.3, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, Doxygen-1.4.3, GraphViz, Guile-www, Electric Fence

Optional (for On-Line Banking)

LibOFX (requires OpenSP-1.5.1 and cURL-7.14.0), KtoBlzCheck, AqHBCI (requires Gwenhywfar then AqBanking), and also see libchipcard

Installation of GnuCash

Install GnuCash by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 \
    --sysconfdir=/etc --disable-guppi &&
make

To test the results, issue make check as the root user as the test suite will attempt to update the SLIB catalog in /usr/share/guile.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
chown -v -R root:root /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnucash/doc/html/html

If you want to install the Help documentation (requires ScrollKeeper-0.3.14 to be installed), unpack the additional tarball, change into the gnucash-docs-1.8.5 source directory and issue the following commands as an unprivileged user:

./configure --prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4 \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--prefix=/opt/gnome-1.4: GnuCash-1.8.11 is a GNOME-1.4 application.

--sysconfdir=/etc: This installs configuration files in /etc/gnucash instead of /opt/gnome-1.4/etc/gnucash.

--disable-guppi: This compiles GnuCash without support for creating GUI graphs and plots. Remove this option if you have Guppi installed.

--enable-sql: This parameter is required if you want to build in SQL support using PostgreSQL.

--enable-ofx: This parameter is required if you want to build in on-line banking support using LibOFX.

--enable-hbci: This parameter is required if you want to build in on-line banking support using AqBanking/AqHBCI. See doc/README.HBCI in the GnuCash source tree for complete information.

Configuring GnuCash

Configuration Information

If you wish to use GnuCash to retrieve stock price quotes and stock historical information, you'll need to install the following Perl modules: LWP, Date::Manip, HTML::Parser, Finance::Quote and Finance::QuoteHist.

Note

GnuCash must be run as root once before use. Simply executing gnucash from an X terminal and clicking on the cancel button is sufficient. This must be done prior to setting up accounts as an unprivileged user, due to the fact that GnuCash must update scheme catalogs before it is used.

Installed Programs: dump-finance-quote, gnc-prices, gnc-test-env, gnucash, gnucash-config, gnucash-env, gnucash-make-guids, gnucash-run-script and update-finance-quote

Installed Libraries: libcore-utils.so, libgnc-app-file-gnome.so, libgncgnome.so, libgncmodule.so, libgw-core-utils.so, libgw-gnc.so and numerous support libraries installed in /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/gnucash

Installed Directories: /etc/gnucash, /opt/gnome-1.4/include/gnucash, /opt/gnome-1.4/lib/gnucash, /opt/gnome-1.4/libexec/gnucash, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/apps/Applications, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnome/help/gnucash, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/gnucash, /opt/gnome-1.4/share/omf/gnucash-docs and /opt/gnome-1.4/share/pixmaps/gnucash

Short Descriptions

gnucash

is a personal finance manager.

GIMP-2.2.8

Introduction to GIMP

The GIMP package contains the GNU Image Manipulation Program. This is useful for photo retouching, image composition and image authoring.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gwdg.de/pub/misc/grafik/gimp/gimp/v2.2/gimp-2.2.8.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gimp.org/pub/gimp/v2.2/gimp-2.2.8.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 0db3fca2f741d6dd51eb61dc85778b16
Download size: 14 MB
Estimated disk space required: 381 MB (includes installing the help system)
Estimated build time: 4.2 SBU (additional 0.9 SBU to run test suite)

Additional Downloads

Optional help files: ftp://ftp.gimp.org/pub/gimp/help/testing/gimp-help-2-0.8.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 2058eb88fe7a9d230bf3284546445c65
Download size: 19 MB

GIMP Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7, libart_lgpl-2.3.17 and XML::Parser

Optional

Gimp-Print-4.2.7, libmng-1.0.9, librsvg-2.9.5, AAlib-1.4rc5, lcms-1.14, libexif-0.6.12, libgtkhtml-2.6.3 (used by the internal help system), libxslt-1.1.14, Python-2.4.1 (and PyGTK), GTK-Doc-1.3, MTA, ALSA-1.0.9 and libwmf

Installation of GIMP

Install GIMP by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc --disable-print \
    --without-libjpeg --without-libtiff &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/gimp-2.2.8 &&
install -v -m644 docs/{Wilber*,keybindings.txt,quick_reference.ps} \
    /usr/share/doc/gimp-2.2.8

The gimp-help tarball contains a help system designed for use with the internal GIMP help browser, external web browsers and HTML renderers. If you downloaded the gimp-help tarball, change directories out of the GIMP source tree to the root of your build directory. Then, unpack the gimp-help tarball and change directories to the root of the newly created source tree (as an unprivileged user). Issue the following commands to install the help files:

./configure &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--disable-print: This option will disable print support and is necessary if Gimp-Print is not installed. If you have Gimp-Print installed, remove this option.

--without-libjpeg: This option is necessary if libjpeg is not installed. Remove it if libjpeg is installed.

--without-libtiff: This option is necessary if libtiff is not installed. Remove it if libtiff is installed.

Configuring GIMP

Config Files

/etc/gimp/2.0/* and ~/.gimp-2.0/gimprc

Configuration Information

GIMP executes a configuration wizard for each user upon their initial use of the program.

Installed Programs: gimp, gimp-2.2, gimp-remote, gimp-remote-2.2, and gimptool-2.0

Installed Libraries: libgimp-2.0.so, libgimpbase-2.0.so, libgimpcolor-2.0.so, libgimpmath-2.0.so, libgimpmodule-2.0.so, libgimpthumb-2.0.so, libgimpui-2.0.so, libgimpwidgets-2.0.so, and many other modules and plugin libraries

Installed Directories: /etc/gimp, /usr/include/gimp-2.0, /usr/lib/gimp, /usr/share/doc/gimp-2.2.8, /usr/share/gimp and /usr/share/gtk-doc/html/libgimp{,base,color,math,module,thumb,widgets}

Short Descriptions

gimp	is a symbolic link to gimp-2.2.
gimp-2.2	is an image manipulation program. It works with a variety of image formats and provides a large selection of tools.
gimp-remote	is a symbolic link to gimp-remote-2.2.
gimp-remote-2.2	is a small utility that tells a running GIMP to open a local or remote image file.
gimptool-2.0	is a tool that can build plug-ins or scripts and install them if they are distributed in one source file. gimptool-2.0 can also be used by programs that need to know what libraries and include-paths GIMP was compiled with.
`libgimp-2.0.so`	provides C bindings for GIMP's Procedural Database (PDB) which offers an interface to core functions and to functionality provided by plug-ins.
`libgimpbase-2.0.so`	provides the C functions for basic GIMP functionality such as determining enumeration data types, gettext translation, determining GIMP's version number and capabilities, handling data files and accessing the environment.
`libgimpcolor-2.0.so`	provides the C functions relating to RGB, HSV and CMYK colors as well as converting colors between different color models and performing adaptive supersampling on an area.
`libgimpmath-2.0.so`	contains C functions which provide mathematical definitions and macros, manipulate 3x3 transformation matrices, set up and manipulate vectors and the MD5 message-digest algorithm.
`libgimpmodule-2.0.so`	provides the C functions which implements module loading using GModule and keeps a list of GimpModule's found in a given searchpath.
`libgimpthumb-2.0.so`	provides the C functions for handling GIMP's thumbnail objects.
`libgimpui-2.0.so`	contains the GIMP common user interface functions.
`libgimpwidgets-2.0.so`	contains GIMP and GTK widget creation and manipulation functions.

Evolution-2.2.2

Introduction to Evolution

The Evolution package contains an integrated mail, calendar and address book suite designed for the GNOME-2 environment.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/evolution/2.2/evolution-2.2.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/evolution/2.2/evolution-2.2.2.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9b49942c8bdd1dc21f2d28792b12f400
Download size: 13.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 198 MB
Estimated build time: 4.1 SBU

Evolution Dependencies

Required

Optional

GStreamer-0.8.10, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, Sendmail-8.13.4 (or other MTA that links to /usr/sbin/sendmail), Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, krb4, GNOME Pilot conduits (requires pilot-link-0.11.8 then GNOME Pilot), GNOME Spell, D-BUS, kdebase-3.4.1, GTK-Doc-1.3 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of Evolution

Install Evolution by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --libexecdir=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/lib \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome \
    --disable-gtk-doc &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
ln -v -s evolution-2.2 \
    `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/bin/evolution

Command Explanations

--disable-gtk-doc: This parameter disables building the API documentation if you have GTK-Doc installed. Remove this parameter if you wish to build and install the documentation.

--with-openldap: This parameter will compile LDAP support into Evolution.

--with-krb5: This parameter will compile Kerberos5 support into Evolution.

--with-pilot-conduits: This parameter will build the GNOME Pilot conduits allowing you to synchronize Evolution data on a Palm device.

ln -v -s evolution-2.2 `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/bin/evolution: This optional command creates a convenience symlink to the evolution-2.2 binary.

Installed Programs: evolution and evolution-2.2

Installed Libraries: /usr/lib/evolution/2.2/* (contains support libraries, conduits, and other components)

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/evolution, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/evolution, $GNOME_PREFIX/include/evolution-2.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/lib/evolution, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/idl/evolution-2.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/evolution-2.2, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/evolution, and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/evolution

Short Descriptions

evolution	is a symlink to the evolution-2.2 program.
evolution-2.2	is an email, calendar and address book suite.

Chapter 34. Office Suites

This chapter contains applications that bundle all the essential needs of everyday office workers into one neat 'little' package. The benefits are a consistent user interface and cooperation between applications.

KOffice-1.4.0b

Introduction to KOffice

KOffice is the integrated office suite for KDE.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/koffice-1.4/src/koffice-1.4.0a.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.kde.org/pub/kde/stable/koffice-1.4/src/koffice-1.4.0a.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 9a8494144962ea5434397289ed326385
Download size: 18.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 303 MB (additional 55 MB for API docs)
Estimated build time: 28.2 SBU (additional 0.5 SBU for API docs)

Additional Downloads

The following patch brings koffice up to version 1.4.0b.

Download mirrors: http://www.koffice.org/bugfixes/koffice_1.4.0_patchset_1b.diff.bz2

KOffice has many localization packages in the form of: koffice-l10n-[xx]-1.4.0.tar.bz2. The [xx] is a two to seven character code for the country covered. The sizes of these files range from about 0.4 MB to 4.6 MB.

KOffice l10n package listing: http://download.kde.org/stable/koffice-1.4/src/koffice-l10n/
Download MD5 sums: http://mirrors.isc.org/pub/kde/stable/koffice-1.4/src/MD5SUMS

KOffice Dependencies

Required

Optional

Aspell-0.60.3, Python-2.4.1, PostgreSQL-8.0.3, ImageMagick-6.2.3-5, libwv2, libwpd, libpaper, GraphViz, and Doxygen-1.4.3

Installation of KOffice

Install KOffice with the following commands:

patch -Np0 -i ../koffice_1.4.0_patchset_1b.diff &&
./configure --prefix=$KDE_PREFIX --disable-debug \
    --disable-dependency-tracking &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Note

If you wish to create the API documentation and you have Doxygen and GraphViz installed, make apidox must be done before make install.

Installed Programs: karbon, kchart, kformula, kivio, koconverter, koscript, koshell, kprconverter.pl, kpresenter, kspread, kthesaurus, kudesigner, kugar, and kword

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries (about 50) in $KDE_PREFIX/lib

Installed Directory: Numerous directories in $KDE_PREFIX/share

Short Descriptions

kchart	is a chart drawing application.
kformula	is a formula editor.
kivio	is a flowchart program.
kpresenter	is a presentation builder/display program.
kspread	is a scriptable spreadsheet program.
kugar	is a tool for creating reports.
kword	is a framemaker-like word processing and desktop publishing program.

OpenOffice-1.1.4

Introduction to OpenOffice

OpenOffice is an office suite, the open source sibling of StarOffice.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://download.openoffice.org/1.1.4/source.html
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.ussg.iu.edu/pub/openoffice/stable/1.1.4/OOo_1.1.4_source.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 20c10db97865ae4c51dc827d668b8939
Download size: 214 MB
Estimated disk space required: 2.8 GB
Estimated build time: 75 SBU

Additional Downloads

Required security patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-security-1.patch
Required patch for gcc-3.4.3: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-gcc_3.4.2+_fixes-2.patch
Required patch for use with NPTL: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-nptl-1.patch
Required patch if compiling with JDK-1.5.0: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-jdk_1.5.0_fix-1.patch
Required patch (Executable test is in /bin, not in /usr/bin): http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-test_bin_loc-1.patch
Required patch for STLport-4.6.2: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-STLport_4.6.2-1.patch
Required patch for use with glibc-2.3.4: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-doublefree-1.patch
Optional patch if you wish to use the system freetype: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-freetype-1.patch
Optional patch if Linux-PAM-0.80 is not installed: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/OOo_1.1.4-no_pam-1.patch
STLport-4.6.2: http://www.stlport.org/archive/STLport-4.6.2.tar.gz
The source TAR ball only contains English language help. A localized help content file may be available at: http://ftp.services.openoffice.org/pub/OpenOffice.org/contrib/helpcontent/

OpenOffice Dependencies

Required

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), Zip-2.31, UnZip-5.52, Tcsh-6.14.00, and which-2.16.

Optional

Linux-PAM-0.80 and NAS-1.7.

Installation of OpenOffice

OpenOffice does not create a directory when you extract the TAR ball. Create a build directory and extract the source with the following commands:

mkdir OOo-build &&
cd OOo-build &&
tar -zxf ../OOo_1.1.4_source.tar.gz

Apply all of the downloaded patches:

for PATCH in ../OOo_1.1.4-*.patch
    do patch -Np1 -i ${PATCH}
done

Copy the STLport TAR ball into the source tree:

cp ../STLport-4.6.2.tar.gz stlport/download/

STLport looks for the c++ headers in the wrong location. Put a temporary symlink in place to satisfy STLport:

Now, as the root user:

ln -sf /usr/include/c++/3.4.3 /usr/g++-v3

Create a temporary symlink to the JRE's motif libraries:

Again, as the root user:

ln -sf ${JAVA_HOME}/jre/lib/i?86/motif21/libmawt.so /usr/lib

If you want to optimize the build, edit solenv/inc/unxlngi4.mk and add the desired optimization flags to the CFLAGSOPT variable. Some users have reported problems with -fomit-frame-pointer. The best option is to not use any custom optimizations. The following command removes an incorrect -mcpu option in the above file:

Now, as an unprivileged user:

sed -i "s:\-mcpu=pentiumpro::" \
    solenv/inc/unxlngi4.mk

Configure OpenOffice using the following commands. You may build install sets for specific languages based on your preferences. Supply a comma separated list to the --with-lang= switch. If a particular component is not available in the language of your choice, the default will be US English. If you need other languages, be sure to add ENUS to the list; otherwise the build will fail:

cd config_office/ &&
./configure --with-lang=ENUS \
    --with-dict=ENUS --without-fonts \
    --enable-libsn --with-system-zlib \
    --with-system-freetype \
    --with-system-curl --disable-fontooo \
    --enable-libart &&
cd ..

OpenOffice fails to compile if umask is set to something exotic. The build can also fail if the LANG or LC_ALL environment variables are set. Use the following commands to change your environment accordingly:

umask 0022 &&
unset LANG LC_ALL

Compile OpenOffice using the following commands:

./bootstrap &&
bash -c "source LinuxIntelEnv.Set.sh; dmake"

If you have downloaded localized help content tgz files, you will need to untar them to the appropriate directory as shown below and then recreate the installation set:

for i in ../helpcontent_*_unix.tgz
  do tar -C solver/645/unxlngi4.pro/pck -zxf $i
  done &&
rm -rf instsetoo/unxlngi4.pro &&
bash -c "source LinuxIntelEnv.Set.sh ; dmake"

Install OpenOffice using the following commands to install the US English language set. To install a localized version, replace the 01 with the international telephone country code for your country:

cd instsetoo/unxlngi4.pro/01/normal &&
sed -i "s:^oo_home=.*:oo_home=openoffice:" install

Now, as the root user:

./install --prefix=/opt &&
for appl in sagenda scalc sdraw sfax simpress slabel sletter \
    smaster smath smemo soffice spadmin svcard sweb swriter
  do ln -v -sf /opt/openoffice/program/$appl /usr/bin/$appl
  done

If you have installed desktop-file-utils-0.10 and use KDE, there is no furthur configuration necessary. If you use Gnome, you should copy the *.desktop files to /usr/share/applications with the following commands as the root use:

install -v -d /usr/share/applications -m 755 &&
cp -v /opt/openoffice/share/gnome/net/ooo645*.desktop \
    /usr/share/applications/ &&
rename -v ooo645 ooo /usr/share/applications/ooo645*.desktop

Finally, as the rootuser: remove the temporary symlinks:

rm /usr/g++-v3 &&
rm /usr/lib/libmawt.so

Command Explanations

--with-lang=ENUS: Make install set for the US English language.

--with-dict=ENUS: Install dictionaries for the US English language.

--enable-libart: Use libart instead of gpc for polygon clipping.

--enable-libsn: Use startup-notification.

--without-fonts: Do not install Bitstream Vera fonts since they are already bundled with X.

--with-system-curl: Use the system installed curl.

--disable-java: Do not build components that need java.

--without-gpc: Do not use gpc. Removes polygon clipping capability.

./bootstrap: Create packages required to bootstrap the build.

dmake: Compile the package.

sed -i "s:^oo_home=...: Remove version specific installation directory.

for appl in sagenda scalc sdraw sfax ...; do ...: Create links so that the package can be started from the command-line without changes to the existing path.

Installed Programs: sagenda, scalc, sdraw, sfax, simpress, slabel, sletter, smaster, smath, smemo, soffice, spadmin, svcard, sweb, swriter, and support utilities

Installed Libraries: OpenOffice libraries

Installed Directory: /opt/openoffice

Short Descriptions

sagenda	create an agenda template and start swriter.
scalc	spreadsheet application.
sdraw	drawing application.
sfax	create a fax template and start swriter.
simpress	presentation application.
slabel	create a label template and start swriter.
sletter	create a letter template and start swriter.
smaster	creates a new master document.
smath	mathematical formula editor.
smemo	create a memo template and start swriter.
soffice	opens a base window with access to all OpenOffice applications.
spadmin	OpenOffice Printer Configuration. You may need to run this if you are having any printing problems.
svcard	business card application.
sweb	an HTML editor.
swriter	word processing application.

Chapter 35. Graphical Web Browsers

This chapter contains a wonderful selection of browsers. We hope you can find one you enjoy using or give them each a trial run.

Mozilla-1.7.8

Introduction to Mozilla

Mozilla is a browser suite, the Open Source sibling of Netscape. It includes the browser, composer, mail and news clients, a calendar client and an IRC client.

The Mozilla project also hosts two subprojects that aim to satisfy the needs of users who don't need the complete browser suite or prefer to have separate applications for browsing and e-mail. These subprojects are Mozilla Firefox, (a stand-alone browser based on the Mozilla source code) and Mozilla Thunderbird, (a stand-alone mail client based on the Mozilla source code). The build instructions for these two applications are discussed in separate sections:

Firefox-1.0.6
Thunderbird-1.0.6

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/mozilla/releases/mozilla1.7.8/source/mozilla-1.7.8-source.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/mozilla/releases/mozilla1.7.8/source/mozilla-1.7.8-source.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a6fa13d0c9243060bac6821fcff4b973
Download size: 29 MB
Estimated disk space required: 636 MB
Estimated build time: 12.9 SBU

Additional Downloads

To enable the Enigmail extension to the Mozilla mail client, you'll need to download the two tarballs below. The Enigmail extension allows users to access the authentication and encryption features provided by the GnuPG package.

http://downloads.mozdev.org/enigmail/src/enigmail-0.91.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum (Enigmail): 4ab46132f41b4f1718cd4141742f824b
http://downloads.mozdev.org/enigmail/src/ipc-1.1.2.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum (IPC): 4aa272b46c8cbf167dcd49a6d74cf526

Mozilla Dependencies

Required

Zip-2.31, GTK+-2.6.7, libIDL-0.8.5

Optional

libjpeg-6b, UnZip-5.52, GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1 (to build the gnomevfs extension), libart_lgpl-2.3.17, Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1 (for the GSSAPI libraries to build the negotiateauth extension), Doxygen-1.4.3, Xprint, Electric Fence and Cairo

Installation of Mozilla

Compile Mozilla by running the following commands:

export MOZILLA_OFFICIAL="1" &&
export BUILD_OFFICIAL="1" &&
export MOZ_CO_PROJECT="suite" &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-default-mozilla-five-home=/usr/lib/mozilla \
            --with-system-zlib \
            --with-system-png \
            --enable-application=suite \
            --enable-default-toolkit=gtk2 \
            --enable-extensions=all \
            --enable-crypto \
            --enable-xft \
            --enable-xinerama \
            --enable-optimize \
            --enable-reorder \
            --enable-strip \
            --enable-cpp-rtti \
            --enable-calendar \
            --disable-freetype2 \
            --disable-accessibility \
            --disable-debug \
            --disable-tests \
            --disable-logging \
            --disable-pedantic \
            --disable-installer &&
make

You should add the --with-system-jpeg switch to the configure script if you have libjpeg installed.

If you're building the Mozilla mail and news clients and plan to install the Enigmail extension, execute the following steps:

tar -zxf ../enigmail-0.91.0.tar.gz -C extensions &&
tar -zxf ../ipc-1.1.2.tar.gz -C extensions &&
build/autoconf/make-makefile extensions/ipc extensions/enigmail &&
make -C extensions/ipc &&
make -C extensions/enigmail

Install Mozilla (as the root user) as follows:

make install &&
install -v -d -m755 /usr/include/mozilla-1.7.8/nss &&
cp -v -Lf dist/private/nss/*.h dist/public/nss/*.h \
   /usr/include/mozilla-1.7.8/nss &&
ln -v -nsf mozilla-1.7.8 /usr/include/mozilla &&
if [ -d /usr/lib/mozilla/plugins ]; then
    mv -v /usr/lib/mozilla/plugins/* /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8/plugins
    rm -v -rf /usr/lib/mozilla
fi &&
ln -v -nsf mozilla-1.7.8 /usr/lib/mozilla

If you're installing the Enigmail extension, issue the following commands as the root user:

make -C extensions/ipc install &&
make -C extensions/enigmail install

Some libraries, including the Netscape Portable Runtime (NSPR) and Network Security Services (NSS) libraries, installed by Mozilla are also needed by other packages. These libraries should be in /usr/lib so that other packages can link against them. As the root user, move them as follows:

for i in \
    lib{nspr4,plc4,plds4,nss3,smime3,softokn3,ssl3}.so libsoftokn3.chk
do
   mv -v /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8/$i /usr/lib/
   ln -v -sf ../$i /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8/
done

Create the required component registries to enable multi-user installs. These steps should be preformed by the root user each time a Mozilla add-on is installed. This will allow unprivileged users to run mozilla. Enable multi-user operation by executing the following:

cd /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8 &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$PWD" &&
export MOZILLA_FIVE_HOME="$PWD" &&
./regxpcom &&
./regchrome &&
touch `find . -name *.rdf`

Note

You should run /usr/bin/mozilla once as the root user (or any user with write privileges) to create some necessary additional files in the /usr hierarchy.

Lastly, unset the build variables from the unprivileged user's environment:

unset MOZILLA_OFFICIAL &&
unset BUILD_OFFICIAL &&
unset MOZ_CO_PROJECT

Optional Extra Switches

You may wish to run ./configure --help and review each of the listed options to discover what affect they have on the build. Feel free to add or remove options to tailor the build to your desires. Listed below are some common options not listed above but can be added to the configure command in order to have the described effect on the Mozilla compile.

--with-system-jpeg: Uses the system-installed copy of libjpeg instead of the bundled copy.

--enable-elf-dynstr-gc: Removes un-referenced strings from ELF shared objects generated during the build. Note that this option breaks the build on alpha.

--disable-mailnews: Disables the mail and news clients.

--disable-ldap: Disables LDAP support, recommended if mail is disabled.

--enable-xterm-updates: Displays the current command in the xterm window title during the compilation.

--enable-plaintext-editor-only: Disables support for HTML editing. Do not use this switch if you are building the mail-news component.

Command Explanations

export MOZILLA_OFFICIAL="1"; export BUILD_OFFICIAL="1": Set some variables that affect what and how the package is built. These two exports specify a distribution is being built.

--with-default-mozilla-five-home=/usr/lib/mozilla: Sets the default value for MOZILLA_FIVE_HOME.

--with-system-zlib --with-system-png : Use the system-installed versions of these packages.

--enable-application=suite: Identifies the build as a Mozilla suite build.

--enable-default-toolkit=gtk2: Use the GTK2 toolkit for graphics rendering.

--enable-extensions=all: Enables all available extensions. If you want, you can disable any or all extensions other than the browser by changing this switch to --enable-extensions="default,-venkman,-inspector,...". For a short description of the various extensions available with the Mozilla source, see http://linuxfromscratch.org/~tushar/downloads/mozilla-extensions.txt.

--enable-crypto: Enable the Personal Security Manager to enable SSL connections.

--enable-calendar: Builds the calendar application. Removed this parameter if you don't wish to build it.

--enable-xft; --disable-freetype2: Enable Xft support which automatically pulls in the FreeType libraries.

--enable-xinerama; --enable-optimize; --enable-reorder; --enable-strip; --enable-cpp-rtti --disable-accessibility; --disable-debug; --disable-tests; --disable-logging; --disable-pedantic; --disable-installer: Various options that affect what components are built and some optimization options. You can pick and choose from these options. More information on them, and many other available options, can be found by running ./configure --help.

install -d /usr/include/mozilla-1.7.8/nss; cp -Lf ...: Copy the NSS interface headers that are not copied by make install.

if [ -d /usr/lib/mozilla/plugins ] ... fi: Some applications may have already installed Mozilla plugins. This set of commands move any existing plugins to the newly created plugin directory, then removes the existing /usr/lib/mozilla directory.

ln -nsf mozilla-1.7.8 ...: Mozilla installs headers and libraries in version specific directories. These commands makes symbolic links so that applications depending on Mozilla (such as OpenOffice, Galeon, etc.) don't need to know which version of Mozilla is installed.

Configuring Mozilla

No specific configuration is required as long as the mozilla script is in the user's path. If Mozilla is installed in a non-standard location, then make a symlink to the mozilla script from /usr/bin.

Many applications look for netscape when they need to open a browser. You may make the following symlink for convenience (as the root user).

ln -v -sf mozilla /usr/bin/netscape

For installing various Mozilla plugins, refer to Mozdev's PluginDoc Project. If you have JDK-1.5.0 already installed, create the following link as the root user to utilize the JAVA plugin:

ln -v -s $JAVA_HOME/jre/plugin/i386/ns7/libjavaplugin_oji.so \
    /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8/plugins

Installed Program: mozilla

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries, browser, and email/newsgroup components, plugins, extensions, and helper modules installed in /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8

Installed Directories: /usr/include/mozilla-1.7.8, /usr/lib/mozilla-1.7.8, and /usr/share/idl/mozilla-1.7.8

Short Descriptions

mozilla

is a browser/email/newsgroup/calendar/chat client suite. The various components such as the Composer, mail-news client, calendar, IRC chat client and address book can be accessed from the menu after mozilla starts or via command-line switches to the mozilla script. Issue man mozilla for additional information.

Firefox-1.0.6

Introduction to Firefox

Firefox is a stand-alone browser based on the Mozilla codebase.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/firefox/releases/1.0.6/source/firefox-1.0.6-source.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/firefox/releases/1.0.6/source/firefox-1.0.6-source.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 7b4c1d10d478dcb4c52fbbe3e41745d9
Download size: 32.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 545 MB
Estimated build time: 10.3 SBU

Firefox Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7, libIDL-0.8.5 and Zip-2.31

Optional

libjpeg-6b, UnZip-5.52, GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1 and libgnome-2.10.0 (to build the gnomevfs extension), MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7 (for the GSSAPI libraries to build the negotiateauth extension), Doxygen-1.4.3, Xprint, Electric Fence and Cairo

Installation of Firefox

The configuration of Firefox is very similar to Mozilla-1.7.8 and hence the options are not discussed. Refer to the Mozilla-1.7.8 instructions for explanations and additional configuration information.

Compile and install Firefox by running the following commands:

export MOZILLA_OFFICIAL="1" &&
export BUILD_OFFICIAL="1" &&
export MOZ_PHOENIX="1" &&
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-default-mozilla-five-home=/usr/lib/firefox-1.0 \
            --with-user-appdir=.firefox \
            --with-system-zlib \
            --with-system-png \
            --enable-application=browser \
            --enable-default-toolkit=gtk2 \
            --enable-extensions=cookie,xml-rpc,xmlextras,pref,\
transformiix,universalchardet,webservices,inspector,\
gnomevfs,negotiateauth \
            --enable-crypto \
            --enable-xft \
            --enable-xinerama \
            --enable-optimize \
            --enable-reorder \
            --enable-strip \
            --enable-cpp-rtti \
            --enable-single-profile \
            --disable-freetype2 \
            --disable-accessibility \
            --disable-debug \
            --disable-tests \
            --disable-logging \
            --disable-pedantic \
            --disable-installer \
            --disable-mailnews \
            --disable-ldap \
            --disable-composer \
            --disable-profilesharing &&
make

You should add the --with-system-jpeg switch to the configure script if you have libjpeg installed.

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -d /usr/include/firefox-1.0.6/nss &&
cp -Lf dist/private/nss/*.h dist/public/nss/*.h \
    /usr/include/firefox-1.0.6/nss

To enable multi-user operation, execute the following as the root user:

cd /usr/lib/firefox-1.0.6 &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$PWD" &&
export MOZILLA_FIVE_HOME="$PWD" &&
./regxpcom &&
./regchrome &&
touch `find . -name *.rdf`

Note

You should run /usr/bin/firefox once as the root user (or any user with write privileges) to create some necessary additional files in the /usr hierarchy.

Lastly, unset the build variables from the unprivileged user's environment:

unset MOZILLA_OFFICIAL &&
unset BUILD_OFFICIAL &&
unset MOZ_PHOENIX

Configuring Firefox

No specific configuration is required as long as the firefox script is in the user's path. If Firefox is installed in a non-standard location, then make a symlink to the firefox script from /usr/bin.

Many applications look for netscape when they need to open a browser. You may make the following symlink for convenience (as the root user).

ln -v -sf firefox /usr/bin/netscape

For installing various Firefox plugins, refer to Mozdev's PluginDoc Project. If you have JDK-1.5.0 already installed, create the following link as the root user to utilize the JAVA plugin:

ln -v -s $JAVA_HOME/jre/plugin/i386/ns7/libjavaplugin_oji.so \
    /usr/lib/firefox-1.0.6/plugins

Installed Programs: firefox and firefox-config

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries, browser components, plugins, extensions, and helper modules installed in /usr/lib/firefox-1.0.6

Installed Directories: /usr/bin/defaults, /usr/include/firefox-1.0.6, /usr/lib/firefox-1.0.6, and /usr/share/idl/firefox-1.0.6

Short Descriptions

firefox	is the next-generation browser from Mozilla.
firefox-config	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use Firefox libraries and browser components.

Galeon-1.3.21

Introduction to Galeon

The Galeon package contains a GNOME-2 browser that utilizes the Mozilla gecko rendering engine and presents the simplest interface possible for a browser.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://prdownloads.sourceforge.net/galeon/galeon-1.3.21.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 5106e037bb52bdb234b3fc09c1e0a3f3
Download size: 4.0 MB
Estimated disk space required: 73 MB
Estimated build time: 1.1 SBU

Galeon Dependencies

Required

GNOME Desktop-2.10.1 and Mozilla-1.7.8 or Firefox-1.0.6 or Thunderbird-1.0.6

Optional

Nautilus-2.10.1 and libgtkhtml-2.6.3

Installation of Galeon

Compiling must be done with the same compiler version and the same optimization settings that were used to compile Mozilla.

Install Galeon by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome --localstatedir=/var/lib &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d \
    `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/doc/galeon-1.3.21 &&
install -v -m644 FAQ README{,.ExtraPrefs} doc/{intro,bookmarks}.txt \
    `pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0`/share/doc/galeon-1.3.21

Installed Programs: galeon and galeon-config-tool

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/apps/galeon, /etc/gnome/gconf/gconf.xml.defaults/schemas/apps/galeon, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/doc/galeon-1.3.21, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/galeon, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/gnome/help/galeon, $GNOME_PREFIX/share/omf/galeon and $GNOME_PREFIX/share/sounds/galeon

Short Descriptions

galeon	is a GNOME-2 web browser using the Mozilla rendering and networking engines.
galeon-config-tool	clears settings, installs schemas, removes schemas and fixes permissions in the GConf database.

Konqueror-3.4.1

konqueror is the default graphical web browser for the KDE desktop environment. It is packaged and installed with kdebase-3.4.1.

Dillo-0.8.5

Introduction to Dillo

Dillo is a fast, small footprint graphical browser. Version 0.8.5 is now considered a very stable beta. Dillo does not support Java, JavaScript or CSS, and the current version does not support FTP, HTTPS or frames. It is, however, very fast and so is useful on older, slower machines. It supports downloads and can support cookies.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.dillo.org/download/dillo-0.8.5.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: d0ab7fa1d40b310deb891388604188f8
Download size: 415 KB
Estimated disk space required: 9.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Dillo Dependencies

Required

GTK+-1.2.10

Optional

OpenSSL-0.9.7g, Wget-1.9.1 (for downloading via FTP) and Electric Fence

Installation of Dillo

Note

Dillo has no mechanism of character set selection and always uses iso8859-1. If this character set is not appropriate, replace all occurrences of iso8859-1 to the desired character set in src/dw_style.c.

Install Dillo by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc/dillo &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -d -v -m755 /usr/share/doc/dillo-0.8.5 &&
install -v -m644 doc/{README,*.txt} /usr/share/doc/dillo-0.8.5

Configuring Dillo

Config Files

/etc/dillo/dillorc, /etc/dillo/dpidrc, and ~/.dillo/*

Configuration Information

Dillo stores its configuration in the system wide /etc/dillo/dillorc file and the ~/.dillo directory which is created automatically when dillo is run for the first time. Note that cookies are turned off by default. To enable cookies, edit the ~/.dillo/cookiesrc file.

Installed Programs: dillo, dpid, and dpidc

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: ~/.dillo, /etc/dillo, /usr/share/doc/dillo-0.8.5, and /usr/lib/dillo

Short Descriptions

dillo	is a GTK+ graphical WWW browser with limited facilities, but a small footprint and runs fast on slower machines.
dpid	is a Dillo plugin daemon.
dpidc	is a control program for dpid.

Chapter 36. Other X-based Internet Programs

The Internet isn't just about browsing. Here are more graphical applications that utilize other areas of the Internet.

Thunderbird-1.0.6

Introduction to Thunderbird

Thunderbird is a stand-alone mail/news client based on the Mozilla codebase.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/thunderbird/releases/1.0.6/source/thunderbird-1.0.6-source.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.mozilla.org/pub/mozilla.org/thunderbird/releases/1.0.6/source/thunderbird-1.0.6-source.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: a0ddcc8bd5ee2c9be724b6963ad27111
Download size: 33.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 560 MB
Estimated build time: 10.3 SBU

Additional Downloads

To enable the Enigmail extension to the Thunderbird mail client, you'll need to download the two tarballs below. The Enigmail extension allows users to access the authentication and encryption features provided by the GnuPG package.

http://downloads.mozdev.org/enigmail/src/enigmail-0.92.0.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum (Enigmail): 50c369ce6d6fcb2d275cd30319a601ff
http://downloads.mozdev.org/enigmail/src/ipc-1.1.3.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum (IPC): 64ba4c6e3b52568468c4f6680ec7e679

Thunderbird Dependencies

Required

Zip-2.31, GTK+-2.6.7 and libIDL-0.8.5

Optional

libjpeg-6b, UnZip-5.52, GNOME Virtual File System-2.10.1, libgnome-2.10.0, MIT krb5-1.4.1 or Heimdal-0.7 (for the GSSAPI libraries), Doxygen-1.4.3, Xprint, Electric Fence and Cairo

Installation of Thunderbird

The configuration of Thunderbird is very similar to Mozilla-1.7.8 and hence the options will not be discussed. Refer to the Mozilla-1.7.8 instructions for explanations and additional configuration information.

Compile Thunderbird by running the following commands:

export MOZILLA_OFFICIAL="1" &&
export BUILD_OFFICIAL="1" &&
export MOZ_THUNDERBIRD="1" &&

sed -i -e 's/$(destdir)$(bindir)/$(DESTDIR)$(mozappdir)/' \
       mail/app/Makefile.in &&
 
./configure --prefix=/usr \
            --with-default-mozilla-five-home=/usr/lib/thunderbird-1.0.6 \
            --with-system-zlib \
            --with-system-png \
            --enable-application=mail \
            --enable-default-toolkit=gtk2 \
            --enable-extensions=wallet,spellcheck,xmlextras,webservices \
            --enable-crypto \
            --enable-xft \
            --enable-xinerama \
            --enable-optimize \
            --enable-reorder \
            --enable-strip \
            --enable-cpp-rtti \
            --enable-single-profile \
            --enable-necko-protocols=http,file,jar,viewsource,res,data \
            --enable-image-decoders=default,-xbm \
            --disable-freetype2 \
            --disable-accessibility \
            --disable-debug \
            --disable-tests \
            --disable-logging \
            --disable-pedantic \
            --disable-installer \
            --disable-profilesharing \
            --disable-mathml \
            --disable-oji \
            --disable-plugins \
            --disable-necko-disk-cache &&
make

You should add the --with-system-jpeg switch to the configure script if you have libjpeg installed.

If you're building the Enigmail extension, execute the following steps:

tar -zxf ../enigmail-0.92.0.tar.gz -C extensions &&
tar -zxf ../ipc-1.1.3.tar.gz -C extensions &&
build/autoconf/make-makefile extensions/ipc extensions/enigmail &&
make -C extensions/ipc &&
make -C extensions/enigmail

Install Thunderbird by running the following commands as the root user:

make install &&
install -d /usr/include/thunderbird-1.0.6/nss &&
cp -Lf dist/private/nss/*.h dist/public/nss/*.h \
    /usr/include/thunderbird-1.0.6/nss

If you're installing the Enigmail extension, issue the following commands as the root user:

make -C extensions/ipc install &&
make -C extensions/enigmail install

To enable multi-user operation, execute the following as the root user:

cd /usr/lib/thunderbird-1.0.6 &&
export LD_LIBRARY_PATH="$PWD" &&
export MOZILLA_FIVE_HOME="$PWD" &&
./regxpcom &&
./regchrome &&
touch `find . -name *.rdf`

Note

You should run /usr/bin/thunderbird once as the root user (or any user with write privileges) to create some necessary additional files in the /usr hierarchy.

Finally, unset the build variables from the unprivileged user's environment:

unset MOZILLA_OFFICIAL &&
unset BUILD_OFFICIAL &&
unset MOZ_THUNDERBIRD

Command Explanations

sed -i -e 's/$(destdir)$(bindir)/$(DESTDIR)$(mozappdir)/' mail/app/Makefile.in: Correct the installation location of the defaults directory.

Installed Program: thunderbird and thunderbird-config

Installed Libraries: Numerous libraries, email/newsgroups components, plugins, extensions, and helper modules installed in /usr/lib/thunderbird-1.0.6

Installed Directories: /usr/include/thunderbird-1.0.6, /usr/lib/thunderbird-1.0.6, and /usr/share/idl/thunderbird-1.0.6

Short Descriptions

thunderbird

is Mozilla's next-generation email and newsgroup client.

Pan-0.14.2

Introduction to Pan

The Pan package contains a graphical newsreader. This is useful for reading and writing news, threading articles and replying via email.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://pan.rebelbase.com/download/releases/0.14.2/SOURCE/pan-0.14.2.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: ed3188e7059bb6d6c209ee5d46ac1852
Download size: 1.8 MB
Estimated disk space required: 67.8 MB
Estimated build time: 0.72 SBU

Pan Dependencies

Required

GTK+-2.6.7, GNet-2.0.7, intltool-0.33 and libxml2-2.6.20

Optional

gtkspell-2.0.4

Installation of Pan

Install Pan by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Program: pan

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/gnome/apps/Internet

Short Descriptions

pan

is a graphical newsreader.

Balsa-2.2.6

Introduction to Balsa

The Balsa package contains a GNOME 2 based mail client.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://balsa.gnome.org/balsa-2.2.6.tar.bz2
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 6179fadbfc5cca642dac081519acef25
Download size: 2.9 MB
Estimated disk space required: 45.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.67 SBU

Balsa Dependencies

Required

libgnomeprintui-2.10.2, ScrollKeeper-0.3.14, Aspell-0.60.3, libesmtp-1.0.3r1 and GMime >= 2.1.9

Optional

libgtkhtml-2.6.3, OpenSSL-0.9.7g, OpenLDAP-2.2.24, PCRE-6.1, Procmail-3.22, Sendmail-8.13.4 (or other MTA that links to /usr/sbin/sendmail), Heimdal-0.7 or MIT krb5-1.4.1, SQLite, GPGME and GnuPG-1.9.x

Installation of Balsa

Install Balsa by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=`pkg-config --variable=prefix ORBit-2.0` \
    --localstatedir=/var/lib --sysconfdir=/etc/gnome &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--localstatedir=/var/lib: This switch puts ScrollKeeper files in /var/lib/scrollkeeper instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/var/scrollkeeper.

--sysconfdir=/etc/gnome: This switch puts configuration files in /etc/gnome instead of $GNOME_PREFIX/etc.

--with-ssl: Use this option to enable SSL support if OpenSSL is installed.

--with-ldap: Use this option to enable LDAP address book support if OpenLDAP is installed.

--with-gpgme: Use this option to enable GPG support if “GnuPG Made Easy” (GPGME) is installed.

--enable-smime: Use this option to enable S/MIME support if GnuPG-1.9.x is installed.

Configuring Balsa

Configuration Information

All configuration of Balsa is done through the Balsa menu system, with mailbox configuration done with the Settings—>Preferences menu.

Installed Program: balsa

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: /usr/share/balsa, /usr/share/sounds/balsa and /usr/share/gnome/help/balsa

Short Descriptions

balsa

is a GNOME 2 based mail client.

Multimedia

37. Multimedia Libraries and Drivers
38. Audio Utilities
39. Video Utilities
40. CD-Writing Utilities

Chapter 37. Multimedia Libraries and Drivers

Many multimedia programs require libraries and/or drivers in order to function properly. The packages in this section fall into this category. Generally you only need to install these if you are installing a program which has the library listed as either a requirement, or as an option to enable it to support certain functionality.

ALSA-1.0.9

The Linux kernel now provides ALSA support by default. However, applications need to interface to that capability. The following five sections of the book deal with the five separate components of ALSA: the libraries, the utilities, the tools, the firmware and the OSS compatibility libraries.

ALSA Library-1.0.9

Introduction to ALSA Library

The ALSA Library package contains the ALSA library. This is used by programs (including ALSA Utilities) requiring access to the ALSA sound interface.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/lib/alsa-lib-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/lib/alsa-lib-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 114af3304619920ffe2b147b760700b9
Download size: 682 KB
Estimated disk space required: 27.3 MB (additional 14.4 MB to build and install docs)
Estimated build time: 0.6 SBU

ALSA Library Dependencies

Optional

Doxygen-1.4.3

Kernel Configuration

In the “Sound” section of the kernel configuration, edit Advanced Linux Sound Architecture options to match your audio hardware and disable deprecated Open Sound System. Recompile and install your new kernel.

Installation of ALSA Library

Install ALSA Library by running the following commands:

./configure --enable-static &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

If you have Doxygen installed and you wish to build the library API documentation, run the following commands from the top-level directory of the source tree:

make doc

Now, as the root user:

install -v -d -m755 /usr/share/alsa/doc/html &&
install -v -m644 doc/doxygen/html/* /usr/share/alsa/doc/html

Command Explanations

--enable-static: This switch is used to enable building the static library as some programs link against it.

Configuring ALSA Library

Config Files

~/.asoundrc, /etc/asound.conf, /usr/share/alsa/alsa.conf, and /usr/share/alsa/{cards,pcm}/*.conf

Configuration Information

The default alsa.conf is adequate for most installations. For extra functionality and/or advanced control of your sound device, you may need to create additional configuration files. For information on the available configuration parameters, visit http://www.alsa-project.org/alsa-doc/doc-php/asoundrc.php.

Installed Programs: alsalisp and aserver

Installed Libraries: libasound.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/alsa and /usr/share/alsa

Short Descriptions

libasound.[so,a]

provides ALSA functions for application programs.

ALSA Plugins-1.0.9

Introduction to ALSA Plugins

The ALSA Plugins package contains plugins for OSS and JACK.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/plugins/alsa-plugins-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/plugins/alsa-plugins-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 15a3fbbea779736b6425f43bbd051a32
Download size: 187 KB
Estimated disk space required: 1.8
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

Additional Downloads

Optional patch: http://www.linuxfromscratch.org/blfs/downloads/6.1/alsa-plugins-1.0.9-no_jack-1.patch

ALSA Plugins Dependencies

Optional

JACK

Installation of ALSA Plugins

If you choose not to install JACK, apply the patch by running the following commands:

patch -Np1 -i \
    ../alsa-plugins-1.0.9-no_jack-1.patch

Install ALSA Plugins by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libasound_module_pcm_oss.so and optionally libasound_module_pcm_jack.so

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/alsa-lib

Short Descriptions

`libasound_module_pcm_oss.so`	Allows native ALSA applications to run on OSS.
`libasound_module_pcm_jack.so`	Allows native ALSA applications to work with jackd.

ALSA Utilities-1.0.9a

Introduction to ALSA Utilities

The ALSA Utilities package contains various utilities which are useful for controlling your sound card.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/utils/alsa-utils-1.0.9a.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/utils/alsa-utils-1.0.9a.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: d4b77e9fe0311772293e402fdd634ad2
Download size: 935 KB
Estimated disk space required: 5.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ALSA Utilities Dependencies

Required

ALSA Library-1.0.9

Installation of ALSA Utilities

Install ALSA Utilities by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring ALSA Utilities

Config Files

/etc/asound.state

Configuration Information

Use a bootscript to store the values at shutdown.

As the root user, install the init script /etc/rc.d/init.d/alsa included in the blfs-bootscripts-6.1 package.

make install-alsa

Note

All channels of your sound card are muted by default. You can use the alsamixer program from the ALSA Utilities to change this.

The first time the dev.d script below is run, it will complain that there is no state in /etc/asound.state. You can prevent this by running the following commands as the root user:

touch /etc/asound.state &&
alsactl store

The volume settings will be restored from the saved state using a /etc/dev.d/ handler script that will execute when the device is detected during boot (or when plugged in for USB devices).

While still the root user, create the dev.d script with the following commands:

install -v -d -m755 /etc/dev.d/snd &&
cat > /etc/dev.d/snd/alsa.dev << "EOF"
#!/bin/sh -e
# This script is called by udevd when a change in a device is
# detected, including initial detection upon bootup.
# udevd sets the environment variables ACTION and DEVNAME.

[ "$ACTION" = "add" ] || exit 0
DEV_BASENAME="${DEVNAME##*/}"
N="${DEV_BASENAME#controlC}"
case "$DEV_BASENAME" in
    controlC[0-7])
        x=0
        while [ $x -lt 20 ]; do
            # Wait up to 20 seconds for /usr to be mounted if necessary
            if [ -f /usr/sbin/alsactl ]; then
                /usr/sbin/alsactl restore $N
                exit 0
            fi
            sleep 1
            x=`expr $x + 1`
        done & # Put the while command in the background and continue
    ;;
esac
exit 0
EOF
chmod -v 755 /etc/dev.d/snd/alsa.dev

Installed Programs: aconnect, alsaconf, alsactl, alsamixer, amidi, amixer, aplay, aplaymidi, arecord, arecordmidi, aseqnet, aseqdump, iecset, and speaker-test

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

aconnect	is a utility for connecting and disconnecting two existing ports in the ALSA sequencer system.
alsaconf	is a configuration tool which tries to detect the sound cards on your system and write a suitable configuration file for ALSA.
alsactl	is used to control advanced settings for the ALSA sound card drivers.
alsamixer	is an ncurses-based mixer program for use with the ALSA sound card drivers.
amidi	is used to read from and write to ALSA RawMIDI ports.
amixer	allows command-line control of the mixers for the ALSA sound card drivers.
aplay	is a command-line soundfile player for the ALSA sound card drivers.
aplaymidi	is a command-line utility that plays the specified MIDI file(s) to one or more ALSA sequencer ports.
arecord	is a command-line soundfile recorder for the ALSA sound card drivers.
arecordmidi	is a command-line utility that records a standard MIDI file from one or more ALSA sequencer ports.
aseqdump	is a command-line utility that prints the sequencer events it receives as text.
aseqnet	is an ALSA sequencer client which sends and receives event packets over a network.
iecset	is a small utility to set or dump the IEC958 (or so-called “S/PDIF”) status bits of the specified sound card via the ALSA control API.
speaker-test	is a command-line speaker test tone generator for ALSA.

ALSA Tools-1.0.9

Introduction to ALSA Tools

The ALSA Tools package contains advanced tools for certain sound cards.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/tools/alsa-tools-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/tools/alsa-tools-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3139b9d6c10e14acbb926f23b488e745
Download size: 1.4 MB
Estimated disk space required: 14-17 MB depending on the tool being built
Estimated build time: 0.1-0.5 SBU depending on the tool being built

ALSA Tools Dependencies

Required

ALSA Library-1.0.9

Optional

GTK+-1.2.10 (to build echomixer, envy24control and rmedigicontrol), FLTK (to build hdspconf and hdspmixer), and Qt-3.3.4 to build qlo10k1.

Installation of ALSA Tools

The ALSA Tools package is only needed by those with advanced requirements for their sound card. The tools are not all built together, instead you need to cd into the directory of each tool you wish to compile and run the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: ac3dec, extract_ac3, as10k1, echomixer, envy24control, hdspconf, hdsploader, hdspmixer, lo10k1, ld10k1, mixartloader, pcxhrloader, qlo10k1, rmedigicontrol, cspctl, sbiload, sscape_ctl, us428control, usx2yloader, and vxloader

Installed Library: liblo10k1.so

Installed Directories: /usr/share/applications, /usr/share/pixmaps, /usr/include/lo10k1, /usr/share/ld10k1, and /usr/share/sounds

Short Descriptions

ac3dec	is a free AC-3 stream decoder.
extract_ac3	will take an MPEG-2 stream and produce AC-3 audio to stdout if it exists.
as10k1	is an assembler for the emu10k1 DSP chip present in the Creative SB Live, PCI 512, and emu APS sound cards. It is used to make audio effects such as a flanger, chorus or reverb.
echomixer	is the Linux equivalent of the Echoaudio console application from Echoaudio. It is a tool to control all the features of any Echoaudio soundcard. This includes clock sources, input and output gains, mixers, etc.
envy24control	is a control tool for Envy24 (ice1712) based sound cards.
hdspconf	is a GUI to control the Hammerfall HDSP Alsa Settings. Up to four hdsp cards are supported.
hdsploader	is used to load the firmware required by the Hammerfall HDSP sound cards.
hdspmixer	is the Linux equivalent of the Totalmix application from RME. It is a tool to control the advanced routing features of the RME Hammerfall DSP soundcard series.
ld10k1	is the server of a EMU10K[1,2] patch loader for ALSA.
lo10k1	is the client of a EMU10K[1,2] patch loader for ALSA.
qlo10k1	is a Qt GUI for the ld10k1 patch loader.
mixartloader	is a helper program to load the firmware binaries onto the Digigram's miXart board sound drivers. The following modules require this program: snd-mixart. These drivers don't work properly at all until the certain firmwares are loaded, i.e. no PCM nor mixer devices will appear.
pcxhrloader	is a helper program to load the firmware binaries onto Digigram's pcxhr compatible board sound drivers. The following modules require this program: snd-pcxhr. These drivers don't work properly at all until the certain firmwares are loaded, i.e. no PCM nor mixer devices will appear.
rmedigicontrol	is a control tool for RME Digi32 and RME Digi96 sound cards. It provides a graphical frontend for all the sound card controls and switches.
cspctl	is an SB16/AWE32 Creative Signal Processor (ASP/CSP) control program.
sbiload	is an OPL2/3 FM instrument loader for the ALSA sequencer.
sscape_ctl	is an ALSA SoundScape control utility.
us428control	is a Tascam US-428 control program.
usx2yloader	is a helper program to load the 2nd Phase firmware binaries onto the Tascam USX2Y USB sound cards. It has proven to work so far for the US122, US224 and US428. The snd-usb-usx2y module requires this program.
vxloader	is a helper program to load the firmware binaries onto the Digigram's VX-board sound drivers. The following modules require this program: snd-vx222, snd-vxpocket, snd-vxp440. These drivers don't work properly at all until the certain firmwares are loaded, i.e. no PCM nor mixer devices will appear.

ALSA Firmware-1.0.9

Introduction to ALSA Firmware

The ALSA Firmware package contains firmware for certain sound cards.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/firmware/alsa-firmware-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/firmware/alsa-firmware-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: f7ce6a31691d6eb35fc155f306abc77b
Download size: 1.5 MB
Estimated disk space required: 18.4 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ALSA Firmware Dependencies

Required

ALSA Tools-1.0.9

Installation of ALSA Firmware

The ALSA Firmware package is only needed by those with advanced requirements for their sound card. See the README for configure options.

Install ALSA Firmware by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: None

Installed Directory: /usr/lib/hotplug/firmware and/or /usr/share/alsa/firmware

ALSA OSS-1.0.9

Introduction to ALSA OSS

The ALSA OSS package contains the ALSA OSS compatibility library. This is used by programs which wish to use the ALSA OSS sound interface.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://gd.tuwien.ac.at/opsys/linux/alsa/oss-lib/alsa-oss-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.alsa-project.org/pub/oss-lib/alsa-oss-1.0.9.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 3c0411e54fd2e5c6083fd3c2ac9db509
Download size: 219 KB
Estimated disk space required: 2.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.1 SBU

ALSA OSS Dependencies

Required

ALSA Library-1.0.9

Installation of ALSA OSS

Install ALSA OSS by running the following commands:

./configure &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring ALSA OSS

Configuration Information

Installed Program: aoss

Installed Libraries: libalsatoss.[so,a], libaoss.[so,a], and libossredir.a

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

aoss

is a simple wrapper script which facilitates the use of the ALSA OSS compatibility library. It just sets the appropriate LD_PRELOAD path and then runs the command.

aRts-1.4.1

The Analog Real-time Synthesizer (aRts) provides software that can simulate a complete “modular analog synthesizer” on your computer. It creates sounds and music using small modules like oscillators for creating waveforms, various filters, modules for playing data on your speakers, mixers, and faders. You can build a complete setup with the GUI of the system, using the modules: generators, effects and output — connected to each other.

aRts provides necessary libraries for KDE, however it can be installed as a standalone package. The installation instructions for aRts can be found in the aRts-1.4.1 portion of the KDE installation instructions.

Audio File-0.2.6

Introduction to Audio File

The Audio File package contains the audio file libraries and two sound file support programs. These are useful to support basic sound file formats.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.68k.org/~michael/audiofile/audiofile-0.2.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 9c1049876cd51c0f1b12c2886cce4d42
Download size: 374 KB
Estimated disk space required: 8.5 MB
Estimated build time: 0.23 SBU

Installation of Audio File

Install Audio File by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: audiofile-config, sfinfo, and sfconvert

Installed Library: libaudiofile.[so,a]

Installed Directories: None

Short Descriptions

audiofile-config	is used during the compile process by programs linking to this library.
sfinfo	displays the sound file format, audio encoding, sampling rate and duration for audio formats supported by this library.
sfconvert	converts sound file formats where the original format and destination format are supported by this library.
`libaudiofile.[so,a]`	contains functions used by programs to support AIFF, AIFF-compressed, Sun/NeXT, WAV and BIC audio formats.

EsounD-0.2.35

Introduction to EsounD

The EsounD package contains the Enlightened Sound Daemon. This is useful for mixing together several digitized audio streams for playback by a single device.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/esound/0.2/esound-0.2.35.tar.bz2
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.gnome.org/pub/GNOME/sources/esound/0.2/esound-0.2.35.tar.bz2
Download MD5 sum: 1566344f80a8909b5e6e4d6b6520c2c1
Download size: 376 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.9 MB
Estimated build time: 0.13 SBU

EsounD Dependencies

Required

Audio File-0.2.6

Optional

ALSA-1.0.9, tcpwrappers-7.6 and DocBook-utils-0.6.14

Installation of EsounD

Install EsounD by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --sysconfdir=/etc &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/esound-0.2.35 &&
install -v -m644 docs/esound.ps /usr/share/doc/esound-0.2.35 &&
cp -v -R docs/html /usr/share/doc/esound-0.2.35

Command Explanations

--sysconfdir=/etc: This switch puts configuration files in /etc instead of /usr/etc.

Configuring EsounD

Config Files

/etc/esd.conf

Configuration Information

Instructions and information about the configuration file is located in the TIPS file in the EsounD source directory.

Installed Programs: esd, esdcat, esdctl, esd-config, esddsp, esdfilt, esdloop, esdmon, esdplay, esdrec, and esdsample

Installed Libraries: libesd.[so,a] and libesddsp.[so,a]

Installed Directory: /usr/share/doc/esound-0.2.35

Short Descriptions

esd	is the Enlightened Sound Daemon.
esd-config	is used by configure to determine the compiler and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use EsounD.
esdcat	plays a RAW audio stream through the daemon.
esdctl	controls certain aspects of the sound daemon.
esdfilt	is an EsoundD filter.
esdloop	is test scaffolding for sample cache, loop and free.
esdmon	outputs the mixed stream from the daemon.
esdplay	plays the named file on EsoundD.
esdrec	outputs from the sound device's current input.
esdsample	is test scaffolding for sample cache, playback, and free.
`libesd.[so,a]`	contains functions used by the EsounD programs as well as other programs to read, write and play various sound format files.

SDL-1.2.8

Introduction to SDL

The Simple DirectMedia Layer (SDL for short) is a cross-platform library designed to make it easy to write multimedia software, such as games and emulators.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://www.libsdl.org/release/SDL-1.2.8.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 37aaf9f069f9c2c18856022f35de9f8c
Download size: 2.6 MB
Estimated disk space required: 36 MB
Estimated build time: 0.8 SBU

SDL Dependencies

Optional

ALSA-1.0.9, EsounD-0.2.35, aRts-1.4.1, NAS-1.7, NASM-0.98.39, X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), AAlib-1.4rc5, DirectFB, SVGAlib, GNU Pth, Qtopia and PicoGUI

Installation of SDL

Install SDL by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr --disable-debug &&
make

Now, as the root user:

make install &&
install -v -m755 -d /usr/share/doc/SDL-1.2.8/html &&
install -v -m644 docs/html/*.html /usr/share/doc/SDL-1.2.8/html

Command Explanations

--disable-debug: This switch configures SDL to build with aggressive optimizations.

--enable-video-aalib: This switch is required to build SDL with AAlib video support.

Testing SDL

It is advisable to test the installation of SDL using the included test programs. It is not required to install any of the resulting binaries to validate the installation. Issue the following commands to build the test programs:

cd test &&
./configure &&
make

You'll need to manually run all the test programs.

Configuring SDL

Configuration Information

Installed Program: sdl-config

Installed Libraries: libSDL*.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/SDL and /usr/share/doc/SDL-1.2.8

Short Descriptions

sdl-config	determines the compile and linker flags that should be used to compile and link programs that use `libSDL`.
`libSDL*.[so,a]`	libraries provide low level access to audio, keyboard, mouse, joystick, 3D hardware via OpenGL, and 2D frame buffer across multiple platforms.

Libao-0.8.6

Introduction to Libao

The libao package contains a cross-platform audio library. This is useful to output audio on a wide variety of platforms. It currently supports WAV files, OSS (Open Sound System), ESD (Enlighten Sound Daemon), ALSA (Advanced Linux Sound Architecture), NAS (Network Audio system) and Polypaudio (next generation GNOME sound architecture).

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/ao/libao-0.8.6.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.fu-berlin.de/unix/linux/mirrors/gentoo/distfiles/libao-0.8.6.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: 12e136a4c0995068ff134997c84421ed
Download size: 387 KB
Estimated disk space required: 3.8 MB
Estimated build time: less than 0.1 SBU

Libao Dependencies

Optional

X (XFree86-4.5.0 or X.org-6.8.2), EsounD-0.2.35, ALSA-1.0.9, aRts-1.4.1, NAS-1.7 and Polypaudio

Installation of Libao

Install libao by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Configuring Libao

Config Files

/etc/libao.conf and ~/.libao

Configuration Information

Currently, the only configuration option available is setting the default output device. Issue man libao.conf for details.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libao.[so,a] and plugins

Installed Directories: /usr/include/ao, /usr/lib/ao and /usr/share/doc/libao-0.8.6

Short Descriptions

libao.[so,a]

provide functions for programs wishing to output sound over supported platforms.

Libogg-1.1.2

Introduction to Libogg

The libogg package contains the Ogg file structure. This is useful for creating (encoding) or playing (decoding) a single physical bit stream.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/ogg/libogg-1.1.2.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: 4d82996517bf33bb912c97e9d0b635c4
Download size: 414 KB
Estimated disk space required: 4.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.07 SBU

Installation of Libogg

Install libogg by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

To test the results, issue: make check.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Installed Programs: None

Installed Library: libogg.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/ogg and /usr/share/doc/libogg-1.1.2

Short Descriptions

libogg.[so,a]

libraries provide the functions for programs wishing to read or write Ogg formatted bit streams.

Libvorbis-1.1.1

Introduction to Libvorbis

The libvorbis package contains a general purpose audio and music encoding format. This is useful for creating (encoding) and playing (decoding) sound in an open (patent free) format.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://downloads.xiph.org/releases/vorbis/libvorbis-1.1.1.tar.gz
Download (FTP):
Download MD5 sum: b77270c24840af4de54bea5ad1c0b252
Download size: 1.3 MB
Estimated disk space required: 17.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.2 SBU

Libvorbis Dependencies

Required

libogg-1.1.2

Optional

pkg-config-0.19, and libxslt-1.1.14 and PassiveTeX (to build the PDF documentation)

Installation of Libvorbis

Install libvorbis by running the following commands:

./configure --prefix=/usr &&
make

libvorbis is known to cause compiler errors on certain machines. If you get errors, insert this command after running the configure script:

sed -i.bak -e 's/-mno-ieee-fp//' lib/Makefile

This package does not come with a test suite.

Now, as the root user:

make install

Command Explanations

--enable-docs: This switch enables building the documentation.

Installed Programs: None

Installed Libraries: libvorbis.[so,a], libvorbisenc.[so,a], and libvorbisfile.[so,a]

Installed Directories: /usr/include/vorbis and /usr/share/doc/libvorbis-1.1.1

Short Descriptions

libvorbis*.[so,a]

libraries provide the functions to read and write sound files.

NAS-1.7

Introduction to NAS

The Network Audio System is a network transparent, client/server audio transport system used to read , write and play audio files in many formats including .au, .snd, .voc, .wav, .aiff, .aif and .iff. It can be described as the audio equivalent of an X server.

Package Information

Download (HTTP): http://nas.codebrilliance.com/nas/nas-1.7.src.tar.gz
Download (FTP): ftp://ftp.us.xemacs.org/pub/xemacs/aux/nas-1.7.src.tar.gz
Download MD5 sum: c9918e9c9c95d587a95b455bbabe3b49
Download size: 1.2 MB
Estimated disk space required: 17.1 MB
Estimated build time: 0.31 SBU

NAS Dependencies

Required